Home

High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.08 User`s Manual

Contents

1. Gpen and maintain link to session file P Make session ile link read arly This operation can also be achieved by using the File gt Import session To import an existing session using File gt Import Session 1 Select File gt Import Session The Session Name dialog box opens i ES __ Cancel Session Hame Session name Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 358 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility A 3 4 Enter the new session name Select the session file you wish to import into the new session Click OK A new session is added with the same settings as the file you browsed to but with the new name 17 1 6 3 Importing a link to a session You can add a new session to the High performance Embedded Workshop system but link to the session file in its location rather than importing or copying the file to the project directory This is useful when sharing debugger information with other users in a network environment To import a link to an existing session file L 2 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box opens Click the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the Open and maintain link to session f
2. Pop up Menu Option Function Save Saves the contents of an editing window Close Closes an individual file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 110 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor In the Disassembly window it is possible to close window via the related tab s pop up menu Right clicking on the tab of the Disassembly window opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Function Close Closes the Disassembly window 4 4 Searching and navigating through files 4 4 1 Finding text To search for text in the current file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select one of the following operations to open the Find dialog box e Click the Find toolbar button 4 OR e Press the CTRL F key OR e Select Edit gt Find OR e Select Find from the pop up menu in the Editor window Find Ei Find what T Match whole word only rect Cancel Match case Regular expression 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match
3. Show file path lt Back Next gt Bimet Cancel When a makefile is selected by Makefile path Source files shows source files in the makefile To view the source files in the makefile again click Start To apply toolchain options such as the compiler select the Import options check box If you want to remove a file from the project you can remove it by selecting the file and pressing Remove button And if you want to add a file to the project you can add it by pressing Add button Selecting the Show file path check box shows the full path of the file 17 1 3 Editing project configuration If you are using the SuperH or H8SX H8S and H8 family toolchains then it is possible to configure the simulator again using the project generator This feature is not enabled for the demonstration project type 1 Select Project gt Edit Project Configuration The Edit Project Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click on the Target tab 3 Select the target you wish to use and then click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 333 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 4 Configuring the debugger Before you can load a program into your debugger you must set it up to match your application s system The items that must be set up are typically device type operating mode clock speed and the memory map It is particularly important to set up the memory map as you must
4. e aconfiguration named debug has a configuration directory located at c workspace project debug e HEW2 EXE is installed in c Program Files Renesas Hew e a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located in c Program Files Renesas Hew Tools Renesas Sh 9_0_1_ 1 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the options setting dialogs and the New Build Phase dialog step 3 of the Build menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 504 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Placeholders Note the Windows operating system is installed in c windows and the Windows system directory is located at c windows system a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login to the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable c project is mapped to x vc project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent file s location USERNAME PASSWOR
5. ssssessssssosseeeneesssssssssssssessssetreresssssssssssssserererressssssssssseeeereeee 152 6 8 Specifying workspace OPLIONS xs cirenctnn Anoconastnecruwatanatatonetasctmead Aaa EAA EEES EAEE EEEE Sa HAEA ENEE 152 6 8 1 Opening the last workspace at Start Up cccccccccccccccccseeceeseessesseeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaagaaeeeeeees 152 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page iii Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 6 8 2 Restoring files on opening a workspace venessnccancaratncws spadeaneiadennandsondncedseun bin waudaediawinnedsowdnsitcoieestuddantesernsaneees 153 6 8 3 Displaying workspace information on opening a workspace esssesssssssssseeeererssssssssssssssseereresssssssssseses 153 6 8 4 Saving the workspace before executing any tools e eessssssssssssssetterrersssssssssssssssssererreressssssssssseeeeeeeee 154 6 8 5 Prompting before saving a WOFKSPaCe cccccccccsccssnssssesseeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeaaaaesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaaasseseeeeeeeeeees 154 6 8 6 Prompting before saving a session s ssssssssssssseeetrerressssssssssssssetererresssssssssssseetrrreressresssssssssseesrerereresesssss 155 6 8 7 Enabling auto backup facilities cccccccccccceccccccceaeeesesssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaessssseseeseeeececeeeeeeeeeesaaaaasaseeeeseeeeeess 155 6 8 8 Setting the projects to load ON workspace open ccceecccesssssesssseeeeeccceeeeceeeeaeaaeesses
6. status Memory Mode None Target Device Configuration UODOUODUDD OTFFFFFF EXT 20U000000 27FFFFFF Ext S40000000 47FFFFFF Ext COOOOO00O0 COOOUOFFF EXT FFFFSOOO0 FFFFBFFF KAM FFFFFEOO FFFFFFFF 1 0 aystem Memory Resources QOOO00000 OO007FFF Read O6000000 O6000FFF Read OTFFFOOO O 7FFFFFF Read FFFFFEOQO FFFFFFFF Read Program Name Memory Loaded Area a 4 A Memory A Platform j Events REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 432 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Tab Description Memory Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file Platform Contains information about the current status of the debugger typically including CPU series and mode run status and timing information Events Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information 17 16 Viewing the function call history The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 17 16 1 Opening the Stack Trace window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button fey Window configuration le Stack Trace Ox Find Name Values F tuned i short OxGO0000S4 P param 3 Ox0C0003tta OxXDOOUStAS sh hort L local 3 D3 GxOO0O3 fds unsigned long F funee short i GxBOCCO0T2 P
7. 1 Displaying section group When the Overlay function is used i e when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing Debug gt Overlay This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box Overlay Address Section Mame PPI eTerr errr rerrririrretitiiiitiieiiriit iii iis OO2000 O0e2008 Cancel The Address list box displays the address ranges used by the Overlay function Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range Address OOLO00 0O0102 5 Psectol Psectill Psectue Psectle OO2000 002008 i Psectuos Psectls3 ae Section Name REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 445 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 2 Setting section group When using the Overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the High performance Embedded Workshop will operate incorrectly Firstly click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest
8. Page 492 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Main Menus 1 8 Tools Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Function Key Button Tools Administration Controls the components Change Toolchain Version Changes a toolchain version Version Select Selects a version control system Control Configure Add to VCS Remove from VCS Get from VCS Check out from VCS Check in VCS Get VCS status Launch External Debugger Setups the version control system Adds files to Visual SourceSafe Gets a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Gets a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Checks out a writable copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Checks in your edits to a file into Visual SourceSafe Views the status of a file in Visual SourceSafe Launches an external debugger tool e De Ge GP SP Macros Opens the Macro dialog box Record Macro D Starts recording of a macro Play Macro D Plays a macro Stop Macro m Stops a macro System tools a Invokes system tools e g Renesas Call Walker 1 Custom menu options to which recorded macros have been assigned are shown between Stop Macro and system tools 2 Further menu options for external tools added by customizing the Tools menu are shown under the menu options for system tools 1 9 Test Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Function Key Button Test Create New Test Creates
9. Any text based files may be opened in the disassembly window and not just project source files Any source file opened in the disassembly window is read only and cannot be edited it is only intended for the viewing and debugging of source files This view is only available when the module is downloaded Window configuration a Disassembly DemoSH4 c View mised mode View Source View Disassembly Column Source Address S W Breakpoints Source a header long min Max Leng l ine i OO002Z006 PELINtE Data 29 00002014 for i 0 e WA Line Number column SAW Breakpoints column Source Source Address column mal REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 372 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view disassembly codes in disassembly mode click the View Disassembly button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Source field Column Name Line Source Address S W Breakpoints Displays the line number for the source file After your program has been downloaded the source view displays the addresses for the current source file Display the PC location G and breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by e The Source field includes codes highlighting the syntax Options
10. Opens a dialog box which allows you to select one directory for relocating all files retrieved from the download module Properties Shows the selected download module setting in the Download Module dialog box This download module setting can be modified The download module will be unloaded if it has already been downloaded Note If you use a debug only project i e Debugger only xxxxxx this menu option will be displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 44 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Right clicking on a file retrieved from the download module opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available only when you use the debug only project Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Open lt file name gt Opens a file in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor Add File Adds files to a project Configure View Configures the workspace view Relocated file s Opens a dialog box which allows you to select the same short filename retrieved from the download module at a new location Properties Displays file properties Right clicking on the Dependencies folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Configure View Configures the workspace view Right clicking on a dependence file opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Func
11. Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Introduction Introduction The High performance Embedded Workshop is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas micro controllers The main features are e A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options by using GUI e An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability e A configurable environment which allows you to run your own tools e An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application e Version control support Operating Environment for the High performance Embedded Workshop This user s manual online help and release notes do not indicate that the correct operation of the High performance Embedded Workshop is guaranteed for any types of host computers or peripheral devices Note on the Sample Source Files Generated by the High performance Embedded Workshop When a new workspace is created sample source files for the microcomputer in use are automatically generated These files contain sample code and this does not indicate that the operations of all programs based on that
12. la target connection cut target cor necta i Before download of modules Add Hadit After download of modules After reset HE Renove Wg Pawn 4 Then click Add The debugger will then display the add Command Line File dialog box Command Line File ki x Filename gt Browse mK Initial Director gt Browse Cancel T Apply to all timings 5 Enter the command batch file name in the Filename field If you wish to insert a placeholder into the Filename field click the placeholder button and select the placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button 6 In the Initial Directory field enter the name of the directory where you wish to execute the command batch file By this setting you can also use command batch files that have relative paths If you wish to insert a placeholder into the Initial Directory field click the placeholder button f and select the placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a directory click the Browse button 7 Selecting the Apply to all timings check box adds the batch file to every timing At target connection Before download of modules After download of modules and After reset 8 Click OK to add the batch file 9 Once added it can moved into the correct place in the order by using the Up and Down buttons This is only valid if you are adding multiple command line batch files 10 Click OK Notes
13. DetsulS amp s oer Lagat Al Gersons __ 5H A4 simulator Cone zre Lore Teme Z Desig haima Enz m t Dosana marcus Filename se Addes Foma Add EC0NFIGMAPAPRAO Oromon EU SD aah y I 1 yee ee See section 17 1 6 Debugger sessions for more information about a Debugger sessions 1 14 Overview of Macro Recording Support facility and Test Support facility When coding is finished the program must be tested If a problem is found in testing you will need to correct the problem and re test the program Testing takes a significant number of steps in development of programs To ease the process of testing the High performance Embedded Workshop provides the macro recording support and test support facilities REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 24 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview e Macro recording support facility The macro recording support facility allows you to record operations which are associated with the High performance Embedded Workshop system applications 1 build 2 and debugging 3 as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands or to execute these recorded commands Files to record the operations High performance Embedded Workshop macro files are command line batch files that have hdc as the extension and can be modified These files are stored in the Macros folder within the High performance
14. Meoduled2 Bus Controller Meoduled3 System Meoduledd lnterrupt Controller OMIA Channel Commer regt sre gO MAW ER regl re gO MATLR reg cre gD WAB CAHAN rega sre gD MAB CRAL AM re gd sre gD WAB C AHA re g5 zre gD WAB CALF AMN gdepzreaMSsTPCRAH F 0 Fega OMAWERA Id D LAWYER dtf og B A H dmawer_bttields Regter name Address sire Absolute address tg Fermat Bitfieds Bites Cetin tien Idirewer bittelds boxy EA biti VVEOB bt2 VWV E14 bt3 VYE1B REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 507 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 7 Symbol File Format 7 Symbol File Format In order for High performance Embedded Workshop to be able to understand and decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol_name_1 11FCH Symbol_name_2 11FEH Symbol_name_3 1200H Symbol_name_4 END Note Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 508 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Keyboard Shortcuts 8 Keyboard Shortcuts All major command
15. Src Dest Example Compared trace range Trace type Unmatched trace range Content of the test image file Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Comparing PTR 3 to 1 Trace type Trace Trace data is not matching PTR 3 to PTR 1 Trace data at the beginning of difference PTR 3 Src 0000001879 0000107C F gt DEMMW MOV L R15 R1 R1 lt 00000010 Dest 0000001887 00000818 FD lt E JSR R5 PC lt 00001000 Page 311 of 523 CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 To make detailed setting with one trace type 16 Test Support Facility If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test Trace Ranges e To add a trace range Trace ranges start PTA End PTR OK hE Cancel Add Monit Hemose i 1 Click on the Add button on the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box to open the Add Trace Range dialog box 2 Specify Start PTR and End PTR to set a trace range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To modify a trace range Add Trace Range Ea Ea Start PTR End PTR Cancel 1 Click on the Modify button on the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box The trace range selected in the Trace ranges list will be modified Only one trace range is selectable in the list 2 The Modify Trace Rang
16. When a command is run the status of the batch file will automatically be reset REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 260 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 18 Setting a breakpoint in a batch file Breakpoints can be set on command lines in a batch file on the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window This feature is not available when no batch file has been specified To set a breakpoint in a batch file 1 Open the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window 2 Perform one of the following operations in the upper pane e Double click on the Breakpoint column for the line where the execution should stop e Place the cursor on the line where the execution should stop Then right click to open the pop up menu and select Insert remove breakpoint A breakpoint icon appears on the Breakpoint column This indicates that a breakpoint has been set 3 To switch enabling and disabling of the breakpoint that has been set right click and select Enable disable breakpoint from the pop up menu 4 To delete the breakpoint right click and select Insert remove breakpoint or double click on the column 5 To delete all breakpoints right click and select Clear all breakpoints from the pop up menu Execute the batch file with the Debugger tabbed pane open in the Command Line window At a break the execution stops before the command line where the breakpoint has been set If you sel
17. selection 5 Select the Color tab 6 Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The System color refers to the current window foreground and background settings in Control Panel 7 Click the OK button for the new color settings to take effect Fl EE Source os DY Selected Text oe k Test D PC Line Highlight H E CPU information file Absolute file Stack information file Profile file C list file Linkage map file C source file C header file C source file ve A Comments File type Keyword group Operator PreFrocessor Eoo H 4 10 2 Creating new keywords To create new keyword groups al Color Font Keywords Comments Foreground SSS Background SYSTEM HEW Sample Text 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens Expand the Source view icon in the tree 2 Select the file type for which you want to create a new keyword group from the tree on this dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 121 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 3 Click the Add button underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box then opens Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field Click the OK button to add a keyword group To modify the name of the group select the keyword group and click the Modify button underneath the tree Modify Category dialog box
18. 2 Select the file group that you want to associate from the file extensions list 3 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog box opens Modify File Extension File group Linkage map file Cancel Associated application pen Linkage map file with z Add Madis BEmare REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 54 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 5 2 9 2 Add Application iene Cancel Command texcluding parameters rh SBrowsen Parameters ________ hitial directory Po Browse Click the OK button to set the application for the selected file group Creating a new file extension and file group 2 Build Basics Select None to remove any association Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other you can either specify a new application or select any previously defined application from the drop down list Click the Add button to define a new application The Add Application dialog box opens Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file into the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location of the file see Re
19. 6 Type your country or region in the Country Region edit box This item must be completed 7 Once you are happy with your report choose the method of sending the report in the How would you like to submit the report drop down list box You can print it e mail it or save it to a disk This selection is required 8 Then click Submit This will send the report When submitting a report via e mail you will see a confirmation message after clicking Submit Please type a description of the problem you wish to report a xl Name Company website your application Sant Count A egior How would you like to submit the report Print Cancel Fields marked with a are required Note Fields marked with an asterisk are required You can click the Submit button after these fields are completed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 485 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Reference Reference REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 486 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Main Menus 1 Main Menus 1 1 File Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Macro Function Key Button Recording File New CTRL4N J Creates a new document Open CTRL O a Opens an existing document Close CTRL F4 Closes the active document New Workspace Creates a new workspace Open Workspace co Opens an existing workspace Save Workspace D Saves
20. C OD D me T lt A 5 V High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 User s Manual All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corporation without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corporation through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corporation website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics Rev 1 00 Jul 2010 www renesas com 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectu
21. Mase bor bop Mare up Mare darm Mareta baton Test image file E Workspace sDemoSH4 Test _Sute_Demo_Test_Demo hif gt Browse To add a new test you should setup the following data 1 Enter the test name There can be no spaces in this name 2 Enter the test description This should describe the test in a verbose way so you will understand it at a later date 3 To setup the actual tests to execute you should click the Add button 4 The Add New Test Script dialog box is displayed See below 5 The Script type box allows you to select a High performance Embedded Workshop macro HEW macro or a High performance Embedded Workshop command line batch file TCL command line batch file 6 Selecting HEW Macro in the Script type drop down list shows all of the registered macro in the Select macros to add to test list 7 You can select multiple macro files to be executed for each test This is achieved by selecting the checkbox next to the macro names you wish to use 8 Selecting TCL command line batch file in the drop down list changes the Add Test Script dialog box so you can define the file to execute when the test is executed 9 Clicking OK stores the results and adds it to the Add New Test dialog box 10 Finally you must set the Debug system for test image comparison file This file stores the comparison data for the system to be compared to after the tests have executed This file can be created by using Test g
22. Menu gt Menu Option gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key Figures Some figures in this user s manual may differ from the objects they represent Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Visual SourceSafe Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other company and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies Website and Support Renesas Electronics Tools Website http www renesas com tools Inquiries http www renesas com inquiry REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents Contents Mi OV Wy seca ce penne E E E E E A E E E E 1 1 1 Workspace and Pro eci leseese RETE E E O EA Or l Le MANINO eee E E AEE EEA AAN AAEE AE OEE l 1 2 1 MAGIC GE aa E E E E aonusencees acc cesaceserenucosccs 2 L22 IN TUE 1 i E E E O A E A AE A A A A tenons A AE 2 1 2 3 LOODA arna aE E A AEE AEE O E ENEE ENE E E E ETE 3 1 2 4 Workspace WINGO W sists ccavencensancsievectecseaaboestsanstanteasaneeboseaass simul NEA ENESE NOAE AEN 6 L23 AOE O eaer n E A E I A E FE EA EE O I E AEE E AE 8 1 2 6 OUUU WIN OW
23. Notes 1 This pane cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 The following debuggers support this facility The Simulator Debugger for the SuperH Family The Simulator Debugger for the H8SX H8S H8 Family The Simulator Debugger for the RX Family e Section settings after a build right pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Show Unallocated Area Shows the unallocated area Show No Size Section Shows the no size section in Os al a View source Views the source code for the address in the selected line Print Prints section list view REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 235 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 1 2 Entering exiting the edit mode To edit the section information shown in the left pane the High performance Embedded Workshop must enter the edit mode By default the edit mode is not selected To enter the edit mode 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Section Edit Mode This allows the High performance Embedded Workshop to enter the edit mode 3 There is a tick mark on Section Edit Mode While the High performance Embedded Workshop is in the edit mo
24. REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 365 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Add File To Project Adds the file to a project Go To Definition Of lt Navigation Shows the positions where navigation items of defines C ltem gt functions or C classes are defined List Members While the smart editor function is enabled selecting this option displays an alphabetical list of C defines C functions or C classes as a pop up window Double clicking on an item copies this character string and pastes it to the current cursor position Find Finds text in the current file Replace Replaces text in the current file Goto Line Jumps to a line in a file Match Braces Finds a matching brace Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line Next Bookmark Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line Previous Bookmark Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Clear All Bookmarks Clears all bookmarks in the current file Templates Define Templates Defines a template Insert Template Inserts a template Toggle Breakpoint G Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Define Column Format Sets the status of editor
25. e Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window OR e Right click anywhere inside a floating window and select the Hide option on the pop up menu Hide To show the Workspace window or the Output window Select View gt Workspace or View gt Output respectively 1 2 5 Editor window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files see the figure below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 8 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 include typedefine h pragma section DSEC Static Const SLruce f _UBYTE rom_3 Seale address GE the _UBYTE ron e f End addressa GE the in _UBYTE ram 3 atarte addressa GE the DTEL 1 Overview The editor contains a gutter column on the left hand side of the window The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the mouse pointer over the column a tool
26. e If you use the FILE_LOAD or FILE_LLOAD_ALL command to download a module the command batch file specified for Before download of modules or After download of modules is not executed e If you use the RESET command to reset the CPU the RESET command written in the command batch file specified for After reset is not executed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 337 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 2 Not executing a batch file when a module containing only debug information is downloaded If this checkbox is selected a batch file will not be executed when Download Debug Data Only is selected in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the module in the workspace window even in cases where Before download of modules or After download of modules has been selected for Command batch file load timing and a command batch file has been specified To not execute a batch file when a program containing only debug information is downloaded 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Disable batch file execution when downloading debug information By default this checkbox is selected 4 Click OK 3 Downloading modules after build If this checkbox is selected the user program will be automatically downloaded after a build To download modules after build 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The
27. gt Stop from the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically refreshed when user program execution stops Selecting Auto Refresh gt Real time from the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be refreshed while the user program is running To specify the refresh interval select Update Interval from the pop up menu This item is only selectable when it is supported by the debugger 17 5 3 Refreshing the Waveform window Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately refreshes the window contents REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 408 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 5 4 Specifying the refresh interval You can specify the interval to refresh the Waveform window while the user program is running Support for this function depends on the debugger To specify the refresh interval 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Update Interval The Update Interval dialog box opens Update Interval ed Interval 10 10000mzec 10mzec unit fioo mzer Cancel 3 Specify the refresh interval in 10 ms units The refresh interval is specifiable in the range from 10 to 10000 ms and the default value is 1000 ms The specified refresh interval is applied to all Waveform windows The actual refresh interval may be longer than the specified value depending on the state of execution 17 5 5 Zoom in display
28. 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Global Editor Column States dialog box e Select Edit gt Define Column Format OR e Right click in the editor window and select Define Column Format from the pop up menu Global Editor Column State Ei E4 Line Number SAW Break points WSA Breakpoints 45M Cancel Source Address 2 If the column s checkbox is checked then the column is enabled if the column s checkbox is gray then this means that the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others 3 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect To switch off a column in one source file 1 Open the editor window of the file which you wish to remove a column from 2 Select one of the following operations e Right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column OR REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 128 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor e Right click in the editor window and select Columns The cascaded menu option appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it will have a tick next to its name Clicking on the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not You can adjust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header 4 16 Showing hiding the colum
29. 2 6 Setting build options Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the High performance Embedded Workshop on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Build menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using To set options for a build phase 1 Select the Build menu and select the phase whose options you would like to modify 2 A dialog box will be displayed allowing you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click the OK button to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and press F1 2 7 Build configurations The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration 1 e you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on if you select that configuration all options for all of the build phases will be restored These configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform The figure below shows three configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each phase compile and assemble is set to its standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each file is being built with debug information switched on
30. C WorkSpace rcs_sample 3 Create a folder for RCS C WorkSpace rcs_sample rcs_sample RCS REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 179 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 11 1 2 Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box opens 2 Select Custom VCS 3 Click the OK button 8 11 1 3 Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure to open the Version Control Setup dialog box e Setting environment variables 1 Select the Projects tab ersion Control S etup res sample LOGNAME user path path 0 SACS T2 s 57 9 GT ETEME REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 180 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 2 Click the Add button on Environment 3 The Environment dialog box appears E n ironment arable ph mathe ACS 4 Enter path in Variable and path C RCS in Value respectively 5 Click the OK button 6 Click the Add button Also enter the following environment variables in Environment LOGNAME user TZ JST 9 e Specifying actions 1 Select the General tab Yersion Control Setup 2 Deselect the Prompt before executing command checkbox Leave it selected however if you wish to see the file na
31. Download modules 1 Project_Name abs D0000O0O Dependencies 2 envinc w lowerch w sbrk h w stackscth w typedefine h w VeCtiInc w REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 201 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 9 2 5 Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users To check in edits made to files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files that you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Check in to VCS toolbar button a OR e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Check in to VCS OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Check in to VCS Check in to WOS Mw Workspace Name hws CAWorkep iw Praject_Ha me wp Ework sp _Cancel_ iw Project Name c oAworksp Wltypedetine h Ework sp Mldbsctc oWvorksp i K
32. E E indicating an error Undeclared name a Wild card for error message There are some restrictions on these regular expressions For example it is not possible to define two unclear strings next to each other such as FILEDIR or FULLFILE It is also not possible to define and which are commonly used in filenames and directory names to separate placeholders for filenames and directory names from other characters such as FULLFILE LINE or FILENAME REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 86 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features e When Error has been selected as the syntax type and the output message matches the definition of the syntax An error icon appears on the left to the message output as the result of building Double clicking on the line displays the corresponding source code in the editor e When Warning has been selected as the syntax type and the output message matches the definition of the syntax A warning icon appears on the left to the message output as the result of building Double clicking on the line displays the corresponding source code in the editor e When Other has been selected as the syntax type and the output message matches the definition of the syntax An information icon appears on the left to the message output as the result of building Double clicking on the line display
33. Enter a macro name Finished recording Build acre See section 1 14 1 Example of test procedures for an operation procedure e Test support facility The test support facility allows you to create a test image file of the selected test items test image data execute a macro created by the macro recording support facility or an existing High performance Embedded Workshop command batch file and compare a test image file with the current High performance Embedded Workshop system Test image data can be saved into a test image file HIF REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 26 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Note however that High performance Embedded Workshop is not capable of acquiring test image information of all functions in the High performance Embedded Workshop system For the items from which test image information can be acquired see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files The typical test procedure is outlined in the figure below See section 1 14 1 Example of test procedures for a test procedure 7 Create Hew Test Suite i Save specifyed information o e test ule HEW Test Suite File HTS Edit Test Suite Add Test Specities playing macro al pce ct D ee 3 ii Am Hm Specifies HEN Test Image HEW Macro File File tor comparison after test execution HEIN Test Image File HIF J
34. High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility When two windows are open and this function is enabled in either of the windows values of registers and flags can be compared 17 7 12 Using register contents It can be useful to be able to use the value contained in a CPU register when you are entering a value elsewhere in the High performance Embedded Workshop for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory views You can do this by specifying the register name prefixed by the or character e g PC or HPC The supported prefix depends on the debugger 17 7 13 Changing text colors The text color and font of the register or flag values shown in the Register window can be customized in the Format Views dialog box in the same manner as the color and font in other windows Now it is also possible to customize the color of the changed register or flag values in the Format Views dialog box The default foreground and background colors of the changed values are red and white respectively The color of the background will be the same as in cases where the text category is selected To change the look of the Register window 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the Register item in the tree and expand it 3 Select the Modified category 4 Modify the Foreground color selection on the Color tabbed page as desired 5 Click
35. Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 1 Click on the Next Image toolbar button to view the second frame Image Ed Nonreftesh E pr aor We 10 amp 2 Click on the Next Image toolbar button to view the third frame Image Ei 17 4 5 2 Regularly switching the frames While the function to show images as consecutive frames is enabled the pop up menu and toolbar items listed in the table below are available for regularly switching the frames Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Redraw Interval 0 5s ios The image is redrawn continuously every 0 5 seconds 1 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 1 0 seconds 2 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 2 0 seconds 4 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 4 0 seconds Redraw Continuously a Starts redrawing continuously Stop mi Stops redrawing continuously Note Images may not be updated in the defined interval depending on the debugger in use and the image size Whether the pop up menu and toolbar items are active or not depends on which frame is currently displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 404 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To regularly switch the frames While Redraw Continuously is enabled the frames are regularly switched If you wish to view three consecutive frames for example the operation will be as follo
36. Memory Code StackTrace StackTrace View gt Code gt Stack Trace Note Test items cannot be selected when the High performance Embedded Workshop is not connected to any target REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 293 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 1 1 Output Build Debug Output window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Output Test item name Build Output Window Test image data to be All information in the Build tab of the output window saved into test image files Test result details Original Content of the test image file New Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Original New Building New Debug Test group name Output Test item name Debug Output Window Test image data to be All information in the Debug tab of the output window saved into test image files Test result details Original Content of the test image file New Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Original Connected New Step Normal End No detailed setting specific to the test item can be made 16 6 1 2 CPU Register Register window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved i
37. OR Loads a project Adds files to a project Removes files from project Add folder to a project Expands or collapses the tree below a project icon Executes a version control system Configures the workspace view Displays project properties Right clicking on a folder other than Download module and Dependencies opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Add Folder Rename Folder Remove Folder Configure View Macro Recording Function Add a custom folder Rename a folder Remove a folder Configures the workspace view Right clicking on a project file opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Open lt file name gt Open lt file name gt in external editor Build lt file name gt Build Options Add File Remove File Exclude Build OR Include Build Version Control Configure View Show Differences Properties Macro Recording Function Opens a file in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor Opens a file in the external editor Builds a file Sets build options Adds files to a project Removes files from project Excludes a project file from build OR Includes a project file in build Executes a version control system Configures the workspace view Compares files Displays file properties REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 43 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 B
38. S CONFIGDIR gt Browse Back Next gt Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 81 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Step 4 The fourth and final step allows you to specify any environment variables that the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 FP x sy Does the command require any environment variables to be set If so enter them into the list below Hemose To add a new environment variable click the Add button the Environment Variable dialog is displayed Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click the OK button to add the new variable to the list To modify an environment variable select the variable from the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click the OK button to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment ariable Ei Variable a OK pa OK evs Cancel PD If the tool you are adding can display its output whilst the tool is running then use the Read Output on Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the High performance Embedded Workshop will store all output that is be
39. e C C operators e C C99 C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user defined e Stack trace Note It is only possible when a compiler that supports C99 specifications is in use REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 442 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 18 2 1 C C operators The C C language operators are available amp 1 4 gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt amp amp Buffer_start 0x 1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 17 18 2 2 C C99 C expressions Expression examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specifies reference of a member with pointer C g_value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies a cast operation C C floating point constant Specifies a complex or imaginary number Hexadecimal floating point constants are floating point constant I also supported
40. e The position of the source file in the editor window is fixed If you wish to continue step in Disassembly mode of the Disassembly window select the Debug gt Step mode gt Assembly REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 362 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Note After a break occurs the High performance Embedded Workshop displays the location of the program counter PC In some cases for example if a project has been moved from its original path the source files may not be automatically found In this case the High performance Embedded Workshop will open a source file browser dialog to allow you to manually locate the file this path will then be used to update any other source files in this debug project 17 2 1 Opening the Editor window To view a source file s code double click on its icon in the file tree or right click on the source file and click the Open option on the pop up menu The High performance Embedded Workshop opens the file in the editor Toolbar View Source View mied mode Yew Disassembly Source old mainl void i long min Wax The editor in version 4 00 onwards has been enhanced to include an integrated disassembly view This integrated view has a toolbar which allows the switching of mode When each mode is available it is possible to click the button and change to the new view Three different modes are possible thes
41. o A series of command lines can be called from a batch file and the results can be output to a file The contents of the selected batch file are shown in the upper pane of the Debugger tab o You can clear the information shown on this pane The contents of the lower pane of the Debugger tab will also be cleared e Debugger tab This pane allows the user to perform single stepping or set breakpoints in the selected batch file to control the target platform When a batch file has been loaded placing the mouse cursor on the line dividing the panes turns the mouse cursor into a double headed arrow Click and drag the mouse cursor to a desired position to adjust the size of the panes REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 251 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line Command Line C forkspace Command hdc no log file ES toba Tada olagGiviae Contents of the atch file es ee l command Line number allresert Breakpoint 3 step Current line to be executed 4 step oS atep Breakpoint column Line number 4 H column gt command reset ae ee atep eee Step complete at AQQOOUDZ execution gt EY console Debugger o Upper pane contents of the batch file The upper pane shows the contents of the selected batch file and allows debugging However you cannot modify data in this pane The contents of the selected batch file are displayed Single stepping of com
42. to 100 characters 3 Click OK A SDO file will automatically be created for the new configuration and stored in the Sync directory The new configuration will be added to the configuration drop list and become selected as the current configuration All other controls on the dialog will be reset to the default state To save an existing configuration to a different filename This is the equivalent of a Save As file operation To save the current dialog settings to a new configuration use the following method 1 Click the Save as button 2 Enter a new unique name for the configuration file 3 Click Save If the configuration was saved to the Sync directory then the configuration will be added to the drop list and selected exactly as it would for a completely new configuration except that the dialogs controls will not be reset to default However the file can also be saved to a different location for example a network drive so that it can be shared with other High performance Embedded Workshop users in which case the configuration will not be added to the drop list To import configurations In order to import a configuration into High performance Embedded Workshop copy the configuration s SDO file into the Sync directory before opening the Synchronized Debug dialog box or follow the following method on the dialog box 1 Click the Import button 2 Browse to the configuration file you want to import 3 C
43. 1 Right click on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select the Relocate file s menu option Selecting this will bring up a standard Windows file open dialog box Please select new location of file Ei ES ci E Look ir E Debug_E mulator de t File name Files of type stdlib hl Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 354 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 3 This dialog will only allow you to select a file of the same name 4 Selecta file and then click the Open button You can select multiple files to be relocated this will bring up the Locate Files dialog box with the files to be relocated in the files to find section 17 1 5 5 Displaying main functions on download The High performance Embedded Workshop automatically displays the source file including main functions in source mode within the High performance Embedded Workshop editor after downloading modules To display main functions on download 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select Debug tab 3 Select the Display main function on download checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK 5 Download a module For details on download see section 17 1 5 2 Downloading modules 17 1 5 6 Unloading of modules It is possible to manually unload downloaded modules When a module is unloaded its symbols are erased from t
44. 17 6 1 Opening the IO window To open the IO window choose View gt CPU gt IO or click the View IO toolbar button ra Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information The IO window has two tabs All Register and Selected Register When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is shown on the All Register tabbed pane Window configuration Toolbar Column header z Module A al Nenory Management Unit os FFOOOOOO goood Register 7 z Bit 0 FFOOOOO4 FFOOOOOS FFOOOOOC 0 FFOOOOLO Jj Interrupt Control EOE All Register Tab Description All Register Shows all I O registers Selected Register Shows selected I O registers This page is blank by default REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 411 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility e I O registers can be expended e If the value of an I O register is changed the value is displayed in red e Double clicking on the line of an I O register opens a dialog box in which you can change the value Changing of the value can be recorded in a macro Macro Recording e The values of I O registers and their bits can be changed in the Value column by in place editing Macro Recording Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the
45. 232 Drag and drop of tiles and folders ess ccnecesnsincesancaswecuesversdvonrsadcensstnnciinedeoevouesboernaddnmeraeasdacivecdawsiwendbacnsedtanctannds 47 2 3 3 Removing files from a Project ccccccccccecccccececcceeeaeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 49 2 3 4 Excluding a project file from build nnneeneeesseseoeeeensssssssssssssssseereressssssssssssseeereeresssssssssssssseeeeeerrsssssssssseses 50 250 Including A project file in Duld seserinis aanere e E EEE Oar EA EAEE 51 24 User folders 1m the WOrkS pace socera AE EE A Ea E a EO SEE aaie 5I 2 9 File extensions and file STOUDG cccccccceccccsscecsecesssssssesseeeceececcccssueceesssssesseeeeeeceeceassseeceanecssssesseceeeeeceessaneceaaseees 53 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file group eeeesessssssssssssssssseeererrssssssssssssseccreeeessssssssssssseeeeeeeeresssssssseses 54 252 Creating a new file extension and file QrOUP c cc seesssssssseeecccecececeeeeeceeaaaseesseseeeeecceeeeeeeeessaaasssseseeeeeeeeess 55 2 5 3 Ga UT IN a odin O E E A E E E T 57 2 6 SP ES Duld Opos ss srsrsareasrieranr sorna ana EE EE E ERTER EE EA EENE AE RANEE EO SEA E NE AEAEE 58 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page i Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents Da BaCO UM ALONG er E E N E E E E E EEE 58 2 7 1 Selecting a build COMMS UIA NOM assises oe TE EE Eaa a AEE N EESE 59 MN Adding a new buil
46. 3 Available placeholders araco rer aE E aO EEEE A OEEO EOE E EAEE 504 E PACOK S eena E E E E E E te 505 EVOP POA e E E E EEA 506 Uc VO e EON es E T E E 508 Be A OAM NOLO CUI E E E E EE E A E E EE EE 509 9 Dras and Drop im the WC DU oC sesen ESE ra BEEE O ner EAEE Ei 512 10 Using Labels to View Your Code cccccccsssssccccccccceeeesseeeccceeeeeaaessseeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaaaseeeeeees 513 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View ccsssssssccccecceeeeeeeeeeecceeeeaaeeeseeeceeeeasaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaas 515 12 To Build in Toolchain for High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 X n 518 AMARE U er ONE eana RE e N E EE e EE 519 gt a 0000 0 07210 0 e E A EA 519 MZ BC Syl Xara ce certs E Stace te T A E IE AI AA EA E A EA A E A A widen caeneuaeraos named neds 519 13 3 Desorption DIOCkS cea sineseseteceazzecnancmcaneceaanaonnontsialnarieasacenmeastesannesnsmbanauiebaniaasnncananenoamae sn aeaastebeducnedmneenudeneneasneudausutebactoants 520 L O aar ne Ce Eo RoE ne en pe enon ee eee ee 523 TS IMESS aR 6 commands sepone EOE ESEE EEE EEEE Een EEEE EEEO 523 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page x Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 1 Overview The functions for High performance Embedded Workshop are explained in this manual This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop 1 1 Workspace and project s High performance Embedded Workshop has a conc
47. 6 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 328 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project 9 Setting the Target System for Debugging SH 4 Functional Simulator SH 4 Functional SimulatorfLittle endian SH 4 Simulator 2 SH 4 Simulator Litthe endian SH 4 with BSC Simulator SH 4 with BSC Simulator Litte endian SH 4 SH 750A Functional Simulator SH 4 SH 7 50R Functional Sirulator Lit SH 4 SH 50R Simulator SH 4 SH7 50R Sinulator Litthe endian Target type SH 4 Target CPU al CPUs 7 Specify the debugger targets in Step 7 Targets Sets the debugger targets Select by checking the debugger targets No selection or a selection of more than one target is possible Target type Specifies the type of the targets displayed in Targets Target CPU Specifies the CPU of the targets displayed in Targets Note The endian type selected in step 2 will be applied to the compiler settings This is separate from the endian type of the debugger target selected in step 7 To move to Step 8 click the Next gt button in Step 7 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 329 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Propect 9 Setting the Debugger Options Target name SH 4 Simulator Core single core gt Configuration name SimbUebug SH 4 Detail options Set
48. AEN watcha Note Names of variables cannot be changed in the following cases e The user program is running e Two or more variables are selected 4 Expanding a variable If a variable is a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the variable To expand a variable click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the variable also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them To collapse an expanded variable click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign The variable can be expanded for the number of levels when a numerical key from 1 to 9 is pressed while a variable is selected 5 Editing the value of a variable You can change the value of a variable To edit the value of a variable Select either of the following ways REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 454 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility e In place edit in the Value column ate NEA 9 Oy ee Fe Se Name Value address Type Scope Fl R Watch Item 1 i FFFS0SCO Iwolatile lo Current Scope
49. After some operations a Confirmation Request dialog box may appear If you have executed build all on the entire program a Confirmation Request dialog box appears by default asking if you wish to download the program To download the program click the Yes button Since the action of clicking on the buttons in this confirmation dialog box cannot be recorded into macros this dialog box will open next time you execute a macro To continue the macro execution you should click one of the buttons The execution must be continued if you are using the test support facility which is used to test a sequence of operations For this reason make the following setting so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear In this example select the Don t ask this question again check box in Confirmation Request dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 28 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Confirmation Request OK to download module CW yorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH44 Debug DemoSH4 abs ves Yes to all Ho to all Cancel Save the High performance Embedded Workshop environment setting that you wish to use for tests so that the environment for the tests will always be the same 1 Select File gt Save Workspace 2 Select File gt Save Session You can always use the same environment to start a test by loading the High performance Embedded Workshop environment setting t
50. Choose Set Log File from the pop up menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File p Browse gt Cancel Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the current log REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 256 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 6 Starting or stopping logging Choose Logging from the pop up menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 14 7 Entering a full path to the file It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command Line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the pop up menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor
51. Column Source Address S W Breakpoants header a long min max long J m int i ooo0z006 printe Data 29 00002014 for i 0 e WA Line Number column SAW Breakpoints column Source Source Address column e Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view disassembly codes in disassembly mode click the View Disassembly button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Source field Column Name Description Line Displays the line number for the source file Source Address After your program has been downloaded the editor window displays the addresses for the current source file S W Breakpoints Display the PC location breakpoints and bookmark Setting PC breakpoint by double click e The Source field includes codes highlighting the syntax Options Right clicking within the Source field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Build File lt File Name gt C Builds the selected files Open lt File Name gt Opens a file shown in the editor window Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Paste Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor
52. Current system option is useful if you have manually executed a script and want to check the current test image data with some you saved previously 4 Click OK 5 The results will be loaded into the test browser It is possible to compare test image file separately to test execution This allows you to compare manually the current system or two test image files at a later date to when the tests were actually executed You can also compare test image file from the workspace window pop up menu 16 8 Running tests This allows you to select tests and automate their execution To run tests 1 Select Test gt Run Tests The Run Tests dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 315 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility k Run Tests Test Suite Demo ki E4 Test cases Ok Tes Demo Demonstration Cancel Hun Mowe Wn LL Mowe down Action after test execution Compare sistem against saved test image file M Automatically save test results Test timeoutja E Stop at first failure 2 All tests currently defined in the High performance Embedded Workshop test system are listed in the Test cases list 3 Clicking the check box selects the test for execution in this test run 4 Itis also possible to modify the order a test is executed in by selecting the test and clicking the Move up and Move down buttons 5 When one o
53. D Erne O e E E E E E AE E EEA A AE 94 3r bang IN toolchain Versio scoissiarnisnir nn a E SSE ATi 95 3 8 Generatie a makefile eo serrarzasncercemrueatieanniorive toute siuiaioeneapndine Er aaRS EEEN E EER EENAA EEE NANE NAE EEEE NERENN ENA 95 3 9 Using a makefile inside the High performance Embedded Workshop system ccccccccccceeeesssesssseesseeeeeeeeeees 98 3 10 Customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop linkage order ccccccccecceeececeeeeeeaeesesseeeeeeeeeees 100 e EO e a e cuevecaegacescanetavectsoewtoucasetareste penton E E E 104 4 1 EES 9M TOW A E E E E eters teraterecercdersnesese 104 4 2 Working with multiple files ec ccccccccccccccecccccceaseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaaaseesssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 105 4 3 Sia ALC Tle Ope FA OIG oscats ices sctanarencdsoeh cacsenunsteasaenanadeandaaetsqnactasestiadas tan sanleandetonnoek naasengagaeaaiapa seeds aedesehecodunanmteasnenanaes 106 4 3 1 SS AS yy TA areca tate pects caches aaa acces E gasie diene sds doce pape penn dnd ee anaes Sonos EET 106 4 3 2 JE NN TN aps act soe EATE AE AE E E E E E ETT 106 4 3 3 a A MIC a E E E E E E E E E 107 4 3 4 PS A Ae BINS a E AE AT A E EA E E E A 108 4 3 5 CO T a A A E E E E 109 4 3 6 Pop up menu to close the WiINdOW cccccccccccccseceessesesseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaaessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 110 4 4 Searching and navigating through files ccccccccc
54. Download automatically on target connection 2 The Offset field specifies the memory address offset the module will be loaded at It defaults to O After the module has been added the offset value is shown on the right of the module name in the Debug gt Build submenu the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and the File gt Recently Downloaded Modules submenu 3 The File format drop down list box contains a list of supported object format The file format of the download module is selected here So this does not have to match the debug format on the Debug Settings dialog box However the Stack Trace window will be supported for instance depending on the format specified in the Debug format field 4 The Filename field can be specified with placeholders or as an absolute setting Itis recommended to use placeholders 5 The Access size field specifies the access size when the memory is accessed If the memory needs to be accessed by a specific access size specify the access size by using this option 6 The Download debug information only checkbox will download the debug information only without downloading the code 7 The Perform memory verify during download checkbox can be used to do additional checks when downloading the module to ensure it was correctly downloaded to the target device 8 The Download automatically on target connection checkbox can be used to automatically download the modu
55. During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located Components list Select a component and click the Register button to register an individual component or click the Register All button to register all located components 6 Click the Close button to exit the dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 134 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration Search Disk for Components ki Ei Select the directory im which to begin the search G tart C Program Files Renesas Hew Browse M Include subfolders Close Located components Version HAF Location Register Hew angetoerver C Program FilessAenesassHew Syst FdT argetServer 1 00 00 C Program Files RenesassHewSust Register All Generic TCL Too 1 03 03 C Program Files Renesas HewsSyet Call Walker 1 07 00 C Program Files Henesas Hew T ool HeS Hee S00 Sta 6 2 1 0 C AProgram Files Renesas Hew Tool H Seres Libraria 1 03 00 C Program Files HenesassHew Tool Map vieny 1 07 00 C Program Files RenesassHewsT ool Renesas M320 8 47 07 C Program Files Renesas Hew T ool Renesas MTIBC 5 44 00 CNProgram Files Renesas Hew T ool SuperH RISC en 9 1 1 0 CNProgram Files Renesas HewsT ool 4 ii ER j Search status 99 files found To register a single component 1 C
56. Embedded Workshop management information folder under the application data folder for each user profile By default the file Default hdc is created Note however that High performance Embedded Workshop is not capable of recording all operations in the High performance Embedded Workshop system corresponding to the High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands For the operations that can be recorded a macro record icon is shown in the Macro Recording column of the menu list This indicates that this operation can be recorded into a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file Notes 1 Changing a project session or configuration 2 Compilation and build 3 Downloading a module changing a memory value or register value setting deleting a software breakpoint and running a program The macro recording support facility is available in the Tools menu and on the Macros toolbar Macros toolbar Macros EF gt wo If the Macros toolbar is hidden select Setup gt Customize to open the Customize dialog box Select the Macros checkbox on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box Tools Menu Macros Toolbar Function Macros Opens the Macro dialog box This dialog box has the following features and lists the macro names recorded in each of the selected High performance Embedded Workshop macro files Creating a new blank macro file Importing an existing macro file Starting a macro record operation St
57. Embedded Workshop when you add a project you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a file above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the High performance Embedded Workshop workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the High performance Embedded Workshop will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of High performance Embedded Workshop this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original file path The older version of High performance Embedded Workshop could only relocate the projects which were in a sub directory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop To add the project to the workspace using a relative path 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click on the selected project to invoke a pop up menu 3 Select Properties 4 Click the Project file specified as a relative path in the HWS file checkbox to switch the relative file path feature 5 Click OK Project file specified as a relative path in the HWS file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 77 of 523 Jul 01 2010 REN
58. Exit codes If there are any syntax errors in the make file being executed or if any process executed whilst running the make file returns an invalid error code then hmake will exit with code 1 Otherwise hmake will exit with code O See below for file syntax and how to specify exit code conditions Parameters The following table shows the available parameters and their function Parameter Function A Execute all commands regardless of input output file status Equivalent to a Build All N Use status of input output files to calculate wnat commands need to be executed as normal and then display the commands but do not execute them Displays help info 13 2 File syntax There are four basic types of statement used in a hmake file the variable declaration the description block the comment and the message command These can be combined in any order to produce a hmake file but a variable must be declared in a variable declaration before it is used in a description block or other variable declaration The first all statement used in nmake files is not required in a hmake file Commands are executed in order as they appear in the make file Note the character is used to show were a tab character must be used in order to keep the make file syntactically correct REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 519 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 HMAKE User Guide Variable declarations A v
59. Go To Cursor Q Commences to execute the user program starting from the current PC address The program will continue to run until the PC reaches the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor or another break condition is satisfied Display PC Displays the disassembled codes at the PC location Set PC Here D Changes the value of the PC to the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor Edit Modifies the instruction at that address Find in Range Searches the range for the specified text string Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Define Column Format Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the column header Save Disassembly Text Saves the specific range Print Prints the specific range Toggle Breakpoint G Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint Enables or disables the current software breakpoint 17 2 2 6 Refreshing the disassembly view Even if some external operation changes the memory contents shown in the Disassembly view the High performance Embedded Workshop cannot detect the change For example if you use the external flash utility to program the range of memory being displayed the Disassembly view will not be reflected Right click on the Disassembly filed in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Refresh This acquires the latest
60. In the third configuration MyOptimized each file is being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default Tuty Deb ug uy Optimized Corfiquratiori Conf quratiori Conf guration Debug OH Debug OH Debug OHF aa Dptirmize OIF Optimize GNF Optimize OH Liat File YES Liat File HO Liat File HO Debug OH Debug OHF Liat File TES Liat File HO Liat File HO CG Source Files Fase mbler Source Files hte Proje ct Defaut Cht Froe ctt Debug Cute Proje cth Op trni zed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 58 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 7 1 Selecting a build configuration To select the current configuration 1 Select Build gt Build Configurations The Build Configurations dialog box opens 2 Select the build configuration that you want to use from the Current Configuration drop down list 3 Click the OK button You can also select a different build configuration by selecting it from the Current Configuration drop down list on the Standard toolbar 2 7 2 Adding anew build configuration To add a new build configuration 1 Select Build gt Build Configurations The Build Configurations dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog box
61. Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 3 Click the Add button The Add Tool dialog box opens 4 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field 5 Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field 6 Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field 7 Enter the initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial directory field 8 Click the OK button to add the menu option to the Tools menu Add Tool Ei Name Ok Notepad Cancel Command CAWINNT4NOTEPAD EXE p Browse Arguments SFULLFILE P Initial directory po Brose New menu options are added to the bottom of the list i e bottom of the Tools menu To modify a menu option 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Menu tab 3 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button 4 Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog box and then click the OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 145 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment Modify Tool ea Cancel Notepad Command CAWINNT4NOTEPAD EXE p Browse Arguments siFu LLFILE Initial directory CO To remove a menu option 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog
62. Locals SimSessian SH 4 ae 0AF Watch SimSessinSH 4 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 291 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 2 Clicking the Check All button selects all checkboxes while clicking the Uncheck All button deselects all checkboxes 3 Click the Import button to open the Import the Test Image File dialog box Browse to the HIF file location The settings of an existing test image file are imported 4 Each component is listed in the dialog box Check the checkbox next to the component name to save data for that component Test Group Oe cru IO SimSessionSH 4 5 Testltem Session 5 Select the component in the dialog and then click the Settings button A dialog box will be displayed that is dependent on the selected component This will allow you to customize the data that is saved to the file For details see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files 6 Clicking OK will dismiss the dialog and store the changes that you have set up 7 The Save Test Image File dialog box opens 8 Save the data into the High performance Embedded Workshop test image file selected in the Add New Test dialog box or a new High performance Embedded Workshop test image file Only test image data of the selected test items with tick marks in checkboxes will be saved into the file You can also edit a test image file from the
63. Logging Starts or stops output to log file Browse Sy Enters a full path to the file Placeholder Configuration Configuration Directory Pastes the CONFIGDIR placeholder directory Configuration Pastes the CONFIGNAME placeholder name Project directory Pastes the PROJDIR placeholder Project name Pastes the PROJECTNAME placeholder Workspace Pastes the WORKSPDIR placeholder directory Workspace name Pastes the WORKSPNAME placeholder HEW Installation Pastes the HEWDIR placeholder directory Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Copy a 5 Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Cut ab Removes the selected text block and copy them onto the Windows clipboard Paste A Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Clear Window of Clears the contents of the Command Line window Undo ee Undoes the last operation H Once an opening bracket or is input and the nesting follows this button is visible This button selection is impossible Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 253 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line e Debugger tab o Upper pane contents of the batch file Right cl
64. OEO ANE 172 8 6 Pee ae e TO OE a E E E E T E E E E A 173 8 7 Specifying file locations example ccccccccccccecccccceeeeeeeaeesseeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeausaeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeceaaaaassssseeeseeeeeees 175 8 8 PCC hy MNS environne Nieee o eaea a E a OaE 176 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System ccc cccccssssssssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaaaeseeessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaesaaaessesess 176 8 10 Specifying a user name and password cccccsssesseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeassaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeaensees 177 8 11 Usage example of the Custom Version Control System cccccssssseessseeecceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeseeeees 178 8 11 1 Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with RCS cccccccccccccccceeaesssesssseseeeeeeeeeeees 178 8 11 2 Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with CVS ccccsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeenees 185 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System ni ccacsnesaretass iedscieoveasaenetedieiecraionedssedieinowaasrensteleredys 194 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace sseeeeeeeesssssssssssesseterrrressssssssssssssessettrrrressssssssssseeetrereeessssssssesees 194 92 NViSilal SOUCCES ale COMMMANGS eorsiriarri rira aE E NEA EEA EE EEEE TEE RE 197 9 2 1 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe cccccccccccsssssssssssssssssseecccccceeecsssaaeeessssseeeeeecccecesesssaaaagassgssssseeeee
65. Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar 17 Debugging Facility The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Edit Value a Launches a dialog box to modify the selected variable s value Radix Hexadecimal 1b Displays in hexadecimal Decimal 10 Displays in decimal Octal D Displays in octal Binary 2 Displays in binary Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 2 Editing the value of a local variable You can change the value of a local variable in the Locals window To edit the value of a local variable Select either of the following ways In place edit in the Value column Locals se mE Name Type el Watch Item l long 107 oe H 00000000 7FO00004 long Open the Edit Value dialog box in one of the following ways o Double click within the Value column o Right click on the line of a variable and select Edit Value from the pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 464 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Edit Value si Expression 0 Current Value H OOO000
66. Page 440 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 18 1 6 Loading labels from a file A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the High performance Embedded Workshop s current symbol table Choose Load from the pop up menu to open the load symbols dialog box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows Open file dialog box select the file and click Open to start loading 99 The standard file extension for symbol files is sym 17 18 1 7 Saving labels into a file Choose Save As from the pop up menu to open the save symbols dialog box The save symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the High performance Embedded Workshop s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files 66 99 is sym See Reference 7 Symbol File Format for symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the pop up menu 17 18 1 8 Searching for a label Choose Find from the pop up menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label ki Address Cancel M Match whole word only Match case 1 Enter the label name that you wish to find into the Name field or select a label name that you have searched before from the drop down li
67. R H OOOQOQOOO0 RR aie ester wolatile long H 00000000 i FFFSO5 4 volatile long 4 A App Watcha A watch2 A Watcha A Watcha j e Open the Edit Value dialog box in one of the following ways o Double click within the Value column o Press the Enter key on the line of a variable o Right click on the line of a variable and select Edit Value from the pop up menu Edit alue ed Expression 0 Current value H OOO00000 Hew Value E Cancel Enter the new value in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value 6 Setting the scope of variables The Watch window has the Scope column that shows the scope for registered variables The scope for sub items is the same as that for their root item and is not shown in the window In the Scope column you can select the scope for each of the variables that have been registered Even when there are two or more variables with the same name scope can be separately specified to distinguish them REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 455 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility The available types of scope are listed below Scope Current Scope Global File scope name Load module name To set scope of a variable Select either of the following ways Description This scope covers all variables that can be watched from the address indicated by the program counter Th
68. RCS e Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with CVS 8 11 1 Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with RCS In this example the High performance Embedded Workshop is to be connected with RCS e RCS environment The following types of version control system can be used o GNURCS o GNU diff This procedure assumes that the version control system is located at C RCS REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 178 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System e Workspace Create a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace in the following folder C WorkSpace rcs_sample Then create a folder for RCS C WorkSpace rcs_sample rcs_sample RCS The following pages describe the procedures to create a workspace make settings for version control check in compare check out and view logs Step 1 Create a workspace Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Check in Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Compare Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Step 7 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 8 11 1 1 Step 1 Create a workspace 1 Select File gt New Workspace to open the New Project Workspace dialog box 2 Create a workspace with the following conditions e Workspace Name rcs_sample e Project Name rcs_sample e Directory
69. Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables respectively 9 Select the Output Syntax tab and define the error warning and information for the custom phase Messages that include filenames can only be handled as syntax Thus all syntax defined on the Output Syntax page should include filenames Always use a placeholder to specify a filename REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 85 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Output Spntas Line formats Error FULLFILE LIME JIE Wearing FULLFILE LINE N i When the lines showing error messages in the Build tab of the output window match the definition of Output Syntax you can find icons on the left to the error messages and view the source code in the editor If the Renesas SuperH C C compiler is used for example the following error message may be output to the Build tab of the output window C Workspace SH SH resetprg c 70 C2225 E Undeclared name a To define this error type the following syntax FULLFILE LINE E The correspondence between an error message and its syntax is as shown below Error Message Example Output Syntax Example Description C Workspace SH SH resetprg c FULLFILE Placeholder of the file name with its full path 70 LINE Placeholder of the line number enclosed with parentheses C2225 z Wild card for and error message number E
70. Renesas SH Project Generator 4 00 00 9 Project Generators Custom Sia Version Control System ustom WCS M Show all components When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The Properties dialog box will be invoked The High performance Embedded Workshop also has a feature that outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information about the entire High performance Embedded Workshop system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the High performance Embedded Workshop To output tool information 1 Select Tools gt Administration The Tools Administration dialog box opens 2 Click the Tool information button A Save tool information file dialog box is displayed 3 Choose the location of the output file and click the OK button 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the High performance Embedded Workshop If any of the components have problems these can be seen in the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 138 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop
71. Reset Uperations executed on any debugger wil Operations executed on the master debugger f All debuggers synchronized C Master debugger wd Go B alzo be executed on all other debuggers will be executed on all other debuggers BreakHalk o E i Step Set by platform Connection O Download modules D Initialize i Update the views in all debuggers when platform memory is changed Synchronized debugging mode Parallel poste Sync 18 1 1 Managing configurations Current configuration Default jh New Import Save ag Delete The Current configuration drop list The drop list at the top of the Synchronized debug dialog will have an entry for each configuration file in the Sync directory In order to change the settings on the dialog to a previously saved configuration you should select the configuration in the drop list When you select a configuration the current settings will automatically be saved to the file of the previously selected configuration To create new configurations To create a new empty configuration use the following method 1 Click the New button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 467 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Enter Configuration Name Configuration name Cancel if 2 Enter a name for the configuration You can only enter characters which are valid in a file name You are limited
72. Selecting Zoom In from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal coordinate enlarged 17 5 6 Zoom out display Selecting Zoom Out from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal coordinate reduced 17 5 7 Resetting the zoom display Selecting Reset Zoom from the pop up menu displays the waveforms in its original size REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 409 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 5 8 Setting the zoom magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the pop up menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 17 5 9 Setting the horizontal scale In the Scale submenu of the pop up menu the size of the X coordinate can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 17 5 10 Non display of cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the pop up menu hides the cursor display 17 5 11 Displaying the sampling information When anywhere within the graph is clicked a cursor green vertical line appears The cursor can be moved by pressing the left or right arrow key Right click in the window to display a pop up menu Selecting Sample Information from the pop up menu displays the Sample Information dialog box If you double click the coordinate where you wish to view the sampling information the Sample Information dialog box appears Sample Information Data Size obit Channel Jo Mong oe ooe 7 Value Displays the sa
73. Sets this project as the current pop up menu option project REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 269 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Target Project file Download modules folder E Download module Notes Build lt File name gt pop up menu option 1 Download all module pop up menu option pop up menu option Download module pop up menu option Download module debug data only pop up menu option Unload module pop up menu option pop up menu option Operation 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Function Builds a file Loads all object program files Download A New Module Make setting in the dialog box opened Loads an object program file by clicking on the menu option 2 Double click on a download module Click on the menu option Unloads an object program file from memory Download A New Module Make setting in the dialog box opened Loads an object program file by clicking on the menu option 2 1 Available only when there is a toolchain installed 2 Only options Offset File format Filename Access size and Perform memory verify during download can be recorded Download debug information only and Download automatically on target connection are not recordable 15 5 1 2 Editor window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Display Mode Source mode Mixed disassembly mod
74. Show files in subfolders M Show source files only Create folder structure in project 1 In the dialog box the files are initially sorted by the file type in alphabetical order If you click a column header of file names or types the files will be sorted by the file name or type 2 Youcan select multiple files by clicking If you then click on one of the checkboxes for the selected files or press the Space key checkboxes for all of the selected files will be switched ON or OFF depending on the previous state 3 If the Show files in subfolders checkbox is selected the dialog box also shows the files within subfolders under the folder that was dropped Otherwise the dialog box only shows the files within the folder that was dropped By default this checkbox is selected 4 If the Show source files only checkbox is selected the dialog box only shows the files having the extension specified for the source files in this project e g C source files Otherwise the dialog box shows all files If the High performance Embedded Workshop cannot recognize the file type Unknown type will be shown in the File Type column By default this checkbox is selected 5 If the Create folder structure in project checkbox is selected files are added to the tree where the folder was dropped For example when a folder data containing some files 1s dropped onto the tree the files are added into a user folder data which is newly cr
75. Standard toolbar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 356 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 6 2 Adding a session You can now create a session with a target attached and setup ready for use This session can be given a name and the target chosen To create a new session with a target attached and setup 1 Select File gt New Session The New Session dialog box opens Hew Session Session name pat o ooo Create a new session ore 5H Simulator Cancel E Fan gl i x Using internal core Single Core Target z Session generator to use Renesas SH Project Generator 2 Enter the name of a new session into the Session name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space 3 Select the target you wish to use in the Create a new session on list 4 Select the core in the Using internal core list This item is only available when a synchronized debugging facility has been used 5 Select the generator in the Session generator to use list This should default to the correct selection However sometimes there may be multiple generators that support the same target 6 Click the OK button This should launch the generation process the process depends on the generator that was selected At this point an additional dialog box may be disp
76. Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Watch window acquired saved into test image files with this setting Check boxes for all symbols are blank by default Test result details Failed at symbol Name of the unmatched symbol Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at symbol a 6 Src long H 00002704 70000018 Dest long H 00000daa 70000018 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens The scope for all watch items to be tested must be Current Scope If any other scope has been selected the items are not shown in the Symbols list Edit Test Watch ki Watch Sheet ham 5 Sembol Cancel afb Curent Setting Ignore address REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 301 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 1 The Watch Sheet drop down list contains Watch1 Watch2 Watch3 and Watch4 Symbols shown in the Symbols list depend on the selection made in the Watch Sheet drop down list 2 Each of the symbols in the Symbols list has a check box By default the check boxes are not selected Select a watch sheet and check the boxes for symbols as required The selected symbol is shown in Curre
77. The contents can be printed out Symbols Lists all symbol information or those for respective sections You can search for filter or sort this function is not supported by the evaluation version symbol information The source file for the address in the selected line can be opened in the editor window The contents can be printed out e Supported toolchains The toolchains included in the following compiler packages support the map function o C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family V 7 1 03 or later o C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family V 5 0 05 or later o C Compiler Package for M16C Series V 5 42 Release 00 or later o C Compiler Package for M32C Series V 5 41 Release 00 or later o C Compiler Package for R32C Series V 1 01 Release 00 or later o C C Compiler Package for RX Family V 1 00 Release OO or later e To view the information on sections and symbols To view the information on sections and symbols the following setting is required in advance 1 Select Build gt xxxxxx Standard Toolchain to open the build options dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 231 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 2 Select List for Category in the Link Library tab 3 Select the Generate list file checkbox This allows output of information on sections 4 Click the Enable all button This allows output of information on symbols 5 Select Build gt Build C C Assembl
78. Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button 8 2 Defining Version Control commands Version control commands are listed in the Define Commands dialog box You can define as many commands as you want to and specify the order in which they execute Existing commands can be modified or removed To define a new version control command 1 Click the Add button on the Define Commands dialog box The Add Command dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 170 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Add Command ea Command Version control executable lv Wee SWINK Vos ese Browse Cancel Arguments History SCV DIRG CFILENAME YtUSERNAME P gt Initial directory FILEDIF gt Browse Executable retum code Return code of executable ig not meaningful Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To E 2 Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 4 Enter into Initial directory the directory from which you would like to run the exe
79. Unloads the object program 1 Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 2 Support for this function depends on the debugger 1 7 Setup Menu Options Menu Menu Option Setup Customize Options Format Views Radix Hex Decimal Oct Shortcut Key Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Customizes the High performance Embedded Workshop application Sets option of the High performance Embedded Workshop application Configures fonts colors keywords and so on for the window Sets radix to decimal Sets radix to binary Sets radix to hexadecimal Sets radix to octal Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS
80. Use custom linkage order check box 3 The Object order list box allows you to specify the linkage order of modules Each module has a different icon depending on where it originated from This is shown below Note While a toolchain included in the compiler packages listed below is in use the Object order list box shows library files along with object files C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family C C Compiler Package for RX Family However only object files matter to the linkage order The order of library files is only used in searching for undefined symbols Linkage Order I Use custom linkage order as Object order a Cancel main obj ees Wau Lee i Intprg aby fa runtime library lib Move up Intermediate file File in project projectname lib User library ge user_edit_options lib Move down from options Move to bottom Import Export Curent configuration Debug Copy to ve REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 100 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features You can change the linkage order in the following ways e To move a single or consecutive modules Move to top Moves the selected module s to the top Move up Switches the selected module s and the previous module Move down Switches the selected module s and the next module
81. Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Also set up the following tree commands in the same way Command Option Name Characters to be Input Check out Version control executable C RCS CO EXE Argument f FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Diff Version control executable C RCS RCSDIFF EXE Argument FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Log Version control executable C RCS RLOG EXE Argument FILENAME Initial directory PROJDIR Preparation for version control is now completed 8 11 1 4 Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Check in 1 Enter a keyword at line 12 in the file rcs_sample c so that you will be able to see the changes made in the file Id 2 Select the file rcs_sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and then select Tools gt Version Control gt Check in 3 The MS DOS command prompt window opens 4 Enter a comment for check in after the prompt gt gt and press Enter 5 Enter one period and press Enter rcs_sample c v lt rcs_sample c enter description terminated with single or end of file NOTE This is NOT the log message gt gt initial revision 1 1 done C RCS gt 6 Enter exit and press Enter This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 7 A High performance Embedded Workshop confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes The keyword now includes the file name revision number date and user name REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 P
82. Workspace directory and below only Use static sub command files M Scan dependencies whilst building make file 4 Select a makefile type in Generate makefile for e the current configuration in the currently active project e all configurations in the currently active project e all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace 5 Enter the file name in the MakeFile name edit box To insert a placeholder place the cursor at the position where you wish to insert the placeholder click the placeholder button E and select Placeholder from the pop up menu The default makefile names are as follows e When the current configuration in the currently active project is selected PROJECTNAME _ CONFIGNAME mak e When all configurations in the currently active project is selected PROJECTNAME mak e When all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace is selected WORKSPNAME mak 6 Select a makefile format in the Makefile format drop down list High performance Embedded Workshop is capable of generating GNUMake HMake and NMake compatible files 7 Inthe Relative paths drop down list select how directories within the makefile should be expressed Workspace directory and below only is the default option See the table below for details Option Workspace Directory and below Outside the Workspace Directory None Absolute path Absolute path Workspace directory and below only Relative
83. a component select it from the Registered Components list on the Tools Administration dialog box and click the Properties button The Properties dialog box opens The General tab displays the name version and location of the selected component SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 9 2 0 0 Properties FEI aaa Select the Information tab to view any information about the component This may include copyright information enhancements and so on SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 9 2 0 0 Properties EE If there is an issue with the component and it is working incorrectly additional information is displayed here Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings This tab is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 136 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 9 2 0 0 Properties Ei EI Environment varables PATH Program Files Aenesas Hew T ools Henesas oh SHO INC C Program Files RenesassHew 7 ools Renesas s SHC_LIB C Program Files enesas Hew Tools enesas45 Modif SHC_TMP C ADOCUME TSU ser LOCALS 1T emp E Hemave Cancel Add To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button The Environment Variable dialog opens 2 Enter the variable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the v
84. a new blank test suite so you can begin adding and running tests Suite Open Test Suite Opens an existing test suite Edit Test Suite Edits the current test suite Allows you to add and remove tests to the test Suite Close Test Suite Closes the current test suite Create New Test Setups and customizes the test image data saved to the test image file Image File HIF Compare Test Compares test image file allows you to compare a test image file with the Image File current High performance Embedded Workshop system or with another test image file already on your disk The results are then displayed in the test browser REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 493 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Function Key Button Run Tests Test Result Browser 1 10 Window Menu Options 1 Main Menus Runs tests allows you to run multiple tests that you have defined in the test suite and see the results of the comparisons in the test browser There are various options to configure the test run execution Displays the test results for one or more test executions It shows the pass and fails results and the detailed reason why the test failed Menu Menu Option Shortcut Key Toolbar Button Function Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons Close All Virtual Desktop desktop Manager Default 1 4 Arranges all open
85. accepted by the High performance Embedded Workshop for a given phase e g your assembler source files are asm but the High performance Embedded Workshop only recognizes src then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions The File Extensions dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog box opens Add File Extension File extensor k asm Cancel File group f Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file C Extension belongs to a new group o pesaclated applicata Pen erous vaiti Editor bi Modis Remove tl 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumeric and an underscore as characters of a file extension string The drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select the group to which you would like to add this new extension 5 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 57 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics
86. ae stdio h a stdlib h Bs C source file sn CAW orkspacesD ebug nlys D ebug nly S ourceWdbsct c TE Cw orkspaceSDebugOnly D ebuglnlyS ounce ysbrk c C source file z Z CWorkepace D ebugllnly4D ebuglnlyS ourceresetprg cpp z CAworkspacetDebug rnyS D ebug nly S ource sort cpp If you wish to relocate files in the download module to a different directory this is possible via pop up menu 3 Relocating files to a different directory If you wish to relocate the whole module 1 e want to relocate all files in the module to a different directory this is possible via the download module pop up menu To relocate all files in the module to a different directory 1 Right click on a download module in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select the Relocate Module menu option Selecting this will bring up a standard Windows directory open dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 353 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Please select new location of module files k x Look ir E Debug_E mulator de i H Open Cancel EF 2 3 Select a directory and then click the Open button Any files that could not be found in this directory will invoke the Locate Files dialog box allowing you to search for the unlocated files You can also relocate files via the pop up menu option shown for files To relocate a file to a different directory
87. and disassembly columns Columns Column name Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the column header Instant Watch Launches the Instant Watch dialog box with the name extracted from the view at the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Add Watch Adds the selected variable to the Watch window Go To Cursor 5 Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Set PC Here D Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor not mouse cursor Display PC Opens the source file or disassembly at the address of the PC View Disassembly Opens a Disassembly window at the address mating the current source line Properties Displays file properties Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 2 1 2 Viewing assembly language code The Disassembly mode shows at the same address of the cursor line as the Source mode You can view assembly language codes only when the debugger is connected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 366 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Window configuration Options w DemoSH4 c Disassembly OR x Whew med mode View Source Ble View Disassembly S Column oft ASM Disassembly
88. any project files produce errors 2 8 3 Building multiple projects The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to build multiple projects and configurations at once To build multiple projects 1 Select Build gt Build Multiple The Build Multiple dialog box opens 2 The Build Multiple dialog box gives you the choice of which projects and configurations to build Select the check boxes next to the projects and configurations that you want to build For example in figure below if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 61 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Build Multiple Project configurations Build Build All Jhewhest Debug Jhewtest Release Clean Jhemwhests Debug Jhewhest3 Release Check All Jhewtest4 Debug Uncheck All hewhest4d Rlelease UnAchec Cancel t EEk 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the Build button and the High performance Embedded Workshop will build the selected projects and configurations 4 If you want to build all of the projects click the Build All button This will automatically select all projects and configurations and build them all 5 If you also wish to delete intermediate and output files of the selected pr
89. are missing in the left pane and the right pane includes a section group whose address value is smaller than the smallest address among the missing sections all of these sections will be added to the last in the section group REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 239 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map e If some sections are missing in the left pane and none of the addresses of section groups listed in the right pane is smaller than the smallest address among the missing sections all of these sections will be added as a section group at the smallest address among the missing sections Note If an overlay section is missing this will be added as a normal section 13 1 7 Editing a selected item In the edit mode you can also modify the address value and the name of a section group subsection group overlay group or section To modify the selected item 1 Select either of the following operations e Right click on an item in the left pane to open a pop up menu Select Edit Selected Item OR e Double click to modify a value 2 The Edit Selected Item dialog box appears 3 Enter a string or integer value into an edit field Edit Selected Item Section Start Address i Section Ganon Hame RS THandler Cancel 5 we e I x 13 1 8 Setting the primary section In the edit mode you can set a selected overlay group as the primary section To set the primary section
90. are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1
91. as appropriate No buffering of output text will take place A message command has the following syntax IMESSAGE lt text to output gt A new line character is assumed to come after the last character in lt text to output gt Any white space between IMESSAGE and lt text to output gt will be ignored There follows an example of a valid message command IMESSAGE Executing C Compiler REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 523 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 User s Manual Publication Date Jul01 2010 Rev 1 00 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation l Microcomputer Tool Development Department 1 EEC SY Renesas Solutions Corp CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian Dist
92. as the makefile format with the makefile generating function To execute a makefile HMake 1 Open a DOS Command Prompt window and move to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree of portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options that include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 97 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 9 Using a makefile inside the High performance Embedded Workshop system The High performance Embedded Workshop also allows you to configure the internal build to use a particular make tool hmake nmake or gmake as well as the internal High performance Embedded Workshop system The build procedures using makefiles are listed below nmake and gmake tools must be prepared by the user while hmake is installed in the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory To set up the internal makefile execution 1 Create a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace 2 If you want to use a High
93. been opened in High performance Embedded Workshop V 2 x onwards cannot be opened in High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 x In High performance Embedded Workshop V 2 x onwards a new project for the old version cannot be created When a project for the old version in High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 x is created use High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 x Select HEW Registration File Look ir E Bb Oa de to ci E sh_60a0 hr File name sh_60a0 hit Files of type HE W Registration Files hrf Cancel 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 518 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 1 Command line The following section describes the command line that should be used to execute the hmake program on a file using none or more of the available options Basic structure The command line must be of the following syntax hmake lt make file you wish to execute gt lt parameter list gt If a file is specified without an extension then mak will be appended to it The parameter list may include none or more of the parameters listed in the following section The parameters list may appear before the make file name if you wish Each parameter must be separated by at least one white space character Parameters are not case sensitive If no parameters are given and no file is given then help information will be displayed
94. between files For example a C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the High performance Embedded Workshop provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the Projects tab of the Workspace window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder although this can be modified by configuring the projects tab at Workspace 0 RS Demo B Assembly source file 3 z J lowlyl src See C source file D 6 dbsct c Demo c s E intprg c n E lowste c 6 resetprg c 6 sbrk c ee A vectthl c a sy Dependencies l oe lowerc h a sbrk h stacksct h Ey vecth Note Some include files may include other files Up to 31 nesting levels of dependent files are displayed in the Dependencies folder REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 69 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics File dependencies in a project are automatically updated at the following operation timings Operation Timing Specific Operation Open workspace Select option in the Welcome dialog box Select File gt New Workspace Select File gt Open Workspace Add a project to workspace
95. box appears asking if you wish to save the file High performance Embedded Workshop AN Save changes to CAWorkspacesDemoSH4 DemoSH4 sbrk c e Clicking No closes the file without saving e Clicking Cancel returns to the editor window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 109 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor e Clicking Yes closes the file by overwriting the contents If the file has the read only attribute a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name High performance Embedded Workshop A Lorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH44sbrk c This file i read only Do vou want to save it as another flename Ho Overvarite Cancel e Clicking Yes opens the Save file dialog box Change the file name before saving e Clicking No closes the file without saving e Clicking Overwrite closes the file by overwriting the contents e Clicking Cancel returns to the editor window 4 3 6 Pop up menu to close the window BEE 14 include typedefi 15 16 pragma section I 1 Static const Struc 16 _UBYTE rom 3 19 _UBYTE rom E 20 _UBYTE ram 3 al t DTBL 4 _ Cc cle dbsche K ae Close In the High performance Embedded Workshop editor window it is possible to save and close editor file window via the related tab s pop up menu Right clicking on the tab of the Editor window opens a pop up menu containing available options
96. box opens 2 Select the Menu tab 3 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button When you have one or more tools added the System Tools toolbar will be available in High performance Embedded Workshop This will have one toolbar button for each tool Clicking on a tools button will launch the tool exactly as if it had been selected from the Tools menu For tools that have EXE commands the hutton s image will be the same as the Windows icon for the EXE If no such image is available the default image E will be used 6 3 Using custom placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current High performance Embedded Workshop project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the High performance Embedded Workshop system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the High performance Embedded Workshop The other method of defining the pla
97. byte string of up to 256 bytes or less 512 characters or less can be searched for Specify the data for each byte with two characters Search conditions other than pattern search are data match mismatch and search direction Note that only data match and forward direction can be selected with pattern search If you did not drag the address range to be found you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range If the data is found the data which has been found is highlighted in the Memory window If Search Next is selected from the pop up menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 388 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 3 10 Changing the display address Use the scroll bar Page Up Page Down key and Up Down key to change the display position To change the display address directly follow the procedure below 1 In place edit in the Address column et poooz poogso 2 To change the display address open the Display Address dialog box by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the Address column you want to change OR e Choose Address from the pop up menu Display Address kl x Address ooooo000 al mea Spec
98. can be displayed as an image in the Image window Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 4 1 Opening the Image window Choose View gt Graphic gt Image or click the Image toolbar button i to open the Image Properties dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 397 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Image Properties et EDGE tal lies i mage Wata SET tell Seene anane Eau Se Hastian A easa Tt postion Rr e el eee rece Niet pared Ne MGA eat seeli Lit sei Pte Ute ain bs ral Elta rab The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image window The following items are to be specified Color Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Information Mode Specifies the format MONOCHROME Black and white RGB R red G green and B blue BGR B blue G green and R red YCbCr Y luminance Cb color difference for blue and Cr color difference for red Bit Pixel Specifies bits pixel according to the selected mode valid when RGB or BGR is selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 398 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Buffer Information REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Sampling Format Data Address Palette Address Enable Redraw Continuously Image Data 17 Debugging Facility S
99. comparison with two files on your local drive L Select one of the following operations Select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click on the selected file to open a pop up menu Select Show Differences OR Click the Compare Files toolbar button Fil OR Select View gt Differences Right click within the window to open a pop up menu Select Compare The Compare Files dialog box opens Compare Files Reference file Jorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c Browse r ance f Compare with file on drive Target file Gdyvanced Browse E Gormpare with version contral Ensure the Compare with file on drive radio button is enabled Enter the name of a file to be compared to in Reference file If you have opened the Compare Files dialog box via the workspace window at step 1 the file name is already entered in Reference file Select a previously used file from the drop down list box or click the Browse button to browse a file Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog box This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog box Compare Files Advanced Options Advanced gnore blanks Cancel 6 Click Compare REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 218 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 C
100. created workspace sampleCVS 7 Select Project gt Remove Files to open the Remove Project Files dialog box 8 Select the file you wish to control and click the Remove button 9 Click OK button 10 Select Project gt Add Files to open the Add files to project sampleCVS dialog box 11 Select the file you wish to control and click the Add button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 186 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 11 2 2 Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select Select ersion Control System Version control system Custom WCS i E Cancel 2 The Select Version Control System dialog box opens 3 Select Custom VCS 4 Click the OK button 8 11 2 3 Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure to open the Version Control Setup dialog box e Setting environment variables 1 Select the Projects tab 2 Click the Add button on Environment 3 The Environment dialog box appears 4 Enter CVSROOT in Variable and C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE in Value respectively REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 187 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Wersion Control Setup sampleCvS M leili ENE ve jakiei ENGKE 5 Click the OK button e S
101. csseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 W C OPa a E came nce oe en E ven tes E O 315 KS PU e a EE E AE EE E AE E AT OEA AAE AA 315 169 Usine the test DONS O niner aT ir E E E NEE 317 16 10 Configuring the Test tab of the Workspace WINdOW ssssseeececeeeceeceeeaaasesseesseeeecceeeeeeeeseeaaaaasaaaassseseseeeeeeess 318 16 11 Configuring the Test tab of the Output window cc ccsssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaasesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeesseaaeaessseseeeeseseeeeeess 319 eD DO 1S AGU o E sted qcaseatetvacdeainebeobosnanaseien 321 I7 Preparations for GE WU 1S oa ccassesctctsvcaracasecseesaavuieecsabobecdcahouwecadeqsetiaseeiweaubesoaiiesyetuesadawvds EENAA te anole i saai eaii 321 17 1 1 Compiline TOM CC DUS osacersicescrenshescverenendsonaneswvexticm sieneloetetesogoudievensieiantuesstensvonsyreusdetareivcextonsttepsnesevervaetiorenssed 321 172 Selene ade DUC SSE sosire E TEE E 321 17 1 3 Editing project CONMSUPAMON se65cciccasessssceasssnasadeegeesedcessosadsapansdeananddegdedednssadugdeapegaeanadaasadsendetedoededuesaacenanseanads 333 IA Lonni iede DUE eE A E EE EEE TAE EA 334 17 1 5 DP wnloadine Module sireci E E 341 a CUE S561 ONS ea E E EEE E E S E A EE E 356 DE NV EO T T e E E EE E EEE EET E AA 362 17 2 1 Opening the Editor WANG OW siscrairiara eisni a E ARTA 363 17 22 Opening the Disassembly Window eseeeseesssssssssssseseterresssssssssssssseeteerressssssssssssesererrerrereessssssssseeeeeeeeeo 371 17 2 3 Looking at the current PC PO
102. dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out and who did so 9 2 2 Removing files from Visual SourceSafe If you wish to take files out of Visual SourceSafe the files must be removed To remove files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files that you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Remove from VCS toolbar button Ea OR e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Remove from VCS OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Remove from VCS Remove from Wilts iss ok OK Workspace Name hws CAWorksp a Project_Name hwup CAWorkep Cancel iw Project Name c cAworkep Wltypedetine h CAwworkep i idbsctc orl n Tm ILLI I p 3 The Remove from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to remove and click the OK button 9 2 3 Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it
103. dialog box opens 3 Select the Network tab 4 Click the Access rights button The User access rights dialog is displayed 5 Select the user you wish to remove in the users list 6 Press the Remove button 7 Then click OK to save the access rights changes REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 215 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities User access rights Ei Ed User access rights Add Remove C Administrator C Full read write access C Read write file access only f Read only access 10 5 Changing your password To change your password 1 Log into the High performance Embedded Workshop network database you are changing your password for Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Network tab 3 Click the Password button 4 Enter your new password and confirm it in the second edit box 5 Click OK 6 Then click OK to save the password change 10 6 Note on using the network facilities to share projects When you share a networked project for the first time the High performance Embedded Workshop automatically connects you to the correct network High performance Embedded Workshop service This is defined using machine name If the workspace cannot be found using the machine name then the dialog below appears Simply type or browse the location of the machine and click OK If you want to be the server machine t
104. directory and not selecting search a confirmation box will be shown as below Confirmation Request ki 1 The directory CWworkspace DebuglnlysDebugl nlysSource has been selected but not searched Would wou like to search this directory for the remaining tiles T Don t ask this question again REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 350 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility If you select Yes a search will be made and the Locate Files dialog box will remain open allowing you to stop the search if needed Selecting No will invoke the message box and close the Locate Files dialog box If the confirmation is ticked not to be shown again the default behavior will be No To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Show message when canceling for directory browse dialog checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 2 Showing a source tree Files retrieved from the download module will be shown in the workspace window The files will be shown under the download module Files will be grouped according to file type and shown under their relevant folder If no file type for that file exists they will be grouped under their extension folder When you double click on a file the external editor is launched with the file If you wish to open the fil
105. each session can be targeted at a different debugger This facility can allow you to have many different sessions each with different debugger options defined For example it is possible to have each session using the same target but with slight variations in the session options This can mean it is very easy for the user to switch session and modify such things as register values or target settings such as clock speed The figure below shows this principle The five sessions share the same target but the sessions can be slightly different with regard to the options defined This means that both sessions can share the same download module and avoid an unnecessary rebuild This is because sessions are not directly related to the build configuration data Defaultsession Defaults ession we Simsession System 1 Simsession System Oe Simsession System Os Sims essionsH 4 Each session s data is stored in a separate file to the High performance Embedded Workshop project You can then manipulate the data to share or modify as is required in the project 17 1 6 1 Selecting a session To select a session 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Select the session that you want to use from the Current session drop down list box 3 Click the OK button Detaulthess ion TETEE You can also select a different debug session by selecting it from the Current Session drop down list on the
106. edit box enter the current directory where the makefile is to be executed When this edit box is empty the initial directory will default to WORKSPDIR REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 98 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 10 Enter the options for building the makefile in the Makefile options edit box 11 Enter the options for cleaning the makefile in the Clean options edit box 12 Click on the OK button Once this system is setup the build button menu and keyboard shortcuts are linked to the makefile tool execution The clean all projects button menu and keyboard shortcut will also be linked to the makefile execution All output is directed to the Build tab of the output window as in the case of the normal build If you are using a build phase supported by High performance Embedded Workshop the line of an error message can be double clicked to jump to the source files The help link should also be supported Note when using the HMAKE exe system the Build All toolbar button 5 will pass a command to HMAKE to force a re build all operation To set up the makefile system environment By default the makefile will be executed in the default system environment the same environment used within High performance Embedded Workshop If this is not desirable the environment can be configured as described below 1 In the Build tab click the System button to the right o
107. file list file source file G header file C liet tile The File Extensions list is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions and on the right are the file groups associated with the extensions Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc Assembler source files T source files Library files REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 53 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog box allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window the appropriate application is launched with the file File Extensions Group Ipp C list file Text editor cpp C source file Cancel cpu GPU information file Add Word processor W doc Documents 2 exp Expanded assembly source file Remove hex Hex file Librarian ee X lib Library file Open with lbp Library information file 2 map Linkage map file fey Linkage symbol file z obj Object file ae d To associate an application with a file group No application 1 Select Project gt File Extensions The File Extensions dialog box opens
108. floating Complex point values Float Jl Displays imaginary numbers as single precision floating Imaginary point values Double dI Displays imaginary numbers as double precision floating Imaginary point values REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 382 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Macro Function Button Recording Fixed 16bit Fixed 16 Displays memory data as 16 bit fixed 32bit Fixed we Displays memory data as 32 bit fixed 24bit Accum Displays memory data as 24 bit accumulate 40bit Accum Displays memory data as 40 bit accumulate Layout Label Switches display or non display of Label area Register Switches display or non display of Register area Code Switches display or non display of Code area Column E Changes the number of digits displayed Switches display or non display of measurement result IENEI Coverage Enable 1 Save D Saves memory contents in a file Load Loads a memory area contents from a file Split Splits up the window display Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Note 1 Support for this function depends on the debugger 2 Available only when the debugger supports this function 17 3 2 Setting data at a desired address in the Memory window To set data at a desired address in the Memory window follow the procedure b
109. following error gt TCL TCL Disabled gt memory_display 300 10 Error Invalid command 14 1 Opening the Command Line window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button Ea to open the Command Line window If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons The High performance Embedded Workshop command and TCL commands can be input in this window For information about the available commands see Reference 3 Commands and the on line help The Command Line window has two tabs Console and Debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 250 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line Window configuration e Console tab This pane allows the user to input text based commands to control the target platform The results of command execution shown on this pane are in synchronization with the lower pane of the Debugger tab Command Line C 4 orkspace Command_hdc no log file E Toolbar iy ka Wo ea oe Inout gt Command commanda reset and the atep results of tep complete at ADQODOOOOE command execution gt Lei Console o The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt gt on the last line in the window o Pressing the CTRL UP ARROW or CTRL DOWN ARROW keys on the last line in the window displays the previously executed command line
110. functions in the alphabetical order 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Un check Group By Access This option is unchecked by default REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 226 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities To group the display of public private and protected member variables and functions together 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Check Group By Access This option is unchecked by default Note that Group By File and Group By Access cannot both be on at the same time Switching one on will switch the other one off Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection To view the Base or derived classes 1 Right click on class on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu option To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu option 3 Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format 4 Click Close to close this dialog once you have the information you require 12 3 Jump to a definition from the editor It is possible to select navigation items of defines C functions or C classes from the source codes shown in the editor window and
111. g zeh SIC Browse REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 147 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Customize dialog box This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names and changes are logged to this file Log I Generate build log Path stwORKs POIRIA ORESPNAME J tet Browse I Generate workspace log M Generate log for projects When the Generate workspace log check box is clicked any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same name as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the Generate log for projects check box is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file is updated when the workspace is saved 6 5 Configuring the help system The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the Editor window In other words if you select some text in the Editor window and
112. i e the phase that takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list 5 Click the OK button to create the new mapping Define File Mapping o Ib SOURCE phase Cancel SH Sesembler Destination phase OptLinker To modify a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be modified 2 Click the Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog box opens 3 Modify the options as necessary 4 Click the OK button to commit the changes To remove a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be removed 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the OK button to commit the changes REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 89 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 4 Setting custom build phase options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option in the Build menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be displayed depends on whether the custom phase selected was multiple or single according to the selection of phase type when it was created in the New Build Phase wizard HyPhase Options EES Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files meee Command C Tools MyT ool exe ae dbect c Options TEk FULLFILE ee B resetprg c E sbrk c E SH4demo c 1 Default Options eas File
113. in the Navigation tab 1s double clicked in the workspace window By default the external editor is selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 158 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment e Output window double click When an error or warning in the Build tab or an entry in the Find in Files 1 or Find in Files 2 tab is double clicked in the output window By default the external editor is selected e Drag and drop file into HEW main window When a file is dragged from the Windows Explorer and dropped into the High performance Embedded Workshop window note that however a drag and drop of a file onto the current project and user folder into the Projects tab of the workspace window only adds this file to the project and does not open the file By default the internal editor is selected 8 Click the OK button When the Use external editor checkbox is selected the following actions always select the external editor for use e Clicking the Edit Code button in the Breakpoints dialog box opened by selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoints e Selecting File gt Recent Files If you select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window and right click to display a pop up menu the Open lt file name gt in external editor menu option is available under the Open lt file name gt menu option Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e a
114. in three classes toolchain only debug only Debugger only xxxxxx and full project generator that configures both the debugger and toolchain aspect of the High performance Embedded Workshop 5 Click the OK button to create the new workspace and project This then launches the wizard you have selected to guide you through the creation process Note It is not possible to create a workspace if one already exists in the same directory 1 6 Opening a workspace To open a workspace 1 Select Browse to another project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt Open Workspace The Open Workspace dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the workspace file HWS file that you want to open REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 16 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 3 Click the Select button to open the workspace If the High performance Embedded Workshop is set up to display information when a workspace is opened the Workspace Properties dialog box will be displayed Otherwise the workspace will be opened Note that whether the Workspace Properties dialog box is shown depends on the setting of either the Show workspace information on workspace open check box in the Workspace Properties dialog box or the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog box The Options dialog box can
115. included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Print E Prints section tree view Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons e Symbol information of the linkage editor right pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Find th Finds a symbol Find Next kt Finds the next symbol that matches the search text Filter er Filters the symbol information View source Es Views the source code for the address in the selected line Print E Prints section list view 13 2 2 Printing out the map list You can also print out the map list in the left pane To print out the map list 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box opens From here you can choose your printer and page setup options REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 246 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 2 3 Finding symbols You can search for the linkage editor symbols To search for symbols 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Find The Find Sym
116. information of the data being displayed and updates the contents of the view 17 2 2 7 Disassembly lock refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly view so that it does not refresh This function is called the disassembly lock refresh Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Lock Refresh The Lock Refresh dialog box will be displayed Lock Refresh ki EJ Start Address ooon2o00 sag ance End Address 00002014 Check the Locked check box The controls should now enable REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 376 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Select the start and end address that should be locked and cached so that no updates are displayed Click OK The view refreshes to only show the locked area 17 2 2 8 Looking at a specific address When you are looking at your program in a Disassembly window you may want to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Right click on the Source field or the Disassembly field and select the Set Address option The Set Address dialog box will be displayed Set Address aix Cancel Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click the OK button or press the Enter key The Disassembly view updates to show the code at the new address When an
117. is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement e
118. is not currently in scope the High performance Embedded Workshop will add it to the Watch window but its value will be Not available now 3 Editing the name of a variable You can change the name of a variable Even if variables can be expanded e g structures or pointers however the names of their sub items are not changeable To edit the name of a variable Open the Edit Name dialog box in either of the following ways e Double click within the Name column e Right click on the line of a variable and select Edit Name from the pop up menu SRE OFS x Se Cee E R Watch Item 1 1 FFFSO5CO Iwolatile long i Current Scape Paean B 0 HL AAC A IO PRPS 1 ira larila longi CR Edit Name GE S 2 longi i ion Uk ioe E 3 variable BI Epee long F 4 Watch _Item_1 Cancel long R 5 2 cae R 6 H OOOUOOO00 FFFSOSDS volatile longi oe R 7 H a FFFSOSDC volatile longi aa R 8 H l FFFSOSEO volatile longi A 9 H OOOOOO00 FFFSOSE4S wolatile longi oe R Watch Item 2 0 H OOOO00000 i FFFSOSES fwolatile long Current Scope AE watcha Enter the new name in the Value or expression field and click OK Edit Name Varable or expression watch _Item_1 1 Cancel Ui The Watch window is updated to show the new name REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 453 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility JRRD AXIS e oe
119. lO Status Image 1 Waveform 1 Stack Trace Test Browser Notes Opened by View gt Difference View gt Map View gt Map View gt Command Line View gt TCL Toolkit View gt Workspace View gt Output View gt Disassembly View gt Registers View gt Memory View gt CPU gt IO View gt CPU gt Status View gt Graphic gt Image View gt Graphic gt Waveform View gt Code gt Stack Trace Test gt Test Results Browser 1 Support for this function depends on the debugger 2 See the Tcl Tk Additional document REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 495 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Commands 3 Commands 3 1 Command List Alphabetic Order Command Name ADD_FILE ASSERT AUTO_COMPLETE BUILD 1 BUILD ALL 1 BUILD FILE 1 BUILD MULTIPLE 1 CACHE 2 CHANGE_CONFIGURATION CHANGE_PROJECT CHANGE_SESSION CLEAN CLEAR_OUTPUT_WINDOW CLOSE_TEST_ SUITE CLOSE_WORKSPACE COMPARE_TEST_DATA CONNECT 2 DEFAULT OBJECT FORMAT DISCONNECT 2 ERASE EVALUATE FILE LOAD FILE LOAD _ALL FILE SAVE FILE UNLOAD FILE UNLOAD_ALL FILE VERIFY 2 FREE _GO 2 GENERATE_MAKE_FILE 1 GO GO_RESET GO_TILL HALT HELP INITIALIZE LOG MEMORY_COMPARE 2 MEMORY_DISPLAY MEMORY_ EDIT Abbreviation Description AF AC BU BL BF BM CC CP CS CL COW CTS CW CTD CN DO DN ER EV
120. location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 14 8 Pasting a placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the pop up menu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line Placeholder sub menu Placeholder Configuration directory CONFIGDIR Configuration name CONFIGNAME Project directory PROJDIR Project name PROJECTNAME Workspace directory WORKSPDIR Workspace name WORKSPNAME HEW Installation directory HEWDIR 14 9 Selecting all the window contents Choose Select All from the pop up menu to select all contents in the Command Line window 14 10 Copying the selection onto the clipboard Choose Copy from the pop up menu to copy the selected text block onto the Windows clipboard Only available if the test block is selected 14 11 Cutting out the selection to the clipboard Choose Cut from the pop up menu to remove the selected text block and copy them onto the Windows clipboard This option is available only when you have selected the text block currently being input at the latest cursor position REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 257 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 12 Pasting the contents of the clipboard Choose Paste from the pop up menu to insert the content of the Windows clipboard at the current cursor positio
121. machines attached to the network the server machine All other client machines then use the service this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine is notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This procedure is shown below Networked workspace and project Bia Networked Data Example Network AS Networked Data Example access a Debug H E SimBebuq SH 2 Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files on the network The clients cannot directly communicate with each other ether All communication is directed through the server machine The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Notes e Sharing projects by network facilities is not possible under the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operati
122. may want to open the file FILE1 C from the directory c files the following shortcut could be made c myedit myeditor exe c files FILE1 C However what happens if you want to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the High performance Embedded Workshop to use the editor specified but to open the file that we have chosen at that time To do this you can substitute the specific name of the file for a general Placeholder c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the High performance Embedded Workshop launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace the FULLFILE placeholder with the file you have selected 5 2 Inserting a placeholder To insert a placeholder select in any of the following operations Example 1 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Click the placeholder button A pop up menu will be displayed which lists all of the placeholders that are valid for the associated edit box 3 Select the desired placeholder from the pop up menu The equivalent placeholder will be inserted into the edit box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 502 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Placeholders Filename Configuration directory Project directory workspace directory HEW installation directory Wo
123. modifying your current linkage order To save the linkage order in a text file 1 Click Build gt Linkage Order The Linkage Order dialog box opens 2 Select the Use custom linkage order check box 3 Click on the Export button The Export Linkage Order dialog box opens 4 Choose a file and directory and click on the Save button The current settings in the list box are saved in the specified text file Example Exported linkage order for project Project_name configuration Debug c workspace workspace_name project_name debug main ob c workspace workspace_name project_name debug resetprg ob c workspace workspace_name project_name debug intprg ob c workspace workspace_name project_name debug runtime_library lib c workspace workspace_name project_name debug projectname lib c workspace workspace_name project_name debug user_edit_options lib REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 102 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Open the file e g in the Editor modify the linkage order and then save it in the text format Follow the procedures of To import the linkage order from the text file to load the new linkage order When you are using multiple configurations it is likely that the linkage order will be very similar To do this effectively you can copy the current settings in the dialog to other configurations This is described below To copy the linkage ord
124. must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box When the contents of the two memory areas match at comparison the message Comparison successful appears Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 3 7 Testing an area of memory You can test an area of memory in the address space using the Memory Test feature Select an address range to test in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Test option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Test Memory dialog box opens Test Memory Start Address pooo End Address O000F F A Cancel If you did not drag the address range to be tested you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Support for this function depends on the debugger Note The exact test is target dependent However in all cases the current contents of the memory will be overwritten YOUR PROGRAM OR DATA WILL BE ERASED 17 3 8 Saving memory contents in a text file You can save an area of memory in the address space to a text file using the Save Memory Contents feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose Save Memory contents from the p
125. of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 3 Select the column in which you wish to search for an I O register Address Address of the I O register Name Name of the I O register 4 In Find enter the string to be found in the selected column The characters are not case sensitive 5 To find the I O register that completely matches the string entered in Find select the Match whole word checkbox When this option is not selected all I O registers that partially match the entered string will be found 6 Clicking OK starts the search from the first line When an I O register is found this line is highlighted To find the next I O register to match select Find Next in the pop up menu 17 6 11 Finding the next After an I O register in the IO window has been found you can also use Find Next to find the next I O register that meets the requirement 17 7 Looking at registers If you are debugging at assembly language level using the Disassembly view you will probably find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this by using the Register window 17 7 1 Opening the Register window The Register window displays the register data and flag data You can change a register flag value from the window To open the Register window choose View gt CPU gt Registers or click the Registers toolbar button E1 The Register window opens showing all of th
126. of command is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To r i 3 Enter the executable file SS EXE for version control system in Version control executable 4 Enter Properties y USERNAME PASS WORD i VCDIR FILENAME in Arguments 5 Enter FILEDIR in Initial directory 6 Click the OK button 7 Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box For detail see section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands e Command Execution 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Properties 2 Select the file in the Properties dialog box and click the OK button 3 Output information on execution of this command will be shown in the Version Control tab of the Output window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 209 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system is implemented by making one of the
127. opened Modifies memory contents Fill Pop up menu option toolbar button by clicking on the menu option or Fills a block of memory Move Pop up menu option toolbar button toolbar button Moves a block of memory REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 271 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Target Operation Function Compare Pop up menu option toolbar button Compares memory contents Save Pop up menu option toolbar button Saves memory to a file Load Pop up menu option toolbar button Loads a memory area contents from a file Value In place edit Modifies memory contents Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking a value Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 15 5 1 6 IO window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Value In place edit Modifies the I O register contents Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking a value 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugger Recordable functions dependent on the debugger included in tool packages are listed in the table below e H8S Tiny E8a Emulator Debugger o H8 Tiny Super Low Power E8a Emulator Debugger o H8 Tiny Super Low Power E8 Emulator Debugger e E10A USB Emulator Software H8SX Device Group All debugging functions can be recorded into a macro file R8C Tiny E8 Emulator De
128. opens 3 Enter the new build configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new build configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Configuration name Dorit ie Based on configuration Debug 4 Select one of the existing build configurations on which you want to base the new build configuration from the Based on configuration drop down list 5 Click the OK buttons on both dialogs to complete the creation of the new build configuration REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 59 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 3 Removing a build configuration To remove a build configuration 1 Select Build gt Build Configurations The Build Configurations dialog box opens 2 Select the build configuration to remove and click the Remove button 3 Click the OK button to close the Build Configurations dialog box 2 8 Building a project 2 8 1 Building individual files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually To build an individual file 1 Select the file to build from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Build File toolbar button Es OR e Select Build lt file gt from the pop up menu OR e Select the Build gt Build File menu option OR e Press CTRL F7 All output is redirected to t
129. or create a new empty configuration This is to help with multi core configuration setup For example it is possible to open several sessions in separate High performance Embedded Workshop applications open the Synchronized Debug dialog in one of the applications and then proceed with synchronized Debugging without having to individually add each session to the Debuggers list A platform or a core on a multi core platform cannot be synchronized without first creating a High performance Embedded Workshop debug session for it Note If any Debugger in the Debuggers list is currently connected to its platform then the Debuggers list will be read only It will not be possible to add modify or remove any Debugger Also Debuggers that are already connected to a platform will not be automatically added to the list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 469 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Each entry in the list contains the following information Debugger ID A unique ID This should be set to something that identifies the Debugger Status Will be one of the following Not open The Debugger is not currently open in a High performance Embedded Workshop application It will be opened when the Sync button is clicked Not connected The Debugger is currently not connected to a platform Break The Debugger is connected to a platform and it is not running Running The Debugger is c
130. or re open the file 4 14 Preventing modification of files while debugging Use this option if you wish to prevent modification of files while debugging with High performance Embedded Workshop and a debugger connected This prevents modification of all files that are open in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor To prevent modification of files while debugging 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Editor tab REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 127 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 3 Selecting the Do not allow file editing when target is connected checkbox prevents modification of files while the High performance Embedded Workshop is connected to a debugger In other words if the High performance Embedded Workshop is not connected to a debugger files can be modified By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK 4 15 Managing the editor columns The editor in High performance Embedded Workshop has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by any component in the High performance Embedded Workshop system Examples of this functionality might include a hardware breakpoint column added by the target or possibly an address information column added by the debugger The global column states feature is also accessible from the main edit menu To switch off a column in all source files
131. overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function Support for this function depends on the debugger When the Disassembly window is in source mode and an address is entered which is source related but not in the currently open source file the related source file will automatically be opened in the source mode If an address is specified which is not source related Disassembly view will switch mode to disassembly mode in order to view the specified address 17 2 2 9 Modifying assembly language code You can modify the assembly language code in the disassembly view in disassembly mode or mixed mode by double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will be displayed Assembler Ea Address Code 0002408 015F Mnemonic ar MoL mfH 017C 8 PC A The address machine code and disassembled instructions are shown Type the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing Enter will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing ESC will close the dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 377 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the a
132. param Ox0000Stfta Ox0000S fe4 fahort L local 2 D Z 000003 fe0 unsigned long F funci short t Ox0000003Se F param i Ox00003t fa Ox00003 0 short L local 1 B i 000003 fec unsigned long F malini t x0 i L start D103 OxDOOUSEEa short The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol Note Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 433 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Go to Source Go to the associated source line View Setting Specifying the Stack Trace window settings Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard 17 16 2 Viewing the source program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the pop up menu to display then the source program corresponding to the function which has been selected by opening the editor window is displayed 17 16 3 Specifying the view Choose View Setting from the pop up menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings stack Trace Settin
133. path name Ingert If the phase selected was multiple then a list of project files is displayed on the left hand side of the dialog to enable you to specify the build options on a file by file basis If the phase selected was single then there is no project file list displayed In either case the three tabs below are available This is where you can set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configurations are being viewed In the configuration list each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select Multiple configurations then the Select project configurations to modify dialog box is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout High performance Embedded Workshop for modifying multiple configurations at once 3 4 1 Options tab This tab allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command that was entered when you defined the phase Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list and then click the Insert button See Reference 5 Placeholders for more information on placeholders REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 90 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Wo
134. path Absolute path All Relative path Relative path REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 96 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 8 Selecting the Use static sub command files checkbox will generate separate command files in the make destination directory By default this checkbox is not selected Note While a toolchain included in the compiler packages listed below is in use the Use static sub command files checkbox has a fixed tick if you have selected GNUMake in Makefile format C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family C C Compiler Package for RX Family 9 Selecting the Scan dependencies whilst building make file checkbox will execute a dependency scan before creation of a makefile This checkbox is selected by default 10 Click OK The High performance Embedded Workshop will create a subdirectory called make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it The executable HMAKE EXE located in the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by HMake selected in Makefile format If you wish to modify makefiles see Reference 13 HMAKE User Guide Note If the name of the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory includes a space the GNU Make command may not work correctly when GNU Make is selected
135. print a file from the High performance Embedded Workshop editor the settings in the print dialog affect the way the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the Page Setup option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder To set up the page margins 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box opens 2 Enter the width of the margins required into the Left Right Top and Bottom fields 3 Set the Inch or mm option accordingly 4 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect Jf Wrap Text oesi To set up the header and footer information 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box opens 2 Enter into the Header and Footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 117 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To set up print wrapping 1 Select
136. recent project workspaces select the Open a recent project workspace button select a workspace from the drop down list and click the OK button The Recent Workspace list displays the same content as that seen in the workspace most recently used File list This list also appears on the File menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select the Browse to another project workspace button and click the OK button To open the Synchronized Debug dialog box select the Start synchronized session button and select a configuration from the drop down list and click the OK button This item is only available when a synchronized debugging facility has been used To register or un register a tool from the High performance Embedded Workshop click the Administration button Click the Cancel button to use the High performance Embedded Workshop without opening a workspace REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 15 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview If you do not wish to open the Welcome dialog box next time you launch the High performance Embedded Workshop select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens Remove a tick mark from the Display Welcome Dialog checkbox in the Confirmation tab If you do not wish to view the start up screen when launching the High performance Embedded Workshop remove a tick mark from the Display Splash Screen checkbox in the Confirmation tab of th
137. s HRF file into the Tools Administration dialog box see the figure below In order to use a component with High performance Embedded Workshop it must first be registered see section 5 3 Registering a component for further information The Tools Administration dialog box shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select Tools gt Administration If you attempt to access the Tools Administration dialog box when a workspace is open the Tools Administration dialog box is opened but cannot be modified When High performance Embedded Workshop is installed any new tools are automatically REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 133 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration registered Day to day usage of the High performance Embedded Workshop though may mean you need to know more about the tools registration process High performance Embedded Workshop stores tool information in a tool database file which is stored in the root of the tool installation directory By default this is set to the High performance Embedded Workshop application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location and this causes a re scan of the tools that are registered in High performance Embedded Workshop To change the tools directory location 1 Selec
138. select one of the following ways Double click the file OR Select the file and click the right hand mouse button Select Open lt file name gt from the pop up menu OR If the file has already been selected focused press Enter REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 108 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor You can also use another editor external editor to open files For details see section 6 9 Using an external editor The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last files that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the Recent Files sub menu To open a recently used file Select File gt Recent Files and from this sub menu select the desired file 4 3 5 Closing files To close an individual file Select one of the following operations e Double click the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window OR e Click on the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window and select the Close menu option OR e Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 OR e Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select File gt Close OR e Click on the Close button located at the top right of each window To close all files Select Window gt Close All If you attempt to close an edited file that is not saved a confirmation dialog
139. selection technique from line to column selection 4 3 3 Saving a file To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations Click the Save File toolbar button el OR Press CTRL S OR Select File gt Save 3 If the file has not been saved before a File Save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save As 3 A File Save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified To save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select one of the following operations Click the Save All toolbar button Gil OR Select File gt Save All 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a File Save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If any of the files have been saved before then that file wil
140. shown in the Macro tab of the Output window To view the recorded High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands be sure to select the Macro tab of the Output window 4 ol of l at 21 21 2 E H Recording refresh session register set RO 0x0 register set Ri 0x0 register set Re 0x0 register set Ra 0x register set R4 0x0 register set Ro 0x0 register set R 0x0 register set RY 0x0 register set RE Oxo register set RY Oxo register set Ri Oxo register set Rii Oxo register set Rle Oxo register set Rls 0x0 register set R14 Oxo build wait file load Elf Dwarft2 CONFIGDIRI S PROJECTHAMNE abs OXx0 p byte memory fill OxYOOOOOO0 OxVOOOOOeY OxOOO0 long nowerify reset go till go Ox2Z0E4 watch add Watchl a 6 Finished recording Permo lacro REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 31 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 1 14 3 Step 2 Editing a macro viewing records 1 Select Tools gt Macros to invoke the Macro dialog box The High performance Embedded Workshop macro file Default in which a macro has been recorded is listed in Current macro file 2 Select the macro Demo in Macro functions and click the Edit button The editor window shows the High performance Embedded Workshop macro file Default hdc in which a macro has been recorded Within a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file the High performance Embedded Work
141. sieros E SEENE EEE SA EE EA OE SEERE Adi 9 1 2 7 S D E E 13 1 3 R a e I EE E E E A E E ne EA A E T A E 14 1 4 Launching the High performance Embedded Workshop neeessessssssssssoeerenssssssssssssssseererressssssssssssssssseerssssssss 15 1 5 Be E E E SA E A A E TE A E AAA teins Sea E N AT E A E AE E 16 1 6 Opening a workspace eseesssssseeeeeeeeressssssssssseseereetererresssssssssssseetrerrressssssssssseeetrerreossssssssssseesetreressssssssseseeeerereresesss 16 Er U Deon PIO e R E E T E E E ETE EE 17 1 8 VM Wy E AC o N EE AA A E E E E E E E E A 17 Ee SWC E E E E E A E TT 19 1 10 Exiting the High performance Embedded Workshop ccccccccccceeecceceaeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaassseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 19 1 11 Component system overview ccccccccsssssssssssseeeeccccceceeesaaneesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaaeessssseeeeeeseeeeeeeenaags 19 1 12 Management information files of High performance Embedded Workshop cccccccccccssssssssesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 19 1 13 Overview of Configurations and Sessions ccccccccccsssssssssssssssseeeccceeceeeeeeaaaasssssseeeeeecceeeeeeeeesaaaaasessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 20 1 14 Overview of Macro Recording Support facility and Test Support facility cc ccccccccccccseessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 24 1 14 1 Example of test POC COU eS siseringi E Ea E Eaa 28 1 14 2 PAR CO TN A aa E E E E eee andes oats 30 1 14 3 Step 2 Editing a macro vi
142. stack size The initial value of the stack areas depends on the CPU selected in Step 1 Note The stack area is defined by stacksct h which is generated by the High performance Embedded Workshop If stacksct h has been modified by an editor it cannot be modified from Project gt Edit Project Configuration in the High performance Embedded Workshop To move to Step 6 click the Next gt button in Step 5 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 327 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project 6 9 Setting the Yector What supporting files would you like to create Powerlh Reset H OO0 Power On Rese _ Manual Reget H 020 Manual Reset 6 Specify the vector in Step 6 Vector Definition Files Checking generates a vector definition file and a vector table setting function definition file Vector Handlers Handler Displays the handler program name of the reset vector To modify the handler program after selecting the handler program name by clicking on it enter the new handler program name Note that if the handler program is modified a reset program resetprg c is not generated Vector Displays a description of the vector Note Since the generated reset program interrupt functions reset vector handlers and interrupt source register definitions are samples be sure to refer to the CPU hardware manual To move to Step 7 click the Next gt button in Step
143. tabs yourself REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 118 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor The figure below illustrates two examples The first shows the effect of pressing Enter when the Auto Indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the int z 20 line is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second example shows the effect of pressing Enter when Auto Indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i of the int word on the previous line Now when the int z 20 line is typed it is automatically aligned 1 e automatically indented void myFunction yvoid void myFunction yoid a LU 2o int E int int int int 2 211 int i Auto Indentation Disabled tt Auto Indentation Enabled To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Set the Enable auto indentation checkbox By default this checkbox is selected 4 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect J Enable auto indentation 4 8 Splitting a window The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to split an editor window into two The split bar button is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any editor window as shown below
144. the color and font of text shown in the windows ltem Source Difference Register Memory Category Selected Text PC Line Highlight Other keyword groups based on the syntax of respective file types LHS Different Lines LHS Moved Lines RHS Different Lines RHS Moved lines Modified Accessed Not Accessed Unknown No Memory Objects to be Customized A selected text shown in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode The line at the PC program counter in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode while the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box Comment or keywords shown in the editor window and disassembly window in source mode Note Control Declaration Operator PreProcessor Value Directive Unmatched text lines shown in the left pane in the Difference window Moved text lines shown in the left pane in the Difference window Unmatched text lines shown in the right pane in the Difference window Moved text lines shown in the right pane in the Difference window Text sections of changed values shown in the Register window Text sections of executed codes at coverage measurement shown in the Memory window Text sections of codes not executed at coverage measurement shown in the Memory window Text outside the coverage range shown in the Memory window Text outside the memory range shown in the Memory window REJ
145. the current workspace Save Workspace As Saves this workspace with a different name or in an old format Close Workspace C Closes the current workspace New Session D Creates a new session Import Session D Imports an existing session Save Session Saves the current session Save Session As Saves the current session with a new session name Refresh Session D Reloads the session file for the current session Download A New Module co Downloads a new module Save CTRL S A Saves the active document Save As Saves the active document with a new file name Save All CTRL il Saves all modified documents in the workspace SHIFT S Page Setup Changes the printing options Print CTRL P g Prints the active document Recent Files Opens this document Recent Workspaces co Opens this workspace Recent Test Suites Opens this test suite Recent Downloaded 5 Downloads this module Modules Exit Exits High performance Embedded Workshop Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 1 2 Edit Menu Options Menu Menu Option S
146. the device s memory map will be set by default If you are using a device that does not have internal memory or a device with external memory instead of or in addition to the internal memory then you must tell the debugger that you have memory there Tip If you are trying to debug code with an emulator and need some memory available that does not exist either on chip or externally in your hardware then you can map some emulation memory from the emulator to the address space for your application to use The details will be specific to the debugger that you chose in the new project Additional information about the memory mapping can be viewed in the System Status view s Memory pane The Device Configuration area shows how the memory in the device s address space Note Due to page length limitations in some emulators the range addresses may not exactly match the entered addresses REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 334 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 4 3 Editing debug settings Normal operation of the High performance Embedded Workshop debugger means that your target and download modules will be automatically configured in the project generation process However in some cases it may be necessary for you to manually configure your debug session This is often the case when using old toolchains and project generators that do not support the latest High performance Em
147. the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe checkout sampleCVS U sampleCVS dbsct c Omit cvs exe checkout Updating sampleCVS Command s completed successfully 8 11 2 7 Step 7 Using the Version Control facility Modify the File Use the High performance Embedded Workshop editor to modify the file and save it In this example the file sampleCVS c is modified REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 190 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 11 2 8 Step 8 Using the Version Control facility Check the Status 1 The status of the file sampleCVS c should be checked 2 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Status 3 Select the file in the Status dialog box and click the OK button 4 The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe status sampleCVS c File sampleCVS c Status Locally Modified Working revision 1 1 1 1 Tue Feb 28 02 46 30 2006 Repository revision 1 1 1 1 C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v Sticky Tag none Sticky Date none Sticky Options none Command s completed successfully The status of the file sampleCVS c is shown as Locally Modified 8 11 2 9 Step 9 Using the Version Control facility Compare 1 The changes made in the file sampleCVS c should be checked 2 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Diff 3 Select the file in t
148. the function e Click the Step Over toolbar button OR e Select Debug gt Step Over During debugging there are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function Alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 428 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To step out of the current function e Click the Step Out toolbar button dt OR e Select Debug gt Step Out To choose the step mode to use while stepping Select Debug gt Step Mode Sub menu Function Auto default Automatically chooses the step mode Assembly Steps through assembly instructions Source Steps through source code While performing Step In in source mode within the High performance Embedded Workshop editor you may wish to keep the source mode display of the library functions e g printf containing no debugging information By default the execution jumps to the Disassembly window and steps every assembly language instruction You can select not to actually step in addresses where no deb
149. the specified workspace file Exits High performance Embedded Workshop Sets the radix for the value Reloads the session file Removes a file from the current project Saves the current session Saves the current workspace Outputs the tool information Build Commands Available only when there is a toolchain installed Command Name BUILD BUILD ALL BUILD FILE BUILD MULTIPLE CLEAN GENERATE_MAKE_FILE UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES Command Line Operating Commands Command Name ASSERT AUTO _COMPLETE ERASE HELP LOG SLEEP SUBMIT TCL Abbreviation BU BL BF BM CL GM UD Abbreviation AC ER HE LO SU Description Performs a build on the current project Performs a build all on the current project Performs a build on the file Performs a build on the multiple projects and configurations Deletes intermediate and output files produced in building Generates a build makefile for the current workspace Updates the current projects build dependencies Description Comment Checks if an expression is true or false Switches the auto completion Clears the Command Line window Displays help for Command Line or help on a command Controls command output logging Delays command execution Executes a file of commands Turns TCL commands on or off REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 498 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Commands Test S
150. then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files that will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Setup Customize dialog box To add a new help file 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Setup Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Help tab REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 148 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment Help Help files i Add CC Standard Library Help chew tools renesas Hemose Default help file C C Standard Library Help 3 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog box opens Add Help File EES Descriptions O 0K Programing m ANSI C C File name _ Cancel c FILES HELP ANSILHLP Browse 4 Enter a description of the help file into the Description field 5 Enter the full path of the help file into the File name field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 6 Click the OK button to add the new help file to the list To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default Help File drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file whenever F1 is pressed To remove a help file 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Setup Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Help tab 3 Select the help file to be removed and then click Remove 4 Click t
151. then the file will be added to the project but certain functions will be disabled for this file When you double click on a file with an unrecognized file type in the Workspace window the open operation is passed to the Windows operating system instead of opening the file in the editor The default Open operation is then carried out as if the file was double clicked in Windows Explorer To view the currently defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog box See section 2 5 File extensions and file groups for further information e Hide Project Files is not selectable under the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders It is possible to drag and drop files or folders from Windows Explorer onto the Projects tab of the workspace window These files or folders can only be dropped onto a project in the active project or a user folder in the active project Note however that you cannot drag and drop files or folders onto multiple folders When you drag and drop files The behavior depends on the destination e A file dropped onto the active project is added into the group folder of the file type If a suitable group folder does not exist the High performance Embedded Workshop creates it For example if you drop the file test c onto the active project this file will be added to the group folder C source file e A file dropped onto a user folder is directly adde
152. thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Undo Check Out REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 203 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System Undo Check Out Workspace Name hws CWworkep Project Narme hywo Ework sp Wl Project Name c cAworksp typedefine h oAworksp Mdbsctc al a n Tm IILI p 3 The Undo Check Out dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you would like to undo a previous check out operation and click the OK button 4 Ifthe file has been modified the confirmation message box shown below appears To continue the check out operation click the Cancel button To load the unmodified file from the version control system click the Yes button If you click the No button the contents of the local file will be different from those of the file in the version control system High performance Embedded Workshop A CAWoorkepace Workspace Mame Projects Mame lowenc c File was modified externally Would vou like to reload it 9 2 8 Viewing the history of files in Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added
153. to Visual SourceSafe In the previous section a mapping between the workspace directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe i e the directory controlled by Visual SourceSafe has been established However the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directory it is mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty You need to add files to the Visual SourceSafe project REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 197 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System To add files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files that you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder the High performance Embedded Workshop system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file HWP to the Files list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Add to VCS toolbar button ice OR e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Add to VCS OR e Right click to invoke a po
154. which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog as shown in the figure below Context Sensittve Help Suton ME Close Button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 14 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control for which you require help and press the F1 key 1 4 Launching the High performance Embedded Workshop To initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas select High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the High performance Embedded Workshop The Welcome dialog box will be displayed after the start up screen Welcome b Create a new project workspace als Cancel f Open a recent project workspace C wworkspace D emosH4 DemoSH4 hws sei Administration Gi f Browse to another project workspace a ni me C Start synchronized session E B Default If you have recently used a workspace Open a recent project workspace is selected by default Otherwise Create a new project workspace is selected To create a new workspace select the Create a new project workspace button and click the OK button To open one of the
155. with their full path as in figure k below If the Show file paths checkbox is selected all of the files in the Projects tab of the Workspace window are shown with their full path 1 e from a drive letter as in figure Kk below Se C source file Sie G source file fo 2 LAW orkspace D emo Demoxdbsct c When Sort files in time order option is selected the workspace window is then sorted into file time stamp order The newest files are located at the top of list with the older files towards the bottom If files are updated after selecting this option manually update the order of these files To manually update the file order Select Refresh Order in the pop up menu on the Projects tab of the Workspace window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 73 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 11 Inserting a project into the workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into the workspace To insert a new project into the workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog box opens 2 Select the New project radio button 3 Click the OK button The Insert New Project dialog box opens 4 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Project Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do n
156. work shared Ov yy lappleharec Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET VCDIR FILENAME When the High performance Embedded Workshop executes the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 FILE1 C If the GET command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 x vc sw app project1 is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application project1 2 FILE1 C is substituted for FILENAME Project File ci work application projectl filel c ee Saas _ oT g Command xi vciswsappiprojectl filel c REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 175 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 8 Specifying environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box to view the current settings To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button beside the Environment list the Environment Variable dialog box will be invoked Environment ariable ki ES Varnable OK Value Cancel Placeholder popup menu 2 Enter the v
157. 0 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later cccceseeeeeeeees 211 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page iv Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 10 2 Enabling network facilities to share Projects cccccccccssssssssssesessseeccccccceeeceesaaaassssseeeeeeeceseeeeesssaaeasaaaaasesseeseseeeeess 213 10 3 Setting the administrator user s password cccccccccccccccecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaasasssesseseeeeceeeeeeeeseasaaasssaassaseeeeeeeeeeess 214 10 4 Adding new users to the SYSteM ccsssssssssseeeeccceeeeeeeeeeaaassseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaaaaaaasesneeeseeeeess 215 10 5 Changing your password cccccccccccccsssssssssessssseeeecceeeeeeeeeaeeaseseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaseeeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeaaaaaasassseeeeseeeeees 216 10 6 Note on using the network facilities to share Projects ccccccccccccccecccceceeceaeseesseeseeeecceceeeeeeeeeauaassssassseeeeeeeeeeees 216 AE COMM NIN FNC Seis cca cepeo sa ensasndcienoboncuandsesalcut E E E E EEA 218 i PN Oponmne ihe Diii T i eN ON gamer ennnen eee tn cree ene vernon mer error teen yn rere een wre nen ran ter E 218 NZ IN AY UO AOU E ACUAUIC S otc 55 E A E ee Ppa 12 1 C function and define navigation component ccc sesesssssseeeeccccceceeceeeeeeaaaeessesseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaessssseesseeeeeeeeeees 224 122 CAF AV Os COMPONE ane enn p
158. 0 Page 207 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System Custom Commands Mappings General Commands Add Madii Remove ieee Move um Mare donr Command Executior i Prompt before executing command T Run in DOS Window e Execution control of version control commands 1 Select the Prompt before executing command checkbox 2 Deselect the Run in DOS Window checkbox This is because the RCS commands must be input via the MS DOS prompt 3 Select the User forward slash as version control directory delimiter checkbox Visual SourceSafe uses this format For detail see section 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System e Setting up commands 1 Click the Add button The Add Menu Option dialog box appears 2 Enter Properties in Option and click the Add button The Add Command dialog box appears REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 208 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 4dd Command Command Yersion control executable C Program Files Microsoft Visual Studiok S S wing24 55 EXE Browse peace Greuments Properties VEIUSERNAMEVRPASSWORD i BOVCDIRI FIL hitial directory E FILEDIF Browse Environment Add od its Renove Command return code f Return code
159. 00 Hew Value E Cancel Enter the new value in the New Value field and click OK The Locals window is updated to show the new value 3 Modifying the radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu The followings can be selected Hexadecimal Display in hexadecimal Default Decimal Display in decimal Octal Display in octal Binary Display in binary 4 Selecting an encoding format If the values of variables are characters or strings and they should be displayed as UTF 8 code select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Click on the Debug tab and select UTF 8 for Encoding Format The Locals window now shows the values of variables as UTF 8 code If Local Code Page default has been selected for Encoding Format the values are displayed as ASCII code Note The default font for display in the Locals window is Courier New which is not supported by UTF 8 Select another font compatible with UTF 8 in the Format Views dialog box in advance REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 465 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging 18 Synchronized Debugging The synchronized debugging system is designed to help with debugging multi core devices It allows you to run programs on multiple CPU cores and synchronize common debug operations Go step halt etc between the cores The Synchronize
160. 00 OO Of OO OO OO 60 O O 00 00 00 00 eee U0 00 OO OO OO OO 0O OO O 00 00 00 00 00 eee U0 00 OO OO OO OO 0O OO O 00 00 00 00 00 eee Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 3 25 Saving an area of memory You can save an area of memory in the address space to a disk file using the Save Memory feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose Save from the pop up menu of the memory window The Save Memory As dialog box opens This operation can also be achieved by selecting Debug gt Save Memory REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 394 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Save Memory As 00001000 E 00001 OFF E i If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range Enter the file format in File format file name in Filename and access size in Access size The File name drop down list contains the last four filenames used for saving memory Alternatively click the button to launch a standard Save As dialog box The access size for saving data can be selected from the Access size drop down list When the data is saved in memory with little endian the order of data depends on the access size When the file save is complete a confirmation message box will
161. 010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System To modify a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the Mapping tab 3 Select the mapping to be modified from the list and then click the Modify button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box opens Version Control Directory Mapping Source directory C Aworkspace Workspace_ HameSProye gt Browse Ld Version control directory srw orkepace Name Cancel 4 To modify a mapping make the same setting as required for adding a mapping in the Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box 5 Click the OK button To remove a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the Mapping tab 3 Select the mapping to be removed from the list and then click the Remove button 9 6 Adding Visual SourceSafe commands In the Custom Commands tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box you can add a menu defining a Visual SourceSafe command not included in the version control submenu Selecting this menu executes the defined command Output information on execution of this command will be shown in the Version Control tab of the Output window This section introduces the definition of Properties command as an example REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 0
162. 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 124 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Menu Entry Date day month year Date month day year Date year month day User name Cursor position Placeholder DATE_DMY DATE_MDY DATE_YMD USER CURSOR 4 Editor Replaced With Current date in dd mm yy form Current date in mm dd yy form Current date in yy mm dd form Current Windows user Insertion cursor positions the cursor in this position after template has been inserted 6 Enter CURSOR to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation 7 There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop down list at the bottom of the edit template dialog box These range from ALT 0 to ALT 9 User input When defining a template it is possible to define a user input field Using the following placeholder specifies this USERINPUT lt n 1 10 gt I lt some text gt The n is a number which identifies the user input identifier These placeholders can be added manually but the User Input button on the Define Templates dialog box adds these placeholders in an automated manner When the template is inserted into a file a dialog is displayed which allows you to enter so
163. 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 4 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview System Tools toolbar You can add an external tool button to which an external tool menu has been assigned on the right to the system tool button on the toolbar as shown below Renesas an Walker When the Standard toolbar is docked it has a Control bar as shown in the figure below If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its Control bar to the new location The figure below shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and also when it is floating S ee bsa femes A Control bar ocked Toolbar sts hina Debug SimSessionSH 4 Pai Floating Toolbar To dock a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating toolbar OR e Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the High performance Embedded Workshop main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes To float a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked toolbar OR e Drag the control bar of a docked toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the High performance Embedded Workshop main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbars REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 5 of 523 Jul 01 2010
164. 1 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 To close a test suite 16 Test Support Facility Select Test gt Close Test Suite Once clicked the current test suite is closed and all items are removed from the workspace tab There are TCL command line commands for these operations that can be used via the command line window These commands are named open_test_suite and close_test_suite You can also close a test suite from the workspace window pop up menu 16 3 Editing a test suite Once your test suite has been created the next step is to add some tests This operation allows you to access the Modify Test Suite dialog box and will allow you to add tests which will then be executable To edit a test suite 1 Select Test gt Edit Test Suite The Modify Test Suite dialog box is displayed Modify Test Suite Ei Test cases OF Cancel d Modi Ee EE Renae The Modify Test Suite dialog box displays the currently defined test cases Each test case has a name and can have a detailed description that you have defined to explain the tests purpose Clicking the Add button on this dialog box displays the Add New Test dialog box this is shown below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 288 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Add Hew Test x Test name Test D emo Test description Demonstratio
165. 1 Right click on an overlay group in the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Change Primary Section REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 240 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map In the tree of the left pane the selected overlay group is set as the primary section Note This function cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 13 1 9 Setting a memory map While the High performance Embedded Workshop is connected with a debugger you can set a memory map To set a memory map 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Memory Map Setting 3 The memory map setting dialog box opens The current mapping of the address space is shown as a list Set a memory map or memory resource as necessary 4 Click the OK button Note The following debuggers support this facility The Simulator Debugger for the SuperH Family The Simulator Debugger for the H8SX H8S H8 Family The Simulator Debugger for the RX Family 13 1 10 Automatically allocating the memory resource When there is a linkage list file map output by the linkage editor the memory resource can be automatically allocated according to the memory map and linkage map information While the High performance Embedded Workshop is connected with a debugger you can allocate a memory resource To automatically allocate the memory resource 1 Right click within the left pane to o
166. 10 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration To load or unload an on demand component manually 1 Click Project gt Components The Component Gallery dialog box opens 2 Select the component you wish to load Click the Load button The components image should change to the loaded state 3 If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the Unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state 4 Click OK to verify the changes Component Gallery Ed ES Project Fly Application Extensions ITRON component lan Custom memory view component La Pin view component Cancel Loaded component Unloaded component Intermediate state component Isad UAlged Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Multiple projects and All projects items to change a components load status over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 5 8 Custom project types The Project gt Create Project Type menu option in High performance Embedded Workshop and allows you to create a template for your project This menu option takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new typ
167. 100 Rev 1 00 Page 78 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order iw SH C Compiler Add ISH Assembler filereliptiy WO ptlinker Remove Mare Wp Mave Wisin The remainder of this chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog box provides 3 2 Creating a custom build phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase To create a new custom build phase 1 Select Build gt Build Phases to invoke the Build Phases dialog box 2 Click the Add button This will invoke the New Build Phase wizard dialog box 3 Follow the 4 steps below To move forward and backward between steps click the Next gt and lt Previous buttons respectively Step 1 The first step asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase REJ10J2169 0100
168. 10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 160 of 523 CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment Item Category Objects to be Customized Modified Text sections of changed values shown in the Memory window Output Build Error Lines of error messages shown in the Build tab of the Output window Build Warning Lines of warning messages shown in the Build tab of the Output window Information Lines of information messages shown in the Build tab of the Output window Disassembly PC Line Highlight The line at the PC program counter in the editor window and disassembly window in mixed mode or disassembly mode or Disassembly window while the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box Source Lines Source codes shown in the editor window and disassembly window in mixed mode All Text Text shown in the windows 6 11 Using the virtual desktop High performance Embedded Workshop has implemented the concept of the virtual desktop This allows window configurations to be defined that can be switched with the click of a button When a particular button is clicked the windows are hidden or displayed depending on the current settings of that window configuration It is possible to have a maximum of 4 desktop configurations in use When the session is saved the window positions for each configuration are saved to the session file You can then switch simply be
169. 184 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 3 Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 4 A High performance Embedded Workshop confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes The file has returned to its original state 8 11 1 7 Step 7 Using the Version Control facility View Logs Use the log command to view the changes 1 Select the file rcs_sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Log 2 The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the log information 3 Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window 8 11 2 Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with CVS In this example the High performance Embedded Workshop is to be connected with CVS e CVS tool environment The following type of version control system can be used o CVS This procedure assumes that the version control system is located at C cvs 1 11 17 e Workspace Create a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace in the following folder C WorkSpace sampleCVS Then create a folder for CVS C src sampleC VS Note In this version control using the High performance Embedded Workshop and CVS only versions of source files can be controlled It cannot control versions of any other files such as workspace or project files The following pa
170. 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 2 Specify All or Line No to set the I O simulation range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To remove a simulated I O range 1 Click the Remove button on the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box The simulated I O range selected in the Simulated I O list will be removed Only one simulated I O range is selectable in the list Then click OK 16 6 2 6 Code Coverage Coverage window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Code Test item name Coverage Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Coverage window acquired saved into test image files with this setting No test range is specified by default Test result details Range Coverage range Instruction Unmatched test option Execution mismatch at Unmatched address Image Content of the test image file System Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Range DemoSH4 c Instruction Execution Time mismatch at 0x20E4 Image 1 System 0 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 310 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High perfo
171. 2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 325 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project 4 9 Setting the Standard Library Mruntime runtime routines Wlnew Performs memory allocation _ctype h Handles and checks charac math A Performs numerical calculatic matht h Pertorme numerical calculatic stdarg h Supports access to variable iw stdio h Performs inpuboutout handlir Iw stdlib h Performs C program standard iw string A Performs string comparison r Jio E C Performs input output proc complex EC gt Performs complex nu C string EC Pertorms string manipule Enable all Disable all lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 4 Specify the configuration of the standard libraries used by the C C compiler in Step 4 The functions defined in the checked items and the runtime functions are included Enable all Disable all Selects all standard library functions Does not select all standard library functions Note that only the minimum required functions runtime and new are selected To move to Step 5 click the Next gt button in Step 4 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 326 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility New Project 5 9 Setting the Stack Area 5 Specify the stack area in Step 5 This is done by setting the initial value of the stack pointer and the
172. 4 08 File type Extension Group C source file Assembly source file Include file C header file C header file Assembly include file File Extension cpp a30 ms al4 asm mar SIC hpp inc 7 Version Control Supported CPU Family e SuperH family e H8SX H8S H8 family e RX family e M32R family e M16C family e R8C family e M32R family e 740 family e SuperH family e H8SX H8S H8 family e RX family Common e SuperH family e H8SX H8S H8 family e RX family e M32R family Common Other types of files can also be supported once they are added to the project e Version Control System that can be Connected with the High performance Embedded Workshop High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide the version control system itself It must be installed in your PC in advance The High performance Embedded Workshop can be connected to the version control system via the GUI interface First select a version control system which you wish to connect with the High performance Embedded Workshop Either of the followings can be selected Type Version Control System Name Description Displayed on Screen Version control by custom settings Custom VCS Version control by Microsoft Visual Microsoft Visual SourceSafe SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 and 2005 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Any version control system in which command line commands should be executed via the MS DOS c
173. 6 Test Support Facility Add Address zZ al Size Byte Y Radis Hex Dec Bin Cancel 2 Specify Address Size and Radix to set a watch point to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To add a bit level watch point 1 Click on the Add Bit button on the Edit Test ASM Watch Points dialog box to open the BitAdd dialog box BitAdd BitSymbol ha Address Bl Size Byte Bit Lancel 2 Specify BitSymbol Address Size and Bit to set a bit level watch point to be saved into the test image file 3 Click OK e To delete a watch point 1 Click on the Delete button on the Edit Test ASM Watch Points dialog box The watch point selected in the Compared watch list will be deleted Only one point is selectable in the list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 305 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility e To disable comparison of the addresses of watch points 1 Select the Ignore address for labels and symbols check box on the Edit Test ASM Watch Points dialog box The check box is not selected by default Edit Test ASH Watch Points Compared watch Address 0 fi 2126 aiG n n Vat ord Cancel Add Bit Delete HEF EL E M Ignore address for lables and symbols Then click OK 16 6 2 4 Symbol CWatch CWatch window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved in
174. 8 1 Looking at labels When the user program that includes the debugging information is loaded the labels are registered at that time The Disassembly window shows the first eight characters of each label instead of the corresponding address or as a part of an instruction operand Note When a label value matches an operand the corresponding instruction operand is replaced by the label If two or more labels have the same value the one that comes first in alphabetical order is displayed When an address or a value can be entered in the dialog box the labels can also be used 17 18 1 1 Listing labels To see a list of all the labels defined in the current debugger session choose View gt Symbol gt Labels or click the View Labels toolbar button Window configuration Label x Toolbar a PS gt 75 m ta h Column HF header Mene nnn e You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading e You can quickly toggle a software break at the entry point of a function by double clicking in the BP breakpoint column Alternatively right click to show the pop up menu and select Break REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 438 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the t
175. 8 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 1 6 Code StackTrace StackTrace window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Code Test item name StackTrace Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and data within nested function calls in the StackTrace saved into test image files window The default value in Nest level is 10 Test result details Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current HEW system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Value differs Src F PowerON_Reset_PC 0000080E Dest F PowerON_Reset_PC 0000081C To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test Stack Trace Ei ES Hest level 1 64 li T Symbal Cancel Parameter Local Variable Ignore address 1 The range of stack trace information to be saved into the test image file is determined by the number of nest levels specified in Nest level 2 To compare parameters or local variables select checkbox Parameter or Local Variable These checkbox are not selected by default 3 If you do not wish to compare the address of the selected register select the Ignore address checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Pa
176. Address header 00002000 podz 0lz OOOO0z004 Disassembly Address column Label column SAW Break poms ASM column Ob code column Disassembly Clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view source codes in source mode click the View Source button The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Disassembly field Column Name Description S W Breakpoints ASM Display the PC location 5 gt breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click Disassembly Address Display the disassembly address Open the Set Address dialog box by double click Enter the address to jump to Obj code Display the object codes Label Display the Labels This column is not available if no module has been downloaded Double clicking the Disassembly field in disassembly mode opens the Assembler dialog box Enter assembly language codes Right clicking within the Disassembly field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Refresh Acquires the latest disassembly information to update the contents of the window Lock Refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly in disassembly mode so that it does not refresh View Source Launches editor at location in source Set Address Enters a new start address Go To Cursor G Commences to execute the user progra
177. Color of the Background Color of the Tab s tobe Type of Output Color Tab Default Color Tab Default Applied to be Applied Text SYSTEM SYSTEM All tabs All Build Error Text Black White Build Error Build Warning Text Black White Build Warning Information Text Black White Build Information 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab 5 Click the OK button 1 2 7 Status bar The status bar displays various information about the current state of the High performance Embedded Workshop The figure below shows the status bar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 13 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Displays HEW status messages Virtual desktop Line numberLines lngertonOvernaite mode GUI command description Mum Lock Attributes Column number Caps Lock Ready EEs Defaulti desktop Read write az fa7 4 INS NUM Fl The customizable status bar feature allows the user to customize the display of the status bar area and its contents The status bar will also now show target related information where required by the specific target being used The bottom section of the status bar area shows the standard application based information as in previous version of High performance Embedded Workshop Above this is the target related information The information displayed here is completely target dependant and in some cases there may not be any target related info
178. Control commands 5 Click the OK button to close the Add Command dialog box 6 Click the OK button to close the Add Menu Option dialog box 7 Click the OK button to close the Version Control Setup dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 169 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System To modify a user defined version control menu option 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button The Define Commands dialog box opens 3 Select the menu option to be modified from the Commands list and then click the Modify button The Modify Commands dialog box opens For details see section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands 4 Click the OK button to close the Modify Commands dialog box 5 Click the OK button to close the Define Commands dialog box 6 Click the OK button to close the Version Control Setup dialog box To remove a user defined version control menu option 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button To change the ordering of user defined version control menu options 1 Select
179. D VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you will be informed 5 4 Placeholder tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system If there is a placeholder pop up menu next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 505 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 I O File Format 6 1O File Format High performance Embedded Workshop formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugger High performance Embedded Workshop will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you ma
180. Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Download modules after build By default this checkbox is selected 4 Click OK 4 Removing breakpoints on download If this checkbox is selected the breakpoints will be automatically removed after downloading the user program To remove breakpoints on download 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Remove breakpoints on download Default for this checkbox depends on the target 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 338 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 5 Disabling memory access until after target connection command file execution When this checkbox is selected if a command batch file to be automatically executed at connection to the target has been specified the memory in the target will not be accessed until execution of the command batch file is finished To disable memory access until after target connection command file execution L 2 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens Select the Options tab Select the Disable memory access until after target connection command file execution This option is useful when initial setting of memory is necessary at connection to the target By default this checkbox is not selected Click OK 6 Limiting disassembly memo
181. DemosH 4 Browse W Search sub directories Active project C All loaded projects 2 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you selected text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 3 Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a semicolon e g C H REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 112 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 4 4 4 3 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case checkbox If you would like your search to match a whole word as opposed to matching all occurrences then check the Match whole word only checkbox Note this option is mutually exclusive with the Regular expressions only one of these two options can be used at any given time If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further information If you would like your search results to appear in the Find in Files 2 tab in the Output Window instead of the Find in Files 1 tab check the Output to Find in Files 2 checkbox this enables two diff
182. E source file i 1 0 Register Definition Files Generate Hardware Setup Function None 3 Specify the generation file in Step 3 Use I O Library Checking enables use of standard I O libraries Number of I O Streams Specifies the number of I O streams that can be used simultaneously Use Heap Memory Checking enables use of the heap area management function sbrk Heap Size Specifies the unit of the size of the heap area to be managed Generate main Function Selects generation of a model main function Generates a main function file Project name c cpp I O Register Definition Files Checking generates an I O register definition file 1odefine h written in the C language Generate Hardware Setup Function Selects generation of a model I O register initial setting program Generates a hardware setting file hwsetup c cpp or hwsetup src Note To include a main function that has already been made select None in Generate main Function and after making the project add the file containing the main function to the project Note that if the name of the function to be included is different the function calling section in resetprg c must be modified Be sure to refer to the hardware manual of the CPU for actual values of the sample file contents such as the vector table definition and I O register definition which are generated by the project generator To move to Step 4 click the Next gt button in Step 3 REJ10J
183. EJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 427 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility e Click Reset CPU toolbar button Zif OR e Select Debug gt Reset CPU Note The Run to main function on reset feature requires a temporary breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 17 13 7 Single step When you are debugging your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the source view a step operation will step a single source line In the disassembly view a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function e Click the Step In toolbar button f OR e Select Debug gt Step In If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over
184. ESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the advanced build concepts 3 1 The build process revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker This will be the case for most installations of the High performance Embedded Workshop However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files The figure below presents a different view of the build process Phase 1 Input Files Phase 1 Output Files Phase 2 Input Files Phase 2 Output Files Phase Input Files Phase amp Output Files The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog box which can be accessed by selecting Build gt Build Phases On the left hand side are the phases that are defined in the current project REJ10J2169 0
185. Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 5 2 20 Address Interrupt Break Points dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Add button Click on the button Adds the break point Delete button Removes the selected break point Delete All button Removes all break points Enable button Enables the selected break point All Enable button Enables all break points Disable button Disables the selected break point All Disable button Disables all break points Selected item in the Address Double click on the item Sets or clears a software breakpoint Interrupt Break Point list 15 5 2 21 Trace window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Acquisition pop up menu Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking onthe Configures trace acquisition option toolbar button menu option or toolbar button parameters 15 5 2 22 Configuration dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function OK button Click on the button Sets the emulator operation conditions 15 5 2 23 Coverage window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Enable All pop up menu option toolbar button Click on the menu option or E
186. FL LA FS FU UA FV FG GM GO GR GT HA HE LO MC MD ME Comment Adds a file to the current project Checks if an expression is true or false Switches the auto completion Performs a build on the current project Performs a build all on the current project Performs a build on the file Performs a build on the multiple projects and configurations Sets caching on or off Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name Sets the specified project file as the current project Sets the specified session as the current session Deletes intermediate and output files produced in building Clears the contents of the specified tab in the output window Closes the current test suite Closes a workspace Compares test data and create results Connects the debugger Sets the object format to be used by default Disconnects the debugger Clears the Command Line window Evaluates an expression Loads an object program file Loads all object program files Saves memory to a file Unloads an object program file from memory Unloads all object program files from memory Verifies file contents against memory Runs program ignoring any breakpoints Generates a build makefile for the current workspace Runs program Runs program from reset Runs program until specified addresses Halts program Displays help for Command Line or help on a command Initializes the debugger Controls command outp
187. File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box opens 2 Click the Wrap Text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything is visible 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 7 2 Changing tabs W Use spaces as tabs Tab size 4 To change tab size 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Enter into Tab Size the number of desired tabs 4 Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect When the TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character is usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog box To use spaces as tabs 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Set the Use spaces as tabs checkbox as appropriate 4 Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect 4 7 3 Auto indentation When you press Enter the editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of the window Auto Indentation is a feature which when RETURN is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non whitespace character of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or
188. Finding eNe eers EE EEE R E EE SO ai 417 D LO a T a T E E E E E 417 17 7 1 Opening the Register Window soeeeeseeeeereessssssssssssectteererssssssssssssseeteereesssssssssssssssseeeterrreossssesesseeeeeereree 417 17 7 2 Changing the register display radix siscacsscesnecastaaceisacincs chess ssiabndadaideedacdiemncaaed sdduadindadanddadeidnuNendossdundonieabaceiades 418 17 7 3 SA S os i E E E E E A E TA E E E E 419 17 7 4 Seting h lay otic E E TAE T 419 17 7 5 Choosing a register to be displayed cccccccccccccccsesesssesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaeesssssseseeeeeeeeess 420 IAO NOG AS BC ASC CO I erea vas Geese cued a rn a ea E Ei 421 17 7 7 Setna The as VAMC eseri ESES E E AE a E A 421 17 7 8 Splitting up the window display ccccsssssssssseeeececeeeeeeeeeaaasseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaasaegsees 422 17 7 9 SCALIA E O D arsed E S E E A T A E NAN E 422 17 7 10 Refreshing the Register window eeesssesssssssssseeereerereesssssssssssseerereressssssssssssseeteeresssssssssssessssseeerereeeesssss 422 17 7 11 Disabling refresh of the Register window ccccsssssssessseeecceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeessssesssseeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaasaassseeeeeeeeeess 422 17 7 12 ASG TIT OSC ON sacra cattenecocahamn sonatas nuasadianncamdepenons namnanauvtelaneanaeqnaccan guenneon nouttiulnasussadunnenedeseneasaeudawantebantoands 423 epee CDEN WEL COOLS E E ta eicea E E eoadin aed s wena eavetaniees 423 I
189. High performance Embedded Workshop window title The High performance Embedded Workshop window title will start with the display ID of the current Debugger This will change whenever the active Debugger is changed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 480 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Switching the active Debugger There are several methods of switching the active Debugger Debuggers tab Right clicking on a Debugger in the tab and selecting Activate will make it the active Debugger Application toolbar When debugging in internal mode an extra drop list is added to the application toolbar This contains the project session combination that describes each synchronized Debugger The active debugger can be changed to a specific Debugger by selecting its session in the drop list Shortcut key combination Pressing the Ctrl Shift N Key combination will change the active Debugger to the next one in the Debuggers tab The Output Window When using Internal mode the Output Window displays a separate Debug tab for each synchronized Debugger Each tab includes the project name and session name of the Debugger it represents so that it can be identified Ol Of Al t 21 ft 7 G Connected mO Build ff Debug Demo Coret Demo Corel i Debug Demo Corel Find in Files 1 F Restricted operations All Debugger operations that change the active session a
190. If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open this dialog box again select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Select the Delete file from project checkbox on the Confirmation tab By default this checkbox is selected 2 3 4 Excluding a project file from build A file in a project can be excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis To exclude a project file from build 1 Click on the file that you want excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window It is also possible to select several files by using a mouse or inputs through the keyboard as follows e To select several files Click the files while pressing the CTRL key e Select several files as a range Click a file as the start of the range Then keep pressing the SHIFT key and click another file as the end of the selected range 2 Take either of the two ways listed below A red cross dE will appear on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build e Select Exclude Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the name of the selected file from the pop up menu opened by right clicking lt file gt is not displayed if several files are selected e Select Build gt Include Exclude Build REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 50 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 3 5 Including a project file
191. If you double click the coordinate where you wish to view the sampling information the Sample Information dialog box appears REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 407 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Auto Refresh Nonrefresh Disables refresh of the Waveform window Stop Automatically refreshes the Waveform window when user program execution stops Real time Regularly refreshes the Waveform window Refresh Now Refreshes the Waveform window Update Interval Specifies the refresh interval Zoom In Zoom in display Zoom Out Zoom out display Reset Zoom Resets the zoom display Zoom Magnification X2 The zoom magnification is 2 X4 The zoom magnification is 4 X8 The zoom magnification is 8 Scale 128 The size of the X coordinate is 128 pixels 256 The size of the X coordinate is 256 pixels 512 The size of the X coordinate is 512 pixels Clear Cursor Hides the cursor display Sample Information Displays the sampling information of the cursor location Properties Opens the Waveform Properties dialog box Note Available only when the debugger supports this function 17 5 2 Regularly refreshing the Waveform window Selecting Auto Refresh gt Nonrefresh from the pop up menu will not refresh the window Selecting Auto Refresh
192. J10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 196 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System The structure image of projects and sub projects in the Visual SourceSafe database High performance Embedded Workshop workspace and projects and the workspace directory in the hard disk is shown below Projects and sub projects in HEV workspace and Workspace directory in the Visual SourceSafe projects the hard disk Visual SourceSafe Ay Workepace Name H Project_Name G Project_Name The High performance Embedded Workshop has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and set up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following eight commands are available via the version control toolbar or menu Tools gt Version Control menu Version Control Toolbar Function Add to VCS Remove from VCS Get from VCS Check out from VCS Adding files to Visual SourceSafe Removing files from Visual SourceSafe Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe da Lee La Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Check in to VCS a Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe Get VCS status Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe Undo Check Out Undoing a check out operation in Visual SourceSafe Show History Viewing the history of files in Visual SourceSafe 9 2 1 Adding files
193. K button or press the Enter key The Disassembly view updates to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 2 1 6 Modifying assembly language code You can modify the assembly language code in the disassembly view in disassembly mode by double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will be displayed Assembler 7 Address Code 0002408 O15F Mnemonic eE MOW L fa H 01 0 8 PC AT The address machine code and disassembled instructions are shown Type the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing Enter will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing ESC will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugger s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly view will show the new assembly language code but the source view will be unchanged This is true even if the source file contains assembler 17 2 1 7 Disassembly find in range The disassembly find in range can be used to find a certain text string in the disassembly view between two add
194. L Create Hew Test Image File Test tem Test Image The memory value of isisisk range O FF Test lage The register value Al the texts of Debug tab etc Test Image 7 Run Test Play Macro specified with Edit Test Suite ol ct iii JL Test Result Browser Test Image Display a comparison Test Image result on Test Browser Test Image HEW Test rage File HIF The test support facility is available in the Test menu and in the pop up menu of the Test tab of the workspace window The first step towards using the test support facility is to create a test suite a set of tests This is available on the Test menu Once a test suite 1s created following operations can also be done in the Test tab of the workspace window Modify the test suite and specify macros to be executed during the test and the test image file for comparison Then select some test items to be saved a test image file Acquire and save test image of the selected test items which you wish to use for comparison After completion of the test macros the selected test items are compared The result is displayed in the test browser window If there is any difference between the test result and the saved the test image file the result of the test item is shown as FAIL You can view the details of the error by double clicking the line of this test item REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 27 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Hig
195. LS SP CCIE yO TC FAG IK enoo EEO E EEE EEE EA EA EEEE AEEA 423 I9 Rescetne hetae ME Uessa E E E 424 1710 Set ne PC tothe address at CUSO i ssocoscsnssaavuecdnnenneoetacsinegrunsupsteneesinnddaosiqetstwetuadtensavsyqnncdanetneasbaddbccamebenactaugiwentoxaaus 424 1711 Initializing the deDUS SET sas sssvcorwesnsreneneditensueucsanavetwtantnes oheannedsbedWanntvennesdebielnbioes theodueilwtascueneianansdeleeperannvedeteldumettenanedene 424 17 12 Connecting disconnecting the debugger nnnnnesssesssssseseessssttrreresssssssssssssretrrrresssssssssssssetreerresssssssssssssseseeeeeeee 424 o PEC CUS your pro i diiiececciee e e or E E aE a E a O Eei 425 EL E O ag 0d a E E AA E E E E EE 425 LI Runnin PRO OY OOM ernn EE E 425 17 13 3 Running program ignoring any Dreakpoints visite cccsiusirsedinvenseiossdencddeansschesiemwdaneouiecntsiavldsuncesinsdondieiwaed 426 LIA Ronm 1 OD ee E E E E a 426 17 13 5 R nnine from a specified address scaw2eccscacariedscndandixewssaasdaveeseeacendieddacetsewasoadeauteadaueasteddewensdteewansaddesscdnwanieeds 427 17 13 6 Continuing execution to a main function at a reset eee eccccccccccccceeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeceeseesaaaassssseseeseeeeeeeeeess 427 ASe OMRON a e R E suseddousdacaschunesooeniaedasevaonssanser 428 EGS INVITED ICES 98 opre EOE EEE actsansunoveaanrnenncantcetesuie aursmmsserhenuecestnoneuceusaciueeseaaite 429 17 14 Stopping your program 2 3iscsetanaaceesanceceuranesuaatossnasedabendanpeeceabutdadecaucada
196. Macro dialog box opens 2 Select the macro file which contains the function you want to edit 3 Select the macro function in the Macro functions that you want to edit 4 Click the Edit button 5 The Macro dialog box is dismissed and the file opened in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor The Macros are stored in the Macros folder within the High performance Embedded Workshop management information folder under the application data folder for each user profile These files are just text based TCL files that can also be manually edited in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor window Any changes made will automatically be picked up by the High performance Embedded Workshop next time the macro is executed 15 8 Assigning a macro It is possible to assign a macro to either a custom menu option toolbar or keyboard shortcut This allows you to quickly access macros which you often use It is possible to assign a single macro to a Tools menu Macros toolbar and keyboard shortcut all at the same time if you want A custom menu and a toolbar button are shown in alphabetical order To assign a macro to a toolbar button 1 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens 2 Select the macro file which contains the function you want to assign 3 Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign 4 Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box is displayed 5 Select the Assign to Toolbar chec
197. Memory Range dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 36 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 6 Enter the start address of an array in Start address and end address in End address and select the size in Access size 7 Click the OK button Start address e Cancel End address _a 0x27 ACCES 126 a 8 Click the OK button in the Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box 9 The content of array element a 6 in the Watch1 sheet is saved into the test image file Double click Watch XXXxxx under Symbol in Available components of the Edit Comparison Settings dialog box The Edit Test Watch dialog box opens 10 Select the checkbox of a 6 in Symbols 11 Click the OK button Edit Test Watch Watch Sheet Wam UE Cancel Ignore address 12 Click the OK button in the Edit Test Image File dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 37 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview In the state of current High performance Embedded Workshop system the test image specified in test item is acquired and the test image is saved to the test image file created at step 5 1 14 8 Step 7 Modifying the program before the test In this example the target of the test is a selected range of memory data in arrays Then modify the program to reduce the number of times to store data into the array so that the saved
198. Move to bottom Moves the selected module s to the bottom e To move non consecutive modules Move to top Moves all of the selected modules to the top Group up Moves all of the selected modules to the position of the first one among them Group down Moves all of the selected modules to the position of the last one among them Move to bottom Moves all of the selected modules to the bottom REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 101 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features If the top module is selected the Move to top and Move up buttons will be disabled If the bottom module is selected the Move to bottom and Move down buttons will be disabled The current linkage order can be saved in a text format You can modify the linkage order saved in the file and load it to apply the new linkage order To load the linkage order from a text file 1 Click Build gt Linkage Order The Linkage Order dialog box opens 2 Select the Use custom linkage order check box 3 Click on the Import button The Import Linkage Order dialog box opens 4 Choose a file and click on the Select button The Linkage Order Import Report dialog box opens 5 To load the linkage order saved in the file click on the Continue button The listbox will be updated with the new linkage order Note This will overwrite your current linkage order 6 Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without
199. NESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Build options dialog box Selecting a configuration and setting up options such as the compiler and the optimizing SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain CACes Assembly Link Libeaiy Standard Library CPU 4 Cordiguratior SimDiebug SH 4 Cirlebos SH 4 Debug Show entries for Rele All Canfiauraliars Include he chreschories r Mukiole guration F Categay Source ka nes Za H Assembly source file H EA Linkage symbol file Options C cpu zshd object HCONFIGDIRIHFILELESF obi debug gbe aute chanepath riaipath global_valshle 0 opt range all intibe_loopeO del vacant_loopet See section 2 7 Build configurations for more information about a configuration e Session What is session Sessions which have their own names are the units to manage various settings such as High performance Embedded Workshop debugger options used for debugging with connection to the debugger and options specific to the debugger and information on the Memory and Register windows and their positions The term session can also be referred to as debugger session In the figure of the Standard toolbar shown as an example sessions SimSessionSH 4 and DefaultSession are available Information on each session is saved in an individual file in the High performance Embedded Workshop project N
200. NESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment To specify an external editor External editor Madii 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Check the Use external editor checkbox The External Editor dialog box opens External Editor Ei Command Ok C SWINNT NOTEPAD EXE Browse Cancel Arguments to open file SFU LLFILE Advanced gt gt Arguments to open file at lire siFu LLFILE P 4 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 6 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 7 Clicking the Advanced gt gt button allows you to select the external or internal High performance Embedded Workshop editor for use when you attempt to open a file by any of the following operations e File open menu When a file is selected in the Open File dialog box By default the internal editor is selected e Workspace window double click When a file in the Projects tab or an entry
201. OK 17 8 Specifying the radix If no prefix e g Ox has been added to a numerical value entered in a dialog box window or command line specify the radix for the value Notes e If the dialog box or window has a field for selecting the radix e g a button or column the radix selected in this field will be applied e The radix in some dialog boxes windows and commands may be fixed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 423 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To specify the radix select a submenu from Setup gt Radix or click on a button on the Debug toolbar Setup gt Radix Submenu Debug Toolbar Description Hex lb Sets the radix to hexadecimal default Decimal 10 Sets the radix to decimal Octal z Sets the radix to octal Binary a Sets the radix to binary 17 9 Resetting the target MCU To reset the target MCU click the Reset CPU toolbar button iT or select Debug gt Reset CPU Resetting the target MCU initializes the on chip I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector 17 10 Setting PC to the address at cursor To changes the value of the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor click the Set PC to cursor toolbar button Trc or select Debug gt Set PC to Cursor 17 11 Initializing the debugger Select Debug gt Initialize It will close down any open child windows and shut dow
202. Options sirccesahosteaszdanenamdanensantscnenadisnevonsadgnevantamenecndsesansatendendanenamdadectanhsonaeuatisbeveasadgnedsndesenecnasesansaebenednts 491 1 7 Setup Ment OpHONS va siov accsccuessaisannsamaddinsican core musadsiontspesinnetaweneuendeidawadssedsinud dsudoonteiad do ubeaietaaslvaatdadannasahuausdbeniamdawevunnionuses 492 LS TOOTS Mena OPC OS ge semscesacssnousacurnenecnatcereouieuvnenssarnetunsecnnonssteuatiy EEEE EEOAE SEE EEEa EEOAE EASRA 493 BE T ME O a 493 L10 Window Menu Opn 550s sic crasxcsctsesvccsacnieseesaaverenveesVaasvnsvedataeioeseuseleesudeeietassvedsadegia ane la aiana a aii naani laii 494 LAIF Help Menr Op hOMS ser sironesenosaseverticaneteneleotatesvgoutdesersiwiehtonn eas apie eunnivioudsvestasschaveleedebetogoutdesenendanctioasedendyesevetogsatvenmnaness 494 Di Vy ON S a E E E A 495 Bs OMIM ANS E E EE A E E E E A E vueecacn 496 3 1 Command List Alphabete Order ecreerenseirnareiien i eaa EE E aa ERRI E IEE EESAN eS 496 32 Command List Listed by Function ccossacsszssnceentanedeicnved natatie na raeo a eeaeee 498 4s WRC OU AT OE CS SI ONG scssi ena e EENE EEE E i TEE EE N EREE S RE i 501 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page ix Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents Die Ee TOET E 502 5 1 AVE 1S A AC COE ee E E E E E E A A A E E E E E E 502 52 Inserting a placeholder rsa asis ez naterncovandnstacnadaiioeevdnsnxtondanesdnatcuentenicowarepudstuadioudedsstnaddhesiaianvabantdus AE RATETA ERA 502 5
203. RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 1 2 4 Workspace window The Workspace window has four tabs Projects Templates Navigation and Test SE Ty Tutorial H z Assembly source tile A Intpre src H E yectthlerc oo haj yhandlersre ra C source file 4 dbsctc m E resetpre c sbrk c a l Projects e Projects tab Allows you to show the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon See section 2 2 Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace window for more information on the Projects tab If you hover the mouse pointer over a file in the Projects tab then the file s full path will be displayed in a tool tip a a Deemed C WorkspacesDemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c ve lowsne c os resetprg c e Templates tab Allows you to display template settings See section 4 11 Templates for more information about a template e Navigation tab Workspace INT OFFSET SR_hit C Functions J abortivoid zJ maintvoid zJ Manual Resetivoid a PowerOh Resetivoid gJ sbrktsize t size l Projects E Templates ae Navigation REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 6 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Allows you to provide jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the Na
204. Reset CPU after download module This checkbox is only enabled if the feature is supported by the selected target Selecting a new target will reset this option to the default setting for the target Default for this checkbox depends on the target 4 Click OK 9 Disabling memory access by GUI when target is executing By setting this option the user can limit memory accesses from the High performance Embedded Workshop components during execution This prevents the target being overloaded providing memory data and degrading execution Support for this function depends on the debugger To disable memory access by GUI when target is executing 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Disable memory access by GUI when target is executing This checkbox is only enabled if the feature is supported by the selected target Selecting a new target will reset this option to the default setting for the target Default for this checkbox depends on the target 4 Click OK It does not completely prevent memory access e Operations in which memory accesses are prevented In the following operations handling of memory is disabled or no data will actually be read from or written to memory in the target if attempted Values to be shown are dummy values FF o Viewing tooltip watch information in the Editor or Disassembly window in the source mode o Viewing or modifying
205. Rev 1 00 Page 79 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Hew Build Phase Step 1 of 4 What type of phase would you like to add Create a new custom phase Addjeneristing svetem phage system Phase Cancel Step 2 The second step asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build New Build Phase Step 2 of 4 FP x sy What type of phase Would you like to create f Multiple phase The command i applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool it a compiler or assembler Select input file group T source file C Single phase The command i only ever executed once per build An esample of this type of tool ie a linker lt Back Next gt Cancel The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 80 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Adva
206. Right clicking within the Source field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Open Source File For Editing Open File in Source Mode Copy Go To Definition Of lt Navigation Item gt Find Goto Line Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Turn Header On Off Define Column Format Columns Column name Instant Watch Add Watch Set Address Go To Cursor Set PC Here Display PC Properties Note Macro Recording Function Opens an editor window containing the file for editing Opens a file shown in the disassembly window Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Shows the positions where navigation items of defines C functions or C classes are defined Finds text in the current file Jumps to a line in a file Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Shows or hides the column header Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Launches the Instant Watch dialog box with the name extracted from the view at the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Adds the selected variable to the Watch window Enters a new start address Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Changes
207. SC engine Toolchair Renesas Super RISC engine Standard Toolchain wersion SEAI Toolchain build phases Build phase OptLinker 3 04 00 SH Assembler Y 01 02 SH C 0 Compiler 9 02 00 SH C 0 Library Generator Inamata i REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 141 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the toolbars The High performance Embedded Workshop provides standard toolbars as detailed in the Toolbars topic In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars Toolbars Toolbars meee M Show Tooltips Mer Reset Penni Reset Positions WV ersin Control Wel Default Window Wl Debug Aun ae Toolbar rane Editor To create a new toolbar 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Click the New button The New Toolbar dialog box opens 4 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar Name field 5 Click the OK button to create the new toolbar Note When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Commands tab 3 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to
208. Select Project gt Insert Project Set the current project Select Project gt Set Current Project Add files to a project Select File gt Add Files Save files Select File gt Save Build Select Build gt Build Automatic dependency scanning Deselect the Disable automatic dependency scanning checkbox To prevent automatic scanning of file dependencies in a project 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Build tab 3 Select the Disable automatic dependency scanning checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK Note Selecting this option clears all file dependencies in a project To manually update file dependencies in a project see To manually update file dependencies in a project at Workspace Be Deno Sie Assembly source file ee 2 lowlyLerc Sie C source file E dbsctec 6 Demo c e E intprg c E lowste c 6 resetprg c H E sbrk c n E vecttbl c REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 70 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics When Build gt Build is selected a confirmation dialog box appears to ask if you wish to update the file dependencies before executing the build If you have not manually updated dependency data it may be out of date When you want dependency data to be updated prior to build select Yes If you select No it executes Build based on current dependency
209. Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Save Auto Recovery info checkbox as necessary 4 Select the number of minutes you wish the auto backup facility to be launched 5 Click the OK button J Save Auto Recovery info every fo minutes Restoring your files If you open your workspace and the following dialog is displayed it means that the last time the workspace was used problems were encountered REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 155 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment HEW Workspace Auto Recovery HEW failed to shutdown correctly the last time you used this workspace Would vou like to recover the following files rather than Use the saved versions Filename Director demo hwe cc demo de mo hwp cde mo de moa H defaultsessionhst c demo sdemo simsessionsh 3 cde modemo To recover the files check the checkbox alongside the filenames you wish to recover and click OK Clicking Cancel will discard the auto recovery files and load from the original files 6 8 8 Setting the projects to load on workspace open You can configure which projects are initially loaded on workspace open This is an application wide setting which is only relevant to workspaces that contain multiple projects To change the projects to load on workspace open 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box ope
210. SitiOn cccccccccccccccscssesesseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaasaesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessasaaaasseeeeeeeeeess 379 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page vi Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 1724 We late the Mk CCG eisian E a E ie 379 UO PAU TNC TIE Vac A E NA A E E A O E E E A E E ee 380 17 3 1 Opening the Memory windoW ssssseeseeeeeeesssssssssssssssttrerressssssssssssseeterrressssssssssseeeererersessssssssssssseeeeeeeeeo 380 L732 Setting data at a desired address in the Memory window ccccccccccceccececceeeeeaeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeees 383 17 3 3 SEI C HS INGO TANS ieie a E Ea REE E EE EES EN 384 17 3 4 Filling an area of memory with constant data ccccsssseecccccccceceeeeaeasseseseseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeesaaaaassseseseeseeeess 385 17 3 5 Copying an area Of MEMOTY cccssseececccccccccccccauescesssseseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaassssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeaaaaassssseseeeeeeeeeeess 386 T730 CONICET Memory COM 0M Se ses edad sds eee A addi inese ad aca EAN 386 17 3 7 Josine an arca Of Memory osipi a E ii Oaia 387 17 3 8 Savile memory contents m a Text Teskin EEE E EE EREA ARESE 387 17 3 9 Finding a value in Memory seessssseeeeeeeeenessssssssssssseetrrreesssssssssssseetrrrrrsssssssssssseeterereressssssssssssseseeteereeessssss 388 310 Changin me display Address ssor snis a a EESE EEEE ES 389 17 3 11 Changing the scroll ARCA waco anhanendcationusiouritansiactesdadeontei
211. Test Trace Ranges dialog box The trace range selected in the Trace ranges list will be modified Only one trace range is selectable in the list The Modify Trace Range dialog box opens Modify Trace Range kd E4 Trace type Internal ALID U sermemorn trace Start PTA End PTR 2 Cancel 2 Specify Trace type Start PTR and End PTR to set a trace range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To remove a trace range 1 Click on the Remove button on the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box The trace range selected in the Trace ranges list will be deleted Only one trace range is selectable in the list Then click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 314 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 7 Comparing atest image file To compare a test image file 1 Select Test gt Compare Test Image File The Compare dialog box opens Test image file p Browse l l gt Cancel Compare test image file to f Curent system Test image file gt Emwee 2 Enter the test file location that you want to compare in Test image file field This is a HIF High performance Embedded Workshop test image file file and contains details about the test image data 3 Then select what you want to compare the file you have selected with You can choose either the Current system or another previously saved test image file The
212. V 4 08 5 Tools Administration If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then the icon in figure below is used to show this H85 H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform 3 0 dhion Embedded Monitor Platform 1 0 intel Hex Record Obiect Header LO Component not found icon If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure below is used to show this Registered components Component Tor aa oe HES H8 3S00 Standard Toolcha SuperH RISC engine Standard ie SunerH RISG eneine Standard Incompatible component found icon Note If the tool has one of these errors then it is possible to get more information by the following method To get tool error feedback 1 Select Tools gt Administration The Tools Administration dialog box opens 2 Select the tool in the list that has an issue 3 Click Properties 4 Select the information tab and scroll the edit field to the bottom 5 The reason for the problem will be displayed in this area 5 7 Using On Demand components The High performance Embedded Workshop version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 139 of 523 Jul 01 20
213. Visual SourceSafe command options To view the status of files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files whose status you would like to view in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Get VCS status toolbar button ay OR e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Get VCS status OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get VCS status 3 The Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status dialog box shows the status of files 9 2 7 Undoing a check out command in Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However 1f the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone To undo a check out of files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination
214. __ BEHA mj Split Bar To split a window Double click the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed drag the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 119 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 4 9 Changing the editor font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font To change the editor font 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the Source icon in the tree The Font tab should be available on the right of the Format Views dialog box 3 Select the font type from the Font list 4 Select the font size from the Point Size list 5 When this is being modified the sample text below shows what the font will look like 6 Click the OK button Fort Font Cour ier Mew Point Size 10 HEW Sample Text 4 10 Syntax coloring To enhance code readability the High performance Embedded Workshop
215. a 2 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 303 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 2 3 Symbol ASM Watch ASMWatch window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Symbol Test item name ASMWatch Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the ASMWatch window saved into test image files acquired with this setting Checkboxes for all watch points are blank by default Test result details Failed at xxx data Name of the unmatched watch point value is different Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at 414 data value is different Src 0000 Dest 0001 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test ASH Watch Points Compared watch Address Size OF Cancel Add Bit Delete ARE Ek g T Ignore address for lables and symbols e To adda watch point 1 Click on the Add button on the Edit Test ASM Watch Points dialog box to open the Add dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 304 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1
216. a module that you recently used To download all modules Select one of the following operations e Select Debug gt Download Modules gt All Download Modules OR e Right click within the Download folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download all modules Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu option The Debug Settings dialog box opens The files will be downloaded to the target in order of the Download modules list An existing module which is not yet added to the Download modules list can be automatically downloaded to the target when it is added to the Download modules list To automatically download an existing module to the target when adding it to the Download modules list 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Download Module dialog box e Select File gt Download A New Module OR e Right click on a module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download A New Module All fields must be setup for the download module to be configured correctly REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 345 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Offset i Ff File format ElDwaf2 M Cancel Filename S CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME abs Browse ACCESS SIZE ho H T Download debug information only T Perform memory verify during download T
217. a number of macros this 1s easily achieved by the following operations One method for importing macro files is from the macro dialog The instructions are shown below To import an existing macro file into High performance Embedded Workshop 1 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens 2 Click the Import button A standard file browser is opened for you to select the existing macro file you wish to import 3 Select the file and click Select The file is now imported It automatically becomes the default macro file in the Current macro file drop down list The file is also copied into the Macros folder within the High performance Embedded Workshop management information folder under the application data folder for each user profile 4 Then click Close on the Macro dialog box and the macro file is ready for use Another method is to simply copy the new macro file into the Macros folder in the High performance Embedded Workshop root directory High performance Embedded Workshop will automatically detect the new file and add its information to the High performance Embedded Workshop macros dialog box The new file will not be the default file for use so you will then have to enter the macro dialog box to switch the default macro file to the newly copied one 15 4 Recording a macro There are a number of ways to record a macro file in the High performance Embedded Workshop these options are discussed below To record a macro fr
218. abled can be modified during execution of the program 13 Setting an update interval The interval to update the display contents of the Watch window during execution of the user program can be changed Support for this function depends on the debugger To set an update interval 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Update Interval The Update Interval Setting dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 459 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Update Interval setting Interval 40 10000meec 10meec unit flog MEC Cancel 3 Specify an update interval in 10 ms units for Interval The default value is 100 ms The valid range of values depends on the debugger in use 4 Click OK The specified update interval is applied to all panes of the Watch window The actual update interval may be longer than the specified value depending on the state of execution 14 Recording the history of updating of values The history of updating of the values of variables to which automatic update has been applied in the Watch window can be recorded into a file To start recording the history of updating of values 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Record Update Value and then Start Recording from submenus The Recording Settings dialog box opens Record Settings ki Recording Sheet OK Ca
219. acro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Apply button Click on the button Changes the performance conditions 15 5 2 12 Trigger Output Conditions dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Apply button Click on the button Changes the trigger output conditions REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 278 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 5 2 13 Realtime Profile window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file e E200F Emulator Software Target Operation Function Clear Data pop up menu Click on the menu option or toolbar button Clears all measurement data of option toolbar button real time profile Save To File pop up menu Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking Saves real time profile option toolbar button on the menu option or toolbar button measurement results to a file e E100 Emulator Software Target Operation Function Set pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the e Allocates real time profile memory dialog box opened by De allocates real time profile memory clicking onthe menu e _ Sets real time profile measurement mode option or toolbar button e Enables or disables each task ID individually Properties pop up menu option toolb
220. age 183 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Tip If you do not wish to see the result of command execution in the MS DOS command prompt window select the Close DOS Window on exit checkbox in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box 8 11 1 5 Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Compare L 2 To compare with the checked in file modify the file rcs_sample c and save it Select the file rcs_sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Diff The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the result of comparison Enter exit and press the Enter key This closes the MS DOS command prompt window RCS file res_sample c v Working file res_sample c head 1 1 branch locks strict user 1 1 access list symbolic names keyword substitution kv total revisions 1 selected revisions 1 description revision 1 1 locked by user date 2006 03 14 07 22 42 author user state Exp Initial revision 8 11 1 6 Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Use the check out command to undo the changes made in the file I Select the file rcs_sample c in the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Tools gt Version Control gt Check out 2 The MS DOS command prompt window appears and shows the result of check out REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page
221. agnifying glass icon lt p Once the user has selected Search this button will be changed to a STOP button allowing the user to cancel a search Any files that had been found before the search was cancelled will return to the unlocated state REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 349 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 8 Clicking OK then the files that were searched for and found will be located to that directory accept all searches and close the dialog box 9 Clicking Cancel completely cancel all searches that have been done and close the dialog without changing anything If you had done some searches and they clicked on cancel a confirmation box will appear as below Confirmation Request a 1 j Are pou sure you want to cancel all file relocations and discard changes T Don t ask this question again If you select Yes this will invoke the Locate Files dialog box and close the dialog box If you select No the dialog box will remain open allowing you to select OK If the confirmation is selected not to be shown again the default behavior will be Yes To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Show dialog to search on OK for directory browse dialog checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK If you select the OK button after selecting a
222. ains the function you want to assign Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box is displayed Select the Assign to Keyboard Shortcut check box Select the keyboard shortcut you wish to assign to the macro in the drop down list Click OK and the shortcut is now available for use Configuring the Macro tab of the Output window Shows the current records of macros You can view information such as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands recorded into a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file from execution of Tools gt Macro Recording to Tools gt Stop Macro It is also possible to view this information while recording REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 284 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility olo A at 2 1 7 B tl 9 Recording build wait Finished recording Build Record Macro Build Stop Macro Enter a macro name acre Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window d Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Co
223. al Filter by global symbols Normal Filter by local symbols Section sections containing symbols Section name Filter by section names File files containing symbols File name Filter by file names 6 Clicking the Set All button selects the check boxes of all filtering conditions 7 Clicking the Clear All button de selects the check boxes of all filtering conditions 8 Click OK Symbol information of the linkage editor shown in the right pane is filtered by the selected condition For further filtering by combining a different condition select another column and then select a filtering condition in the column To disable filtering de select the Enable Filter checkbox in the Filter Symbol dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 248 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 2 5 Viewing the source code for the address The source file for the address in the selected line will be opened in the editor window To view the source code for the address Select one of the following operations e Right click on the symbol list line in the right pane to open a pop up menu Then select View Source OR e Double click on the symbol list line in the right pane 13 2 6 Printing out the symbol information You can also print out the symbol information in the right pane To print out the symbol information 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standa
224. al property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information
225. all areas where no section is allocated which is indicated by Unallocated Area in the Name column 13 1 13 Viewing sections of size 0 You can view sections of size 0 By default this function is not selected To view sections of size 0 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Show No Size Section 3 The right pane shows all sections of size 0 At this time the End Address column does not show the end addresses 13 1 14 Viewing the source code for the address The source file for the address in the selected line will be opened in the editor window To view the source code for the address Select one of the following operations e Right click on the section list line in the right pane to open a pop up menu Then select View Source OR e Double click on the section list line in the right pane REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 243 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 1 15 Printing out the section list You can also print out the section list in the right pane To print out the section list 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box opens From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 13 2 Viewing symbols You can view symbols in each of the sections in the Map Symbol Information window Even if there are too many symbols the search o
226. all the keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Reset button All shortcuts revert to the default settings for the currently selected keyboard layout 2 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog box The keyboard shortcuts dialog box allows you to import and export keyboard settings to a defined file This allows you to easily transfer settings from one machine to another To import keyboard shortcuts 1 Select the keyboard layout you wish to replace with your imported settings in the Default keyboard layout drop down list 2 Click the Import button A standard file dialog box opens 3 Choose the filename to load the keyboard layout from 4 Click OK To export keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Export button A standard file dialog is displayed 2 Choose the filename to save the settings of the currently selected keyboard layout to 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 151 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 7 Scope of a control in the setup 6 7 1 Scope of a control in the Customize dialog box 6 Customizing the Environment The scope of each control in the Customize dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Customize differs This can be confusing so these have been listed below Tab Toolbar Command Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Keyboard 6 7 2 Scope of a control in the Options dialog box Control All All Applicati
227. ance Embedded Workshop to automatically open the last workspace when it is launched 4 Click the OK button W Open last workspace at start up 6 8 2 Restoring files on opening a workspace When you close a workspace the High performance Embedded Workshop stores the names of the files that were open at that time When you open a workspace the High performance Embedded Workshop can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened then set this checkbox To restore files on opening a workspace 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Restore files on opening workspace checkbox if you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened 4 Click the OK button J Restore files on opening workspace 6 8 3 Displaying workspace information on opening a workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what is contained within each workspace The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace This description can be displayed whenever a workspace is opened To enter a workspace description 1 Select the workspace icon from the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right clic
228. ance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility e M32C PC7501 Emulator Debugger e M16C R8C PC7501 Emulator Debugger e M32C PC4701 Emulator Debugger e M16C R8C PC4701 Emulator Debugger e M32C Compact Emulator Debugger e M16C R8C Compact Emulator Debugger e M32C FoUSB UART Debugger e MI16C R8C FoUSB UART Debugger While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window Window Name Opened by ASMWatch View gt Symbol gt ASMWatch CWatch View gt Symbol gt CWatch S W Break Points View gt Break gt S W Break Points Address Interrupt Break Points View gt Break gt Address Interrupt Break Points e E200F Emulator Software While a macro is being recorded operations made in the window or dialog box listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window or dialog box Window Dialog Box Name Opened by Editor Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Disassembly View gt Disassembly Label View gt Symbol gt Label Watch View gt Symbol gt Watch Locals View gt Symbol gt Locals Trace View gt Code gt Trace Event View gt Code gt Eventpoints Realtime Profile View gt Performance gt Realtime Profi
229. ance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more left to match 4 13 Setting the read only attribute for a file While using the High performance Embedded Workshop you can set a file to be read only When you attempt to save a read only file a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name To set a file to be read only 1 Select one of the following operations e Right click on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window to open a pop up menu You can even select multiple files OR e Right click within the editor window to open a pop up menu 2 Selecting Properties opens the Properties dialog box 3 Select the Read only checkbox If you have selected two or more files including both read only and writable files the checkbox is gray intermediate state By default this checkbox is not selected 4 The title bar of the editor window shows Read Only When a file is open within the editor window and if you switch on off the read only attribute of the file via the Windows Explorer it does not match the attribute shown on the title bar of the editor window because the title bar is not updated The attribute shown on the title bar is not updated until you start modifying the contents
230. and click the Go toolbar button dE or choose Debug gt Go e Change the PC value in the Register window e Place the text cursor not the mouse cursor to a target line in the editor or disassembly window and choose Set PC Here from the pop up menu 17 13 2 Running from reset To reset your user system and run your program from the Reset Vector address click the Reset Go toolbar button CEI or choose Debug gt Reset Go The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually at any time by clicking the Halt toolbar button 4 or by choosing Debug gt Halt Program Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 425 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 13 3 Running program ignoring any breakpoints Sometimes when you are debugging your application you may need to start running continuously but have breakpoints configured Instead of disabling all the breakpoints you can quickly execute the code using the Free Go feature To run from the current PC address but ignore any both software and hardware breakpoints e Click the Free Go toolbar button Zz OR e Choose Debug gt Free Go Note Support for this function depend
231. and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor Move the cursor to the previous word in the editor Move the cursor to the next word in the editor Switch virtual desktop Move to next tab For example the output or workspace window Move to previous tab For example the output or workspace window Show white space and tab characters in the editor Open the Image window Open TCL toolkit Line deletion in editor Find a matching brace Change the active Debugger to the next one in the Debuggers tab of the Workspace window Synchronized Debugging Facility Save all modified documents in the workspace Insert a template Change into a uppercase letter all the texts chosen in the editor Open the Waveform window Display PC position Search for the previous occurrence of the text chosen in the editor or open the Find dialog box Re shown the function name and parameter as a pop up window when the first open bracket is entered in the editor Switch windows in the editor Select from the cursor to the beginning of the file Select from the cursor to the end of the file Select the previous word in the editor Select the next word in the editor Display context sensitive help Previous bookmark Search for the previous occurrence of the specified text Run from reset Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Show context menu Same as right click pop up menu Step out of the curren
232. and press the Insert key o Right click within the window and select Add Watch from the pop up menu Add Watch Ei Variable or expression Cancel Detail Scope Curent Scope Curent Scope Global dbschc waltchT est abs Intprg co watch est abs lowlvl src watch Testd abs lows ciwatchT est4 abs resetorg c watchT estt abs srk cowatchTest4 abs vecttbl cwatchTest4 abs watch T est4 cwatchT est4 abs REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 451 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 2 Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch in the Variable or expression field The element number for an array entered in the Variable or expression field can be binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Note however that there are the following rules on the prefix Element Number of the Array Rule Binary The prefix must be Ob or OB Octal The prefix must be 0 Decimal No prefixes are required Hexadecimal The prefix must be Ox or OX a 0b00011110 H OOO00LZ02 OOO011A4 a 0E00011110 H OOO002Z02 QOO011A4 a Os6 H OOO00202 OOO01144 ali H OOO000202 OOO011A4 al xie H OOO0U2Ue2 OOO011A4 al UX1E H OOO00202 OOO011A4 3 Select the scope for the variable from the Scope drop down list Even when there are two or more variables with the same name scope can be separately specified to distinguish them The available types of scope are list
233. ankO from the pop up menu with the Register window active Through the operation of option BankO and Bank1 the value of flag does not change Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 7 4 Setting the layout To set the layout of the Register Window choose Layout from the register Window pop up menu The followings can be selected Radix Switch display or non display of radix FLAGs Switch display or non display of flags display area When the radix or flag is shown the option is checked REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 419 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility When the radix and flags are displayed Value Radix _ RO OOOO00L0 Hex Rl OOOO00FO Hex Ra OOO40001 Hex ne MD RB EL FD HM Q IMASE Ds TASK Iz PELE ele ere 1 1 IMASE 1 IMASE IO S T FR S2 PR ON 1 1 01l 1 CAUSE E CAUSE V CAUSE 2 CAUSE 0 CAUSE U T T CAUSE I ENABLE Y ENABLE 2 ENABLE 0 T 0 0 T ENABLE U ENABLE I FLAG FLAG 2 FLAG O 0 0 0 0 0 FLAG U FLAG I RML RAO T 0 0 1 17 7 5 Choosing a register to be displayed To choose a register to be displayed in the Register window choose Settings from the register pop up menu This dialog box is shown in following figure Settings 7 Registers Select all iwJRA1O IMACH elect a WRT wIMACL WA 2 IPR Unselect all WRIA MSPC WIR15 WIRO EBANK WIPE
234. applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button see Reference 5 Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of all available placeholders An explanation of each version control placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in the table below Pop up menu Placeholder Value And How It Is Determined User login name USERNAME Current user login General tab User login password PASSWORD Current user password General tab Version control directory VCDIR Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment COMMENT Comment specified before command execution File path name FULLFILE Full path and name of the file involved in the operation Filename FILENAME Filename including extension of the file involved in the operation File leaf FILELEAF Filename excluding extension of the file involved in the operation File extension EXTENSION Extension of the file involved in the operation File directory FILEDIR Directory of the file involved in the operation Configuration directory CONFIGDIR Current configuration directory Project directory PROJDIR Current project directory Workspace directory WORKSPDIR Current workspace directory Temp Directory TEMPDIR Temporary directory Command directory EXEDIR Version control executable directory Windows directory WINDIR Directory where Win
235. ar button Set the unit of the measurement of a realtime profile Save To File pop up menu option toolbar Saves real time profile measurement results to a button file Clear Data pop up menu option toolbar button Click on the menu Clears all measurement data of real time profile option or toolbar button 15 5 2 14 Configuration properties dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function OK button Click on the button e Selects the operating clock e Sets up the debugger e Selects a switching function e Allocates emulation memory e Sets on overwriting of the internal flash memory e Sets the warning of exceptional events 15 5 2 15 Device Setting dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function OK button Click on the button Selects a device and operation mode REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 279 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 5 2 16 Start Stop Function Setting dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation OK button Click on the button 15 5 2 17 ASMWatch window Function 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Specifies the address of a work area and an executing routine While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be reco
236. aracters in search strings when performing a find replace or find in files operation These characters are listed in the table below and explained underneath Character Function This character matches any single character except the newline character For example t p matches top tip but not trap This character matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline Thus this character will not match across new lines The character will match as few occurrences as are necessary to make the rest of the pattern match For example t o matches the to of too the tro of trowel and the ty o of sporty orange but not smart orange because the character does not match across a new line t This character matches the tab character Example 1 t8 Finds every occurrence of a tab character followed by an 8 Example 2 init t Finds every occurrence of a tab character following init This matches any one character or a range of single characters listed within the brackets Brackets cannot be nested specifies a range of characters e g a z or 0 9 The beginning character in the range must have a lower ASCII value than the ending character of the range matches a single character if it is not any one of the characters between and This pattern also matches newline characters unless the newline character is included within the brac
237. arch for the next occurrence of the text chosen in the editor or open the Find dialog box Close the editor window Switch windows in the editor Build an individual file Enable or disable a breakpoint on the current line Re shown list members as a pop up window in the editor Delete current word Stop tool execution Copy the selection to the clipboard Switch windows in the editor REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 509 of 523 CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Function key CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL ALT CTRL ALT CTRL ALT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT Key HOME END UP ARROW DOWN ARROW LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW 1 4 PAGE UP PAGE DOWN Zl IlITyAI D o lt lt C adajo SPACEBAR TAB HOME END LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW F1 F2 F3 F5 F8 F10 F11 F12 DELETE ESC TAB HOME END UP ARROW DOWN ARROW 8 Keyboard Shortcuts Function Return the cursor in the editor to the beginning of the current file Send the cursor in the editor to the end of the current file Scroll window up and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor Scroll window down
238. ariable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment tab To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab 2 Click the Modify button The Environment Variable dialog box opens 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK button to modify the environment variable Environment Yariable x Variable OF pm w Cancel Value S TOOLDIR bin Placeholder To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment tab 2 Click the Remove button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 137 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration Note Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For further information about using placeholders see Reference 5 Placeholders 5 6 Technical support The Tools Administration dialog box is capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the High performance Embedded Workshop itself and cannot be registered unregistered manually If you check the Show all components checkbox on the Tools Administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see the figure below Sen Project Generators g H85 H87300 Project Generator Ta
239. ariable declaration declares a variable which can then be used in any statement throughout the rest of the hmake file A declaration has the following syntax lt variable name gt lt value gt Any number of white space characters are allowed between the variable name and the sign and the value and the sign The value may be split over several lines using a V character If the value contains V characters within the main text then these are taken literally Only V characters followed by a new line are considered to indicate a value wrapping over more than one line There follows some examples of valid variable declarations EXECUTABLE c dir prog exe OUTPUT c dir2 filel out INPUT c dir2 filel c DEPEND c dir2 file2 h c dir2 file3 h c dir2 file4 h In order to use a variable later in the hmake file write the variable name with added to the front and added to the back The variable name along with the characters will be substituted with the variables value For examples of this see later under description blocks Only alphanumeric characters and underscore characters are allowed in variable names It is possible to use a variable inside the declaration of a different variable but all variables must be declared before they are used 13 3 Description blocks Basic outline A description block specifies one or more targets zero or more dependants and a list of commands which sh
240. ariable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the variable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment list To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list 2 Click the Modify button beside the list 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK button to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list 2 Click the Remove button beside the list 8 9 Controlling execution of a Version Control System The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box allows you to control the way in which the version control system is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 176 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System The execution of a version control system can be modified via the following three checkboxes e Prompt before executing command If this checkbox is selected then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated checkbox Clicking the OK button will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking the Can
241. arting a macro play function Editing a current macro file Assigning the selected macro Removing the selected macro Macro Recording Starts a macro record operation REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 25 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Tools Menu Macros Toolbar Function Play Macro i The Select Macro Function dialog box opens Choose which macro you wish to execute D Pauses the current macro operation Stop Macro m Stops the current macro operation The procedure from selection of Record Macro to that of Stop Macro D consists one macro and one High performance Embedded Workshop macro file can record multiple macros a set of High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands A macro includes multiple High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands The figure below shows the High performance Embedded Workshop macro file and macros Macro File Record Macro gt hacro Operations tart Reset CPU lf reset Step In Gy4 step Ox Stop Macro DO gt Wacro Operations End Enter macro name Record Macro acro Build Start Build build wait Stop Macro DO gt acro Build End Enter a macro name The current records of macros are shown in the Macro tab of the Output window The Build macro in the figure above is outputted as follows 4 o ot al at 21 21 2 I E Record Macro Recording eG Build build wait Stop Macro
242. as been enabled Specifies the number of frames to be redrawn image continuously Frame Count Buffer Full Size Hex Specifies the number of frames 2 or more Displays the size of the buffer required for images display as obtained from the width and height and the number of frames in hexadecimal notation rCENESAS Page 399 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility View Specifies whether display is on all or part of the screen in hexadecimal notation valid when 8Bit has Information been selected for RGB or BGR View Mode Specifies the entire part to be displayed in the image Full Size The image is displayed on the whole screen Part Size The image is displayed on part of the screen Start Position Specifies where the display of data is to start Top Display of data starts at the upper left position Bottom Display of data starts at the lower left position Position Specifies the start position of the image where part of the image is to be displayed Valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X coordinate of the start position unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Y Position Specifies the Y coordinate of the start position unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Width Height Size Specifies the height and width of an image to be displayed on part of the screen Width Pixel Specifies the width of the disp
243. as the floating point constants in this expression only when a compiler that supports C99 specifications is in use 17 18 2 3 Supporting duplicate labels In some languages for example in C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address Just entering the label name is ambiguous so the High performance Embedded Workshop will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 443 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Select Function 7 Select Function Hame Set Function Hame iSample changeflong 2006 5 ample 5 ample 2000 5 ample sort long t 2068 Counter All Function Select Function Set Function E Functions E Functions fo Functions Lancel Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally only one function can be selected at one time except for setting breakpoints as multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Name Displays the names of the functions Address Displays the addresses of the functions Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Name Displays the names of the functions Address Displays the addresses of the functions Counter Displa
244. ase letters then check the Match case checkbox 12 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further information 13 If you clicked the Find Next button the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click the Replace button if you want to replace it Click Replace All button to replace all occurrences or click the Cancel button to stop the replace action If you select Selection in the Replace In field the replace action will be performed in the range of the selected text If you select Whole file the replace action will be performed on the whole file If you select All open files all files that are currently open in the editor will have the replace operation carried out on them 44 4 Jumping to a specified line To jump to a line in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations to open the Goto dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 114 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor e Press CTRL G OR e Select Edit gt Goto Line OR e Select Goto Line from the pop up menu in the Editor window Goto Line number il Cancel 3 Enter the number of the line that you want to jump to into the Line number box and then click the OK button The insertion cursor will be placed at the s
245. at you wish to view the mapping from the Show mappings for project drop down list The High performance Embedded Workshop workspace and project directory and Visual SourceSafe project directory are shown in the list Mapping of projects can be added modified or removed For detail see section 8 6 Specifying file locations Custom Commands Mappings General chow mappings for project Project Name Source Director C Wworkspacesiworkepace Nam Workspace_Name Add CworkspacesWorkepace Nam orkspace_MameProject_Nar Modit Remove To define a new directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the Mapping tab 3 Click the Add button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box opens 4 Specify a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace directory or project directory in the Source directory field Select one of the following operations e Enter the directory name OR e Click the placeholder button Then select Project directory or Workspace directory from the menu OR e Click the Browse button to open the Browse to Source Directory dialog box Select the directory and click the Select button 5 Enter the name of the Visual SourceSafe project directory to be mapped to the source directory in the Version Control Directory Mapping field 6 Click the OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 206 of 523 Jul 01 2
246. ated Note however that High performance Embedded Workshop is not capable of recording all operations in the High performance Embedded Workshop system corresponding to the High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands For the operations that can be recorded a macro record icon is shown in the Macro Recording column of the menu list This indicates that this operation can be recorded into a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file Notes 1 Changing a project session or configuration 2 Compilation and build 3 Downloading a module changing a memory value or register value setting deleting a software breakpoint and running a program The macro recording support facility is available in the Tools menu and on the Macros toolbar The procedure from selection of Record Macro to that of Stop Macro consists one macro and one High performance Embedded Workshop macro file can record multiple macros a set of High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands A macro includes multiple High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands 15 1 Macro menu and toolbar The macro recorder has both a menu and toolbar integrated into the High performance Embedded Workshop The macro menu is available on the Tools menu It has the following standard menu options Macros Record Macro D Play Macro le Stop haca The Macros menu option opens the Macro dialog box This allows management of t
247. ats swan I E EE EE E ER 225 12 3 Jump to a definition from the Cito cccccccccccccccceeessesseeeeeccceeceeeeeeeeeeesaaaessssseseeeeeeeeeeeseseaaeessaaaasssseeeseeeeeess 22 12 4 Drag and drop navigation items sci siccicencicc cua tatentesancsatundwasacioss ceaceadwabadadaiduateddnednciad Seuletabendadanddadebeasantonssdeedonuabaceiaads 228 Pes SME CCL Cao A E A E E E E A E A E E E E 229 MDs e e E E AEA E DAEN A I AEE A 231 ILL Manamo sechon seS S so janice tecenssarerewicasocaneytacseucetmaeneceneneseseieasnteatansnawmteaesceeneseuesqeuiateneeeanlaua creneneueiewinrietaatnie 233 13 1 1 Opening the Map Section Information window cccccsssssssssseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeaeeeseees 233 15 1 2 Ent ring exiting he edit Mode size s cccassececasccassancnsessaunceracagngesansnnnasapaneiansiedagsnnaaoacsagnesanna pacassancuearsernugbonecantds 236 13 1 3 WANG 4 SUE Ae O a E srr ere Nea nr eet oer a ene eee 237 MM AIA A O oa ch aaron ees ceseatre E E tenenonteheoscunsnavedsascanees 238 13 1 5 Addin am overlay CLOUD esrara tec 238 13 1 6 Automatically registering the unregistered section ccccccccccccececeeessseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaassseseeeeeeeeeeeeess 239 DON ACUI SC CCE E E tee cvensnc dS cmamonGs E E E E 240 13 1 8 SCCM he primary SECON sesser EE EEEO AIEE EEEE EEES 240 13 1 9 SONE ACON p e E 241 13 1 10 Automatically allocating the memory resource eeessessssssseeeeeeerresssssssssssseeeteerrss
248. avaanic atduracencoweeciiaddenncaivaseeewasimen dal dauetssnndiaadoucaubinedad Gbundn edaveiveunideumencreddeheoumentdavevnoncdanen 411 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page vii Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 17 6 1 Ope nne NO WOW saasreacron set centre eit see cnins 26 AE ES 411 L762 Expanding an VQ register display ossc siwecdnocunceerscsteacametrnoutontiuosneutshootnedsuneanedesantuecdenunnedehacsinendanetesutnendbuoeveseees 412 17 6 3 Modifying the values of I O registers ccsssssnsesesseseeeeeeceeeeeceeeaaaaaesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeauaasssseesseeeeeeeeeess 413 17 6 4 Refreshing the IO Window 0 ccssssseeeeecccceecececaanessssesseeeeccecceeeeeeeeaaeesssssseesseeeeeeeeeceeeeessaaagasseeeseeeeeeeeess 413 17 6 5 Disabling refresh of the IO window ccccccccccccccccasssssesseseeecceeceeeeeseaaaaessssseeeseseeeeceeeeeeeseaaaaaassassseeeseeeeess 413 17 6 6 Selecting the I O register S tO VIEW sssesssseeecccccceecceeanaseessssseeeceeeceeeseeeeeeeaaaeessssseseeeeeeeeeeeseesaaaaaggeesees 414 176 7 Loadine anm VO Ml asec tesectinee sete cine ese ysorseeatne ne peie eri a Ene svat cue EENEN Cean Te E PE eE TEENE i EEr EEEa 415 17 6 8 Panting ibe curently displayed conl eniS eroii e EE E a 416 17 6 9 Saving the cutrently displayed contents si c2scsissdccssnsdaneseiducsudscsdodadneguoncdenatecseannsdoccsocedeasennedesaasedenganiedsesdodane 416 CEO Fo TN E a E E E E sanaudendenauel 416 IOA
249. b dbsch c machine h reselprg cpp sbrk c sbrk h Browse A 4 Workspace Aa DebugUnly Debuglrly SEN Debug Emulator sf J Source H E DemoSH4 H Workspace Mame EE Compact Disc D T Look in subdirectories Do not show on download UF Cancel ae To locate files 1 The Last searched directory holds the last directory that was searched for these module files 2 The Search status field shows the number of files that were found against the number that have not this is only relevant to the files in the dialog and do not account for any previous searches 3 The Files to find list holds a list of all the files that could not be found they will appear in short filename format and will be searched for in this manner 4 The Browse section allows the user to select a directory in which to search the remaining files for 5 The Look in subdirectories check box will look for the files in all sub directories for the chosen directory 6 The Do not show on download check box will not bring up this dialog box on download if there are files that can not be located This checkbox is also present in the Confirmation tab of the Options dialog box and can be turned off and on here 7 Pressing Search will look for the files in the Browse list in the chosen directory files that have been found will be removed from the Files to find list Any searched directories in the Browse section will be shown by a folder and m
250. be displayed 17 3 26 Loading a memory area from a file A file can be loaded to the debugger s memory Choose Load from the pop up menu of the memory window The Load Program dialog box opens Load Program 1 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 395 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Enter the file format in File format file name in Filename offset address in Offset address and access size in Access size To verify memory check Perform memory verify during download If the load address value is to be changed enter the offset value in the Offset field otherwise enter 0 17 3 27 Splitting up the window display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar To cancel the split up display select Split from the pop up menu again 17 3 28 Verifying a memory area A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Choose Debug gt Verify Memory The Verify Memory dialog box opens Yernly Memory ki File format Cancel Filename Oo Offset address a ACCESS SIZE o Enter the file format in File format file name in Filename offset address in Offset address and access size in Access size The message File verified OK appears when verification is successful If the verification failed Verify failed appears Support fo
251. be invoked via Setup gt Options Click the OK button in the Workspace Properties dialog box to open the workspace Click the Cancel button to stop opening the workspace M Show workspace information on workspace open The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last workspaces that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the Recent Workspaces submenu This gives you a shortcut to opening workspaces which you have used recently To open a recently used workspace Select Open a recent project workspace in the Welcome dialog box select the name of the workspace from the drop down list and then click the OK button Another way is to select File gt Recent Workspaces and then from this submenu select the name of the workspace Note The High performance Embedded Workshop only permits one workspace to be open at a time Consequently if you attempt to open a second workspace the first will be closed before the new one is opened 1 7 Using old workspaces The High performance Embedded Workshop can open any workspace that was created on a previous version of the High performance Embedded Workshop This should be automatically upgraded when the workspace is opened A back up version of the initial workspace or project file must be saved in the current directory of the file that has been upgraded 1 8 Saving a workspace The amount of information on workspaces and projects to be saved increases as the Hig
252. bedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Both a start and end address should be supplied You also need to specify the full filename to save the information to If needed you can browse to the file to use Click OK 17 2 2 12 Printing the disassembly view The disassembly view can be printed by using File gt Print or the Print toolbar button 8 when it is in focus or by using the menu Print on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode pop up menu When Print is selected the Disassembly Print Range dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to print Disassembly Print Range Ei EI Start Address 00002000 al End Address Jooo0201A al Cancel Both a start and end address should be supplied Clicking OK on this dialog box then passes the print selection to the standard print formatting and selection dialog box From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 17 2 3 Looking at the current PC position To automatically display the program counter PC click the Display PC toolbar button Fc or select Debug gt Display PC This will open the editor or disassembly at the current PC 17 2 4 Highlighting the line at the PC In the Editor and Disassembly windows an icon in the S W Breakpoints column indicates the PC location The source or assembly language code at the PC can be highlighted To highlight the line at the PC location 1 Select Setup gt Options The Opt
253. bedded Workshop interfaces To check your debug session setup display the Debug Settings dialog box Select one of the following operations e Select Debug gt Debug Settings OR e Right click on the download module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Debug Settings from the pop up menu Debug Settings SimSessionSH 4 Target Options al Project Name Target SH 4 Simulator Corre Single Core Target Debug format EID warta r Download modules Offset Address Format SICONFIGDIAY S PAO OOOO0000 EltOwart Target Core Debug format or Download modules can be selected on the Target tab of the Debug Settings dialog box Note that Core can be specified by using Synchronized Debugging facility REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 335 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To change the target the following operations is necessary 1 Select the project that needs to be changed in the tree on the left of the dialog It defaults to the current project 2 Select the session which is to be modified in the drop list above the tree 3 Change the target using the target drop list control This removes any target specific setup options that have been previously been set Moreover the Options tab of the Debug Settings dialog box provides the following options e Configuring the automat
254. belonging to each file are displayed below it in the alphabetical order REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 222 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities To group the display of navigation items by a file 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Check Group By File mi eE 9 OF E DemoSHd e z FLMAX EJ envine z F LMM E intpreare z HEAPSIEE EJ lowlylave aD INT OFFSET E owsree a OSTREAM C Delimes a LF A C Functions a O RDOHLY B Ctt Clasres z ORIWA By Glebals O WROMLY 3 a CLOSEALLGon SR hi MT OLB Sid ay STDERR p ob STDIN a niles a STOUT Eri charzethyoid 9 C Funetions ch rput SBYTE a _CLOSEALL Goud a close SINT fikno a IKT OUB tod gy iimo changeling a ag feces SINT fileno SOWORD oliset SINT bese close SINT tileno ag cpentSBYTE name SINT mode SINT fle S becki SINT dileno SOWORD offset SINT base read SINT fileno SBYTE bul UINT count a momirod Jy sml but a Monual Aesetoid dg erie SINT fileno SBYTE buf UINT count 44 coen_SBYTE name SINT mode SINT fie HS lowsreh E PorwerQh_Reset vad H E resetpree A reed SIHT tileno SBYTE buf UINT count H 0 C Defines 4 sork sent see amp INT OFFSET E sorillone a i a SR hn 40 write SINT fileno SBYTE buf UINT comt B D C Functions S 00 C Glasses E PowerON Resethnid Ho aa umnamed_ Marval Peset
255. bol dialog box appears Find Symbol 2 Marne main Match case Cancel wild card 3 Enter a symbol name you wish to find in Name or select one from those you have previously searched for in the drop down list box 4 To distinguish uppercase and lowercase characters select the Match case checkbox 5 To use wild cards or select the Wild card checkbox ie A character i A string 6 Click OK When a symbol is found a line that contains the symbol is highlighted in the right pane To find the next occurrence of the symbol select Find Next 13 2 4 Filtering the symbol information You can view the filtered symbol information of the linkage editor To filter the symbol information 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Filter The Filter Symbol dialog box appears REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 247 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map Filter Symbol E M Enable Filter Filter Colurnr Attribute Set All Clear All cancel 3 Select the Enable Filter checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Select a column in Filter Column 5 Select a filtering condition in Filter Item Filter Column Filter Item Function Attribute symbol attribute Function Filter by functions Data Filter by data symbols Entry Filter by positions to start execution None Filter by other symbols such as labels Scope scope attribute Glob
256. bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Clears all bookmarks in the current file Defines a template Inserts a template Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Sets the status of editor columns Opens the Breakpoins dialog box Evaluates simple and complex expressions Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 488 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Main Menus 1 3 View Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Key Toolbar Macro Saving into Test Function Button Recording 1 Image File 2 View Differences Opens the Difference window Map 3 Opens the map window Command Line CTRL L Opens the Command Line window TCL Toolkit CTRL SHIFT K See the Tcl Tk Additional document Workspace ALT K a D Opens the Wor
257. box is only accessible when no workspace is open Tools Administration Registered components Component Version al Cancel a Toolchaing a see H85 H8300 Standard Toolchain 6 2 1 0 2 Renesas M16C Standard Toolchain 5 44 00 Hnn Renesas M32C Standard Toolchain 5 41 01 i m SuperH RISC engine Standard Toalchain 3 2 0 0 O Register A Sy System Tools fia Call walker 1 07 00 Enregister H Seres Librarian Interace 1 03 00 A Mapwiewy 1 07 00 Espot r40 Family CPU 1 03 00 a Binary File Object Reader 1 05 00 oi ad Ree CoN a E 4101 bd nn Tool information T Show all components Current HE tools location C Program Files Aeneas Hew Modify TELE There are five standard types of component Toolchain A Toolchain is a set of build phases e g compiler assembler linker and librarian These components provide the build capability System Tool A System Tool is an application EXE that can be launched from the Tools menu These are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an interactive graphical librarian etc Utility Phase A Utility Phase is a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific Debugger Component A Debugger Component is a component that supports some specific deb
258. bugger M16C Tiny M16C 62P E8 Emulator Debugger e M32C 80 E8 Emulator Debugger While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window Window Name Opened by Editor Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Disassembly View gt Disassembly Label View gt Symbol gt Label Watch View gt Symbol gt Watch Locals View gt Symbol gt Locals Event View gt Code gt Eventpoints REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 272 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility e E10A USB Emulator Software other than the H8SX device group e E6000 Emulator Software e K6000H Emulator Software While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window Window Name Opened by Editor Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Disassembly View gt Disassembly Label View gt Symbol gt Label Watch View gt Symbol gt Watch Locals View gt Symbol gt Locals e E100 Emulator Software While a macro is being recorded if you handle a menu option shortcut key or toolbar button of those listed below these op
259. button to close the dialog box 3 8 Generating a makefile The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to generate a makefile associated with your workspace High performance Embedded Workshop is capable of generating hmake nmake and gnumake compatible files The make tool to execute makefiles is operated in the DOS command prompt and thus the use of makefiles allows you to build projects without High performance Embedded Workshop The generated makefiles can be executed in the High performance Embedded Workshop For details see section 3 9 Using a makefile inside the High performance Embedded Workshop system To generate a makefile 1 Open a workspace where you wish to generate a makefile if the workspace includes two or more projects the active project must be one in which you wish to generate a makefile 2 Select a configuration for generating a makefile REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 95 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 Select Build gt Generate Makefile The Generate Makefile dialog box opens Generate Makefile Generate makefile for the current configuration in the currently active project Cancel C all configurations in the currently active project all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace Makefile name PROJECTNAME _ CONFIGNAME mak gt Makefile format HM ake t Relative paths
260. c _ vhandler sre la CG source file a dbsctc 2 dbscte z resetpre c os E resetpre c E a 2 ebrk c a When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown below If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location EE REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 a Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview To dock the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating window OR e Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the High performance Embedded Workshop main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the windows To float the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked window OR e Drag the control bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the High performance Embedded Workshop main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar e Drag the control bar of a docked window while pressing the CTRL key To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Select one of the following operations
261. cccccccceeeeeseseseseeeecceeeeeeeeesausaseussseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaasaassseeeeeeeeeees 111 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page ii Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 4 4 1 PTA MUO Ke enter ace geebeaceien E E E E E E E E E 111 4 4 2 Finding texi ie MeS eseon e E TEE OE EEE TEGESI 112 4 4 3 PRC LACM E a E O E O 113 4 4 4 Jumping toa SPECI IME serra E EEEE OEE A GOEREE EUn 114 4 5 Boo oa R R E EE E asso TE EE E E E E S E E E A O E E 115 Ao Printing aiies sssr N EE E EEEE N S Ai 116 At Conheurine text layoUf scssimssercuniencusi reene bond renere Eus Erisin Eea En api E Ea aaar ke r teen nereis tetanii 117 4 7 1 a A E E E A E E T EE T E E A E E 117 4 7 2 Chano m PADIS oacocadnonie tones sa actanal ecacsnsnoncesesiatecuasaaaeeoneta cout sce asanariessedansanactanet pac sunyrcaeanesietesaisetsaahecscunesauedeaseatess 118 4 7 3 PPO TINGS CLO Oe des feces seteaasas E santana aneonantnaasee A E EE 118 4 8 Splitting a Vy OW tec cecorasie sa ceapatqnansarnnnanecaeatmeeneitaaaseanadicannastectameahaoneiaaestoandauasaanedeneapheanzonsiiuatvusaadgnetaatoneneonsemsnuaureotatoants 119 VT WIN EO ROO esas ce css etc E EEN don ad nse E satan seeds E E 120 ATO Syntax Coloring sersreediasisierrarrenenre ienna inana ai r aa a aenda aE aE a as rin aR aTa 120 4 10 1 Chanoine Tex COLOS roinaa e a T a EEEa 121 4102 Creatine Mew Key W OlS ereraa a TE EE E E Ea On T KAE 121 4 10 3 Enabling disabling syntax coloring cccccccccccccccce
262. ce file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders as in figure ii below If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies as in figure i below uw at Workspace OF x Ww at Workspace 0 a Assembly source file B a Assembly source file i FS loull ere bee FE loval sre E a C source file EI a C source file P PI dbecte HE dbsctc Beene Demo c z intprg c E intprg c LTE lows ce z vect h H E resetprg c H E lowste c l hke lowerc h Le LE veettble E resetpra c H E Dependencies T stacksct h E lowste h E E sbrk c a shrkh sbrk i a E doka E vecttbl c Eun vecth Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown as in figure J below For example in C code if you write a include statement such as include lt stdio h gt stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes checkbox as in figure jj below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 72 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics li li Dependencies Dependencies sbrk h stackecth E builtin h E smachineh stackscth stddeth stdioh stdlibh string h E umachineh Show File Paths By default any files will not be shown
263. ceholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders This means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 146 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment Placehalders Applicaton wide custom placeholders Placeholder ficaiti Hemose Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder A Modi Ke Remove LL To add a custom placeholder 2 Note Select Setup gt Customize The Tools Customize dialog box opens Select the Placeholders tab Choose whether you need to use an application wide or workspace wide placeholder Click the Add button which is adjacent to the list you require The Add New Placeholder dialog box opens In the fields provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means Choose a directory which relates to this placeholder In High performance Embedded Workshop V 2 01 or later version the user defined directory can be set as the custom placeholder which can be used for setting the toolchain option When the directory path is specified specify an absolute path in Directory as shown in figure below Hew Custom Placeholder Ei E4 Placeholder ook ju SERDIA Cancel Description User define directory Directory
264. cel button will abort the operation e Run in DOS window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this checkbox Select Close DOS window on exit checkbox if you wish the DOS window to close after execution has been completed e Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the High performance Embedded Workshop substitutes the VCDIR placeholder it uses the backward slash character V to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then select the Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter checkbox 8 10 Specifying a user name and password Most version control tools will require you to pass a username and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users The custom version control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAME and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a co
265. ch time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a Build Build All or Build File operation 6 10 Customizing the font in your views The High performance Embedded Workshop contains many components which you may wish to make look differently It is possible to change the font and text coloring for the views To change the look of your windows 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the view you are interested in changing the appearance of To change all views select the All views category REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 159 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 3 Expand the item in the tree to see all items you can change the look of 4 Select the item Notice the tab changes on the right of this dialog box 5 Change the font or text color 6 Click OK to save the changes and the views will be automatically updated with the new coloring Format Wiews Y BS am Selected Text Text E SOUCe ie Command Line E stack Trace E 1a EI Register E TOL Toolkit E otatus Difference E Memory H ER Cutout Bs a Madity a Es al Font Font Courier New Point Size ic HEW Sample Text 7 Renove Cancel The Format Views dialog box allows you to customize
266. characters of a file extension string The drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to new group option and enter a description that defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open lt extension group gt with drop down list e Editor e None e Other e Windows default If Editor is selected the Open File function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the High performance Embedded Workshop editor If None is selected then the Open File operation is disabled when it is attempted Selecting Other allows you to configure another tool for the Open File operation See section 2 5 1 Associating an application with a file group for more details If Windows default is selected then the Open File function in the Workspace window passes the Open File operation to the Windows operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 56 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 5 3 Creating a new file extension If your files use a different extension from those
267. cimal pop up menu option toolbar button Radix gt Octal pop up menu option toolbar button Radix gt Binary pop up menu option toolbar button or sign Click on the sign Function Sets real time check of a symbol to enable Sets real time check of all symbols to enable Sets real time check of a symbol to disable Sets real time check of all symbols to disable Starts to record the updated values Stops recording the updated values Adds a symbol Deletes and adds a symbol Edits the value of a symbol Deletes a symbol Deletes all watch items Sets radix for hexadecimal for this value Sets radix for decimal for this value Sets radix for octal for this value Sets radix for binary for this value Expands or collapses a symbol REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 276 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Target Operation Function Watched variable name Make setting in the dialog box Deletes and adds a symbol opened by double clicking a value Value In place edit Edits the value of a symbol Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking a value Note Scope is not recordable 15 5 2 5 Local window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Edit pop up menu Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking on the menu opt
268. code are guaranteed Please read the hardware manual for the microcomputer to check if the generated source code is applicable and modify the code as required REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Introduction About This User s Manual This user s manual describes the High performance Embedded Workshop system This user s manual describes information on the basic look and feel of the High performance Embedded Workshop and customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop environment and detail the build and the debugging functions common to the High performance Embedded Workshop products The figures in this document show the High performance Embedded Workshop operating with a debugger for the SuperH family For details on the debugger refer to the user s manual or help information for the emulator or simulator included in the package This user s manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective user s manuals The High performance Embedded Workshop is customized in various languages This user s manual gives descriptions on the English version of the High performance Embedded Workshop application Document Conventions This user s manual uses the following typographic conventions Convention Meaning
269. code is option and set the drop down list and edit box as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the High performance Embedded Workshop will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If this is the case no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the High performance Embedded Workshop will not check the return code of each command Consequently all commands will execute regardless 8 6 Specifying file locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever GET the file MAIN C To resolve this problem High performance Embedded Workshop uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings Directory mappings tell the High performance Embedded Workshop which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map to which controlled directories 1 e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two
270. cording the history of automatically updated values 2 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu Select Record Update Value and then Stop Recording from submenus Recording is automatically stopped when A program is downloaded or unloaded Expansion of watched variables to be recorded is collapsed The radix for watched variables to be recorded is changed A new variable to be watched is added to the sheet selected for recording The order of watched variables to be recorded is changed Automatic update of watched variables to be recorded is canceled 15 Changing text colors You can customize the font and text coloring for the Watch window through the Format Views dialog box the Text category in the table below It is also possible to use the Format Views dialog box to specify the color for memory with a specific attribute or changed values shown in the Value column of the Watch window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 461 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To change the look of the Watch window 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the Watch item in the tree and expand it 3 Select the category of objects to be customized Category Objects to be Customized Foreground color default Background color default Text Text shown in the window Black White Read Memory that has been read Black Green Writ
271. ctal Binary Display in binary 9 Specifying the default radix If you select a variable and click on Radix gt Set Initial the Initial Radix dialog box opens Initial Radix ki OF pree Cancel Select a radix from the list box This will be applied as the default radix for newly added variables 10 Saving the Watch window contents in a file To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the pop up menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten 11 Opening a Memory window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choosing Go To Memory from the pop up menu opens the Memory window If you drag an item in the Watch window and drop it into the Address column of the Memory window the address of the variable will be the first address shown in the Memory window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 458 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility x JRE OR hx Se e ol 0 H 11223844 RO H ogoogogn R 2 H o0o00000 R B H ogoogodn E A H anaoaogo E 5 H ogoogodn B H ogoogogn AR 7 H oooooo00 F 8 H ogoog
272. ctions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window fe Clears the contents of the window Save El Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Test tab Shows the results and progress of the current test execution test support facility The test execution progress shows the current test being executed and the number of tests remaining If errors occur then these are displayed in this window For details on the test support facility see Chapter 16 Test Support Facility Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window d Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Version Control tab Shows the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control
273. ctual machine code in the debugger s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly view will show the new assembly language code but the source view will be unchanged This is true even if the source file contains assembler 17 2 2 10 Disassembly find in range The disassembly find in range can be used to find a certain text string in the disassembly view between two addresses Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode and select Find in Range The Find in Range dialog box opens Find in Range Ei Ei me ff Start Address El Cancel End Address El Enter your search string the start and end address that should be searched Click OK The view then selects the first instance of that string in the range Note Subsequent find operations will find strings only in the paged disassembly area not the complete range 17 2 2 11 Saving disassembly text The contents of the disassembly view can be saved by using the Save Disassembly Text menu from the Disassembly field in disassembly mode or mixed mode pop up menu When Save Disassembly Text is selected the Save Disassembly Text dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to save Save Disassembly Text ki E4 Start Address ooonzo00 il End Address ooon2014 Bl Cancel Filename Browse REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 378 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Em
274. cutable or browse to it graphically by clicking Browse In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder which means that the command should be executed from the same directory as the file 5 Set the Executable return code options as appropriate see section 8 5 Executable return code 6 Click the OK button to define the new command To modify a version control command 1 Select the command to be modified from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Command dialog box will be displayed 3 Modify the information as necessary and then click the OK button To remove a version control command 1 Select the command to be removed from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box 2 Click the Remove button To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select the menu option to be moved from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog box 2 Click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 171 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 3 Specifying arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be
275. d Debug dialog box is the main entry point for configuring and initiating the synchronized debugging system Options related to synchronized debugging are saved in SDO files These are always located in the Sync directory This is defined as lt Local settings directory gt Renesas HEW hew_001 Sync The local settings directory is set by Windows and is normally Window 2000 or Windows XP operating system C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Local Settings Application Data Window Vista or Window 7 operating system C Users lt user name gt AppData Local 18 1 The Synchronized Debug dialog box Select Synchronized Debugging from the Debug menu to open the Synchronized Debug dialog box This can be done when High performance Embedded Workshop initially starts up or when there is a workspace open There is also an option to open the dialog from the High performance Embedded Workshop Welcome dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 466 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Synchronized Debug E Curent configuration Default New Import Jave AS Delete Available debuggers Options Type Workspace _Session Add Main Not open Debug Hulk core LWorkspacesDemo Demo Corel 1 Video Not open Debug Multi core CAWorkepacesDemo Vemo Corel Synchronization style m Synchronization options C Mone W
276. d In Files toolbar button For further details on using Find in Files see section 4 4 2 Finding text in multiple files Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Go to Occurrence Go to the associated source line Clear Window a Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Macro tab Shows the current records of macros macro recording support facility You can view information such as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands recorded into a High performance Embedded Workshop macro file from execution of Tools gt Macro Recording to Tools gt Stop Macro It is also possible to view this information while recording For details on the macro recording support facility see Chapter 15 Macro Recording Support Facility REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 11 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The fun
277. d by the value of Start Address The Overlay column shows the name of the primary section Window options e Map information and section settings of the linkage editor left pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 234 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Section Edit Mode Add Section Group Add Section Add Overlay Group 1 Section Auto Registration Edit Selected Item Enters the edit mode Adds the section group Adds the section Adds the overlay group Automatically adds missing sections Edits the selected item Cut Cuts the section information Copy Copies the section information Paste Pastes the section information Delete Deletes the section information Move up Moves up the section information Move Down Moves down the section information Change Primary Section 1 Changes primary section Memory Map Setting 2 Sets a memory map Memory Resource Auto Allocate 2 Print Automatically allocates the memory resource Prints section setting tree view tE S BP ENSE Ss Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons
278. d closed normally in High performance Embedded Workshop so that the workspace files are updated before it can be specified on this dialog Changing a Debugger s ID 1 Select the Debugger to be changed in the list 2 Click the Modify button Options Ei Debugger ID M air Cancel CPU mode Debug 3 Enter a new unique ID for the Debugger 4 Click OK The Debugger s ID will be updated in the list It is not possible to modify Debugger Ds when synchronized Changing a Debugger s options There are two methods of changing a Debugger s options First method 1 Select the Debugger in the list 2 Click the Modify button 3 Select the new options from the drop list 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 471 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Second method 1 Select the Debugger in the list 2 Click the Debugger s Options entry This will display a drop list Options Type en Debug Multi core a Mult core 3 Select the new options from the drop list It is not possible to modify options when synchronized Removing a Debugger from the list 1 Select the Debugger you want to remove 2 Click the Remove button The Debugger will be removed from the list 18 1 3 Setting the synchronization options Overview In this context synchronization refers to a virtual link from one Debugger core to another Deb
279. d configuration cccccccccsssssssssseseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeausassesssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaaaesasseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqags 59 243 Removing a build configuration eee ccccccccecceeccaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaseseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeaseeeceeeeeeeeeaaaas 60 2 UA i sae gastro seseinaeotiecene E E NE E E EE 60 2 8 1 Building individual files ss scicssscsvedessesdecasessvecsavels nE RE Eaa D E E NEARNE KA Ra ERa aia 60 2 8 2 UTICA PEO CCL cenieni e Enero Tune SREE iE beeps EESE EE Ee E Eier en ne Seia Duerre 60 2 8 3 Budne mape eaa E E E E sewer err te 61 2 8 4 EOP PIN 100k XCCH ON erin aiaia Eaa EE iii 62 2 8 5 Deleting intermediate and output files produced in building cece eeeccccceceeeececceecaaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 63 2 8 6 Configuring the Build tab of the Output Window ccccscseeecceceeceeeceeeeeeseseseeeseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaasaseeseeeess 65 2 8 7 Controlling the content of the Build tab of the Output window cccssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaeseessesseeeeeeeeeeeess 67 2 8 8 Displaying out of date files in the Workspace WINdOW cccccccccccceesssssseseseeeeceeeeceeeeeaaaeaesessseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaas 68 DO Tied pand CMCC na E 69 2 10 Configuring the Workspace window sscasecesssiwesdscsnnecseccaineccanntossuvencruessenedbectinedieosueeteaeevecesnneraedtbaciloadseudaneverecinecdancianads 12 2 11 Inserting a project into the workspace ccceccccceccccceceeeaeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeee
280. d the last modified date Right clicking on a test icon A allows you the following options Pop up Menu Option Function Run Test Case Executes the selected test case Edit Test Case Modifies the selected test case Remove Test Case Deletes the selected test case Create New Test Image File Creates a test image file for the selected test case Compare Test Image File Compares the test image file with data in the current system Edit Test Image File Modifies the test image file Save Test Image File Saves the current setting in the High performance Embedded Workshop system into the test image file Save Test Image File As Saves the current setting in the High performance Embedded Workshop system as another test image file Properties The Test properties dialog box opens It displays the test name test description test location and the last modified date 16 11 Configuring the Test tab of the Output window The Test tab of the output window displays the results and progress of the current test execution The test execution progress shows the current test being executed and the number of tests remaining If errors occur then these are displayed in this window Starting tests test suite lt Test Suite Name gt lt Compare Conditions gt lt Save Conditions gt continue on failure timeout 10 Running test lt Test Name gt X of Y Running batch file macro lt Macro Name gt X of Y Classification Item Run Tests dialog box E
281. d then click the Reset button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 143 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment To reset the toolbar position back to its original state 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Click the Reset Positions button The Reset Positions button reverts all toolbars back to their original factory default positions Be careful as this will reset any custom positions that you may have setup during your session To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Set the Show Tooltips checkbox as desired 6 2 Customizing the Tools menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options To add a new menu option 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box 2 Select the Menu tab The first thing you need to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool which will be available to all of your workspaces or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have chosen choose the relevant section of the dialog box Menu Application wide tools Add Modit TET workspace wide tools Mame Version Add Moat ih Remove REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 144 of 523
282. d to this folder Even if a file with the same name is already in the folder the new file can be added to the folder only when these two files have different paths e Ifa file of an unrecognized file type is added to the project this file is directly added to the project To drag and drop folders Drag and drop of a folder from the Windows Explorer opens the Add Files From Folder dialog box which allows you to select the files in the folder that you wish to add to the project This dialog box shows the names of all files included in the folder that was dropped Filename and File Type show the full paths of files and file types respectively REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 47 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Add Files From Folder Ei EI Select the files to add Filename Cid Wile Type 4 LWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4sintorg src Assembly source file Lancel CAworkspacetDemosH4DemosH 4o sre Assembly source file LWWWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4vectbl Assembly source file Uncheck All LWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSh4 vhandl Assembly source file LWWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsctc C source file LWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 Demos C source file LWWorkspace DemoSH4DemoSH4slowsre c C source file LWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 resetor C source file CWoorkepacesDemoSH4 DemoSH4sbrk c C source file CWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 Debug Library file CWoorkepacesDemoSH4 DemoSH4 Debug Object file M
283. de the options listed in the table below are available Right click on an item in the left pane The following options with in the table can be selected Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Item Button Root Address Section group Subsection group Overlay group Section a aa aa a a Add Section Group oa W we w Add Section TE W W wt W Add Overlay Group 1 i W W Wx Section Auto Registration al ll W W W Edit Selected Item Cig wt v wt tt Cut A r e r Copy wf p Paste A W W W wf W Delete Pa w wf w wf v Move up t r Move Down TE i Change Primary Section 1 P i Notes 1 This pane cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 Will be supported by the toolchains included in the compiler packages listed below C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family V 9 00 Release 04 or later C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family V 6 01 Release 02 or later C C Compiler Package for RX Family V 1 00 Release 00 or later REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 236 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map To exit the edit mode 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Section Edit Mode 3 The confirmation dialog box shown below opens To reflect the changes to the section settings of the linkage editor select Yes eckmap E G Set the edited linker section mformation 4 The High performance Embedded Workshop exits the edit mode The
284. decimal lb D Displays in hexadecimal Decimal 10 D Displays in decimal Octal g Displays in octal Binary 2 Displays in binary Set Initial ie Sets the default radix for newly added variables Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Save As Saves the currently displayed contents ly BC Go To Memory Opens a Memory window for the address Shows or hides the toolbar Toolbar display Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Note Available only when the debugger supports this function REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 450 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Adding a variable You can add variables to the Watch window To add a variable to a Watch window e Editor or Disassembly window in source mode o Right click on a variable in the window and select Add Watch from the pop up menu 17 Debugging Facility o Right click on a variable in the window and select Instant Watch from the pop up menu Then click on the Add button in the Instant Watch dialog box this is the instant watch feature o Drag and drop a variable into the Watch window The default scope applies to the added variable but the selection depends on whether the program is running or not State of the Program Scope Stopped Current Scope Running Global e Watch window 1 Open the Add Watch dialog box in either of the following ways o Select the window
285. definition for loop or a comment block for a function The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active Editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually Figure below shows a list of templates which is located on the Templates tab of the Workspace window 2 File E Toolchain Templates E Templates Any new templates which have been added to the High performance Embedded Workshop are displayed under the Templates folder The Toolchain Templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the High performance Embedded Workshop system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file It is also possible to drag an area of text from the editor into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on the Templates folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Function Add Adds a new template Remove Removes the current selection Edit Edits the current selection REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 123 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 4 11 1 Defining a template To define a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog box e C
286. directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog box Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Projects show details tor project Details Version control directory mappings Ci work Applications Project ooschwe sw app project G work pplications sre wesw Lapp Sere hodit Ce work ohared wesw shared Remove a Environment Madis ere To define a new directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the Projects tab REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 173 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 3 Click the Add button which is next to the Version Control Directory Mappings list The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box opens 4 Specify a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace directory or project directory in the Source directory field Select one of the following operations e Enter the directory name OR e Click the placeholder button Then select Project directory or Workspace directory from the menu OR e Click the Browse button to open the Browse to Source Directory dialog box Select the directory and click the Select button 5 Enter the version control d
287. disassembly source mode as primary debug view 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Use disassembly source mode as primary debug view checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected 4 Click OK If this option is set the following actions will be performed e Ifthe Disassembly window is open and in Disassembly mode then when a break occurs at a known source address the Disassembly window will switch to source mode e Ifthe Disassembly window is open then when a break occurs no other editor windows are opened e When a break occurs the window order will not be changed automatically e The position of the source file in the editor window is fixed If you wish to continue step in Disassembly mode of the Disassembly window select Debug gt Step mode gt Assembly REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 374 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 2 2 5 Viewing assembly language code The Disassembly mode shows at the current PC location You can view assembly language codes only when the debugger is connected Window configuration at Disassembly View mixed mode View Source B View Disassembly Column header noo02000 OOOO0z002 OoOOO0z004 Disassembly Address column Label column SAW Break poms ASM column Ob code column Disassembly e Clicking another too
288. display information on its operation 4 Click and drag a button from the dialog box onto the toolbar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 142 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment Commands Categories Search E ditor Standard Debug Aun Debug Bookmarks Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Commands tab 3 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To modify the name of a user defined toolbar 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Inthe Toolbars list select the user defined toolbar and whose name you want to modify 4 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar Name field 5 Click the OK button to save the toolbar s new name To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button will change to a Delete button Click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Toolbars tab 3 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list an
289. dow gt Virtual Desktop 2 Select is cascaded menu 3 Then select the desktop configuration you wish to view on this menu The selected option is ticked REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 162 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 7 Version Control 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to version control system Some of the reasons why version control systems are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by controlling revisions to its source files Figure below illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files LOCAL e Files Supported for Version Control by the High performance Embedded Workshop Version control by the High performance Embedded Workshop basically supports the following types of files File type Extension Group File Extension Supported CPU Family Workspace file HEW Workspace hws Common Project file HEW Projects hwp Common File for version control Configuration file hve Common Source file C source file C Common REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 163 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V
290. dows is installed Windows system directory WINSYSDIR Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name WORKSPNAME Current workspace name Project name PROJECTNAME Current project name Configuration name CONFIGNAME Current configuration name 8 4 Specifying comments If a version control command contains the placeholder COMMENT the High performance Embedded Workshop will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the Please Enter Comment dialog box You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files checkbox before clicking the OK button 8 5 Executable return code While each version control command executes its output is redirected to the Version Control tab of the output window When the command s execution is complete its return code is obtained When defining a command you can determine whether this return code can be used to indicate that the command failed and that the remaining commands should not be executed i e abort The controls contained in the Executable return code group allow you to specify this behavior REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 172 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System If the return code of the commands can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return
291. e Target Operation Build lt File name gt pop up menu Click on the option menu option Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu option Enable Disable Breakpoint pop up menu option Go To Cursor pop up menu option Set PC Here pop up menu option S W Breakpoints column Double click on the column Go To Cursor pop up menu option Click on the Set PC Here pop up menu option menu option Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu Function Builds the selected file Sets or clears a software breakpoint Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Runs program until the PC reaches cursor Sets PC to the address at cursor Sets or clears a software breakpoint Sets or clears a software breakpoint Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Runs program until the PC reaches cursor option Enable Disable Breakpoint pop up Sets PC to the address at cursor menu option REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 270 of 523 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Display Mode Target Operation Function S W Breakpoints column Double click on Sets or clears a software breakpoint the column 15 5 1 3 Disassembly window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Display Mode Target Operation Function Source mode Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu Click onthe Sets or clears a software breakpoint optio
292. e Memory that has been written to Black Red Modified Variables whose value or position Red White has been changed Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 4 Modify the Foreground and Background color selection on the Color tabbed page as desired 5 Click OK 16 Selecting an encoding format If the values of variables are characters or strings and they should be displayed as UTF 8 code select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Click on the Debug tab and select UTF 8 for Encoding Format The Watch window now shows the values of variables as UTF 8 code If Local Code Page default has been selected for Encoding Format the values are displayed as ASCII code Note The default font for display in the Watch window is Courier New which is not supported by UTF 8 Select another font compatible with UTF 8 in the Format Views dialog box in advance 17 Sorting variables Clicking on the Name or Address column header sorts the variables by name or address Every time you click on the column headers the variables are alternately sorted in ascending and descending order REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 462 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility a R R mE y x e om H d d FFFS0D61E ivwolatile long Current Scope H OOOOOOOO i FFFSOE14 Iwolatile long Current Scope H OOUOODOOOO FFFSOSE10 Iwolatile long Curren
293. e Visual SourceSafe databases lsrcsafeini Cancel ae REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 195 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System e Enter the full path of the Visual SourceSafe database file in the Database path field 6 The Create SourceSafe Project For Workspace dialog box was displayed eate SourceSafe Project For Workspace Cancel 7 The Project name field shows the name of the High performance Embedded Workshop workspace The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field shows the structure of the database specified in Step 5 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in Project name 9 Click the OK button in the Create SourceSafe Project For Workspace dialog box The Create SourceSafe Project dialog box opens The example below shows that the High performance Embedded Workshop workspace Workspace_Name is added as a project Workspace_Name into Visual SourceSafe database The Project name field shows Poject_Name that is to be created next Greate SourceSafe Project Cancel Workepace Name 10 Click the OK button in the Create SourceSafe Project dialog box 11 Repeat step 10 for each of the projects in the current workspace RE
294. e memory in another so the state of this check box is not important 18 1 5 Synchronized debugging mode Synchronized debugging mode Parallel ntermal Parallel Select the mode to be used while Debugging Internal The specified Debuggers will be opened in one High performance Embedded Workshop application This mode is only available when all the Debugger s Session s are in the same High performance Embedded Workshop workspace Parallel The specified Debuggers will be opened in separate High performance Embedded Workshop applications Note The Internal mode option will only be available if all the sessions in the Available Debuggers list are from the same workspace It is not possible to use the Internal mode option when sessions from separate workspaces are selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 474 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging 18 1 6 Start synchronized debugging Once the synchronized debug configuration has been set up click the Sync button to begin debugging If Parallel mode has been selected one Debugger will be opened in the High performance Embedded Workshop application from which the Synchronized Debug dialog box was launched and new High performance Embedded Workshop applications will be opened for the remaining Debuggers If Internal mode was selected the workspace that is common to all the Debuggers will be opened in the High pe
295. e Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Project Insert Project Set Current Project Edit Project Configuration 3 Build 1 Build File Build Build All Build Multiple Clean Current Project Clean All Project Build Configurations 4 Debug Reset CPU Go Reset Go Free Go 3 Go to Cursor Set PC to Cursor Run Step In Step Over Step Out Step Step Mode Halt Program Initialize Connect 3 Disconnect 3 Save Memory Verify Memory 3 Download Modules Unload Modules Setup Radix Debug Sessions 5 Auto Assembly Source All Download Modules All Downloaded Modules Hex 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Shortcut Key Toolbar Button lt File name of the download module gt lt File name of the download module gt Decimal Oct F9 CTRL F9 CTRL F7 ae SimDebug SH 3 sims essionsH 3 F5 SHIFT F5 Bi I F11 H F10 p SHIFT F11 p smon _ oF bn lb 1 g 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 2 tENESAS Page 268 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Notes 1 This menu is not displayed while a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 01 or later is in use 2 Only options Offset File format Filename Access size and Perform memory verify during download can be recorded Download debug information only and Download automaticall
296. e CPU Test item name Simulated I O Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Simulated I O window saved into test image files acquired with this setting No I O simulation range is specified by default Test result details Failed at Line Unmatched line number Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at Line 1 Src Data Input Dest a 1 21468 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 308 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Edit Test Simulated 1 0 e To adda simulated I O range 1 Click on the Add button on the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box to open the Add Simulated I O dialog box 2 Specify All or Line No to set a I O simulation range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To modify a simulated I O range 1 Click on the Modify button on the Edit Test Simulated I O dialog box The simulated I O range selected in the Simulated I O list will be modified Only one variable is selectable in the list The Modify Simulated I O dialog box opens Modify Simulated 1 0 ej PF REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 309 of 523 Jul 01
297. e CPU s general registers and values Window configuration Screenshot of the SH 4 debugger Column header OOOO000LO QOOOO00FO OOO40001 Double clicking the register display line opens a dialog box which allows you to change a register value Macro Recording REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 417 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility The register s contents can be changed by using in place editing Macro Recording You can change a flag value by clicking the button corresponding to the flag Macro Recording The right click menu allows you to change the display radix point and the register bank Change of the register bank can be selected only when the debugger supports this function Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Radix Hex Displays in hexadecimal Dec Displays in decimal Oct Displays in octal Bin Displays in binary Banko Displays registers of bank 0 Bank1 Displays registers of bank 1 Layout Radix Switches display or non display of radix FLAGs Switches display or non display of flags display area Settings Chooses a register to be displayed Edit D Changes a register s contents Refresh Refreshes the Register window Lock Refresh Disables refresh of the Register window Split Splits up the window display Save To File Saves register content
298. e Display dialog box for history checkbox or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 4 To display the results of a status command in a dialog box check the Display dialog box for file status checkbox or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 9 4 Version Control setup You can view or modify the general settings for the High performance Embedded Workshop connected with Visual SourceSafe 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the General tab User details User UserQ Passyword KERERE Database C Program Files Microsoft Visual StudiaVootercsate ini Contiguration file Current version control configuration file Ce itorkepace Name workspace Name hye 3 The User details group box shows the login user ID and password and database file in Visual SourceSafe 4 You can modify the user ID password or database in the Log in dialog box opened by clicking the Log In button 5 The Configuration file group box shows the configuration file in the current version control system REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 205 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 9 5 Specifying file locations You can view the current mapping in the project Select the project th
299. e Options dialog box 1 5 Creating a new workspace To create a new workspace 1 Select the Create a new project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt New Workspace The New Project Workspace dialog box will be displayed 2 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Workspace Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space As you enter the workspace name the High performance Embedded Workshop will add a sub directory and Project Name for you automatically This can be changed if desired This allows the workspace and project name to be different To select the directory in which you would like to create the workspace use the Browse button or type the directory into the Directory field manually 3 Select the CPU family and Tool chain upon which you would like to base the workspace 4 When anew workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop will also automatically create a project with the name specified in the Project Name field and place it inside the new workspace The project types list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list The project types displayed will be all valid types for the current pair of CPU family and Tool chain The project types are classified
300. e and the style of the Project Generation Wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog box and are initially hidden in the System Components part of the Tools Administration tree To export one of the Custom Project Generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog box The export functionality packages the Custom Project Generator into a binary file which includes an executable This can be given to another user who then runs the executable This installs the Project Generator into the correct location on the target user s machine REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 140 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration Note A project template can be created by selecting Project gt Create Project Type based on the project in use This template includes the version information of the toolchain When a project is created by using this template after the toolchain version has been updated in your High performance Embedded Workshop system check that the toolchain version of the created project matches the using environment When the registered toolchain can be updated the toolchain version can be changed in the dialog box that is displayed by selecting Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Change Toolchain ersion Toolchain name Renesas SuperH RISC engine Standard Current version 9 7 0 0 Cancel CPU Family SuperH RI
301. e are listed below Mode Function Source mode This mode is the standard High performance Embedded Workshop editor It allows source file editing and keywords are highlighted correctly if you are viewing source files This view allows line numbers addresses breakpoints bookmarks and source codes to be viewed Mixed mode The mixed mode facility in a source file is different to the disassembly window mixed mode Instead of showing the continuous disassembly it shows the disassembly that is related to each line of source code This view cannot be edited and is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows line numbers breakpoints address object codes labels and mixed codes for showing both source and disassembly to be viewed Disassembly mode The disassembly mode shows the true continuous disassembly code in address order This is the same as clicking View gt Disassembly This view is only available when a target is attached to the session This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 363 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Notes It is not possible to switch from the source view to the mixed display under the following conditions 1 2 The target is not connected to the current session No download modules have been downloaded No debug information is available fo
302. e dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 312 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Modify Trace Range Ei Ei Start PTA End PTR 2 Cancel 2 Specify Start PTR and End PTR to set a trace range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To remove a trace range 1 Click on the Remove button on the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box The trace range selected in the Trace ranges list will be deleted Only one trace range is selectable in the list Then click OK To make detailed setting with two or more trace types If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test Trace Ranges Trace ranges Start PTR End PTR Cancel Mout Renove zz Ca aed Baie e To add a trace range 1 Click on the Add button in the Edit Test Trace Ranges dialog box to open the Add Trace Range dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 313 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Add Trace Range Ed Ei Trace type Internal ALID U sermenmion trace Start PTA CT End PTR FO Cancel 2 Specify Trace type Start PTR and End PTR to set a trace range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To change a trace range 1 Click on the Modify button on the Edit
303. e for comparison and modify the program so that the number of times to store data into the array will be reduced Execute the test and see that the data stored in the array has changed Then modify the program again to restore the number of times to store data and execute the test Make sure that data in the array is the same that in the saved test image file Step 1 Recording a macro Step 2 Editing a macro viewing records Step 3 Playing a macro Step 4 Creating a test suite Step 5 Editing a test suite Step 6 Creating a test image file Step 7 Modifying the program before the test Step 8 Viewing the test result unmatched Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test again Step 10 Viewing the test result matched 1 14 2 Step 1 Recording a macro In this example use the macro recording support facility to record the following combination of operations as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands Recorded High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands are output to the Macro tab of the Output window However some operations open another tab 1 Click the Record Macro button on the Macros toolbar The mouse pointer is modified to include the record icon The message Recording is shown in the Macro tab of the Output window 2 Select File gt Refresh Session This records the refresh_session command 3 Click the Registers button Ri on the CPU toolbar
304. e in the editor window see section 2 5 File extensions and file groups Files that could be located will be shown under the download module shown in a normal icon 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 351 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Z zl Ey Debugl rly iy DebugOnly pj aa Download modules E Chose ie es E hoc lbh machine h 2 sbrk h sort E stacksct h E stddef h stdio h os E stdlib h a C source file Sie C source file see resetprg cpp ve zort cpp j i Z tutorial cpp ay Dependencies Files that could not be located will be shown under the download module but will have a red icon To distinguish these files you can view the full path of the file To view the full paths of all files 1 Right click anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select the Configure View menu option The Configure View dialog box will be displayed 3 Select the Show file paths check box 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 352 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility yl zi E Debug nly E Debug nly A Download modules a hoc lbh CA Workspace sD ebuglrAly D ebuglnlyS ounce ysbrk h CA Workspace D ebuglnAly D ebuglnlyS ource york h CMorkspace sD ebuglnlyDebuglnlyS ounce stacksct h machine h stddef h
305. e in which the default positions of windows are recorded e High performance Embedded Workshop database files e Component s data files e Keyboard shortcut layout files e Macro information file and newly added macro files e Custom project type wizard files e Syntax highlighting files e Templates files e Synchronized debug option configuration files Note Support for this function depends on the debugger These files are specific to each user account on the host computer When multiple versions of the High performance Embedded Workshop are installed the files specific to each High performance Embedded Workshop are saved for each user account 1 13 Overview of Configurations and Sessions Standard toolbar Current Configuration Current Session g SimessionsH 4 l Debug i Defaults ession Release Configuration Session The drop down list box on the Standard toolbar shows the current configuration and session This example shows the configuration and session in which the Renesas SuperH Standard toolchain was selected at creation of a project and SH 4 Simulator was selected as the target debugger You can switch between different configurations and sessions by selecting one in the drop down list box It is also possible to add or delete configurations or sessions as necessary REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 20 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview e Configuration What is con
306. e placeholder button Fr and select the placeholder from the pop up menu 5 Click the OK button to confirm the new log file settings M Generate build log Path stwORKS PDIR MHW ORKSPNAME twt Browse REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 94 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 7 Changing toolchain version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the High performance Embedded Workshop you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog box To invoke the dialog select Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Choose one of the versions from the Toolchain version drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain Yersion Ed Toolchan name Renesas SuperH RISC engine Standard Current wersion 9 1 0 0 CPU Family SuperH RISC engine Toolchair Renesas SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchan version EENI Cancel i Toolchain build phases Build phase Intomatan UptLinker 3 04 00 SH Assembler r 01 02 SH CC Compiler 3 02 00 SH CrC Library Generator To show information about toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phase drop down list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog box and click the Information button A tool information dialog box will show you information about the tool Click the Close
307. e projects depend upon another 1 Select Project gt Dependent Projects The Dependent Projects dialog box opens 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project Dependent projects 3 The Dependent projects list has a checkbox for each project listed Set the associated checkboxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click on the OK button When there is a project dependent on the current project the High performance Embedded Workshop checks whether building of the dependent project should be executed earlier than that of the current project When the current project is a parent the dependency checking will be performed on its child project Even if another project is dependent on the child project this dependent project will not be checked REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 76 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 14 Removing a project from the workspace To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project that you wish to remove in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click on the selected project to invoke a pop up menu 3 Select Remove Project Note You cannot remove the Current project from the workspace 2 15 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance
308. e reflected Right click on the Disassembly filed in disassembly mode and select Refresh This acquires the latest information of the data being displayed and updates the contents of the view 17 2 1 4 Disassembly lock refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly view so that it does not refresh This function is called the disassembly lock refresh Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select Lock Refresh The Lock Refresh dialog box will be displayed Lock Refresh ki Start Address ooon2o00 RR ance End Address 00002014 Check the Locked check box The controls should now enable Select the start and end address that should be locked and cached so that no updates are displayed Click OK The view refreshes to only show the locked area 17 2 1 5 Looking at a specific address When you are looking at your program in a Disassembly view you may want to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 368 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select the Set Address option The Set Address dialog box will be displayed Set Address Fix Cancel Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click the O
309. e test data comparison failed This can also be viewed by selecting the test and then clicking the details button on the toolbar The results of the tests can be exported to file The two options are Export and Export All Export only saves the results of the currently selected test Export All saves the results of all the tests executed The results can be saved as text or as a comma delimited file for importing into other tools for analysis You can also display Test Browser from the workspace window pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 317 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility e Tests top pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Export mj Exports the result Export All il Exports all results Clear Clears all results e Test items bottom pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Details 4 Displays the details of the result 16 10 Configuring the Test tab of the Workspace window The Test tab was created to allow fast access to the tests in your test suite When the test suite is opened the test suite is added to the Test tab of the workspace window and the tests in the test suite are added underneath them This is shown below H TestSuite Test Suite Al Download Memory Gheck Test Right clicking on
310. e workspace 1 Select the Unloaded project from the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Load Project option It is possible to select multiple projects in the workspace window to perform this operation 2 13 Specifying dependencies between projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if one project uses another in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library which is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent 1 e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the High performance Embedded Workshop attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the High performance Embedded Workshop will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project To mak
311. eated If the Create folder structure in project checkbox is not selected when you drop a folder onto a user folder files in the folder are added into this user folder When a folder is dropped onto the active project tree files in the folder are added into the group folder of the file type e g a file main c is added into the group folder C source file If a suitable group folder does not exist the High performance Embedded Workshop creates it Files of an unknown type dropped onto the project are directly added to the project By default this checkbox is not selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 48 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 6 Clicking the Uncheck All button deselects all checkboxes while clicking the Check All button selects all checkboxes 7 Clicking the OK button adds all selected files which have tick marks in their checkboxes to the project Next time this dialog box is opened it shows the most recently used setting 2 3 3 Removing files from a project There are three ways of removing files from a project e Files can be individually removed from a project e A selection of files can be removed e All files can be removed To remove a file s from a project 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed e Select Project gt Remove Files OR e Right click on the project within the Pro
312. eceeceeeeaasseuseseseeeccceeeeeeseessassaessneseeseseeeeeeeess 394 17 3 24 Switching display or non display of measurement FeSult eesseeeeseeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeseeaaeaaessseseeeeeeeess 394 1753 25 Saving an arca of TMC INOLY saa ceussicsceacegcntarcatansescotdethecometcaseoaanabasutalaoetatcachacane aiea aaia iea iida eoi 394 17 3 26 Loading a memory area from a TNS soc iecenecesacseecanccamctrnoevoustvouvensnnendtnesunedviectivetaanevuetebactnedtuccaneteboeWaugiwesnenedes 395 17 3 27 Splitting up the window display ccccccccccccccccccceesessseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaesssssseeseseeeeeeceeeeeeessaaaaaaaseeeeeeeeeeeess 396 lAo Vertyine A MEmory Aedes o a a E E SES 396 o A a E O O e O e 396 17 4 Displaying memory contents as an LNA OC iiss scancsnessecrsnne sonnossdessuedewcadqaieentateasesoucecaiysunedewsaieaiesennan soncosedesiuedewcaaaais 397 17 4 1 Opening the Image WINdOW sncsssescsnasencannessacenadabetansqnausantennesernes suede ganacannagmaconnaaoacsunad dmeandabanetontemmcersamesnicuiads 397 1742 Regularly refreshing the Image window sssnsiissesisiisnin i e EA Ni 401 17 4 3 Refreshine the Image Window sisressrsiiisisnnsrneiein diaais ien iiaa 402 17 4 4 Specify ibe retresh mteryal srsoissirrrisaiir noni e S ETA O ENN EE SEEN ei 402 17 4 5 Viewing Images as Consecutive Frames ccccccssssssssssseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaeessssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseassssassseeeseeeeess 402 17 4 6 Displaying the pixel information eeeeesessssssssss
313. ect Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you Pressing CTRL SHIFT SPACE opens this pop up window which is visible until a closing bracket is entered class Sample p_sam P_sam new Sample p sam gt change l fort i 0 oid chengeWone a F J if j lt Ot E ali j e Itis possible to select a C function define C class or member function in the pop up window and add it to the High performance Embedded Workshop editor window by either of the following ways o Right click within the High performance Embedded Workshop editor window to display a pop up menu and select List Members A pop up window opens Select an item you wish to add and press ENTER OR o Press CTRL SPACE to display a pop up window Select an item you wish to add and press ENTER REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 230 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 Map Among the section settings of the linkage editor and the contents of the linkage list file output by the linkage editor information on sections and symbols are respectively shown There are the following features Sections A tree view in the form of address section group section Assignment of sections can be changed by drag and drop You can add modify or delete addresses section groups and sections The source file for the address in the selected line can be opened in the editor window
314. ect Step or Play after the break the execution restarts at the command line indicated by the yellow arrow G Up to 256 breakpoints can be set When saving the session all breakpoints that have been set are also saved Notes e No break occurs if the batch file has been executed with the Console tabbed pane open in the Command Line window e If you modify the contents of the batch file after it has been specified the information shown in the upper pane of the Debugger tabbed pane in the Command Line window will be updated The status of the batch file will be reset with all breakpoints deleted REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 261 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 Macro Recording Support Facility The macro recording support facility allows you to record operations which are associated with the High performance Embedded Workshop system applications 1 build 2 and debugging 3 as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands or to execute these recorded commands Files to record the operations High performance Embedded Workshop macro files are command line batch files that have hdc as the extension and can be modified These files are stored in the Macros folder within the High performance Embedded Workshop management information folder under the application data folder for each user profile By default the file Default hdc is cre
315. ecutive frames Take either of the following ways to open the Image Properties dialog box When the Image window is currently open right click on the window and select Properties from the pop up menu When no Image window is open select View gt Graphic gt Image or click on the Image toolbar button m Select the Enable Redraw Continuously checkbox in the Image Properties dialog box In the Frame Count edit box enter the number of frames 2 or more that you wish to view Click on the OK button After this function has been enabled you can view the images by either manually or automatically switching the frames 17 4 5 1 Manually switching the frames While the function to show images as consecutive frames is enabled the pop up menu options and toolbar buttons listed in the table below are available for manually switching the frames Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Next Image Redraws the next image Previous Image lt p Redraws the previous image Top Image lt p Redraws the top image Last Image eje Redraws the last image Whether the pop up menu options and toolbar buttons are active or not depends on which frame is currently displayed To manually switch the frames Clicking on Next Image goes to the next frame If you wish to view three consecutive frames for example the operation will be as follows Image X Nonrefresh E pr alor He ee REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 403 of 523
316. ed Automatic un sync If an operation is performed that changes the current debug session the High performance Embedded Workshop application will be removed from the synchronized debug system and will no longer be synchronized with the other High performance Embedded Workshop applications REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 479 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging The following operations will cause the session to change New workspace Open workspace Close workspace Set current project Change session 18 2 3 Internal mode functionality Tert FE RSPLST irigh pp rearea mbar deed prip Eoia biat EE a et y eL EF ee ee E i F a F ii TH D i i F i 8 ii ZEEE E kos fee ee oe Se ae aha a E Pr TE LEIRE Polis ote te el ed PL ees et ee r ee oe toh on ea CAs i a 4u General operation When using internal mode all Debuggers are opened in the one High performance Embedded Workshop application The state of the GUI can be switched by various methods to debug the different open Debuggers When the GUI is switched to a Debugger the debug views will change to show data on that Debugger and any operations executed from then on will be executed on that Debugger referred to as the active Debugger This allows you to debug several platforms or several cores on a multi core platform using one High performance Embedded Workshop application
317. ed below Scope Description Current Scope This scope covers all variables that can be watched from the address indicated by the program counter This scope is not displayed while the program is running Global This scope covers global variables in all load modules Global variables declared as static cannot be watched File scope name Load module name This scope covers static variables within the specified file scope Static variables declared within functions and global variables watched in the Global scope cannot be watched The default scope for newly added variables will be as follows depending on whether the program is running or not State of the Program Scope Stopped Current Scope Running Global 4 Clicking on the Detail button opens the Set Scope dialog box in which scope for newly added variables can be selected in the same way as in the Scope drop down list of the Add Watch dialog box Before selecting a desired file scope name in the Set Scope dialog box you can also check full paths to source files or filter file scope names by the string entered in the Filter box The full file paths however may not be displayable for some toolchains Variables that you have set in the Watch window are saved in the session file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 452 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Note If the variable that you have added is a local variable that
318. ed setting it is possible to customize test image data of this test item before saving On the other hand when a test item does not allow detailed setting and the checkbox for this test item is selected all test image data of this item will be saved into the file A save file icon f in the Saving into Test I mage File column of an item listed in the View menu indicates that this data can be saved into a test image file 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products Among the functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products test image data of the test items listed below can be saved into test image files The following table shows the test items in the Create New Test Image dialog box and the corresponding windows from which the data will be saved into test image files For more information on the test image data to be saved into test image files how to make detailed setting and test results see the descriptions of test items for the corresponding windows Create New Test Image Dialog Box Window Tab Name Opened by Test Group Name Test Item Name Output Build Output Window Build tab of the Output window View gt Output Debug Output Window Debug tab of the Output window CPU Register Register View gt CPU gt Registers lO lO View gt CPU gt IO Status Status View gt CPU gt Status Memory Memory View gt CPU gt
319. edded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Modify the description as required and click the Save File button feel on the Editor toolbar Close the High performance Embedded Workshop macro file Default hdc 1 14 4 Step 3 Playing a macro 1 Click the Play Macro button on the Macros toolbar The Select Macro Function dialog box opens 2 Selecting the macro Demo starts playing the recorded commands The mouse pointer is modified to include the play icon d iW 3 When the playback of a macro is completed the mouse cursor returns to be an arrow 1 14 5 Step 4 Creating a test suite 1 Select Test gt Create New Test Suite to invoke the Create New Test Suite dialog box Create Hew Test Suite Ei EI Test suite name Test_S ute Denna Lancel Directory for test suite C Sworkspace D emoSH4 Browse 2 Enter Test _Suite Demo in Test suite name 3 Initially the workspace directory is shown in Directory for test suite This can be modified as required 4 Click the OK button 5 Displays the Test tab of the workspace window Shows the Test_Suite_Demo test suite icon REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 33 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview l jj Test_Sute_Demo T Project E Templates al Mawigatiorn 1 14 6 Step 5 Editing a test suite Select the macro recorded at step 1 for running a test 1 Right click on the Test_Suite_Demo test suite ico
320. editor can display specific strings i e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for C source file C header file Assembly source file or Assembly include file Note When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name and extension that the High performance Embedded Workshop recognizes See section 2 5 File extensions and file groups for information on file extensions REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 120 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 10 1 Changing text colors To change existing colors 4 Editor 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the view you are interested in changing the font for If it is the editor expand the Source in the tree on the left hand side of the dialog box 3 Select the file type for which you want to edit syntax coloring from the File group list and then expand and select it 4 Select the category are interested in The tabs on the right side of the dialog box change depending on the
321. eeeeeeeaeaessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeauasasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaas 74 212 Seine ME Curen proe aisi ENa EENE ENO EE ENEE ERES 75 213 Speciiyimg dependencies between projeCiS os ceecsccsidenosascnvessienicatonenteshasenesailenenssedeneuisaienesiaddadenaminaereneveweterceiauentsabodend 76 2 14 Removing a project from the workspace eeeesssessssssssseeerereerrersssssssssssssetereerresssssssssseeetereressssssssssseeeeterresesessss vi 2 15 Relative projects paths in the workspace cccecccccceccceceeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaassseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 71 is HMI ING CO Bud Feature esio iaaa a 78 3 1 The build process EVI SIC Case cpencnsnteann rie EA spGunaceamen E EE stan Stecdensei wed ausioarentmacsmemaces 78 3 1 1 WY IIA 1S DUI A A E E A P EE A guess reoanee nese A T A E E E A 78 32 reaime ACU OTe Duld phat ernn E EEEE E ER 19 3 3 Ordens bold Phases sorres Ea T EEIE EEEE AEEA NEn 83 3 3 1 BOETA a E E E EA 84 oo EEE a AD A A E E A AE E A A E A E A A 88 ee Fil Mappings Dee crcatetieroceyeeciemeneriovieuoueve sacmnnadvasieemanaede ves Gum E Enina S sone E EEEE TEATES EEES EER aE REN Ei 88 3 4 Setting custom build phase Options cccccccccccccccceeeeeesesesseseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeaaasessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaaaausasaseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 90 3 4 1 UO r E E A EE EE EEA EEA E CEE EAN E A A 90 3 4 2 oE a E A E tem E E E 91 3 4 3 D penden Pues LAW ei E E E 92 3 5 Conaola e 0100 e E E E Teter rT 93
322. eeeeeeseaaaaaaasssesseeeeeeeess 258 14 14 Undoing the last Opera On enicesacansuascsonieaseeresatneduecalagepeceienmndietoueseragensinnnndacaeerbertntualeueresinabenaneevereienmnnielauestraseadnnte 258 14 15 CHECKING Dr ce matching save iedasneicdcesseeredessaidecauessvecsavele aE KRE r EAEE E SE ESNE EER N AE K NESEN En Eai 258 14 16 Resetting the status of a batch file eeeccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesseesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasuaaasssseeeeeeeeess 299 taAa onele steppe naba hT G E ere Scere ett re terre rr Tere 259 14 18 Setting a breakpoint in a batch INC yscissctoaecestesaadscadedacensunsedossecunjeanedsaadaiadsageaushasshnacsaedtonebaeadedacunneassahwooduasnanedsaadenees 261 L3 Macro Recording Support Facillly cs iccesisnedaciedewsictscanaunnnctionsisunssseeteniotendseessdaeecdewadvacauenenndsiwadvacessaudes 262 OF MICRO MCA ANN LOL OAR ornai E E EEEE EEE E EAE E E A E AEE E 262 15 2 Using the Macro dialog DOX sscsaiansdcontimosrasoatwadiinnsteatsdadtonkeastdentadeadsehiiesadensshadtaniasndtantusiadiowsiiiaadantsdnnediedtontagaddvvndenadeats 264 15 3 Importing a macro file with existing Macros eesssssssssssssseeeeeeeerssssssssssssssssseetrrrsessssssssssssseteeeeressssessssssssseseeeereeo 266 G RCO a TACT o E E E E EE E E EE E E TE 266 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro fil S 20 00 cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaaags 267 15 5 1 Recordable functions co
323. eeeess 197 922 Removing files from Visual SourceSafe nnnnnnneesssesssssssseeeeerresessssssssssssererrerrressesssssssssssseseereresessssesssss 199 9 2 3 Getting read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe cccccccccccccccccccesseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaaaaeeseees 199 9 2 4 Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe 20 cccccccssssssseseeeeeceececeeeeeeeaeseeessseeeeeeeeees 200 925 Checking in writable copy of files into Visual SourceSafe ccccccsssssessseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseseeeeeeeees 202 9 2 6 Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe cccccccccccccccecccccceeeeessssseeeeeececceeeeeeeeaaaaessnseeseeeeeeeeeeess 203 9 2 7 Undoing a check out command in Visual SourceSafe ccccccccsssssssseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeesesseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 203 9 2 8 Viewing the history of files in Visual SourceSafe cccccccccccccccccceeeeesssssseeeeecceceeeeeeeeauaassssseeseeeeeeeeeeees 204 9 3 Visual SowceSai command 00 el ONS separate cate E EEE EE a RAEE EE TEAT 205 94 Verson COE OSCE Dace sees cc san nce sone taccnscngase A sacernsesascuaen ancora ac 205 9 5 SOCCER INO Te OC A OIG aeran E EEE E I TEA T AO EE EREE 206 9 6 Adding Visual SourceSafe COMMAMNAS ccccccccccccccccccceeessssseeeeeeccccccceseseacaeeasssseseeececcesessssssaaagassgsssssseeseeeeeess 207 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities cccccccccssssssseecccceeeeeeesseeeeccceceeeeaeesceeeeeessaaesseseeeeeees 21
324. eeererresssssssssseseeerrrresssssssssssssssseertrerressssssssssessereereesesssss 406 17 5 Displaying memory contents as Waveforms essssssssssssssseetrrerrsssssssssssssrerrrerrssssssssssssseererreesssssssssssssseeeeeereno 406 17 5 1 Opening the Waveform window sseeessseseessssssssssssssteerrrssssssssssssssecteereesssssssssssseeeseeetrrreessssssssseeeeeeeeeeee 406 17 5 2 Regularly refreshing the Waveform window sssssseeeecccceeeeeeeeeaseesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeeseseeseseeeeeeeess 408 17 5 3 Refreshing the Waveform WIndow ccccccccccccccssssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseseeaeseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaesssseeeeeeeeeeeeess 408 17 5 4 Specifying the refresh interval ccccesssssseeecccceccccceeeeeeaeaesessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesssseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseuauaaaseesses 409 17 5 5 Zoom GS DLA apap E aadeansetannoee nagsanpegaeneney acacaaamensehmcocuaenmteasaenanad 409 E Oo o aa et ee R E E A E E E E E E EE 409 17 5 7 Resetting ihe Zoomi display eda ses msccnnessacssneapacantancncessanunconsasguiesnaa a ia aia aan ei e aiaiai 409 17 5 8 Setn the ZOOM MAGIC ALON ssc0f oxcssncsenatardssuis nra SEEN I N EKERI AEEA EEES ETERA 410 17 5 9 Sene De Horizonal SCAG eesis a T E aE a e ea 410 lA INOMACISD AY Oi CUOL essri E E iE 410 17 5 11 Displaying the sampling information cc ccsssssssssseeeecccceeecceeeeeeeeaaessessseseeeeeceeeeeeseessaaaaasssseeesseeeeeeeess 410 17 6 Looking at T OO y saves c
325. eep checked out Comment 3 The Check in to VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to check back into Visual SourceSafe and click the OK button 4 When the operation is finished the file has a red mark next to its name This means you as the current user of High performance Embedded Workshop has checked it out 5 The red mark next to the file name is removed which indicates that the file has been checked into Visual SourceSafe If you select the Keep checked out checkbox in the Check in to VCS dialog box before you check the files into Visual SourceSafe these files can be writable even when they are checked out REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 202 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 9 2 6 Viewing the status of files in Visual SourceSafe Although files appear in your High performance Embedded Workshop project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Some of the files that are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe will be checked in and others will be checked out i e being edited by a user The Get VCS status command displays the current status of files The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3
326. either the test suite name or the test gives fast access to the test facilities features Right clicking on the test suite icon iy allows you the following options Pop up Menu Option Function Edit Test Suite Edits the current test suite Allows you to add and remove tests to the High performance Embedded Workshop test system Close Test Suite Closes the current test suite Compare Test Image File Compares test image file allows you to compare a test image file with the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or with another test image file already on your disk The results are then displayed in the test browser Run Tests Runs tests allows you to run multiple tests that you have defined in the test suite and see the results of the comparisons in the test browser There are various options to configure the test run execution You can also use this option to refresh the test image files automatically if you make a minor modification and they need to be updated REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 318 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Pop up Menu Option Function Test Results Browser This menu displays the test results for one or more test executions It shows the pass and fail results and the detailed reason why the test failed Properties The Test Suite Properties dialog box is displayed It displays the test suite name test suite description test suite location an
327. elow e In place edit in the Data column e In place edit in the Code column e To change the contents of memory open the Set dialog box by selecting one of the following operations o Double click the Data column you want to change OR o Double click the Code column you want to change OR REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 383 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility o Select the data you want to change and choose Set from the pop up menu Address 00000000 Data bo Data Type i Value String Length li byte jejelze verify Cancel Enter the value value or character to be set in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugger When setting the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group 17 3 3 Selecting a memory range If the memory address range is in the Memory view you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit depending on your Memory view display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 384 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 3 4 Filling an area of memory with constant data You can set the con
328. enu option or toolbar button Deletes a symbol Delete All pop up menu option toolbar button Deletes all symbols Load pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box opened by Defines symbols clicking on the menu option or toolbar button BP column Double click on the column 15 5 2 4 Watch window Sets or clears a software breakpoint While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Enable Auto Update pop up menu option toolbar Click on the menu option or toolbar button button Enable Auto Update All pop up menu option toolbar button Disable Auto Update pop up menu option toolbar button Disable Auto Update All pop up menu option toolbar button Record Update Value gt Start Recording pop up Make setting in the dialog box menu option toolbar button opened by clicking on the menu option or toolbar button Record Update Value gt Stop Recording pop up Click on the menu option or toolbar menu option toolbar button button Add Watch pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box Edit Name pop up menu option toolbar button opened by clicking on the menu Edit Value pop up menu option toolbar button option or toolbar button Delete pop up menu option toolbar button Click on the menu option or toolbar Delete All pop up menu option toolbar button button Radix gt Hexadecimal pop up menu option toolbar button Radix gt De
329. ept of Workspace and Project e Workspace Workspace is a largest unit when you make the program with High performance Embedded Workshop Workspace can have several projects When you create a workspace more than one project is needed and one project is automatically made when you create the workspace e Project s When you make the program sometimes you make a certain function as a library and make hierarchical levels between several modules In such cases you can also create the library project and insert it to a workspace WORKSPACE 1 2 Main window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files that are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 1 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Title bar s cy Tutonal High performance Embedded Workshop resetprg c Menu bart e File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Test Window Help Tobas e D Sh g S i s oh I HR D A z Bey Tutorial El Tutorial Eo ey source file typedefine h Workspace gt intprg src stackact h window aes E vectbl src F E vhand
330. er If you click on a toolbar button or pop up menu option associated with display of error messages the line of the error message will be highlighted and the editor will show the source code of that line if the line has any source code Double clicking the line of an error message will also show the source code in the editor When you attempt an operation to display an error or warning the status bar shows this error or warning message Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Ol Highlights the next occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor a OT Highlights the previous occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor A Highlights the next occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor AT Highlights the previous occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor Display next Error Warning Info al Displays the editor that generated the next build error or warning Display previous Error Warning Info at Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Help a Shows the help information about the line Go to Error Warning Info Goes to the associated source line Clear Window ie Clears the conten
331. er from one configuration to another 1 Click Build gt Linkage Order The Linkage Order dialog box opens 2 Select the Use custom linkage order check box 3 Select the configuration you wish to copy in the Current configuration drop down list This defaults to the currently loaded configuration 4 Click the Copy to button this displays the Select Configuration To Copy To dialog box and asks you which of the configurations in the current project you wish to copy the current linkage order to 5 Select a configuration and click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 103 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 4 Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that is provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 1 Editor window The editor window contains the file windows that are being viewed or edited The title bar of the active window will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure bellow All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible OR e Press CTRL TAB or CTRL SHIFT TAB to cycle through the windows one after another OR e Select the window by name from the Window menu OR e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor wi
332. erations will be recorded into a macro file Menu Menu Option Shortcut Key Toolbar Button Debug RTOS Debug Go To Cursor BH Step In Alt F11 H Step Over Alt F10 r Step Out Shift Alf F11 ry While a macro is being recorded operations made in the window or dialog box listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window or dialog box Window Dialog Box Name Editor Disassembly Label Watch Locals Code Coverage Data Coverage Hardware Break Trace conditions Performance Analysis Conditions Trigger Output Conditions Realtime Profile Configuration properties Device Setting Start Stop Function Setting Opened by Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window View gt Disassembly View gt Symbol gt Label View gt Symbol gt Watch View gt Symbol gt Locals View gt Code gt Code Coverage View gt Code gt Data Coverage View gt Event gt Hardware Break View gt Event gt Trace Conditions View gt Event gt Performance Analysis Conditions View gt Event gt Trigger Output Conditions View gt Performance gt Realtime Profile Setup gt Emulator gt System Setup gt Emulator gt Device Setting Setup gt Emulator gt Start Stop Function Setting REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 273 of 523 rCENESAS High perform
333. erent sets of search results to be available in the Output Window Select a search location type Directory Selecting this option will enable searching a directory or directory structure for the given search string For this options set the Search sub directories checkbox if you also wish to search all sub directories of the given directory If you just want to search the specified single directory in Directory field then ensure that this checkbox is not checked Active project Selecting this option will enable you to search the files belonging to the currently active project in the workspace All loaded projects Selecting this option will enable you to search the files belonging to all loaded projects in the workspace Note that the Active project and All loaded projects options will not search project dependencies include files Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find in Files 1 or Find in Files 2 tab of the Output window To stop a Find In Files action once it is under way select the Edit gt Stop Find in Files menu option Once the Find In Files operation is complete you may jump to an instance of the search string by double clicking on the desired entry in the Output window Replacing text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text To replace te
334. erformance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 4 A confirmation dialog box appears Select No Confirmation Request 5 J Would you want to display the static member on this expansion DD T Don t ask this question again The static member variables are hidden even when structures are expanded and this will save time taken for display Even after you have selected No it is still possible to view the static member variables by adding them to the Watch window 17 18 3 1 Tooltip watch Use this function to know the value of a variable defined in the source program Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode to view the source program and rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip pop up window will appear showing the watch information To use Tooltip watch 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Check the Enable tooltip watch check box 4 Click OK M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the editor window or disassembly window in source mode 1 Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode showing the variable that you want to examine 2 Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 447 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High
335. ermediate files from all projects in the workspace Do you wish to continue T Don t ask this question again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Clean workspace checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK The Build tab in the Output window shows all projects and configurations in which intermediate and output files have been deleted You can select multiple configurations and delete intermediate and output files produced in building For details see section 2 8 3 Building multiple projects REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 64 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Note The types of intermediate and output files to be deleted vary with the package and version number e CCompiler Package for M16C Series V 5 45 Release 00 or later e C Compiler Package for M32C Series V 5 42 Release 00 or later e Compiler Package for R32C Series V 1 02 Release 00 or later Relocatable absolute linkage list MAP and assembly program list files LIS are deleted Subcommand files of toolchains are not deleted The extension for absolute files varies with the specified format e CCompiler Package for M16C Series V 5 30 Release 0 to V 5 44 Release 00 e CCom
336. escribe how you can associate Microsoft Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace First you need to select Microsoft Visual SourceSafe as the version control system to be connected with the High performance Embedded Workshop REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 194 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System To attach Microsoft Visual SourceSafe to a workspace 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box opens 2 Select the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe entry from the Microsoft Version control systems list Select ersion Control System Version control system Microsoft isual Sources ate Ronee i E 3 Click OK The SourceSafe Login dialog box opens SourceSafe Login Username Useri1 Login Fassword eek Dancel Database path i 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe username into the Username field and password into the Password field 5 For the Database path field specify the Visual SourceSafe database file SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this project Select either of the following operations e Click the Browse button to open the Select Visual SourceSafe database dialog box Select the Visual SourceSafe database file and click the Select button OR select VWisual SourceSate database e Fee File name lsrcsafe ini Files of typ
337. etting up commands 1 Select the Commands tab 2 Click the Add button on User menu options 3 The Add Menu Option dialog box appears 4 Enter Initialize in Option and click the Add button 5 The Add Command dialog box appears 6 Enter C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe in Version control executable 7 Enter init in Arguments 8 Enter C src sampleCVS in Initial directory REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 188 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Command Version control executable Cyeve 1 11 1 Favs exe Arguments Add Command ki Browse pores j cc llmLrLLCUC Initial directory C ero sampleCV5 gt Browse Executable retum code 9 Click the OK button Return code of executable is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To z 0 10 Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box Also set up the following six commands in the same way Command Option Name Characters to be Input Register Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument import m New Source sampleCVS Renesas rel 20060228 Initial directory C src sampleCVS Check out Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument checkout sampleCVS Initial directory C src Status Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument status FILENAME Initial directory C src sampleCVS Di
338. ew3Server exe under the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory 7 Click the OK button and close the Add a Program dialog box 8 Click the Add Port button to open the Add a Port dialog box 9 Enter DCOM in Name and 135 in Port Number and select TCP option button 10 Click the OK button and close the Add a Port dialog box 11 Click the OK button in the Windows Firewall dialog box 12 Close the Network and Internet Connections 13 Close the Control Panel Step2 DCOM 1 Select Run from the Windows start menu The Run dialog box is invoked 2 Enter dcomcnfg in the Open field and click the OK button The Component Services window opens 3 Expand the tree If the Window Security Alert dialog box appears at expansion click the Keep Blocking button Console Root gt Component Services gt Computers gt My Computer 4 Right click on My Computer and select Properties from the pop up menu The My Computer Properties dialog box is invoked 5 Click the COM Security tab 6 Click the Edit Limits button in the Access Permissions area to open the Access Permission dialog box 7 Select ANONYMOUS LOGON in the Group or user names list 8 Select the Allow checkbox for Remote Activation in the Permission for ANONYMOUS LOGON list 9 Click the OK button and close the Access Permission dialog box 10 Click the Edit Limits button in the Launch and Activation Permission area to open the Launch Permission dia
339. ewing records ssssesseeeeeeesssssssssssssssesecereeressssssssssssseetreersossssssssseseeerrrreessssss 32 1 14 4 Se ae A T E T E AIA A E A E A I TE E E A A A T A E E A AT 33 1 14 5 Step 4 Creating a test suite asediesassonnsaroecattebosuenatennnsnssinntoaneoaad sbenoanadenawanteguabannencnecntebeduenatannecessdanoaskeannesstsbenwand 33 1 14 6 Step 3 Editing a test SUITE vasesrsinnssanndn canencwnddionsdnineaetsuead aan ae a AUAN AAEE Ear E EENES 34 1 14 7 Step 6 Creating a test image file surcos aAa a EE EEEa anaa AE aaa ar 36 1 14 8 Step 7 Modifying the program before the test ccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseenses 38 1 14 9 Step 8 Viewing the test result UnMatched ec ccccsssnesseeseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeenees 39 1 14 10 Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test AQain cccccsececceecccceececaaeeeseseesseeeeeeeeeeeess 40 1 14 11 Step 10 Viewing the test result matched eecessseseeeececececceeeeaaeessssseeeeecceececeeeeeaaaesaaeaasussseeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 40 PE 5001S Ml 5 E E A E TE A AR EE A TE EE O AA 4 2 1 MTS OUNCE OCC 98 E T nate vscnandavianpacacenaencontee E OET re aeducassasaatavoea ET AT EET 4 2 2 Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace WINdOW cccccccccceccccceeeaeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaaaessesseeseeseeseeeeeeeeaas 42 2 3 Poe E e E E E A E A EE EE ENE AA 45 2 3 1 Po Wi Testo A DLO C CU ena R E ESER 46
340. f the Makefile options controls This will launch the Makefile System Environment dialog box Makefile System Environment Ei ES M Inherit system environment Cancel Add bere pi Hodiy Feus Environment variables Hemarve 2 The Inherit system environment checkbox can be used to alter the inheritance of the system environment Set The makefile will be executed in the standard environment Default Clear The makefile will be executed in a fresh environment Note Only the SystemRoot variable will be carried over into the new environment as it is needed to allow program to run in Windows 3 In both cases additional environment variable can be set using the Environment variables controls Any values set here will override the value in the current system environment 4 Click OK to save the changes and return to the Options dialog box Values will not be committed to the Workspace until the OK button in that dialog is also used REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 99 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 10 Customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop linkage order Modules are usually linked in the alphabetical order in High performance Embedded Workshop However you can specify the linkage order if you wish to To manually change the linkage order 1 Click Build gt Linkage Order The Linkage Order dialog box opens 2 Select the
341. ference 5 Placeholders for more information on placeholders Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click the OK button to finish creating the application Click the Modify button to modify an application The Modify Application dialog box will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog box described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click the OK button If you want to manage files that are not by default recognized by the High performance Embedded Workshop e g documents then you need to create a new extension and a new file group To create a new file extension in a new file group L 2 Select Project gt File Extensions The File Extensions dialog box opens Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 55 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Add File Extension File extension x ext x Cancel File group C Extension belongs to an existing group Absolute tile Extension belongs to a new group Text Sssociated application pen Text with windows default dd Madii L Remove 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumeric and an underscore as
342. ff Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument diff FILENAME Initial directory C src sampleCVS Commit Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument commit m modify FILENAME Initial directory C src sampleCVS Log Version control executable C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe Argument log FILENAME Initial directory C src sampleCVS Preparation for version control is now completed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 189 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 11 2 4 Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Create a Repository 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Initialize 2 Select the file in the Initialize dialog box and click the OK button Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe init Command s completed successfully 8 11 2 5 Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Register a Module 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Register 2 Select the file in the Register dialog box and click the OK button Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe import m New Source sampleCVS Renesas rel 20060228 N sampleCVS dbsct c Omit No conflicts created by this import Command s completed successfully 8 11 2 6 Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Checkout 2 Select the file in the Checkout dialog box and click the OK button 3 The Version Control tab of the output window shows
343. figuration Configurations are the build option settings e g output of debug information or optimization having their own names The term configuration can also be referred to as build configuration In the figure of the Standard toolbar shown as an example configurations SimDebug_SH 4 Debug and Release are available Configurations created by the High performance Embedded Workshop When a project is created after selection of the toolchain the High performance Embedded Workshop automatically creates configurations Debug and Release Selecting SuperH RISC engine from CPU family and Renesas SuperH RISC engine from Tool chain respectively Hew Proyect Workspace Workspace Name a fAnplcatices Workspace Name F Demonstration Project Name Empty Application Pioject_Name TE Import blakelile ae ae Library J Debugger only KREE C Aworkspace workspace_Neme Browse CPU teredy Supere RISC engine Tool chan Renesas Super Stendaid If you have selected a target debugger at creation of the project the High performance Embedded Workshop creates a configuration suitable for the debugger If you have selected SH 4 Simulator in Targets at creation of the project configuration SimDebug_SH 4 is created REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 21 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Selecting SH 4 Simulator in Targets as
344. figuration Map Section Information Toolbar un Gl Linker section setting ee eee Address a Jdi Na INTHandler 00000800 0000057 00000558 section 2 poTHandler VECTTEL goo00nss ooooors3 ooooonze rou ere d oooonso0 IntPRG ooo0ope4 oooooDe7 ooooooo4 9 yrHandler ECTTEL PResetPRG 00001000 O000106F 00000070 A o0001000 P 00002000 0000C67EC 000047BE DETTE c ooo067e0 000068543 00000384 e CSBSEC 00006644 000068646 oooo0on8 Saige CSDSEC oooos6B4e oooo6E5 ooooonoe Sub section Prag F C CSBSEC CEDSEC HME p OO006B58 D0006863 Oooooooe ee i er P C CSBSEC CSDSE poverlayPRe 00002000 O000208F 00000090 F group ti POver layPRG B 70000000 7OOOO5SEB OOODOSEC da 70000000 R 700005 700005F7 0poooooe A Aa B R 5 T3FFFBFO 73FFFFEF 00000400 Section a p RSTHandler AQOO0000 agoo001B ooooooig Section Hame Start Address End Address Size Overlay The map information and section settings of the linkage editor The section settings after a build REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 233 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map e The left pane shows the map information and section settings of the linkage editor Section settings of the linkage editor are displayed While in the edit mode each of subsection groups overlay groups and sections can be dragged and dropped User Operation Appearance of the Mouse Pointer while an Item Position of the Dropped Item is Dragged Select a s
345. filel obj c dir1 filel c c dir1 filel h gcc lt lt c oc dirl filel obj c dirl filel c lt a If the sub command file generated has the name c temp hmk111 cmd then the following would be executed by hmake assuming c dirl filel obj is out of date gcc c temp hmk111 cmd The command file c temp hmk111 cmd would contain c o c dirl filel obj c dir1 filel c It is possible to include more than one command in the description block and to use combinations of the standard and sub command file commands REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 522 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 HMAKE User Guide 13 4 Comments A character signifies a comment When this character appears as the first character on a line the rest of the line up until the next new line character is ignored There follows examples of valid comments My hmake file Variable declaration OUTPUT c dir1 file obj Descriptor OUTPUT c dirl filel c c dir1 file1 h set VARI valuel gcc c dirl filel c A comment must occupy its own line in the hmake file It is not possible to put comments on the end of other statements 13 5 Message commands The message command is used to output a line of text to standard out whilst a make file is executing These text lines will be output in the order they appear in the make file in amongst output from any executables being executed
346. fore executing the user program Display PC CTRL Fc Opens the editor or Disassembly window at the SHIFT Y address of the PC Step In F11 H D Executes a block of user program before breaking Step Over F10 p D Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Step Out SHIFT F11 C Executes sufficient user program to reach the end of the current function Step C Opens the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Step Auto D Steps only one source line when the editor window is Mode active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Assembly C Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 491 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Menu Menu Option Button Recording 1 Source Halt Program Stops the execution of the user program Initialize Disconnects the debugger and connects it again Connect 2 Disconnect 2 Save Memory Saves the specified memory area data to a file Verify Memory 2 Download Modules Shortcut Key Toolbar Macro gel ag 6 Function Steps only one source line Connects the debugger Disconnects the debugger 1 Main Menus Verifies file contents against memory contents Downloads the object program Unload Modules
347. formance Embedded Workshop External debugger selected sas P debugger Debugger settings PO debugger location PD Browse PO profile file location Po Browse Command line options gt Download module o K Boe REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 436 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To configure the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data is the profile file This tells the debugger which profile file to load when it is launched This file stores the debug setup information 3 The third item of data is the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger 4 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 17 17 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop The following details the information required to setup an external debugger which is not Hitachi Debugging Interface or the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop and launch from the e
348. g Nest level 1 64 fio Display symbol Parameter Local Variable Diaplay Radix Hexadecimal C Decimal C Octal C Binary Cancel Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window Note Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 434 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 16 4 Selecting an encoding format If the values of variables are characters or strings and they should be displayed as UTF 8 code select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Click on the Debug tab and select UTF 8 for Encoding Format The Watch window now shows the values of variables as UTF 8 code If Local Code Page default has been selected for Encoding Format the values are displayed as ASCII code Note The default font for display in the Watch window is Courier New which is not supported by UTF 8 Select another font compatible with UTF 8 in the Format Views dialog box in advance 17 17 Using an external debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Setup C
349. g box opens 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button An output file s path can include placeholders 3 4 3 Dependent Files tab This tab is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the High performance Embedded Workshop checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file G e dependent files have been modified since the input files was last modified If not the phase will not be executed Options Output Files Dependent Files Dependent tiles To add a dependent file 1 Click the Add button The Add Dependent File dialog box opens 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 92 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Dependent File dialog box opens 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file t
350. ge 299 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 2 Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugger Among the High performance Embedded Workshop functions dependent on the debugger test image data of the test items listed below can be saved into test image files The following table shows the test items in the Create New Test Image dialog box and the corresponding windows from which the data will be saved into test image files For more information on the test image data to be saved into test image files how to make detailed setting and test results see the descriptions of test items for the corresponding windows Create New Test Image Dialog Box Window Name Opened by Test Group Name Test Item Name Symbol CPU Code Watch Locals ASMWatch CWatch Simulated 1 O Coverage Trace REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Watch Locals ASMWatch CWatch View gt Symbol gt Watch View gt Symbol gt Locals View gt Symbol gt ASMWatch View gt Symbol gt CWatch Simulated I O View gt CPU gt Coverage Trace Simulated I O View gt Code gt Coverage View gt Code gt Trace rCENESAS Supported Debugger Simulator Debugger for SuperH Family Simulator Debugger for H8SX H8S H8 Family Simulator Debugger for RX Family Emulator Debuggers for Supe
351. ges describe the procedures to create a workspace make settings for version control create a repository register a module check out check the status compare register the result and view logs REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 185 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Step 1 Create a workspace Step 2 Selecting Custom Version Control System Step 3 Making settings for Version Control Step 4 Using the Version Control facility Create a Repository Step 5 Using the Version Control facility Register a Module Step 6 Using the Version Control facility Check out Step 7 Using the Version Control facility Modify the File Step 8 Using the Version Control facility Check the Status Step 9 Using the Version Control facility Compare Step 10 Using the Version Control facility Register the Result Step 11 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 8 11 2 1 Step 1 Create a workspace 1 Select File gt New Workspace to open the New Project Workspace dialog box 2 Create a workspace with the following conditions e Workspace Name sampleCVS e Project Name sampleCVS e Directory C WorkSpace sampleCVS 3 Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 Create a folder for CVS C src sampleC VS 5 Move the file you wish to control from C WorkSpace sampleCVS sampleCVS to C src sampleCVS 6 Start up the High performance Embedded Workshop and open the
352. gh performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Edit Label head Address OOF F420 wll Cancel Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details see section 17 18 2 3 Supporting duplicate labels 17 18 1 4 Deleting a label To delete a label select the label and choose Delete from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request 2 Are you sure you want to delete the label main Don t ask this question again If you click OK the label 1s removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box 17 18 1 5 Deleting all labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request 2 Are you sure you want to delete all labels Don t ask this question again If you click OK all the labels are removed from the High performance Embedded Workshop system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00
353. gt CPU gt Memory or click the Memory toolbar button Ea You can specify the display start address and the scroll range at opening The Display Address dialog box opens Enter the Display Address Scroll Start Address and Scroll End Address Display Address Ei Display Address ooo0o000 a Scroll Start Address Jooooa000 El Scroll End Address FFFFFFFF El Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 380 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display scroll start and end addresses Window configuration Memory 000000 Toolbar E ee l6 Column header Sddress T LAETA FI 2 3 4 F5 FE T ze s z R c D a E saur amp cooooo FE 35 1 00 oo oo on og og cooolo oo oo oo oo OO OO OOF OO cooozo oo oo oo oo OO OOF Of OO jocoso cooo4o ooo0so Address column Register column Data column Code column Label column e The Label and Register columns are hidden by default e The Label column shows the name of the label allocated to the first address of the memory data displayed on this row e The Register column shows the name of the register allocated to the first address of the memo
354. gure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 167 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Commands Projects General System menu options and toolbar buttons es ee eee eae ie i ilerle Remove from WCS Get from WCS Check out from WCS Check into WCS let VCS status User menu options Add odin Renove Mare up Mase dar The Commands tab has two lists of menu options e System defined menu options System menu options and toolbar buttons System menu options and toolbar buttons lists the menu options always shown as the Tools gt Version Control sub menus These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the Version Control toolbar This contains the six menu options associated with the most frequently used version control commands e User defined menu options User menu options User menu options lists user defined menu options Menu options defined in this list will be added to the end of Tools gt Version Control sub menus If you wish to add menu options not included in the system menu options they must be defined in this list User defined menu options are not shown on the version control toolbar 8 1 1 System defined menu options There are six version control toolbar buttons They provide you with a shortcut to the most commonly used version control commands nit
355. gure above the Compiler is the first phase the Assembler is the second phase and the Linker is the third and final phase During the Compiler phase the C C source files from the project are compiled in turn During the Assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the Linker phase all library files and output files from the Compiler and Assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phases disable phases delete phases and so on These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 41 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 2 Configuring the Projects tab of the Workspace window The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon Workspace Project Assembly source file Current project Sion source tile Folder crane Ei dbsct c Project file ee ED lowesre c 2 resetprge c i abrk c wo SH4 Demo c Download modules Folder Download module Dependencies Folder Dependent file Download modules oe E Active prajectabs Dependencies B ery IAC a lowerc h E sbrk h stackscth a Yect inc Gl Oey Project m Unload project Loaded project Un
356. h performance Embedded Workshop is upgraded Thus the format in which workspaces can be saved is slightly different depending on the version of the High performance Embedded Workshop REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 17 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview To save a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace in the current version s format select File gt Save Workspace To save the workspace in a previous version s format select File gt Save Workspace As If the current workspace has changed since it was last changed you will be prompted to save it to the current file and version The Save Workspace As dialog box will then be launched Save Workspace As Ei E4 Files Saved Filename Director Workspace Namehwe CA WorkSpace orkspace_ Mame Project Mame hwp CAWorkS paces Workspace Name Project Name Defaults ession het CAWrorkSpaceWorkepace Name Project Mame SimsessionSH T Ast CA WorkSpacesMorkspace NameSProject Mame Format Prefix HE 4 08 00 Format current ed po HE 4 08 00 Format current HE 4 07 00 Format HEW 4 06 00 Format HE 4 05 00 Format HE 4 04 00 Format HEW 4 03 00 Format HEW 4 02 00 Format HE 4 07 00 Format HE 4 00 00 Format This contains a list of all the files currently associated with the workspace a drop list control containing a list of available versions the current version is selected by default and an ed
357. h performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Test Browser x Ba 1 Test Name Description Result II TEST Load and Reset and Step FAIL Jc H Component Result Details ied CPU Memory SimSessionSH 4 FAIL Failed in memory range OxO0000000 Ox0O000000t 1 14 1 Example of test procedures This page introduces an example of test procedures which is a sequence through build and debugging using the macro recording support facility and test support facility This example uses a program that sorts ten random data items written in C language which are typically included in the Tutorial project in an emulator debugger or in a project for which Demonstration has been selected as the project type in the SuperH family simulator debugger in ascending descending order This example lets you see a difference in data stored in an array Before starting the test in this example array a in the program code must be changed from a local to global variable e Before test First open a workspace and connect the High performance Embedded Workshop to the debugger 1 Create a new project workspace or open an existing project workspace For creation of a project workspace see section 17 1 2 Selecting a debugger 2 Select a session which you wish to use for connection with the debugger from the session list on the Standard toolbar For selection of a session see section 17 1 6 1 Selecting a session
358. hat has been saved e Preparing a test script to be used in the example of test procedures In this example use the macro recording support facility to record the following combination of operations as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands into a macro This macro should be used as a test script at execution of a test Classification Operation Preparation before the running the program Reload the session Initialize values See Step 1 2 Prepare a program Initialize register values See Step 1 3 Build the program for demonstration See Step 1 4 Download the program Download the program for demonstration See Step 1 5 Add variables run the program and check Use the memory fill function to set the memory value of array a to 0 the result See Step 1 6 Reset the CPU See Step 1 7 Run the program until a selected line within a main function is reached See Step 1 9 Add the array which stores random data to the Watch window See Step 1 10 Note Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 29 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview e Example of test procedures Invoke the test support facility and select the data in an array memory content at the address of an array as the target of the test Save test image information to the test image file that you wish to us
359. hat you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button A dependent file s path can include placeholders 3 5 Controlling the build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog box Select Setup gt Options to display the Options dialog box and then select the Build tab If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the number of errors exceeds checkbox and specify the error count limit in the field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds checkbox and specify the warning count limit in the field to the right Errors and warnings Stop build if the number of errors exceeds ro BE M Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the Command line Environment and Initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 93 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Notes e Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build
360. have memory in the debugger into which your user code will be loaded In the High performance Embedded Workshop the project generation process will have completed much of this work However if you are using a different configuration of board from the standard types then some customization will be essential 17 1 4 1 Setup To set up the debugger configuration choose Setup gt Simulator or Setup gt Emulator Under this sub menu will be the menus which can be used to configure your debug platform In the case of the SuperH family Simulator the available menus are the System and Memory resource These options both allow the simulator to be customized and setup to your requirements You will be presented with a set up dialog specific to the debugger that you chose in the Debug Settings dialog For a detailed description of the features available in your debugger please refer to the separate Debugger User Manual 17 1 4 2 Memory mapping For the debugger to correctly represent your user system the memory map must be set up It needs to know which areas in the device s address space are RAM ROM on chip registers or areas where there is no memory When you select the device type and mode in the project generator the High performance Embedded Workshop will automatically set up the map for that device and the mode in which the processor is operating For example in a device with internal ROM and RAM the areas where these are located in
361. he Build tab of the Output window 2 8 2 Building a project The Build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file TEST C include s the file HEADER H and the latter has changed since the last build the file TEST C will be recompiled To perform a build operation Select one of the following operations e Click the Build toolbar button OR e Press F7 OR e Select Build gt Build OR REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 60 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build gt Build from the pop up menu The Build All option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced To perform a build all operation Select one of the following operations e Click the Build All toolbar button E OR e Select Build gt Build All OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build gt Build All from the pop up menu All output from a build or build all operation is redirected to the Build tab of the Output window Both the Build and the Build All operations will terminate if
362. he Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Select the session you would like to save 3 Click the Save as button The Save Session dialog box opens 4 Browse to the new file location 5 If you only want to export the session file to another location then leave the Maintain link checkbox unchecked If you would like High performance Embedded Workshop to use this location instead of the current session location then check the Maintain link checkbox 6 Click the OK button To save a session with a different name using File gt Save Sessions As 1 Select File gt Save Sessions As The Session Name dialog box opens Session Hame Session name Cancel ai ES __ Cancel 2 Enter the new session name 3 Click the OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 361 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 6 7 Reloading session information To reload a session Select File gt Refresh Session Clicking this will lose any changes to your session currently and the reload the current session into High performance Embedded Workshop 17 2 Viewing a program This section describes how to look at your program as source code and assembly language mnemonics The source code will be shown in the source mode in two types of windows The main features are Editor Window e A source file opened in the editor window can be edited e When debugging and stepping through s
363. he Diff dialog box and click the OK button 4 The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe diff sampleCVS c Index sampleCVS c RCS file C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v retrieving revision 1 1 1 1 diff r1 1 1 1 sampleCVS c 28c28 3 1 lt printf Data Input n gt Noop gt while 1 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 191 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System gt gt printt Data Input n loop 49a53 54 gt Noop gt Command s completed successfully You can see the changes made in the file sampleCVS c 8 11 2 10 Step 10 Using the Version Control facility Register the Result 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Commit 2 Select the file in the Commit dialog box and click the OK button 3 The Version Control tab of the output window shows the following message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe commit m modify sampleCVS c Checking in sampleCVS c C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v lt sampleCVS c new revision 1 2 previous revision 1 1 done Command s completed successfully 8 11 2 11 Step 11 Using the Version Control facility View Logs 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Log 2 Select the file in the Log dialog box and click the OK button 3 The Version Control tab of the output window shows the fo
364. he High performance Embedded Workshop debugging system but the memory contents of the target remains unmodified After a module has been unloaded it cannot be debugged unless it is reloaded To unload modules Select one of the following operations Select the module which you wish to unload from the Debug gt Unload Modules submenu OR Right click on the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Unload It is possible to select two or more modules To unload all modules Select Debug gt Unload Modules gt All Downloaded Modules REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 355 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens This will unload the modules from the target in the order specified in Download modules list on the Target tab 17 1 6 Debugger sessions The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to store all of your builder options into a configuration This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name In a similar way High performance Embedded Workshop allows the user to store his debugger options in a session Later on you can select the session and all of the debugger options will be restored These sessions allow the user to specify target download modules and debug options This means that potentially
365. he OK button to confirm the new help file settings REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 149 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 6 6 Keyboard shortcut customization The High performance Embedded Workshop allows the keyboard shortcuts to be customized to your own preferences This means that major operations can be configured to different keys especially useful if you are migrating from a different tool To reach the keyboard shortcut customization dialog click Setup gt Customize Then when Customize dialog box is invoked click the Keyboard tab Keyboard Default keyboard layout i Reset High performance Embedded Workshop default Category ee Commands Current keyboard shortcut Hemove Me Open Close New Workspace Open Workspace i one Import New keyboard shortcut Export None Save Workspace Close Workspace Hew Session key curenti assigned to Import Session H dil LE Cc Ste ae Description This dialog box allows instant selection of either the default High performance Embedded Workshop keyboard shortcuts or the PD debugger shortcuts To change the entire keyboard layout select an item in the Default keyboard layout drop down list By default it uses the High performance Embedded Workshop settings A number of operations are possible on this dialog box To add a new keyboard s
366. he current directory and the set command sets an environment variable which will then be in use for the duration of the make file execution Both are used in the same way as the DOS equivalents There follows some examples of valid description blocks which use these commands CHANGEDIR cdc dirl dir2 SETENV set VARI valuel set VAR2 value2 set VAR3 value3 It does not matter that CHANGEDIR and SETENV are not file names They will be treated as files that do not exist and so the commands will always be executed Sub command files If you wish hmake to generate a sub command file for you then the command part of the description block should be specified as follows this replaces lt commandn gt above REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 521 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 HMAKE User Guide lt command start gt lt lt lt sub command gt lt sub command gt gt ou lt sub commandn gt lt lt lt command end gt This will generate a sub command file in the Windows temporary directory which will contain the lines lt sub command1 gt lt sub command2 gt etc This command file will be deleted once the make process has completed The name of the command file will be substituted for all the text between the two lt lt of the sub command file This is generated by hmake s You do not have to worry about the name For example c dirl
367. he current macro files and functions The other menus options are the same as those seen on the Macros toolbar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 262 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility It is also possible to associate macro functions with a menu when you do this additional menu options are added underneath the standard macro menu options This is shown below Macros Record Macro D Play Macro le Stop haci 1 Build Macro functors Download associated Memory_fill With menu options Reset CPU Items that also have an associated toolbar have their icons displayed alongside the menu options The standard buttons on the Macros toolbar are shown below Play Macro Pause Macro Record Mecro Stop Macro C u0 0O e The Record Macro button starts the macro recording process After this button is clicked debugging and High performance Embedded Workshop management operations are recorded This operation is the same as the Record macro menu on the Tools menu e The Play Macro button starts a macro function playback If more than one macro is defined the select macro function dialog is displayed to ask you to select specific macro for playback e The Pause Macro button is only enabled when recording or playing back a macro function This pauses the current operation so that you can return to it later e The Stop Macro button is only enabled whe
368. he project i e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog box Select Build gt Build Phases The Build Phases dialog box will be displayed If you would like a build phase to take files output from a previous build phase these files are called intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog box Build Order Build File Order File Mappings hter mediate file mappings for build Add SH Assembler Opt Linker Object file SHO G Gom SH dssembler Assembly source file SH G G Gom OptLinker Object file SH G Libra OptLinker Library file B Remove oath REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 88 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features A File Mapping means that you would like the output files of a certain type produced by one build phase referred to as the Source phase to another build phase referred to as the Destination phase Such intermediate files are then passed in addition to the project files To add a file mapping 1 Click the Add button The Define File Mapping dialog box opens 2 Select an existing file group to use for the new mapping from the File group drop down list 3 Select the source phase i e the phase that generates the files from the Source phase drop down list 4 Select the destination phase
369. he recording operation begins 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files High performance Embedded Workshop 1s not capable of recording all operations in the High performance Embedded Workshop system into macro files as scripts For the operations that can be recorded Record Macro in the menu list shows a macro record icon This indicates that the operation can be recorded into a macro file e Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products e Recordable functions dependent on the debugger 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products included in tool packages are listed in the table below e Handling menu options shortcut keys and toolbar buttons While a macro is being recorded if you handle a menu option shortcut key or toolbar button of those listed below or make any setting in a dialog box opened these operations will be recorded into a macro file Menu Menu Option Shortcut Key Toolbar Button File Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Import Session P Save Session s Refresh Session Download A New Module 2 Recent Workspaces Recent Downloaded Modules REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 267 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Menu Edit Menu Option Toggl
370. he selected files To define a command to be executed via the system menu or toolbar button 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select a menu option in which you wish to define a command from System menu options and toolbar buttons list and click the Modify button The Define Commands dialog box opens 3 Click the Add button to define a command in the selected menu option See section 8 2 Defining Version Control commands for further information 4 Close the Define Commands dialog box by clicking the OK button 5 Close the Version Control Setup dialog box by clicking the OK button 8 1 2 User defined menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu If you have already created user defined menu options definitions of the commands can be modified or deleted It is also possible to change the order of menu options being displayed User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar To create a new user defined version control menu option 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add Menu Option dialog box opens 3 Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field 4 Click the Add button The Add Command dialog box opens For details see section 8 2 Defining Version
371. he style of step performed source or instruction in a synchronized Debugger will be determined by the program counter step mode and editor cursor position in that Debugger and not the Debugger where the operation was initiated Each individual Debugger will effectively act as if the step operation had been executed locally by the normal High performance Embedded Workshop method e g toolbar button Regarding download the operation will only be synchronized with Debuggers that have modules with the same filename as the module in the initiating Debugger If a Debugger contains more than one module then only the one with the matching filename will be downloaded Unless specifically mentioned all other Debugger operations and other non Debugger High performance Embedded Workshop operations are possible while synchronized debugging But they will only be executed on the initiating platform and not synchronized with other platforms Debug Settings dialog box Debug Settings Target E Demo Tagel E Demo Advanced CPU Eare Webwag hornet EP oF Download modules Offset Address Format S CONFIGDIR PAQ OOOO0000 Eli Dwarfs REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 478 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging While synchronized debugging the functionality of the Debug Settings dialog is different Instead of being able to set all the norma
372. hen leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine Select Server Location f Local C Remote aaa Computer name Branee REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 216 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine Clicking Yes then connects your machine to the new location High performance Embedded Workshop To share this workspace requires the workspace to be closed and reloaded You have modified the workspace Do you want to save the modifications Note If the network is running multiple High performance Embedded Workshop workspaces with the network facilities to share projects enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is serving all of the network workspaces REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 217 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Comparing Files 11 Comparing Files The High performance Embedded Workshop has an integrated difference view You can perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive or a local file and a file in the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe system 11 1 Opening the Difference window To perform a difference
373. hether the environment is shown as each tool is executed e Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool is executed Fia MW Command line W hitial directory W Environment Mark out of date files 2 8 8 Displaying out of date files in the Workspace window Files updated later than the file generated by the previous build i e out of date files are marked in the workspace window In the window below the file demo c is out of date When you click Build next time these files will be re built This is also displayed for dependent projects of the current project The view of these files is updated whenever something that affects the build occurs e g options changing file addition dependencies changing files modified etc Workspace x n JE intpre src H E lowllsrc ie vecttblerc os 6 vhandler src BS source tile o he E dbectc ae 6 demo c n E lowerec vee resetpre c n E sbrk c To display out of date files in the workspace window 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Build tab REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 68 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 3 Check the Mark out of date files check box 4 Click OK Pay l Command line Initial directory Environment Mark out of date tiles 2 9 File dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies
374. hich is opened by clicking the icon at the upper left corner of the High performance Embedded Workshop title bar 1 11 Component system overview The High performance Embedded Workshop allows the user to extend the High performance Embedded Workshop functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the High performance Embedded Workshop system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of High performance Embedded Workshop The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of High performance Embedded Workshop In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the builder component is not installed you will not have the toolchain menu option in the Build menu 1 12 Management information files of High performance Embedded Workshop The High performance Embedded Workshop has the following files containing management information necessary for its correct operation REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 19 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview e A file in which application level setting is stored e A fil
375. hop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 2 This menu is not displayed while a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 01 or later is in use 1 6 Debug Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Macro Function Key Button Recording 1 Debug Synchronized Configures synchronized debugging Debugging 2 Debug Sessions C Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Reset CPU eit a Resets the CPU Go F5 a Starts executing the user program at the current PC Reset Go SHIFT F5 D Executes the user program from the reset vector address Free Go 2 Be D Runs program ignoring any breakpoints Go to Cursor Bf D Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor position Set PC to Cursor Ipc D Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Run D Opens the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter temporary breakpoints be
376. hop while synchronized The main purpose of using High performance Embedded Workshop in synchronized debugging mode is to have the main Debugger options synchronized between different High performance Embedded Workshop debugging sessions usually connected to a multi core platform Many aspects of High performance Embedded Workshop functionality are the same when using Parallel or Internal mode however some things will be different REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 475 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging 18 2 1 Common functionality TA Projects E Terplates al Mawiga A Test et Debugger Debug gers tab This tab is added to the Workspace Window when synchronized debugging begins It contains a separate item for each synchronized Debugger The text of each item will be the display ID specified on the Synchronized debug dialog The icon of each item indicates the current status of the Debugger The following status icons are possible 4 The Debugger is not connected to a platform The Debugger is connected to a platform which is currently stopped i e not running EN The Debugger is connected to a platform which is currently running When you right click on a Debugger ID the following menu will be displayed Reset CPU Go Reset Go Step In Step Out Step Over Halt Program Allow Docking Hide Properties When an operation is selected it will be execu
377. hortcut 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify Itis only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard shortcut for in the Commands list The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 3 Enter the new shortcut in the New keyboard shortcut field Various combinations of buttons can be used here For example CTRL J or CTRL SHIFT 0 etc If the chosen shortcut is already in use it is displayed below the New keyboard shortcut field REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 150 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 4 If you are happy with your selection click the Assign button 5 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog box To remove a Keyboard shortcut 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify It is only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard shortcut for in the Commands list The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 3 Click the Remove button 4 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog box To reset
378. hortcut Key Toolbar Macro Function Button Recording Edit Undo CTRL Z Reverses the last editing operation Redo CTRL Y Repeats the last undone editing operation REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 487 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Menu Menu Option Shortcut Key Toolbar Macro Button Recording Cut CTRL X ha Copy CTRL C Paste CTRL V A Clear Delete Select All CTRL A Find CTRL F a Find In Files F4 Ca Replace CTRL H Goto Line CTRL G Match Braces CTRL SHIFT M Bookmarks Toggle CTRL F2 Lt Bookmark Next Bookmark F2 cu Previous SHIFT F2 Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Templates Define Templates Insert Template CTRL SHIFT T Toggle Breakpoint F9 Enable Disable Breakpoint CTRL F9 Define Column Format Source Breakpoints CTRL B Evaluate S Cla si Be E 1 Main Menus Function Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Windows clipboard Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Finds text in the current file Finds text in multiple files Replaces text in the current file Jumps to a line in a file Finds a matching brace Sets a
379. iables when Global has been selected and local variables that can be viewed in the current scope at the position of the program counter when Local has been selected When you have selected a file name the Name list shows the file local variables included in the compilation unit to which the selected file belongs 3 Each of the variables in the Name list has a check box By default the check boxes are not selected A sign shown next to a variable in the Name list indicates that the variable can be expanded by double clicking However double clicking on a sign does not collapse the expanded variable Even if the check box for a variable with is selected the boxes for its elements are still blank 4 Select a scope and check the boxes for variables as required REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 307 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 5 Click OK e To delete a variable 1 Click on the Delete button on the Edit Test C Variables dialog box The variable selected in the Compared list will be deleted Only one variable is selectable in the list Edit Test C Variables Compared aj st 30 Global Cancel d Delete AE ih E Then click OK 16 6 2 5 CPU Simulated I O Simulated I O window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group nam
380. ial search will be shown to you in the Locate Files dialog box However you can choose not to open the Locate Files dialog box at downloading To prevent opening of the Locate Files dialog box at downloading 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Do not show Debug only workspace browse dialog on download checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 4 Click OK e Debuggers supporting the feature of showing a source tree This feature is only supported by the debuggers that can create debug only projects The condition of the support however depends on the debugger as shown below Debugger Condition of the Support SuperH family emulator debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop has become V 4 02 or later H8SX H8S H8 family emulator debugger due to an update M16C family emulator debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop included in the product package is V 4 02 or later REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 348 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 1 Locating files Files that cannot be found or do not exist after the initial search will be shown to the user in the Locate Files dialog box in the Files to find list Locate Files ki E4 Last searched directory CAWworkepaces DebugllinlysDebug Ernulator Files to find Search status O f 13 foundunfound hoc li
381. ially when you first create a workspace these toolbar buttons are inactive because you have not yet associated any version control commands to them The toolbar buttons are equivalent to the six menu options on the Tools gt Version Control sub menu In other words selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Get from VCS will have exactly the same effect as clicking the Get from VCS toolbar button As the toolbar buttons themselves are fixed the only operation that you can perform upon them is to define which commands should be executed when they are clicked In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 168 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Option Description Add to VCS Add selected files to version control system Remove from VCS Remove selected files from version control system Get from VCS Get a read only local copy of the selected files from version control system Check out from VCS Get a writable local copy of the selected files from version control system Check in to VCS Put back i e update the selected files in version control system with the local copy Get VCS status View the status of t
382. ible these are listed below Mode Function Source mode The source file relating to the current PC address will be opened if available It allows keywords are highlighted correctly if you are viewing source files This view is read only and cannot be edited This view is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows line numbers address breakpoints and source codes to be viewed Mixed mode The mixed mode facility in the disassembly window is different to a source file mixed mode Instead of showing the continuous disassembly it shows the disassembly that is related to each line of source code This view can be edited the assembly language code and is only available when the module is downloaded This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed Disassembly mode The disassembly mode shows the true continuous disassembly code in address order This view can be the assembly language code and is only available when a target is attached to the session This view allows breakpoints address object codes labels and disassembled codes to be viewed 17 2 2 1 Viewing the code When switching to the source mode from within the disassembly window the source file relating to the current PC address will be opened if available Otherwise either the most recently open disassembly window source file will be re opened where possible or a prompt will be given to select a source file to be opened
383. ic command line batch file execution e Not executing a batch file when a module containing only debug information is downloaded e Downloading modules after build e Removing breakpoints on download e Disabling memory access until after target connection command file execution e Limiting disassembly memory access e Not performing automatic target connection e Resetting CPU after download module e Disabling memory access by GUI when target is executing 1 Configuring the automatic command line batch file execution The High performance Embedded Workshop debugger is tightly integrated with the TCL command line facilities This means that it is possible to write batch files for the High performance Embedded Workshop debugger which can be executed automatically at certain times The Command batch file load timing list displays the order in which the files will be executed It is possible to Add Modify Remove Up and Down the files in this list To configure the automatic command line batch file execution 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Command batch file load timing This can be the following values At target connection Before download of modules After download of modules and After reset REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 336 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Command batch file load timing
384. ick the Build File toolbar button 33 you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog box The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure below the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab Build Order Build File Order File Mappines File group Phage order source file WISH G Compiler M y Phase is G source tile l Linkage symbol file For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 3 3 3 File Mappings tab By default the files input to a build phase are only taken from t
385. icking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Set Batch File BAN Specifies a batch file Play Plays the current batch file Stop Stops execution of the current batch file Reset Resets the status of a batch file Step p Single steps in a batch file Insert Remove Toggles a break point on the current line of a batch file Breakpoint Enable Disable Enables or disables the current breakpoint on the Breakpoint current line of a batch file Clear All Breakpoints Removes all breakpoints of a batch file Set Log File tod Specifies a log file Logging d Starts or stops output to log file Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons o Lower pane results of command execution Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Clear Window or Clears the contents of the Command Line window 14 2 Specifying a batch file It is useful to use a batch file when a
386. ifies the refresh interval Next Image a Redraws the next image Previous Image lt P Redraws the previous image Top Image lt p Redraws the top image Last Image f Redraws the last image Redraw 0 5s 10 The image is redrawn continuously every 0 5 seconds Interval 1 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 1 0 seconds 2 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 2 0 seconds 4 0s The image is redrawn continuously every 4 0 seconds Redraw Continuously a Starts redrawing continuously Stop m Stops redrawing continuously Properties ey Opens the Image Properties dialog box Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Note Available only when the debugger supports this function 17 4 2 Regularly refreshing the Image window Selecting Auto Refresh gt Nonrefresh from the pop up menu will not refresh the window Selecting Auto Refresh gt Stop from the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically refreshed when user program execution stops Selecting Auto Refresh gt Real time from the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be refreshed while the user program is running To specify the refresh interval select Update Interval from the pop up menu This item is only selectable when it is supported by the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 401 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Wo
387. ify the displaying address in the Address field Drag and Drop Manipulation Operation Select address on Memory Window s Address area and Changes the window s display start address to that address drop it into another Memory Window s Address column Select variable name text string and drop it into Memory Changes the window s display start address to that address Window s Address column 17 3 11 Changing the scroll area Select Scroll Area from the pop up menu of the memory window The Scroll Area dialog box opens Scroll Area Start Address ooo0og al End Address OFFFFF sr Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 389 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS El High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Specify the scroll range to be displayed By default the scroll range is set to 0 to the maximum address of MCU 17 3 12 Starting address to value of the register Select the register from the followings in the pop up menu Register of the memory window Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 3 13 Tracking the stack pointer position The memory window has a function that alters the display address while tracking the stack pointer position By default the display does not track the stack pointer position To track the stack pointer position choose Followed Stack Pointer from the pop up menu of the memory window The Followed Stack Pointer dialog box opens Followed Stack Pointe
388. ight next to the edit field where an address can be entered If you click this button the Select Label dialog box will be displayed A label can be selected from the current list of labels in this dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 513 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Using Labels to View Your Code Select Label Ee Label Address Cancel i __add DOOU65S8 _allzera 0000234 __alocbut OOOO 250 __calcripey 0000B2 CLOSEALL DOOU240C __ompegb4 OUO04500 __ompgeb4 ODUDD45E8 __empotb4u TUNICIS __ompneb4 DUOD4620 __ conve 00004640 __ convey 00004640 _ convib4 0000444 __convub 00004465C _ c ppe DUDDERA4 dibd DOOU5E ru __drvb4uy DOUU46 70 dil DOO04400 __divlu DOOU4408 __duchek DOOUEDEU enna FUOOOSCU __ficlose 0000r C4 _ topen 0000288 __flshbut DOOU4BA4 __frotout DOOU2404 _ free In this dialog box the labels are initially listed in alphabetical order and their addresses are displayed on the right If you click a column header of names or addresses the labels will be sorted by the label name or the address value The Filter edit box can be used to help you search for a specific label in the list When the contents of the edit box are changed the label list is updated to display only the labels that contain the string entered not case sensitive So in the above dialog example if you entered con
389. ile and Group By Access cannot both be on at the same time Switching one on will switch the other one off 12 1 C function and define navigation component These components simply add the function and define definitions to the navigation view REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 224 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities Workspace H C define navigation category title Hdefine C function navigation category title ANSI C function To jump to a definition Select either of the following ways e Double click a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab e Right click on a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab Select Go to Definition from the pop up menu 12 2 C navigation component The C navigation component supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below Sm Cos Classes C navigation category title CFish Sars CGreaty hite E CGreat hitel sg CGreatwhitel l Class member i Clase name l functions e GetLlassM ame yord mS eee er variable Protected member variable 5 j Globals a Global variables eae 5 heap area and functors folder IA j hrk E INT Wectorsf 2 A Fo Navigation The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are lis
390. ile checkbox This means the session will not be imported into the project directory but instead the High performance Embedded Workshop will link to the session location This file location was entered in step 5 and it will save all of the session data in this location Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is possible to make the link to session file read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally To import a link to an existing session file and make it read only 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box opens 3 Click the Use an existing session file radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 5 Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project 6 Click the Open and maintain link to session file checkbox REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 359 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 7 Click the Make session file link read only checkbox This means that the High performance Embedded Workshop will be unable to save changes to this session and will only be able to read the data when the session is opened i Use an existing session file Name Tutorial session file path Browse MW Open and maintain link to session file J Make se
391. in build A file that has been excluded from build can be included again To include a project file in build 1 Click on a file that has previously been excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window It is also possible to select several files by using a mouse or inputs through the keyboard as follows e To select several files Click the files while pressing the CTRL key e Select several files as a range Click a file as the start of the range Then keep pressing the SHIFT key and click another file as the end of the selected range 2 Take either of the two ways listed below The red cross will be removed from the file s icon and the file will be included in build e Select Include Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the name of the selected file from the pop up menu opened by clicking the right mouse button lt file gt is not displayed if several files are selected e Select Build gt Include Exclude Build 2 4 User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to the Projects tab of the workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog box The operations listed below are not allowed however for folders Download modules and Dependencies that are automatically displayed To add a user folder 1 Select the project on the Pro
392. indow cccccccccccccccccccaaeseeeseesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaasseeeesseeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaasaaseeeeeseeeeess 250 142 Specityine a Datoh Mleci cenoria o aaa iaa o i a i a aiai 254 tao Tee a Ba l e E E E TA E EE E A EEE E 256 144 Stopping command execution rsispas niiae a e a aa a a ai ea eaaa saiae aiaia iaeiei 256 IES oP ene a OO Tiesi rE E EE E AO EE E O EER 256 14 6 Starting or stopping logging ysis ciirnisnctecnninteteswdindlacuhdasianlanebunndadudasehivadsanesdeieniibedwandasedimesdinkdanssannhetebuontagedaerhsinbslents 257 l4 Tobin a ul path 10 the Te sisaren E R 257 Hese Panapa MONEE seon r E E EE EEE 257 14 9 Selecting all the window COMNTENHS ccccececcecccccccecceecaaeasssssesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaasassseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaaaasssseeeseeeeeess 257 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page v Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 14 10 Copying the selection onto the ClipbOard ccc ccccccccccsssssssesesseeeccccccceeeeeesaaaaessssseeeeeeceeeeeeeesesaaausaaaassesseeesseeeeess 257 14 11 Cutting out the selection to the ClpPbOard ow ccccccsssssssseeeseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaaaesessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaesaaaasssseeseeeeeeeess 257 14 12 Pasting the contents of the clipboard 0 0 ccccccccccccccccaaeeseeesssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaesseesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesasaaaasssenseeeeeeeees 258 14 13 Clearing the contents of the Command Line Window cccccccccccccecceceeeeeeessessseseeeececeeee
393. ing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Macro Description Button Recording Enable Auto Update R Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time Enable Auto Update All D Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time Disable Auto Update Fa co Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels real time update Disable Auto Update All 5 Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels real time update Update Interval Sets an update interval Record Start Recording R 5 Opens the Recording Settings dialog box and starts recording Update Value the history of updating of values Stop Recording RH Stops recording the history of updating of values Add Watch EH co Launches the Add Watch dialog box allowing the user to enter a variable or expression to be watched Edit Name TH 1s Launches the Edit Name dialog box allowing the user to change the variable s name Edit Value Launches the Edit Value dialog box allowing the user to change the variable s value Set Scope f Sets the scope for the selected symbol Delete Pas G Removes the variable indicated by the text cursor from the Watch window Delete All F ie Removes all the variables from the Watch window Radix Hexa
394. ing displayed by the tool and display it in the Output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 82 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Note Using Read Output on Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in High performance Embedded Workshop then un check the Read Output on Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase is added to the bottom of the Build phase order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog box 3 3 Ordering build phases In a standard build shown in figure below you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler 1 before the assembler 2 before the linker 3 or after the linker 4 You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended COMPILE ASSEMBLE Select Build gt Build Phases The Build Phases dialog box will be displayed The build phase dialog box provides facili
395. inition entry is entered in the format 1d lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or long word default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt Format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 506 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 lt no gt is the bit number 6 I O File Format 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit Comment lines are allowed and must start with a Example Com ment fhe u es fue uy ke Cetin ition 66 99 character SHV O34 Fami WO Aeqgiater Detinitions File Modules Base ddress 0 Wodulel Power Down Mode Registers Meodule2 DNLA Channel Carmen Modules DNLA Oo Short Address Mode
396. ioid og unnamed 2 WB Gee Glasses H ga HEAPLTYPE HE sbie Globals He E sbrkh ap CLOSEALLiwoid HoE stackesth INT OUB Goid H E typedefineh g job n E vecti gi nfiles vecttblerc ey _slptr vhandlerere Navigation Group Ey File OFF Group Ey File OH It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information To switch off a navigation category 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select Select Categories The Select Categories dialog box is displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 223 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities Select Categories Please select the categories to scan for WC Defines WC Functions Cancel C Classes 3 Un check any categories you are not interested in seeing definitions for 4 Click OK To update the navigation view 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select Refresh Notes e The navigation items are displayed gradually as the files are scanned This means it may take some time if there are many files to fully complete the Navigation view update e Files are re scanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved e Group By F
397. ion Changes a local item s option toolbar button or toolbar button value Value Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking on a value In place edit 15 5 2 6 Event window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Add pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box Adds the break point or break condition Edit pop up menu option toolbar button opened by clicking on the menu Edits the break point or break condition option or toolbar button Enable pop up menu option toolbar Click on the menu option or toolbar Enables the selected break points or button button break conditions Disable pop up menu option toolbar Disables the selected break points or button break conditions Delete pop up menu option toolbar Removes the selected break points or button break conditions Delete All pop up menu option toolbar Removes all break points or break button conditions 15 5 2 7 Code Coverage window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Hardware Settings pop up Make setting in the dialog box opened by e Allocates code coverage memory menu option toolbar button clicking on the menu option or toolbar button e De allocates code coverage memory REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 277 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macr
398. ions dialog box opens 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Enable line highlight for PC position checkbox By default this checkbox is selected 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 379 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility The color of the line can be customized in the Format Views dialog box The text foreground is in black and the background color is yellow by default To change the colors of the line at the PC 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select an item for which you wish to change the color from the left hand tree in the dialog box and expand it e If you are opening the editor window or disassembly window in source mode select Source and expand it e If you are opening the editor window or disassembly window in mixed mode or disassembly mode select Disassembly and expand it 3 Select the PC Line Highlight category 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab 5 Click OK 17 3 Operating memory This section describes how to look at memory areas in the CPU s address space How to look at a memory area in different formats how to fill and move a memory block and how to load and verify a memory area with a disk file are described 17 3 1 Opening the Memory window The Memory window displays the contents of contiguous memory areas To open the Memory window choose View
399. irectory into the Version Control Directory field 6 Click the OK button To modify a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens Select the Projects tab 2 Select the mapping to be modified from the Version Control Directory Mappings list and then click the Modify button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog box opens 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click the OK button to confirm the new settings Version Control Directory Mapping cource directory i OK work Shared p Ewe Version control directory Cancel xee FWshared To remove a directory mapping 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens Select the Projects tab 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version Control Directory Mappings list and then click the Remove button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 174 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 7 Specifying file locations example Consider the scenario shown in the figure below It shows three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL Ci ma B c w orkapplicatiomiprojecti Wits app project Mapped To A CoWwrork applicationsre OWE applerc ma gt to co
400. is checkbox is selected Click the OK button or press Enter to start stepping 17 14 Stopping your program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt toolbar button a and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 17 14 1 Stopping the program by the Halt toolbar button When your program is running the Halt toolbar button is enabled 4 and when the program has stopped it is disabled GB To stop the program e Click on the Halt toolbar button 4 OR e Choose Debug gt Halt Program When the program has been stopped a information including the cause of a stop is displayed in the Debug pane of the Output window 17 14 2 Standard breakpoints PC breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches specific points in your code You can do this by setting a program counter PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 430 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To set a PC breakpoint in the Editor window 1 Make sure that the source or disassembly view is open at the place at which you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Se
401. is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 199 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System To get read only copy of files from Visual SourceSafe L 3 9 2 4 Select the files that you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations Click the Get from VCS toolbar button amp OR Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get from VCS menu option OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get from VCS Get fram WGS Wl Wworkapace_Name hwa OAWorkep Project_Namehwp GMWorksp 1 vance Project Name c c workep typedetine h oworksp Midbsctc tll n Tm LLLI p The Get from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to obtain and click the OK button Checking out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done 1f another user has not already checked out a blue ma
402. is scope is not displayed while the program is running This scope covers global variables in all load modules Global variables declared as static cannot be watched This scope covers static variables within the specified file scope Static variables declared within functions and global variables watched in the Global scope cannot be watched e In place edit in the Scope column Click on the button on the right edge of the list box and select scope from the list RE la lx oe yx Se oe Ai Watch Item 1 i FFFSOSCO Iwolatile lo Current Scope tee R Watch Item 2 0 H OOOO0000 i FFFSOSES iIwolatile long Current Scope Current Scope Global dhsct c iwatchTest4 ahs intprg ciwatchTest4 ahs lowlyl sre watchTest4 abe lowsre c watchTest4 ahs resetprg c iwatchTest4 ah e Shrk c iwatchTest4 abs vectthl c iwatchTest4 ahs hd ei Watcha A watchz A watcha A watchd watchTest4 c watchTest4 e e Open the Set Scope dialog box in either of the following ways o Double click within the Scope column o Right click on the line of a variable and select Set Scope from the pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 456 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Set Scope Ei E4 Expression ww fatch Item 2 0 Scope Current Scope Global watch estd abs File Scope Filter orkspaceWwatchT esttwatch E intprg srel Workspace watch estate low
403. it control where you can enter a short prefix that will be used to change the name of all the associated files When the prefix is changed the File list is updated to display the new names For example to save the workspace in a format that can be loaded from High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 02 00 1 Set the Format drop down list HEW 4 02 00 Format 2 Enter Prefix 402_ 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 18 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview A copy of the workspace will be saved into the current directory so all the source files etc will remain in use but with the entered prefix e g C Workspace Workspace_Name 402_Workspace_Name hws C Workspace Workspace_Name Projet_Name 402_Projet_Name hwp C Workspace Workspace_Name Projet_Name 402_DefaultSession hsf C Workspace Workspace_Name Projet_Name 402_SimSessionSH 1 hsf Note that the current workspace remains loaded as the working copy 1 9 Closing a workspace To close a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace select the File gt Close Workspace menu option If there are any outstanding changes to the workspace or any of its projects you will be requested whether or not you wish to save them 1 10 Exiting the High performance Embedded Workshop The High performance Embedded Workshop can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu w
404. items into a file that s currently open in the editor This makes it easier for you to write code as you will be able to drag the relevant items into the file instead of having to type them REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 228 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities INT OFFSET TOS TRE AM m a STDIN Eevee aJ STDOUT C Functions oo Documenti e Multiple items can be dragged at the same time these will appear on separate lines e The navigation item names will be inserted in alphabetical order e Note that if you drag a function only the function s name will be dragged 12 5 Smart edit capability Another feature of the High performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the High performance Embedded Workshop editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completion help when using C functions defines C classes and member functions The High performance Embedded Workshop editor accesses C functions defines and C navigation information and shows the smart editor s list in a pop up window To use the Smart edit facilities 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 The Enable Smart edit should be checked 4 Click OK W Enable smart editor With this option switched on if you are working on C
405. ith Example Status differs Sheet Platform Line 6 Src Execute From Pipeline Reset Dest Execute From EX Stage To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test Status EES 1 To specify the sheet to be compared in the test image file select the Memory Platform or Events checkbox These checkboxes are not selected by default 2 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 296 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 1 5 CPU Memory Memory window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name CPU Test item name Memory Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Memory window acquired saved into test image files with this setting No memory range is specified by default Test result details Failed at Unmatched address address Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at address 0x70000014 Sre 0x00002f5a Dest 0x00002704 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edi
406. itor Stop running the program Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor Move cursor to the end of the current line in the editor Move the page in the editor up Move the page in the editor down Move cursor up in the editor Move cursor down in the editor Move cursor left in the editor Move cursor right in the editor Select column in the editor Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 511 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Drag and Drop in the Debugger 9 Drag and Drop in the Debugger When using the High performance Embedded Workshop debugger it is possible for each debug component to interact with the others This can be achieved simply by dragging objects from one view to another Some examples are listed below 1 Itis possible to drag a label from the labels view onto other debug views So for example if you drag a label onto the disassembly window it will scroll to the address that the label is located at 2 Itis possible to drag a watch variable from the editor into the watch window This adds the watch variable to the window 3 Dragging a function name from the editor into the disassembly should jump the disassembly view to the label location REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 512 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Using Labels to View Your Code 10 Usi
407. jects tab of the Workspace window 2 Right click and select Add Folder 3 Enter the name in Folder of the Add Folder dialog box 4 Click OK 5 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 51 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics To add a sub folder 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Right click and select Add Folder 3 Enter the name in Folder of the Add Folder dialog box 4 Click OK 5 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically To drag and drop a folder Drag a folder in the active project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window e If the folder is dropped onto the active project the folder is directly added into the project e Ifthe folder is dropped onto a user folder in the active project the folder is added into the user folder You can also drag folders from the Windows Explorer and drop it into the Projects tab of the workspace window For details see section 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders To remove a user folder 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations the folder must be empty e Press the Delete key e Right click and select Remove Folder from the pop up menu To modify a user folder name 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the Workspace windo
408. jects tab of the workspace window and select Remove Files from the pop up menu 2 Select the file s that you want to remove from the Project files list 3 Click the Remove button to remove the file s or click the Remove All button to remove all files from the list 4 Click the OK button to remove the files from the project Remove Project Files ki Ea Project files DemoSH4 c C Wrorkspace D emoSH4 DemoSH Intprg sc C Workspace D emoSH4 DemoSH lowlvl rc C workspace Demos H 40 emasHe Remove lowerc c Lo Wrorkspace D emoSH4 DemoSH reselprg c C Workspace D emoSH4 DemoSH sbrk c Co WYorkepaceDemoSH4 0emoaSH Remove All wecttbl sre C Wrorkspace D emoSH44 DemoSH vhandler src C Wrorkspace D emoSH4 DemoSH LEE REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 49 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics To remove selected files from a project using the Projects tab of the Workspace window 1 Select the files that you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press Delete 3 A confirmation dialog box opens for you to select whether or not to delete the selected files from the project To delete the selected files select Yes Otherwise select No Confirmation Request 1 j Are you sure You want to delete these files from the project T Don t ask this question again
409. k box 6 You can now modify the macro description in the Description field This will be used as the toolbar tool tip if you assign the macro to a toolbar button 7 Now you can decide whether you will use the default macro toolbar button or specify your own toolbar button image from an existing bitmap file bmp 8 To specify your own image simply click the browse button to open a standard file browser This will allow you to manually locate the file on your machine REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 283 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 9 Click OK and the toolbar is added to the Macros toolbar To assign a macro to a menu L 2 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens Select the macro file which contains the function you want to assign Select the macro function in the Macro functions list that you want to assign Click the Assign button The Macro assign dialog box is displayed Select the Assign to Menu Name check box You can now modify the macro description in the Description field This will be used as the menu tool tip if you assign the macro to menu Enter the menu name as you want it to appear on the tools menu Click OK and the menu is added to the Tools menu To assign a macro to a keyboard shortcut L 2 15 9 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens Select the macro file which cont
410. k to invoke the pop up menu and then select Properties The Workspace Properties dialog box opens 3 Enter the description into the Information field REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 153 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 4 Select the Show workspace information on workspace open checkbox if you want a Workspace Properties dialog box to be launched on opening a workspace This checkbox has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace checkbox on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog box 5 Click the OK button W Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace 6 8 4 Saving the workspace before executing any tools It is possible to force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands To save the workspace before executing any tools 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Save workspace before executing any tools checkbox 4 Click the OK button W Save workspace before executing any tools 6 8 5 Prompting before saving a workspace If you are using the Save workspace before executing any phases function you may want the High performance Embedded Workshop to prompt you before saving the workspace For further informatio
411. ked on the Synchronized Debug dialog for the operation to be synchronized Method How the operation is executed in High performance Embedded Workshop Effect The effect in all synchronized Debuggers of executing the operation initial platform means the platform connected to the Debugger where the operation was started Sometimes the effect in this Debugger can be different from the others depending on the operation executed Operation Option s Method Effect Reset CPU Reset Debug gt Reset CPU menu Resets all synchronized platforms Reset CPU toolbar button reset command After download when Reset CPU after download option is enabled Go Go Debug gt Go menu Runs all synchronized platforms Go toolbar button go command Go Until Go Debug gt Run menu Runs initial platform with a specific set of After reset when Run to main on reset option temporary breakpoints is enabled Runs all other synchronized platforms Editor pop up Go to Cursor menu normally Reset Go ResetandGo Debug gt Reset Go menu Resets and then Runs all synchronized Reset Go toolbar button platforms Note This may not be the same go_reset command as performing a reset and go separately depending on your platform Break Break Halt Breakpoint is reached Stops all synchronized platforms running Halt Break Halt Debug gt Halt Program menu Stops all synchronized platforms running Halt
412. kets Example 1 AEIOU Finds every uppercase vowel Example 2 lt gt Finds a literal lt gt or Example 3 A Za z0 9 Matches an upper or lowercase letter a digit or an underscore Example 4 0 9 Matches any character except a digit Example 5 t n Matches a space a tab or newline Example 6 Matches a literal if is placed after i This is the regular expression override character If the character following the backslash is a regular expression character it is treated as a normal character The backslash is ignored if it is followed by a normal non regular expression character Example 1 Searches for every occurrence of an asterisk Example 2 Searches for every occurrence of a backslash REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 501 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Placeholders 5 Placeholders This section describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the High performance Embedded Workshop components 5 1 What is a placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which is replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the High performance Embedded Workshop placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can accept the file to be edited as a parameter When invoking the editor for example you
413. kshop 437 17 18 Debugging functions dependent on the debugger ccc eeeesessccccecceceecceececanaaaeeeesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeaaaasssasseseeeeeeeeeeess 438 17 18 1 Looking at labels vac tosastiowcrcenawetdteos cniseciostetiG osunindavat aad Seavduisinwe renin datoue lee dbuhndinahanentasaus sumnd dowd tudaveninehcwentaidarevaendoannay 438 WEG 2 ED Wat e2 SUPP OP croso y Eea Ea ven ndvouteuuanentewsnmstenested EEEa EA GOEREE EEEa 442 TTL ASO ONTO AL VA OCS eeen E EE A O E RE EA a EESE 446 toeo ynchronized Debir O11 serra E E E E E E 466 iSt Thesyrehironzed Debug dialog DOXsnrinssren a T ee nr nme tre carat ete eevee nt rere 466 18 1 1 Managing COME AITOIIG iscissi ipi eena a a D a aaaea i aaO 467 191 2 Defmine the synchronized Debut Cers erinran E EEE EREE EEE 469 18 1 3 Setting the synchronization OPtiONs ccccesssseccccccececceecaeseeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseaaaaagaesenes 472 18 1 4 NCtUINe the memory update ONG Olasoren e arera SnI T EEE EEEE REEERE 474 18 1 5 Synchronized debugging mode cccccssssssssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaesesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaagsaggeesees 474 18 1 6 Start synchronized debugging 4s 2ises can cenacadetuaaecencadanemecdenscuaceaaneantananianieteaiacatdsebaedndusaudentandwapecdaaeomecesataaaees 475 18 1 7 Update synchromized debug dins ccveccsescxnsishoutncetuccamediruostonttusexastabactneddensened esantuesdansimedstoctnudruesuodterpotia
414. kspace window Output ALT O A mj 4 Opens the Output window Status Bar ALT A LJ Toggles the status bar on and off Disassembly CTRL D oe G Opens the Disassembly window CPU Registers CTRL R co mj Opens the Registers window Memory CTRL M C mj Opens the Memory window IO CTRL I I 5 m Opens the IO window Status CTRL U hal mj Opens the Status window Graphic Image 3 CTRL SHIFT G M Opens the Image window Waveform 3 CTRL SHIFT V Ed Opens the Waveform window Code Stack Trace CTRL K inal mj Opens the Stack Trace window 1 Operations in some windows can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording column of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products Note that a function of another window dependent on the debugger can also be recorded as a command even though this window is not included in the list of menus For details see section 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugger 2 Data in some windows can be saved as test image data into test image files by the test support facility A save file icon in the Saving into Test Image File column of a menu option indicates that this data can be saved into a test image file For details see secti
415. l Directory for test suite E Workspace D eno H 4 Browse 2 Enter the test suite name 3 Initially the workspace directory is shown in Directory for test suite This can be modified as required 4 Clicking OK The test suite is then created This then enables a number of other options on the Test menu Once the test suite is created the Test tab of the workspace window has the test suite added to it This tab allows quick navigation around your test suite and fast access to the tests A file is located in the destination location with the filename HTS High performance Embedded Workshop test suite 16 2 Opening and closing test suites Once a test suite is created it is saved to a file with the extension HTS High performance Embedded Workshop test suite To open this file again after you have created it previously you can use the following operation To open a test suite 1 Select Test gt Open Test Suite The Open Test Suite dialog box opens 2 Select the test suite file Then click Select The test suite is loaded This then enables a number of other items on the Test menu and opens the test suite contents in the Test tab of the workspace window When test suites are opened the filename of the suite is added to the Recently used test suite list on the File menu This allows access to open your test suites after the initial Open test Suite menu operation REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 287 of 523 Jul 0
416. l Delays command execution Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the disassembly level Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the source level Steps through program by instructions or source lines Sets the step mode Steps out of the current function Steps through program without stepping into functions Sets rate of stepping Executes a file of commands Turns TCL commands on or off Outputs the tool information Updates the current projects build dependencies For the syntax of each command refer to the online help REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 497 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Commands 3 2 Command List Listed by Function High performance Embedded Workshop Application Control Commands Command Name ADD_FILE CHANGE_CONFIGURATION CHANGE_PROJECT CHANGE_SESSION CLEAR_OUTPUT_WINDOW CLOSE_WORKSPACE EVALUATE OPEN WORKSPACE QUIT RADIX REFRESH SESSION REMOVE_FILE SAVE_SESSION SAVE_WORKSPACE TOOL_INFORMATION Abbreviation AF CC CP CS COW CW EV OW QU RA RSE REM SE SW TO Description Adds a file to the current project Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name Sets the specified project file as the current project Sets the specified session as the current session Clears the contents of the specified tab in the output window Closes the specified workspace file Evaluates an expression Opens
417. l Slobal Slobal Global Global Global IN IND INT INE INEA VEC o sa INTTEL INTTEL IntPRe PRE waa PRE 2 a4 F Scope Attribute The symbol information of the linkage editor Nothing is displayed in this pane if there is no linkage list file map output by the linkage editor Selecting the root of the map list Linker map list shows all symbol information in the right pane Selecting a section in the map list only shows symbol information of the selected section in the right pane e The right pane shows the symbol information of the linkage editor whar whar whar whar whar vwect weet veot inte rese Fese Derc a File Hame Clicking the column header sorts the listed items When the window is first opened the items are sorted by the value of Start Address The Attribute column shows the symbol attribute Entry Function Data None Entry function Function name Variable name Undefined label or assembly symbol The Scope column shows the scope attribute Global Local REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Global symbol Local symbol rCENESAS Page 245 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map Window options e Map list of the linkage editor left pane Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also
418. l 01 2010 rCENESAS Mddress 0 1 2 H 4 45 68 7 8 H 4 8 Gh 0 E F 00000000 oo 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000 oo OO Of OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OOO00020 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO ON Page 393 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 3 23 Changing the number of digits displayed Choose Column from the pop up menu of the memory window The Set Column dialog box opens Set Column TE Cancel 2 Xx _ Caneel Specify the number of digits in which you want data to be displayed 1 256 17 3 24 Switching display or non display of measurement result In the memory window a display of coverage measurement is set to Disable by default To enable the display select Coverage gt Enable from the pop up menu of the memory window In the Memory window the background of the executed lines is displayed in sky blue and the background of the unexecuted lines is displayed in gray During coverage measurement the default foreground and background colors of the executed codes are black and light blue respectively while those of the codes not executed are black and gray The colors in both cases can be customized in the Format Views dialog box For detail see section 17 3 29 Changing text colors 40 H 2 48 4 5 46 7 A 9 4 GB 2 h E F ASCII U0 00 OO OO OO OO OO 60 O 00 00 00 00 00 eee U0
419. l be updated no dialog will be displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 107 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor When you attempt to save a read only file a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to save the file as another name 4 3 4 High performance Embedded Workshop CAWorkepacesDemoSH4 DemoSh4 ebrk c This file ts read only Do vou want to save it as another filename Ho Overvarite Cancel Clicking Yes opens the Save file dialog box Change the file name before saving Clicking No closes the file without saving Clicking Overwrite saves the file by overwriting the contents The file is no longer read only Clicking Cancel cancels the attempt to save the file Opening a file To open a file L Select one of the following operations to open a File Open dialog box Click the File Open toolbar button OR Press CTRL O OR Select File gt Open Use the directory browser to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of Type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory Once you have located the file select it and click Open To open a file drag the file from the Windows Explorer and drop it into the High performance Embedded Workshop main window To open a source file on the Projects tab of the workspace window
420. l build the Current project To set a project as the current project Select one of the following operations e Select the project that you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu OR e Select the project from the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option If the project is Loaded it is possible to open the project s directory and view the files It is also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project A Loaded project can also have tool executions performed on it from the Tools menu To unload a project from the workspace 1 Select the Loaded project from the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Unload Project option It is possible to select multiple projects in the workspace window to perform this operation If the project 1s Unloaded its icon appears grayed in the Projects tab of the workspace window and no actions can be performed upon it Unloaded projects can be loaded by the following operations To load all projects in the workspace 1 Select a workspace in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Load All Projects option REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 75 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics To load a project in th
421. lay unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Height Pixel Specifies the height of the display unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image window Even after the Image window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu The Image window shows the memory contents as an image Image x Toolbar Nonrefresh E eo e He j Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 400 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Auto Nonrefresh Nonrefresh Disables refresh of the Image window Refresh Stop Automatically refreshes the Image window when user program execution stops Real time Regularly refreshes the Image window Refresh Now Refreshes the Image window Update Interval Spec
422. layed however if the debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx has been created by High performance Embedded Workshop earlier than V 4 01 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 2 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 1 2 3 Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options that you will use the most often There are twelve default toolbars Editor Search Templates Bookmarks Default Window Standard Version Control Map Macros Debug Debug Run and System Tools as shown in the figures below With the default session the High performance Embedded Workshop does not initially display buttons of Version Control and peripheral functions on the toolbar If you use a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 01 or a later version Editor Search Templates Bookmarks Default Window and Standard will not be displayed by default Toolbars can be created modified and removed via Tools gt Customize see section 6 1 Customizing the toolbars for further information Editor toolbar Save File Copy Match Braces Save All Gut Paste Pr it Deg 2 se Oper File He ie Search toolbar Find In Files Find Find Previous Search String Find M ext i JA A A Templates toolbar Defne Templates Insert Selected Template Template Selection EIT Bookmarks toolbar Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Toggle Bo
423. layed for target setup options 7 When finished a new session is added to the current project It should be available in the sessions drop down list box on the main toolbar You can create a new empty session in the project directory The session will use the session name as its new file name If the file name already exists then an error is displayed To add a new empty session 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 357 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 3 Click the Add New Session radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 5 Click the OK button f Add anew session Mame NewSession You can import session data from another file and create a new session file in the project directory All information is an exact copy of the file the data was imported from To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box opens 3 Click the Use an existing session file radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 5 Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project 6 Click the OK button f Use an existing session file Mame Tutorial session file path Browse
424. lbar button switches the display mode To view disassembly codes in mixed mode click the View mixed mode button To view source codes in source mode click the View Source button e The columns listed in the table below are on the left of the Disassembly field Column Name Description S W Breakpoints ASM Display the PC location G breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click Disassembly Address Display the disassembly address Open the Set Address dialog box by double click Enter the address to jump to Obj code Display the object codes Label Display the Labels This column is not available if no module has been downloaded e Double clicking the Disassembly field opens the Assembler dialog box Enter assembly language codes Options Right clicking within the Disassembly field opens a pop up menu containing available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Open File in Source Mode Opens a file shown in the disassembly window Refresh Acquires the latest disassembly information to update the contents of the window Lock Refresh It is possible to lock a memory range in the disassembly so that it does not refresh View Source Launches editor at location in source Set Address Enters a new start address REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 375 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function
425. le Configuration Setup gt Emulator gt System e M32C Simulator Debugger e M16C R8C Simulator Debugger While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window Window Name Opened by ASMWatch View gt Symbol gt ASMWatch CWatch View gt Symbol gt CWatch S W Break Points View gt Break gt S W Break Points e Simulator Debugger for SuperH Family e Simulator Debugger for H8SX H8S H8 Family e Simulator Debugger for RX Family While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 274 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility Window Name Opened by Editor Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Disassembly View gt Disassembly Label View gt Symbol gt Label Watch View gt Symbol gt Watch Locals View gt Symbol gt Locals Coverage View gt Code gt Coverage Trace View gt Code gt Trace Event View gt Code gt Eventpoints Simulated I O View gt CPU gt Simulated I O Support of this function depends on the debugger in use For details refe
426. le when the target is being connected 9 Click the OK button Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box will be invoked The module is added to the bottom of the Download modules list on the Target tab If a module previously downloaded is modified outside the High performance Embedded Workshop a confirmation dialog box appears asking if you wish to download this module again To download the module again select Yes Otherwise select No or Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 346 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Confirmation Request ki 1 Download module c workspace sh4 sh debugsh4 abs has changed Do you want to reload it T Don t ask this question again Ho Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Reload out of date download modules checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 17 1 5 3 Check for changed source files before download The High performance Embedded Workshop can check to see if any of the source files have changed before the download module is downloaded in the current project If files have been modified then a confirmation is launched which asks the use
427. lect The new file name is added to the Current macro file drop down list When you select the macro file name in the list the available macros are displayed It is possible to manually edit any of the macro files The files are text based High performance Embedded Workshop command batch files To edit an existing macro file L 2 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens Select the macro file the function exists in Select the macro in the function list you wish to edit Click the Edit button The Macros dialog box is dismissed and the file is opened in the editor You can also drag and drop a macro file into the High performance Embedded Workshop window to open this file in the same way as opening an ordinary text file To remove the currently selected macro from the existing macro file L 2 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens Select the macro file the function exists in Select the macro in the function list you wish to remove Click the Remove button Pressing the Close button closes the Macro dialog box It is not possible to cancel operations on this dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 265 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 3 Importing a macro file with existing macros If you want to import an existing High performance Embedded Workshop macro file from another machine which already has
428. lect the Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu option or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 3 Itis possible to enable or disable the current breakpoint by selecting Enable Disable Breakpoint from the pop up menu 4 Now when you run your program and it reaches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message PC Breakpoint displayed in the Debug pane and the source or disassembly view is updated with the PC breakpoint line highlighted Additional information When there are two or more instances of a template function breakpoints can even be set at the addresses corresponding to a single line of source code template lt typename T gt T1 tempfunc T t1 g iVal tl gt A breakpoint set here is also applied to tempfunc c and tempfunc s return g_iVal void main void char c short s tempfunc c tempfunc s When you set a breakpoint a dialog box appears to ask if you wish to apply this breakpoint to all addresses To apply the breakpoint to all addresses select Yes Otherwise select No If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation
429. lected the path name in the I O File field will be saved when you save the session The next time this session is selected the most recently loaded I O file will be loaded to the IO window This checkbox is not selected by default 5 Click OK If the register names in the loaded I O file and those shown on the Select I O Register tabbed pane of the IO window do not match an icon appears on the items as shown below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 415 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Sia see y Management Unit El Eo T aaa ASID All Register Selected Register See Reference 6 I O File Format for more information about an I O file format 17 6 8 Printing the currently displayed contents The contents currently displayed on the selected pane of the IO window can be printed in a text file Select Print from the pop up menu 17 6 9 Saving the currently displayed contents The contents currently displayed on the selected pane of the IO window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 17 6 10 Finding an I O register You can search for an I O register shown in the IO window To find an I O register 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Find The Find dialog box opens Find ki Column Name nk ii Cancel aSID T Match whole word REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 416
430. ler sre define SR_Init 0x000000FO Editor E C source file define INT OFFSET 0x100UL window o dbsct c lt i gt resetpng c 4 ol of al at 2121 7 I a Output window Other component window e g Pe Command line 4 gt EEs Default desktop Read write ZB Status bare Feady 1 2 1 Title bar The title bar displays the name of current activate project and file It also contains the standard Minimize Maximize and Close buttons Click the Minimize button to minimize the High performance Embedded Workshop on the Windows task bar Click the Maximize button to force High performance Embedded Workshop to fill the screen Click the Close button to close the High performance Embedded Workshop this has the same effect as selecting File gt Exit or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 Menu bar The menu bar initially contains eleven menus File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Test Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you want to open a file then the File menu is where you will find the right menu option if you want to set up a tool then the Tools menu is the correct selection File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Test Window Help Note If you use a debug only project Debugger only xxxxxx created by High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 01 or a later version the Build menu will not be displayed by default The Build menu is disp
431. les that have been expanded in the IO window so that the register values are displayed Therefore as long as I O modules are collapsed when they no longer need to be displayed this will not cause a problem Also note that having a Memory window or Disassembly window open on the I O area can have the same effect REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 412 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility While Lock Refresh of the IO window is active no data will be read out even if an I O register display is expanded 17 6 3 Modifying the values of I O registers The values of I O registers can be modified in the IO window To modify the value of an I O register Select either of the following ways e In place edit in the Value column Fl Memory Management Unit FFOOOOOO l mG All Register Selected Register e Double click on the line of the I O register or bit to open a dialog box in which the values can be changed Enter a value in New value Edit ASID at FFOOOOOO Current value i T New value Cancel m a ih x 17 6 4 Refreshing the IO window The IO window contents can be forcibly refreshed Selecting Refresh from the pop up menu of the IO window 17 6 5 Disabling refresh of the IO window Automatic refresh of the IO window which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled Select Lock Refresh from the po
432. lick Import The file will be copied to the Sync directory and the configuration will be added to the drop list where it will be selected and then loaded REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 468 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging To delete configurations In order to delete a configuration delete the configuration s file from the Sync directory before opening the Synchronized Debug dialog box or follow the following method 1 Select the configuration you want to delete from the drop list 2 Click the Delete button The configuration will be removed from the drop list The file will be deleted from the Sync directory The next alphabetically configuration in the drop list will be selected and then loaded 18 1 2 Defining the synchronized Debuggers Available debuggers Debugger ID Session Add Main Not open Debug Mult core CAWorkspace Demo Demo Corel Video Mot open Debug Multicore C workspace DemoDemo Core Modi HeEmaove The Debuggers list The list box in the middle of the dialog shows information on the synchronized Debuggers essentially a debug session within a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace When the dialog is first opened the list will be set to contain details of all debug sessions open in any High performance Embedded Workshop application running on the local PC The same also occurs when you change your configuration selection
433. lick the Define Template toolbar button Cir OR e Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates OR e Right click on the Templates in the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Edit from the pop up menu OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Define Templates from the pop up menu Define Templates Shortcuts xl 2 Click the Add button The Add Template dialog box is displayed which asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 3 Ifyou want to modify an existing template use the Template Name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify 4 Enter the desired text into the Template Text area You can copy text from another Editor window and then paste it into this dialog box using CTRL V 5 Enter the following placeholder to insert special information when the template is inserted Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With File path name FULLFILE Filename including full path File name FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension File leaf FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension Workspace name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Project name PROJECTNAME Current project name Line number LINE First line number of template insertion Time TIME Current time Date text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form REJ10J2169
434. lick the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog box 2 Browse to the component s HRF file and click the OK button to register that component Note The High performance Embedded Workshop registration file is located in the root directory of a component s installation 5 4 Unregistering a component The components that are registered with the High performance Embedded Workshop affect the way it behaves For example every compatible system tool that is registered will be added to the Tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If this is not required open the Tools Administration dialog box select the undesired component from the Registered Components list and click the Unregister button A dialog box will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to unregister the component Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from the hard disk It simply removes the information that the High performance Embedded Workshop was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the High performance Embedded Workshop The action can be easily reversed at any time by registering the tool manually see section 5 3 Registering a component REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 135 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration 5 5 Viewing and editing component properties To view information regarding
435. llowing message Executing C cvs 1 11 17 cvs exe log sampleCVS c RCS file C cvs 1 11 17 DATABASE sampleCVS sampleCVS c v Working file sampleCVS c head 1 2 branch locks strict access list symbolic names rel 20060228 1 1 1 1 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 192 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Renesas 1 1 1 keyword substitution kv total revisions 3 selected revisions 3 description revision 1 2 date 2006 02 28 03 39 22 author user state Exp lines 6 1 modify revision 1 1 date 2006 02 28 02 46 30 author user state Exp branches 1 1 1 Initial revision revision 1 1 1 1 date 2006 02 28 02 46 30 author user state Exp lines 0 0 New Source Command s completed successfully REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 193 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe version control system The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a project inside a Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database Select a menu option from the Tools gt Version Control submenu or click a Version Control toolbar button to quickly activate the commands most frequently used in
436. lly available options it is only possible to change the Download modules which are set in each Debugger s session It is possible to use multi select on the left side of the dialog to change the setup of multiple sessions at the same time This allows the same module to be added easily to several sessions ready for a synchronized download For each module in each session you can use the Modify button to specify that debug information only should be downloaded If a multi core target is being used with all cores sharing the same memory it is recommended that the full memory image is downloaded in one session and debug information only is downloaded in the others The functionality of the buttons on the dialog are the same as when debugging normally See section 17 1 4 3 Editing debug settings for details 18 2 2 Parallel mode functionality r L ilipi ae 5 u E ch aa ale elo a Panto aza Ea ea Fe ci FF lt W gln p z pe le TFET EEEREN EET General operation When running in parallel mode each Debugger is a separate High performance Embedded Workshop application These can be used independently exactly like when debugging normally just with the debugger operations synchronized High performance Embedded Workshop window title The High performance Embedded Workshop window title will start with the display ID of the Debugger open in the application This will not change while the application is Synchroniz
437. loaded project Ol Projects Right clicking on a workspace opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Insert Project Adds a project to workspace Load All Projects Loads all projects to workspace Collapse Collapses the tree below a workspace icon Clean All Projects co Deletes intermediate and output files from configurations in all projects in this workspace Version Control Executes a version control system Configure View Configures the workspace view Properties Displays workspace properties Right clicking on a project opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Build Build Cs Builds out of date project files Build All C Builds project files regardless of whether the project files are out of date Clean Current Project D Deletes intermediate and output files from the current configuration in this project REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 42 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Pop up Menu Option Update All Dependencies Set as Current Project Remove Project Unload Project OR Load Project Add Files Remove Files Add Folder Expand Collapse Version Control Configure View Properties Macro Recording 2 Build Basics Function Updates all dependencies Sets this project as the current project Removes a project from workspace Unloads a project
438. log box 11 Select Everyone in the Group or user names list 12 Select the Allow checkbox for Local Launch in the Permission for Everyone list Select the Allow checkbox for Remote Activation in the Permission for Everyone list 13 Click the OK button and close the Launch Permission dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 212 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 14 Click the OK button on the My Computer Properties dialog box 15 Close the Component Services window e Fora client machine with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Firewall 1 Select Control Panel from the Windows start menu 2 Click Network and Internet Connections in the Control Panel 3 Click Windows Firewall in the Network and Internet Connections The Windows Firewall dialog box is invoked 4 Click the Exceptions tab 5 Click the Add Program button to open the Add a Program dialog box 6 Click the Browse button and select HE W2 exe under the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory 7 Click the OK button and close the Add a Program dialog box 8 Click the Add Port button to open the Add a Port dialog box 9 Enter DCOM in Name and 135 in Port Number and select TCP option button 10 Click the OK button and close the Add a Port dialog box 11 Click the OK button in the Windows Firewall dialog box 12 Close the Network and Internet Connecti
439. lose the dialog box To modify a custom phase 1 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Phase dialog box will be invoked with the Command tab selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 84 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Command Command excluding parameters C ATools MyT ool exe p Browse Initial directory S CONFIGDIR FEES Input file group for malti hot phases only Absolute file F T Don t check for input file s existence before executing Read output on the fly 3 Change the contents of Command and Initial directory as appropriate 4 If there are multiple shot phases select the file type to execute a phase from the Input file group for multi shot phases only drop down list 5 Select the Don t check for input file s existence before executing checkbox if you don t want the High performance Embedded Workshop to abort the execution of the phase if any of the input files do not exist 6 Select the Read output on the fly checkbox if you want to display build output as it happens rather than showing the output at the end of each phase execution 7 Select the Environment tab to edit the environment settings for the phase Environment Environment settings ltt a a PATH C 4 Tools SHOW ALL FALSE Mod ity Remove B 8 Use the Add Modify and
440. lue is shown on the right of the module name in the Debug gt Build submenu the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and the File gt Recently Download Module submenu 5 The File format drop down list box contains a list of supported object format The file format of the download module is selected here So this does not have to match the debug format on the Debug Settings dialog box However the Stack Trace window will be supported for instance depending on the format specified in the Debug format field 6 The Filenames field can be specified with placeholders or as an absolute setting It is recommended to use placeholders 7 The Access size field specifies the access size when the memory is accessed If the memory needs to be accessed by a specific access size specify the access size by using this option 8 The Download debug information only checkbox will download the debug information only without downloading the code 9 The Perform memory verify during download checkbox can be used to do additional checks when downloading the module to ensure it was correctly downloaded to the target device 10 The Download automatically on target connection checkbox can be used to automatically download the module when the target is being connected 11 When you click the OK button the debug download module is added to the bottom of the list For automatically downloading an existing module to the targe
441. lyl src C WWvforkspace watch I estd wate lows cl Workspace watch estd watck resetorg c C Workspace watch est4 wate brk c C Workspace WwatchT estd watch wecttbl sre Workspace watchT est4 wat whaler srol Aisi nrk ena atch tall H 1 Select scope for the variable shown in the Expression field 2 If you have selected a load module name in Scope select the corresponding file scope from the list in the File Scope section You can also filter scope names by the string not case sensitive entered in the Filter box before selecting a desired scope name Note If the scope for a variable selected in the Watch window does not match the download module the Scope column on the line of the variable is highlighted Set the correct scope for the variable 7 Deleting a variable To delete a variable select it from the Watch view and choose Delete from the pop up menu The variable is deleted and the Watch view is updated To delete all variables choose Delete All from the pop up menu The all variable s are deleted and the Watch view is updated REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 457 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 8 Modifying the radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu The followings can be selected Hexadecimal Display in hexadecimal Default Decimal Display in decimal Octal Display in o
442. m starting from the current PC address The program will continue to run until the PC reaches the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor or another break condition is satisfied Display PC Displays the disassembled codes at the PC location Set PC Here a Changes the value of the PC to the address indicated by the text cursor Edit not the mouse cursor Modifies the instruction at that address REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 367 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Find in Range Searches the range for the specified text string Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Define Column Format Sets the status of editor and disassembly columns Turn Header On Off Shows or hides the column header Save Disassembly Text Saves the specific range Print Prints the specific range Toggle Breakpoint Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable Disable Breakpoint Enables or disables the current software breakpoint 17 2 1 3 Refreshing the disassembly view Even if some external operation changes the memory contents shown in the Disassembly view the High performance Embedded Workshop cannot detect the change For example if you use the external flash utility to program the range of memory being displayed the Disassembly view will not b
443. mand lines can be performed in the selected batch file Execution can start from the top of the batch file A breakpoint can be set in the Breakpoint column on the left to the command line A yellow arrow 5 in the Breakpoint column indicates the command line where execution is to start The line where execution is to start i e the yellow arrow 5 can be returned to the top of the batch file The results of command execution can be output to a file o Lower pane results of command execution The lower pane shows the results of command execution This information is in synchronization with the contents of the Console tabbed pane However you cannot modify data in this pane You can clear the information shown in this pane The contents of the Console tabbed pane will also be cleared REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 252 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line Options e Console tab Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Set Batch File bay Specifies a batch file Play Plays the current batch file Stop Stops execution of the current batch file Set Log File tog Specifies a log file
444. me excluding path and extension file EXTENSION File extension src WORKSPDIR Workspace directory c workspace WORKSPNAME Workspace name workspace PROJDIR Project directory c workspace project PROJECTNAME Project name project CONFIGDIR Configuration directory c workspace project debug CONFIGNAME Configuration name debug HEWDIR High performance Embedded Workshop c Program Files Renesas Hew installation directory TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on the options c Program setting dialogs and the New Build Phase dialog Files Renesas Hew Tools Renesas Sh 9_0 1 1 step 3 TOOLDIR Tool installation directory Tools Administration c Program Files Renesas Hew Tools Renesas Sh 9_0 1 1 TEMPDIR Temp directory c temp WINDIR Windows directory c windows WINSYSDIR Windows system directory c windows system EXEDIR Command directory v vc win32 USERNAME User login Version control JHARK PASSWORD User password Version control 214436 VCDIR Virtual version control directory c project is mapped to x vc project COMMENT Comment Version control Please Enter Comment dialog box opens LINE Line number of an error warning 12 In the table above we are assuming that e a file path is c workspace project file src e aworkspace named workspace is located at c workspace e a project named project is located at c workspace project
445. me before executing commands REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 181 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 3 L 2 8 9 Select the Run in DOS Window checkbox This is because the RCS commands must be input via the MS DOS prompt Deselect the Close DOS Window on exit checkbox This is because errors must be viewed in the MS DOS prompt Setting up commands Select the Commands tab Click the Add button on User menu options The Add Menu Option dialog box appears Enter Initialize in Option and click the Add button The Add Command dialog box appears Add Command Ei Command Version control executable CR CSAC ESE Browse Cancel Arguments f FILENAME gt Initial directory s PROJDIR P Browse Executable return code Return code of executable ig not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To lo Enter C RCS CI EXE in Version control executable Enter 1 FILENAME in Arguments Enter PROJDIR in Initial directory Click the OK button 10 Click the OK button in the Add Menu Option dialog box Tip It is recommended that you only register some commands frequently used for version control Other commands should be used via the MS DOS command prompt REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 182 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded
446. me custom text for each of these fields This text is then inserted instead of the placeholder You can define ten of these user input fields 4 11 2 Deleting a template To delete a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog box e Click on the Define Template toolbar button GF OR e Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates OR e Right click on the Templates in the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Edit from the pop up menu OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Define Templates from the pop up menu 2 Use the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking the OK button saves the changes and closes the dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 125 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To remove selected templates using the Templates tab of the Workspace window 1 Select the templates that you want to remove in the Templates tab of the Workspace window Multiple templates can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Right click on the Templates within the Templates tab of the workspace window and select Remove from the pop up menu 4 11 3 Inserting a template To insert a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Insert Template dialog box e Click
447. menu option named Toolbar switches showing hiding of the toolbar the toolbar is hidden in the figure below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 515 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View Difference x CAWorkspacesDemoSH4 DemoSH4resetprg c LWWorkspace 4D emoSH 1 DemoSH1 Sresetprg c extern void INTHandlerPRG void void PowerON Reset void wold Manual Reset void void PowerON Reset PC void void Manual Reset PC void o void mainl yvoid Fold main yvoid ifdef cplusplus ifdef cplusplus i endif endif ifdef mn lian HifoeF Hn lieni F The final menu option named Customize launches the Customize Toolbar dialog box This is shown below Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Separator Ce Compare tiles 6 gnore white space 2 Cancel Add A Find a _ a Find next occurence of searc Reset 4 Henare TA Find previous occurence of se t Find previous difference Mose Wn Find nest difference Lebe Mase Dawn This dialog box allows you to modify the displayed buttons and change the ordering The list on the left named Available toolbar buttons displays all toolbar buttons not currently in use on the toolbar The list named Current toolbar buttons displays all of the toolbars currently added to the components toolbar To add the currently selected b
448. mmand is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed To login i e specify a username and password 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the General tab User details User JHARE Password nee 3 Click the Log In button The Log in dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 177 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System Log in ki Ei User name JHARK Cancel Password i Confirm password by retyping it below o 4 Enter your username into the User name field 5 Enter your password into the Password field 6 Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field 7 Click the OK button to set the new username and password If there is any inconsistency between the two versions of the password that you entered you will be requested to type your password again 8 11 Usage example of the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system includes any version control system in which command line commands should be executed via the MS DOS command prompt The usage examples in this section use the following version control systems to be connected with the High performance Embedded Workshop e Connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with
449. mmon to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 06 267 15 5 2 Recordable functions dependent on the debugger 2 0 cccccccccccessssseseeeseeecceeeeceeeeeeeaaaaaesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 272 V5 6 PIA yi TAC O eE E E TE E E E E 282 F MSTA AAC Ogee ce yee ncaa tseasete E E E secessaneaceusanaucesnasantce 283 Do PSST TAT UA Ohi a E eect enee oe aed nade msateeance ieeaneeese audaeeeeeeieees 283 15 9 Configuring the Macro tab of the Output windoW ccsssssssssseeeeececeeeeceecaaaessesssseeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeassaaassssseeeeeeeeeess 284 Ge CSE UP OWE ACME ea e E N E S E E EEE eee ees E E E 286 C R a E a E E E E E E E N E 286 16 2 Opening and closing test suites 0 ceceesseseeeceeceececeeaeeeeeaassesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasassesusseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeseaaaaaaaesaeeeeeeeeeess 287 Wo Earne ae SU ie e aA E E S 288 164 Addin tests tothe test SUE sreco O E E Or EE EEO RE OEE EE ORE ETE E 289 163 Creatine A ESE MAGS Tile ieansevesiresntneneivetotedsioeucseneuuietensinnndecebvesevelbaantyensssAMhesnetanteeteteseqeudtentnelesanpaenstwatnedevelGuestiernantens 291 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test 1mage fileS ccc cseeeeesesseeececceceeeeeeeeseeeesseesseeeeeeeeeeeess 292 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 293 16 6 2 Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugger
450. mory contents MEMORY_ FILL MF Fills a block of memory MEMORY_FIND MI Finds a string in an area of memory MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves a block of memory MEMORY_TEST MT Tests a block of memory Note Support for this command depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 499 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Commands Software Break Setting Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description SET_DISASSEMBLY_SOFT_BREAK SDB SET _SOURCE_SOFT_BREAK SSB STATE_DISASSEMBLY_SOFT_BREAK TDB STATE SOURCE _SOFT_BREAK TSB Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the disassembly level Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the source level Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the disassembly level Enables or disables a software breakpoint at the source level Other Debugging Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description CONNECT CN Connects the debugger DISCONNECT DN Disconnects the debugger INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugger Note Support for this command depends on the debugger For the syntax of each command refer to the online help REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 500 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Regular Expressions 4 Regular Expressions The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to include special ch
451. mpling information of the cursor location in the Waveform window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 1 6bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X coordinate of cursor location Y Displays the Y coordinate of cursor location displays Y coordinate for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 410 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 6 Looking at I O memory As well as a CPU and ROM RAM a micro controller also contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but typical modules are DMA controllers serial communications interfaces A D converters integrated timer units a bus state controller and a watchdog timer Accessing registers which are mapped to the micro controller s address space programs the on chip peripherals Since the setting up and use of these on chip peripheral registers is usually very important in an embedded micro controller application it is useful to be able to look clearly at the contents of these registers The Memory view only allows you to look at data in memory as byte word long word single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values so the High performance Embedded Workshop also provides an IO window to ease the inspection and setting up of these registers
452. n Tests to execute Cancel uh File Path Demo Default Hemose Mase to tap Mare up Mase darm Beve Howi Za Hove dwn Pove abot Mareta botton Test image file E Workspace DemoSH4 Test _Sute_Demo_Test_Demo hif gt Browse Selecting the test and clicking modify allows you to edit currently defined details for the selected test These details are also shown in the same dialog as that used for Add new test If you click Remove the test is removed The Add New Test dialog box allows you to configure tests for execution later This is discussed in Adding tests to the test suite You can also edit a test suite from the workspace window pop up menu 16 4 Adding tests to the test suite Once your test suite has been created the next step is to add some tests This operation allows you to access the Modify Test Suite dialog box and will allow you to add tests which will then be executable To add tests to a test suite 1 Select Test gt Edit Test Suite The Modify Test Suite is then displayed 2 Click Add The Add New Test dialog box is displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 289 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Add Hew Test x Test name Test D emo Test description Demonstration Tests to execute Cancel uh File Path Demo Default Hemose Howi Move Hove dwn irs boten Zoo
453. n This option can only be used when the cursor is at the last line 14 13 Clearing the contents of the Command Line window Selecting Clear window from the pop up menu of the Command Line window clears all of the information shown in the Console tabbed pane and in the upper pane of the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window 14 14 Undoing the last operation Choose Undo from the pop up menu to undo the last operation at the latest cursor position on the text currently being input 14 15 Checking brace matching While the Brackets Opened Indicator toolbar button is displayed users can see if brackets match The button cannot be operated Once an opening bracket or is input and the nesting follows the Brackets Opened Indicator toolbar button is visible al until or is input as the closing bracket Example of a TCL Function Input in the State Toolbar Button is Visible Command Line Window gt set bit 1 None cal 1 None a gt set value 1 None ce 1 None E gt set r 1 None D 1 None gt if bit amp value Opening brace is input B gt setr O r None al gt else Opening and closing braces are input al gt setr1 r None al gt Closing brace is input H gt None B 01 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 258 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 16 Resetting the status of a batch file The status of a batch file can be reset o
454. n Current Project from the pop up menu A confirmation dialog opens for you to select whether or not to delete all intermediate and output files produced in building To delete all files select Yes Otherwise select No or Cancel Confirmation Request ed 3 You are about to delete all intermediate files from project DemoSH 4 Do You wish to continue T Don t ask this question again Ho Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Clean project checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 63 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics To delete intermediate and output files in all projects of the workspace Select one of the following operations e Click the Clean All Projects toolbar button OR e Select Build gt Clean All Projects OR e Right click on a workspace in the Projects tab of the workspace window Select Clean All Projects from the pop up menu A confirmation dialog opens for you to select whether or not to delete all intermediate and output files produced in building To delete all files select Yes Otherwise select No Confirmation Request Ei 3 You are about to delete all int
455. n FAIL Aoo ooo ef Component Result Details Fa CPU Mernory SimsessionsH 4 FAIL Failed in memory range 0s 7000000 Oe F000002 a Symbol W atch SimSessions H 4 FAIL Symbol data i not matching E E E 1 To view the details of unmatched data double click a test item with a red icon in the bottom tab When Symbol Watch xxxxxx is double clicked for example the Test Comparison Details dialog box appears as shown below This dialog box shows the values of both the saved test image information Src xxxxxx and the result of this test Dest xxxxxx regarding elements in arrays REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 39 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Test Comparison Details Test Suite Dero Symbol Watch SimSessionSH 4 Export Information Failed at symbol a 6 Src long 00002 70417000001 8 Dest longH 0000i 3 Clicking the Export button saves the test result into a text file 4 Click the OK button 1 14 10 Step 9 Modifying the program back and executing the test again Modify the program to restore the number of times to store data in the array and then execute the test 1 Return the number from 8 to 10 and build the program 2 Click the Save File button fel on the Editor toolbar 3 Right click on the Test_Demo test icon to display a pop up menu 4 Select Run Test Case to start the test 5 When the test is completed the Tes
456. n Facilities 12 Navigation Facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop has a number of new integrated navigation facilities Workspace x Navigation entries 7 Navigation category El gta CFish Class om a CFisht i a CFishi a ap GetClassNamefwoid 27 m_nlivernw ater 8 CGreatwhite a CGreatwhitel ay CGreathite Navigation Class members The Navigation tab of the workspace window contains categories for all supported navigation types In High performance Embedded Workshop the following navigation components are supported as standard Navigation Type Category Function C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed C Class All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files By default it is possible to display the navigation items grouped by a navigation category Underneath each category the navigation items belonging to the active project are displayed in the alphabetical order To group the display of navigation items by a navigation category 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Un check the Group By File menu option This option is unchecked by default The Navigation view lets you see the navigation items on a file by file basis Each file in the active project is shown in the tree and the navigation items
457. n about saving a workspace before executing phases see section 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases To display a prompt before saving the workspace 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Prompt before saving workspace checkbox 4 Click the OK button If Prompt before saving workspace REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 154 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 6 Prompting before saving a session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk To display a prompt before saving the session 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Prompt before saving session checkbox 4 Click the OK button J Prompt before saving session 6 8 7 Enabling auto backup facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop supports the facility to backup the workspace project and session files at regular intervals This means that if your application or development system should fail you will not lose so much work Any changes you have made will be saved to temporary files When re opening the workspace you will be prompted and asked if you wish to auto recover the files that were not saved during your last session To enable auto file backup facilities 1
458. n header The editor window has a column header You can select to show or hide the column header To switch showing hiding the column header 1 Right click within a field in the editor window showing source or disassembly codes 2 A pop up menu opens Select Turn Header On Off 4 17 Opening a file within the editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to open a file within the editor window To open a file shown in the editor window 1 Right click on the file name in the Source field in the editor window Source inc lude ON include stackeact h Open typedefine h define SR Init Ox0001 2 Select Open lt file name gt from the pop up menu 4 18 Tooltip watch Use this function to know the value of a variable defined in the source program Open the editor window or disassembly window in source mode to view the source program and rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip pop up window will appear showing the watch information REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 129 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To use Tooltip watch L 2 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens Select the Editor tab Check the Enable tooltip watch check box Click OK M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the editor window or disassembly window in source mode 1 4 19 Open the editor windo
459. n menu option Enable Disable Breakpoint pop up Enables or disables the current software menu option breakpoint Go To Cursor pop up menu option Runs program until the PC reaches cursor Set PC Here pop up menu option Sets PC to the address at cursor S W Breakpoints column Double click Sets or clears a software breakpoint on the column Mixed disassembly Go To Cursor pop up menu option Click onthe Sets or clears a software breakpoint mode Set PC Here pop up menu option menu option Enables or disables the current software breakpoint Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu Runs program until the PC reaches cursor option Enable Disable Breakpoint pop up Sets PC to the address at cursor menu option S W Breakpoints column Double click Sets or clears a software breakpoint on the column 15 5 1 4 Register window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Edit pop up menu option Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking on the menu option Changes a register s Flag register Click on the flag register content Value In place edit Make setting in a dialog box opened by double clicking a value Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 15 5 1 5 Memory window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Set Pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box
460. n recording or playing back a macro function This halts the current macro operation that is being carried out In the same way you can associate macros with a menu you can associate them with a toolbar When you associate the macro you can decide to use a user defined toolbar icon or the default High performance Embedded Workshop macro function icon Once added the associated macros appear to the right of the standard macro buttons Clicking these buttons then automatically launches the associated macro function Play Macro Pause Macro User defined Record Macra Stop Macro Default ol m ebuoj 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 263 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 2 Using the Macro dialog box The Macro dialog box allows you to access and manager the macro files currently in use in the High performance Embedded Workshop system The Macro dialog box is shown below Macro Ei Curent macro file Default i Hew Macro functions Import F Show all available macro functions Initial directory FILEDIF l Browse The Current macro file drop down list holds all of the macro files currently in use in the High performance Embedded Workshop system These files are stored in the Macros folder within the High performance Embedded Workshop management information folder under the application data folder for each user profile Any files
461. n the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window This feature is not available when no batch file has been specified A reset involves the following operations e The yellow arrow returns to the top of the batch file e The command interactive mode is exit e Ifa closing parenthesis is missing it will automatically be entered To reset the status of a batch file 1 Open the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window 2 Right click on the upper pane to open the pop up menu 3 Select Reset Notes e Information such as the name of the batch file and breakpoints in the batch file is saved in the session If you change the session on the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window the pane now shows the contents of the batch file specified for the current session The status of the batch file is also automatically reset even in cases where the batch file includes any of the following commands o Setting the current project CHANGE_PROJECT o Selecting a session CHANGE_SESSION e If you change the configuration the status of the batch file is also automatically reset even in cases where the batch file includes the following command o Selecting a build configuration CHANGE_CONFIGURATION 14 17 Single stepping in a batch file Single stepping of command lines starting from the top of the batch file is possible on the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window This feature is not available when no batch file ha
462. n the link to the debugger If this is successful an attempt to re establish the link to the debugger will be made 17 12 Connecting disconnecting the debugger To connect the debugger Select one of the following operations e Click the Connect toolbar button k s OR e Select Debug gt Connect To disconnect the debugger Select one of the following operations e Click the Disconnect toolbar button OR e Select Debug gt Disconnect REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 424 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 13 Executing your program This section describes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 17 13 1 Continuing run When your program is stopped the High performance Embedded Workshop will display a yellow arrow in the gutter of the line in the source and disassembly views that correspond to the CPU s current Program Counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue running from the current PC address e Click the Go toolbar button ElL OR e Choose Debug gt Go To continue running from a specified address which is not the stop address change the PC value in one of the following ways
463. n to display a pop up menu 2 Select Edit Test Suite to open the Modify Test Suite dialog box 3 Click the Add button The Add New Test dialog box opens 4 Enter Test_Demo in Test name 5 Enter Demonstration in Test description 6 Click the Add button The Add Test Script dialog box opens 7 Select the Demo checkbox in Select macros to add to test 8 Click the OK button Add Test Script Ei Script type HEW Macro Cancel Select macros to add to test File Path Default REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 34 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 9 Test image file shows the test suite name entered at step 4 _ and test name Test_Demo entered in Test name test suite name_test name This can be modified as required Add New Test HE Tebeo SSS Demonstration Default res bist Cop Ge Lp We GST Ge Do DTT CWorkspace DemoSH44T est_Suite_Demo_Test_Demo hif b 10 Click the OK button The test Test_ Demo is added to the Test cases list Modify Test Suite Test Dera Demonstration leiel bl am Pm jm mae 11 Click the OK button The Test_Demo test icon appears under the Test_Suite_Demo test suite icon REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 35 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview z xl Test Suite_Demo T Projec
464. nables all the coverage functions Clear All pop up menu option toolbar button toolbar button Clears the coverage data for all functions Add Range pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box Adds anew coverage range Edit Range pop up menu option toolbar button opened by clicking on the menu Edits selected coverage range option or toolbar button Enable pop up menu option toolbar button Click on the menu option or Enables or disables coverage Clear Data pop up menu option toolbar button toolbar button Clears the coverage data Save Data pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box Saves the coverage data Load Data pop up menu option toolbar button opened by clicking on the menu Loads the coverage data from file option or toolbar button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 281 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 5 2 24 Simulated I O window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Erase All pop up menu Click on the menu option Clears the contents of the Simulated I O window option toolbar button or toolbar button 15 6 Playing a macro There are a number of ways to play a macro file in the High performance Embedded Workshop these options are discussed below To play a macro from the toolbar or menu 1 Click the Play Macro button or menu
465. nced Build Features Select Groups C header file C list file Wel C source file J CPU information file Expanded assembly source file Hex file Library file Ba H i Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog box allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file group s name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog box Step 3 The third step requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the High performance Embedded Workshop menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default Options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field Hew Build Phase Step 3 of 4 LA Phase name M yPhase Command excluding parameters car oole MiyT ool exe p Browse Default options IFULLFILE Initial directory
466. ncel File name po Bowe T Append Timestamp 3 Inthe Recording Settings dialog box specify how to record the history 4 Select a sheet that you wish to record the history in Recording Sheet Only one sheet can be used for recording at one time Recording Sheet only lists the names of the sheets that include variables to which automatic update has been applied REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 460 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 5 Enter the file name in File name To insert a placeholder in File name click the Placeholder button and select Placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button To append data to the specified file select the Append checkbox Select the Timestamp checkbox to record timestamps ms in the file This checkbox is not selected by default Clicking the OK button starts recording except in the following case The Append checkbox is selected but the watched variables recorded in the file selected in File name and those to be recorded contained in the sheet selected in Recording Sheet do not match or the radixes are different Once recording is started the values of variables are recorded into the file when Values are automatically updated in real time during execution Values are updated with the stop of execution Values are changed Display is refreshed by an operation in the window To stop re
467. nceusasaaduasecburdnd ENE innein EEr AEn neinni asmana aaa 430 17 14 1 Stopping the program by the Halt toolbar Dutton cccccccccecassesseseseseeeeeceeeeeeseeeaasaaeesseseeseeseeeeeeess 430 17 14 2 Standard breakpoints PC breakpoints cc cssssssssssseeecceeceeeeeeeeeaasseessseseeececeeeeeeeesessaaeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeeess 430 V7 AS Vie wil the current SLALUS ovisii vi vieacecadveciantorieaseuadusslwesastewsxcedugsivesteasieeatwn nunestondecniwasyeAateny eid nE EEEa E N Eaa aai 432 17 16 Viewing the function Call history cc eessssssssseeeeccccecceeeeaeaessessssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeessaaeesessseseeeeeeeeeesseusassssaassnseseeseeeeess 433 TAOL Openmna ihe Stack Tac Wy TO Wy set aster cto ceareien E T NSARE 433 17 16 22 Viewins the source pk Ob AVM x5pcasesnoes pac ssneaeacantantaiessanncossacgutasaaa seca stensacanoie an aE an E RE Naa iaip 434 AIOS SPec TO DE VIC eree EE E E E EE EES 434 17 164 Selecting an encoding format rsrsrsrsrs kantiana a Ea A Ra aiaa ia iadaa 435 WA TST COX Aa detit Ci ac acts tierce pts a E E a E 435 17 17 1 Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop 435 17 17 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop 0064 436 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page viii Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Contents 17 17 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Wor
468. ndow 4 resetprg c a C WWforkspace DemoSH44 DemoSH4 dbsct c Read Only Min x Tithe bar E F wW dbsct c OF xs Ir EE eee eee ee Toolbar E Alas coun Ha Fal _ ae ae ot ee Cee ee ee ee ee QUILT mz P Counce 1 e l code field EI a o FILE rADSCL E 4 Title bar Shows information on files file name asterisk while editing and Read Only attribute If a file is included in a directory of the current project the file name is displayed on the title bar of the editor window Otherwise the title bar of the editor window displays the file name including its absolute path Toolbar The toolbar is only shown while the debugger is connected When one display mode is active clicking another toolbar button switches the display mode If you place the mouse pointer on a toolbar button the name of the button pops up REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 104 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor Column header You can adjust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header Moreover right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column If you place the mouse pointer on a column header the name of the column pops up You can also select showing hiding the column header itself Column There are several spaces columns on the left of the source c
469. ng system e Certain operations are locked when other clients are carrying them out This means that if one user is currently changing the toolchain options all of the other users can only see read only versions of this data e The performance of High performance Embedded Workshop does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version control REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 210 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities Procedures necessary before invoking the High performance Embedded Workshop on a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later See the following section 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later To setup a project file on the server machine 1 Create a project file for the network 2 As the directory of the New Project Workspace dialog specify a network path that can be recognized by both the server machine and the client machine Example WorkGroup Severl ShareDirectory Sharing workspaces The directory specified by the above procedure step 2 must be shared The High performance Embedded Workshop s network facilities share the source object and other files in the server machine These files exist only in the server machine From the client machine the files are accessed via the network To open a w
470. ng Labels to View Your Code Labels are a useful way of navigating through your debug module It is possible to use labels in any edit field that allows addresses If you enter a label in such a field then the built in evaluator will check the label and then convert it to an address This allows you to enter evaluations such as _main 100 or _MyFunction 100 This means that any times that labels are used the addresses which will be evaluated are not fixed This is especially useful if you are using a command line batch file to set a number of breakpoints The command line batch file might always need to set a breakpoint on a certain function and this can be achieved by using a label Using the label allows the code to change without affecting the batch file contents High performance Embedded Workshop V 3 1 onwards also supports a number of easy ways to use label completion Display Address Ei EI Address main Ell mair _ or OOOVOO00 FFFFFFFF UE OR caret The dialog box above also shows an example of a label pick list This store the last twenty entries made into address fields throughout the entire High performance Embedded Workshop application This means if you are entering a label multiple times it should be much faster and efficient if you use this recently used address field list This control is available for all instances of the address edit field where the input is evaluated There is the browse button Bl r
471. nished successfully Bunning batch file macro Macro Ue 2 of 2 Batch file macro finished successfully All tests completed Test Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window ie Clears the contents of the window Save EA Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 320 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 Debugging Facility This chapter describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes See Chapter 1 Overview for the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop High performance Embedded Workshop For details on the functions available with the debugger in use refer to the user s manual or help of the emulator or simulator 17 1 Preparations for debugging This section describes the preparations for debugging your program You will learn how to select and configure a debugger with which to debug how to load the user program and what the debugger sessions a
472. ns 2 Click the Workspace tab Project load on workspace open Last Weed current project 3 To determine the action when a workspace is opened change the Project load on workspace open drop list to one of the following options e Last used current project Only the current project when you last closed the workspace will be loaded e All projects All projects belonging to the open workspace will be loaded e Last loaded projects Any project which was loaded when you last closed the workspace will be loaded REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 156 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment 4 Click the OK button 6 8 9 Specifying a default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Project Workspace dialog box One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the Workspace directory However it is also possible to set this default directory to another location To change the default directory for new workspaces L 2 6 9 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens Select the Workspace tab Enter the directory in which to create new workspaces into the Default directory for new workspaces field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Click the OK button Default director
473. nt Setting 3 Select the Ignore address check box to disable comparison of the addresses of watch points The check box is not selected by default Edit Test Watch Ei Watch Sheet want 3 syrnibols Cancel T Ignore address 4 Click OK 16 6 2 2 Symbol Locals Locals window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Symbol Test item name Locals Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Locals window acquired saved into test image files with this setting Checkboxes for all symbols are blank by default Test result details Failed at symbol Name of the unmatched symbol Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at symbol i Src int H 00000001 R14 Dest int H 00000000 R14 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 302 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test Locals 1 To specify a symbol to be saved into the test image file select the checkbox for that symbol The selected symbol is shown in Current Setting Edit Test Locals am
474. nto test image files and test results not matched Test group name CPU Test item name Register Test image data to be All information in the Register window saved into test image files Test result details Failed at register Name of the unmatched register Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at register R11 Src 0x00000000 Dest 0x00000fff No detailed setting specific to the test item can be made REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 294 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 1 3 CPU IO IO window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name CPU Test item name lO Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the IO window acquired with saved into test image files this setting No I O register is specified by default Test result details Failed at Name of the unmatched I O register Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at IPRC register value is different Src 0000 Dest FFFF To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a fu
475. nts after the batch file has been specified the High performance Embedded Workshop shows a message telling that the batch file will be loaded again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Auto reload Batch File checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 255 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 3 Executing a batch file Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the pop up menu to execute the batch file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the batch file execution stops and control returns to the user The message box shown below appears when a user attempts to close the Command Line window during execution of a command file ecxcmdline x The batch file will be aborted Cancel To terminate the execution of the batch file and close the Command Line window click OK To continue the execution click Cancel This does not close the Command Line window 14 4 Stopping command execution Choose Stop from the pop up menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 14 5 Specifying a log file
476. nvoked and defaults to the High performance Embedded Workshop download page for your region 3 Browse this area for High performance Embedded Workshop updates to fix bugs or add new features REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 484 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 19 Technical Support 19 3 Creating a bug report Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with the High performance Embedded Workshop application If a problem does occur that results in an application crash the High performance Embedded Workshop bug tracking program will be invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below To create and send a High performance Embedded Workshop bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical Support gt Create Bug Report 2 Detailed information is generated from your High performance Embedded Workshop system This may take some time The Submit a Bug Report dialog box is then displayed 3 Write the description of your problem in the Please type a description of the problem you wish to report edit box This item must be completed 4 Type your name in the Name edit box 5 Type your company URL or purpose of the product being developed in the Company website Your application edit box This item must be completed
477. o Recording Support Facility 15 5 2 8 Data Coverage window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Hardware Settings pop up Make setting in the dialog box opened by e Allocates data coverage memory menu option toolbar button clicking on the menu option or toolbar button e De allocates data coverage memory 15 5 2 9 Hardware Break dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Apply button Click on the button Changes the hardware break conditions Detail button for Access Protect Violation Make setting inthe Sets the access violation area Detail button for Read from an uninitialized memory dialog box opened by Detail button for Stack access violation clicking on the button Detail button for Task stack access violation 15 5 2 10 Trace conditions dialog box While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Apply button Click on the button Changes the trace conditions Detail button for Access Protect Violation Make setting inthe Sets the access violation area Detail button for Read from an uninitialized memory dialog box opened by Detail button for Stack access violation clicking on the button Detail button for Task stack access violation 15 5 2 11 Performance Conditions dialog box While a m
478. ode you can add an overlay group 1 under a section group subsection group or section 2 To add an overlay group 1 Right click on a section group subsection group or section to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Overlay Group 3 The Add Overlay Group dialog box appears REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 238 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map Add Overlay Group Section List Ok Sectors Secon Sections ij Cancel Overlay Group Name Sectiond 4 Enter an overlay group name in Overlay Group Name In the tree of the left pane the new overlay group is added under the section group subsection group or section Notes 1 This item cannot be used when the linkage editor does not support overlay 2 Will be supported by the toolchains included in the compiler packages listed below C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family V 9 00 Release 04 and later C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family V 6 01 Release 02 and later C C Compiler Package for RX Family V 1 00 Release 00 and later 13 1 6 Automatically registering the unregistered section In the edit mode if any of the sections listed in the right pane is missing in the left pane this section can automatically be added to the left pane To automatically add missing sections 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Section Auto Registration e If some sections
479. ode field If you place the mouse pointer on a column the name of the column pops up Source code field This field includes codes highlighting the syntax The maximum number of characters per line shown in the editor is 8 192 Right clicking within this field displays a pop up menu containing available options Tab Shows information on files file name and asterisk while editing If you place the mouse pointer on a tab the file name including its absolute path pops up Right clicking within this field displays a pop up menu containing available options 4 2 Working with multiple files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu Menu Option Operation Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each Editor window visible Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows horizontally so that they occupy the entire Editor window without any overlaps Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows vertically so that they occupy the entire Editor window without any overlaps Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the b
480. odn oR 8 Haogogood 7FOO0D24 AE watchs Drag and drop Hemor SIH_I0 long 10 7F000000 lore FFOO0004 Clone 7F000008 long FFOQOO00C long 7F000010 long FFOQOO014 Clore FFOO0018 Clone FFOOO0IC long FFO00020 lore lone Current Scope Gj address 4 E BOCIT TEOOOOOO Llzz2244 0 goood 20 TPOOOOLO goodoodo TPOOOOeZO 000000 oooOodooo Taaa If two or more variables with the same name are assigned to different scope the Memory window shows the memory area that can be watched from the address indicated by the program counter 12 Setting real time update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time A pop up menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window Enable Auto Update Enable Auto Update All Disable Auto Update Disable Auto Update All Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels real time update Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels real time update The values of variables for which real time update has been en
481. oject Workspace dialog box Note The project generator in the High performance Embedded Workshop automatically generates sample source files for the microcomputer in use for some project types however no files are generated These files contain sample code and this does not indicate that the operations of all programs based on that code are guaranteed Please read the hardware manual for the microcomputer to check if the generated source code is applicable and modify the code as required REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 321 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project Workspace Ed Projects Project Workspace Hame Project Types type RST Tutorial Application Demonstration Project Name ry Empty Application IT utorial ty Import Makefile ibaa au gH Library gt Debugger only xxx C AWorkspace T utorial Browse CPU family SuperH RISC endine Tool chain Renesas SuperH Standard Properties Cancel The New Project Workspace dialog box allows you to select a project type for generation which matches your CPU target Project Type Description Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the C C language Assembly Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the assembly language Demonstra
482. oject or configuration click the Clean button This does not execute the build 6 Results from the build are displayed in the Build tab of the Output window in the same way as in a normal build process 7 If you use the dialog again it will restore the checked status from the last time you used it 2 8 4 Stopping tool execution The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process once it is under way To stop tool execution Select one of the following operations e Click the Stop Tool Execution toolbar button H OR e Select Build gt Stop Tool Execution The Build Stopped by User message appears in the Build tab of the Output window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 62 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 8 5 Deleting intermediate and output files produced in building You can delete intermediate and output files produced in building included in the current configuration in the project To delete intermediate and output files included in the current configuration in the project Select one of the following operations e Select Build gt Clean Current Project OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the workspace window Select Build gt Clea
483. okmark Remove All Bookmarks LO c Go Default Window toolbar TCL Toolkit View Workspace Compare view view Disassembly Command Line Files Output Toagle status bar BS OAs o REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 3 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Standard toolbar Build File Build All Launch Clean All Build Stoo Tool Curent Configuration Current Session External proce ou Debugger i Version Control toolbar This toolbar is only available when a version control tool is being used in the current project Check out from WCS Remove from YCS Get Mi Into YCS Add to VCS rom veS Get VES status E Map toolbar F ap Macros toolbar You can add a customized button to which a created macro has been assigned on the right to the standard macro buttons on the toolbar as shown below Play Macro Pause Macro Record Maelo Stop Macro t u O Debug toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Enabler Disable reak port Toggle Decimal Binary Disconnect Breakpoint Hex Octal Connect A Ws 2 PH Debug Run toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Reset CPU Goto Cursor Step In Halt Go 6 Reset Go Step Over Set PC to cursor Free Go Step Out Display PC ET Sl ER EL ET OF OF be Ye REJ10J2169
484. om the toolbar or menu 1 Click the Record Macro button or menu option on the Macros toolbar or the Tools menu To indicate that a recording operation is taking place the mouse cursor is modified to include the record icon le When the macro is being recorded the Pause Macro Ml and Stop Macro O buttons and menus are enabled When the macro is being recorded the pause and stop buttons z and menus are enabled 2 Ifyou are using a debugger that does not support the macro facility a warning is displayed that states the following Warning The target does not support macros Recording will be limited Do you wish to continue If you click yes the record operation will continue 3 Recording will continue until you click Stop Macro For details see section 15 5 Functions that can be recorded into macro files 4 When Stop Macro is clicked a dialog is displayed that allows you to enter the macro name REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 266 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 5 Clicking OK saves the name and adds it to the current macro file Clicking cancel dismisses the dialog box and loses the macro recording Another method is to launch the recording process via the Macro dialog box To record a macro from the macro dialog box 1 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens 2 Click the Record button The Macro dialog box is dismissed and t
485. ommand prompt such as RCS CVS or PVCS The commands in the version control system must be defined as being associated with the GUI interface of the High performance Embedded Workshop Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 and 2005 Main features are already defined Page 164 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 7 Version Control 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System The Tools gt Version Control sub menu contains eight menu options but only the Tools gt Version Control gt Select option is initially available This is because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace Select Eoniaue fie Glee Wins ine Hemose tron vibe a fret tonnes a heck out from sles a heck intayvies ia aE statue To select a version control system 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box opens which lists all of the supported version control systems Select ersion Control System Version control system Microsoft isual SourceS ate 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control system list 3 Click on the OK button e Once the Custom VCS is selected as a version control system the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure option will become available See Chapter 8 Custom Version Control System e Once Microsoft Visual SourceSafe is selected as a version control system other opti
486. omparing Files To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in Visual SourceSafe system The High performance Embedded Workshop must be connected to the Visual SourceSafe system Add the two files you wish to compare to the Visual SourceSafe system in advance Select one of the following operations Select a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Right click on the selected file to open a pop up menu Select Show Differences OR Click the Compare Files toolbar button Pd OR Select View gt Differences Right click within the window to open a pop up menu Select Compare The Compare Files dialog box opens Compare Files Reference file Jorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 dbsct c Browse 7 7 ance C Compare with file on drive Target file Gdyvanced Browse f Compare with version control Click the Compare with version control radio button This radio button is selectable if the High performance Embedded Workshop has been connected to the Visual SourceSafe system Enter the name of a file to be compared to in Reference file If you have opened the Compare Files dialog box via the workspace window at step 2 the file name is already entered in Reference file Select a previously used file from the drop down list box or click the Browse button to browse a file Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog box This allows you to perf
487. on 16 6 1 Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products Note that some functions of other windows dependent on the debugger can also be saved into test image files even though these windows are not included in the list of menus For details see section 16 6 2 Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugger 3 Support for this function depends on the debugger 4 The data of the Build tab or the Debug can be saved REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 489 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 4 Menu Project Project Menu Options Menu Option Set Current Project Insert Project Dependent Projects Shortcut Key Edit Project Configuration 2 Create Project Type Add Files Remove Files File Extensions Components Button Toolbar Macro Function Recording 1 1 Main Menus Sets this project as the current project Inserts a project to the workspace Shows dependent projects Edits the project configuration Creates a new project type Adds files to project Removes files from project Displays current project file extensions Loads unloads components 1 Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Workshop command line commands by the macro recording support facility A macro record icon in the Macro Recording col
488. on wide tools Workspace wide tools Application wide custom placeholder Workspace wide placeholder Debugger tool Debugger location Command line options Session file Download module All All All Scope Each workspace The whole system The whole system Each workspace The whole system Each workspace Each project Default whole system and each project basis Each project Each project Each project Each workspace Each workspace The whole system Scope of each control of each tab of the Options dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Options affects the whole system 6 8 Specifying workspace options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog box To invoke it select Setup gt Options and select the Workspace tab 6 8 1 Opening the last workspace at start up When you exit the High performance Embedded Workshop the last workspace you had open is stored On subsequently launching the High performance Embedded Workshop you may want the last workspace to be opened automatically REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 152 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment To open the last workspace at start up 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Workspace tab 3 Select the Open last workspace at start up checkbox if you would like the High perform
489. onnected to a platform and it is running Options Platform specific option on how the Debugger will be used when synchronized debugging starts Select Debug for normal debugging Type Type of platform associated with the Debugger Will be one of the following Single core Normal single core platform Multi core Multi core platform Workspace The full name of the workspace file that contains the Debugger s session Session The name of the Debugger s session within the workspace Adding a Debugger to the list 1 Click the Add button Add Debugger Ed Workspace file Browse Project Sess10r1 E 2 Enter or browse to a valid High performance Embedded Workshop workspace file 3 Select a project within the workspace 4 Select a session within the project 5 Click OK The combination of workspace project and session specifies a Debugger This is added to the list on the main dialog The Debugger is given an initial ID based on its platform name normal single core platform or core name multi core platform REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 470 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Note The specified workspace must be up to date with the current version of High performance Embedded Workshop and not have been copied to a new location after it was last opened in High performance Embedded Workshop Any such workspace must be opened an
490. ons 13 Close the Control Panel 10 2 Enabling network facilities to share projects To use network facilities to share projects 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Network tab 3 Click the Enable network data access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrator has the highest level of access 4 Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog box until this is completed This is described in the following section 5 Close the Options dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 213 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 6 When the dialog box is closed you are asked if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost Click OK to share projects by network facilities 7 When you re open the workspace and log into the system a dialog is displayed showing your current access rights For example if you are the admin user the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the High performance Embedded Workshop server window is opened and the network facilitie
491. ons of the Tools gt Version Control gt Select option will become available See Chapter 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System To deselect a version control system 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog box opens 2 Select lt None gt from the Version control systems list 3 Click on the OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 165 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 7 Version Control 7 2 Importing and exporting a set up Each workspace can have a different version control setup The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces To export a version control setup L 2 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens Click the Export button An Export current Version Control configuration dialog box opens Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration Enter the name of the file and then click the Save button To import a version control setup 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Click the Import button An Import a Version Control configu
492. oolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Add ar Adds a label Edit ia Edits a label Delete Pai co Deletes a label Delete All S Deletes all labels Load p co Loads labels from a file Save mj Saves labels into a file Save As a Saves labels into a file Find eh Finds a label Fine Next bh Finds the next label to match View Source F Views the source corresponding to a label Print Prints the currently displayed contents Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Customize toolbar 17 18 1 2 Adding a label Choose Add from the pop up menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label ddd Label El Ed Address JOO000000 Cancel Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details see section 17 18 2 3 Supporting duplicate labels 17 18 1 3 Editing a label Choose Edit from the pop up menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 439 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Hi
493. op up menu of the memory window The Save memory contents dialog box opens Select the output range in Memory Save Area data format in Data Length number of digits in Column radix in Radix It is possible to select showing hiding of the Label column and Register column by Output the label column and Output the register column respectively If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the output range REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 387 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Save memory contents Ei Ed Save ir E SH 4derna d ft m be Debug Simbebug_ SH 4 Readme tst File name o Save as bpe Test Fieste H Cancel Memon save Area fooooo000 El foooooorF Ga Data Length byte Column je A adi Hex 7 Code lasch M Output the label column M Output the register column 2 17 3 9 Finding a value in memory You can find a value in memory using the Search Memory feature Select an address range to search in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose Search from the pop up menu of the memory window The Search memory dialog box opens Start Address ponon Bll End Address O000F F Bll Data ii FEE search Data As 2byte W Search Equal Data Search Backward Cancel Enter a value you want to find in Data and select the data format in Search Data As If pattern is selected as the Search Data As a
494. option on the Macros toolbar or the Tools menu 2 If there is only one macro defined it is automatically played If multiple macro functions exist in the current default macro file a dialog is displayed that asks you to choose which macro you wish to execute When playing the mouse cursor is modified to include the play icon d D 3 Click OK and the macro is executed When the macro is being executed the pause fl and stop O buttons and menus are enabled When pausing the mouse cursor is modified to include the pause icon 4 It is also easy to run a macro from the macro toolbar menu or via a keyboard shortcut if you have set up macro function assignments in the Macro dialog box For information on this area read the Assigning a macro information Another method is to launch the macro function via the Macro dialog box To play a macro from the macro dialog box 1 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens 2 Select the macro file which contains the function you want to play 3 Select the macro function in the function list that you want to play 4 Click the Play button 5 The Macro dialog box is dismissed and the macro function executed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 282 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 7 Editing a macro It is also possible to edit macros in the following way To edit a macro 1 Select Tools gt Macros The
495. or C file the smart edit capability should be enabled REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 229 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities Note When the navigation category C Defines C Functions or C Classes is unchecked in the Navigation tab of the workspace window the High performance Embedded Workshop s smart editor function is disabled During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible e Ifyou are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up window will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up window will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up window is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure below Pressing CTRL SPACE displays the pop up window This pop up window disappears when a member is added class sample p sam Posam new Sample p sam 3 sa m_nButton ay m_nDialoe sgm nF ile ag m nline jm nFage mjm noheet El PEPE Ge S e Ifyou are trying to use C or C functions then the pop up window in Figure below is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This pop up window allows you to see what functions are available for the current obj
496. orkspace from the client machine To open a workspace on the network from the client machine search the network path and select the workspace in the Open Workspace dialog box 10 1 Sharing projects by network facilities in a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Service Pack 2 provides enhanced security measures In a PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later you cannot share projects by network facilities if the Windows operating system is in its default state Before invoking the High performance Embedded Workshop you should take the procedures listed below to change the settings of the PC so that High performance Embedded Workshop system will be accessed via network When your server machine and client machine have Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the settings are required for both machines e Fora server machine with Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later Step1 Firewall 1 Select Control Panel from the Windows start menu 2 Click Network and Internet Connections in the Control Panel 3 Click Windows Firewall in the Network and Internet Connections The Windows Firewall dialog box is invoked REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 211 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 4 Click the Exceptions tab 5 Click the Add Program button to open the Add a Program dialog box 6 Click the Browse button and select System Sec HewServer H
497. orm the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog Click Compare The Difference window is displayed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 219 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Comparing Files Window configuration Difference E EH dh a ma t E Header CWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH 44dbsct c T oolbar SOUrCce Sate version ea pragma section DSEC pragma section DSEC Static const struct Static const struct _UBYTE rom 3 f Start _UBYTE rom 3 Stat _UBYTE ron e7 End ad _UBYTE ron e End _UBYTE ram 3 f Start _UBYTE ram 3 Star DPTEL i b DIBL i _ gectop Dj _ secend D sectopr vp secend L pele i Du a a E Reference file T arget file e Inthe Difference window the left and right panes respectively show the files to be compared e Their names are at the header of each pane e If you hover the mouse cursor on the boundary of the two panes the cursor turns into a double sided arrow To adjust the widths of the panes drag the mouse to a desirable position Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Op
498. ormat list You can only debug modules that match the format specified here Even if there is a mixture of file formats in the Download modules list below only the one chosen here can be viewed The Download modules list displays the order in which the files will be downloaded to the target It is possible to Add Modify Remove Up and Down modules in this list To add a new download module 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Debug Settings dialog box e Select Debug gt Debug Settings OR e Right click on a module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Debug Settings REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 342 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 2 Inthe project tree select the project and configurations to which you want to add a download module 3 Click the Add button The Download Module dialog box is displayed All fields must be setup for the download module to be configured correctly Offset i i Ff File format E Dwat M o Cancel Filename SCONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME abs Browse ACCESS SIZE ho H T Download debug information only T Perform memory verify during download T Download automatically on target connection 4 The Offset field specifies the memory address offset the module will be loaded at It defaults to 0 After the module has been added the offset va
499. ost commonly required styles of synchronizations to be specified Synchronization style C None All debuggers synchronized Master debugger EJ Uperations executed on any debugger wil Operations executed on the master debugger also be executed on all other debuggers will be executed on all other debuggers D E Synchronization options M Reset IY Go M Break Halt M Step Set by platform l Connection l Download modules Initialize uoo Synchronization style Three basic styles of synchronization can be set using the dialog None No synchronizations All debuggers synchronized Two way synchronizations between each Debugger and every other Debugger for the checked operations Master debugger One way synchronizations from the specified master Debugger to every other Debugger for the checked operations The drop list next to this option specifies which Debugger will be the master Debugger Synchronization options The check boxes here show the debug operations which can be synchronized The state of the following operations can be synchronized as required Reset Go Break Halt and Step The following operations can also be synchronized but their state is always set by the platform being debugged Connection Download and Initialize For non multi core platforms they will always be off Platform settings When debugging a multi core platform some synchronizations that are normally user configurable ma
500. ot use a minus sign or a space As you enter the project name the High performance Embedded Workshop will add a sub directory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired 5 Use the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually 6 The project type list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list 7 Click the OK button to create the project and insert it into the workspace To insert an existing project into a workspace f Existing project Browse 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog box opens 2 Select the Existing project radio button 3 Click the Browse button to search for the project database file HWP file 4 Click the OK button to insert the existing project into the workspace REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 74 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 12 Setting the current project A project can be in three states the Current project a Loaded project or an Unloaded project Since a workspace can contain many projects only one of them can be the Current project at any time This project is the one that build actions and debug operations can be performed on e g clicking the Build toolbar button wil
501. ote There are various option settings such as the debugger to be connected with the High performance Embedded Workshop the object format for debugging download modules and the timing of connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with the debugger or executing a command batch by the High performance Embedded Workshop REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 23 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Sessions created by the High performance Embedded Workshop When a project is created after selection of the toolchain the High performance Embedded Workshop automatically creates session DefaultSession If you have selected a target debugger at creation of the project a session is automatically created for connecting the High performance Embedded Workshop with the selected debugger For example if you have selected SH 4 Simulator in Target at creation of a project session SimSessionSH 4 is automatically created How to set up High performance Embedded Workshop debugger options To set up High performance Embedded Workshop debugger options kept with a session select the session from the drop down list box in the Debug Settings dialog box opened from the Build menu Options can be set up in the Target and Options tabs HEW debugger options dialog box Selecting a session and setting up options in the Target and Options tabs Debug Settings el ka SinSexsionSH 4 Te opor smetana H 4
502. ottom of the Editor window Window gt Close All Close all open Editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files To show files in a notebook style M Show files in notebook 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Select the Show files in notebook checkbox as appropriate 4 Click the OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 105 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 4 3 Standard file operations 4 3 1 Creating a new file To create a new editing window Select one of the following operations e Click the New File toolbar button L OR e Press CTRL N OR e Select File gt New The new window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 3 2 Editing a file The High performance Embedded Workshop editor s standard editing functionality is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu that is local to each Editor window Right click in an open Editor window to invoke the pop up menu The table below outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Operation Effect Action Undo Reverses the last editing operation Select Edit gt Undo P
503. ould be executed if the newest dependent is newer than the newest target If none of the targets exist and or none of the dependants exist then the commands will always be executed It is not necessary to specify any dependants if you wish the commands to always be executed A description block has the following syntax lt targetl gt lt target2 gt lt dependantl gt lt dependant2 gt lt command1 gt lt command2 gt gt lt commandn gt REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 520 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 HMAKE User Guide Any number of white space characters are allowed between the last target and the character and the first dependant and the character No white space is allowed before the first target Each target and each dependant must be separated by at least one white space character A tab character must be present at the start of a line containing a command Variables may be used in a description block using the syntax specified above under variable declarations There follows some examples of valid description blocks one of which uses the variable specified above under variable declarations c dirl filel obj c dirl filel c c dirl filel h gcc c dirl filel c OUTPUT UNPUT DEPEND EXECUTABLE INPUT Special commands There are two special commands which can be used in a description block The cd command changes t
504. ource code each source file which contains the current PC address will be opened in a separate window as you step through code from one file to another When stepping into an area of disassembly that has no associated source code line the source mode will switch to disassembly mode Disassembly Window e Any source file opened in the Disassembly window is read only and cannot be edited The Disassembly window pop up menu will contain a menu item to open the current file for editing e When debugging and stepping through source code the Disassembly window will automatically switch to the relevant source file which contains the current PC address making this simple for you when debugging Whilst the Disassembly window is open there will be no standard editor windows opened the source files will be opened within the Disassembly window view as necessary When stepping into an area of disassembly that has no associated source code line the source mode will switch to disassembly mode e You can use disassembly source mode as primary debug view If this facility is available the following actions will be performed e Ifthe Disassembly window is open and in Disassembly mode then when a break occurs at a known source address the Disassembly window will switch to source mode e If the Disassembly window is open then when a break occurs no other editor windows are opened e When a break occurs the window order will not be changed automatically
505. ox 2 Select the Output item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it 3 Select the category for which you wish to change the color from the table below Category Foreground Color of Background Color of Tab s tobe Type of Output to the Color Tab Default the Color Tab Default Applied be Applied Text SYSTEM SYSTEM All tabs All Build Error Text Black White Build Error Build Warning Text Black White Build Warning Information Text Black White Build Information 4 Change the selection in the Foreground and Background lists of the Color tab 5 Click the OK button 2 8 7 Controlling the content of the Build tab of the Output window It is often useful to display extra information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Build tab of the output window during a Build Build All or Build File operation via the Options dialog box To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Build tab REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 67 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows e Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed e Environment controls w
506. ox for an item all of its elements are also deselected You should select the checkboxes for the I O register s you wish to view 4 Clicking OK closes the Select IO Register dialog box The selected I O registers are shown on the Select IO Register tabbed pane of the IO window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 414 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility FFOOOOOO OOOO00000 Note This function cannot be used during execution of the user program 17 6 7 Loading an I O file I O files can be manually loaded to the IO window To load an I O file 1 Right click in the IO window to display a pop up menu 2 Select Load IO File The Set T O File dialog box opens 3 Specify an I O file you wish to load in the I O File field To insert a placeholder in the I O File field click the Placeholder button E and select a placeholder from the pop up menu To browse a file click the Browse button 4 Ifthe Save path name of the I O file checkbox is not selected the path name in the I O File field will not be saved when you save the session The next time this session is selected the contents to be loaded to the IO window depend on the debugger When the I O file has been automatically downloaded ensure that this checkbox is not selected The I O file dependent on the selected CPU is chosen by the debugger and automatically loaded If the Save path name of the I O file checkbox is se
507. p up menu and select Version Control gt Add to VCS 3 The Add to VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to add and click the OK button Add to YCS iw Workspace Name hws C Wworksp a Mw Project Wame hwp C worksp wf Project Name c C worksp iv typedetineh C worksp Midbsctc seai T Pe an a z Comment When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only If you select the Keep checked out checkbox in the Add to VCS dialog box before you check the files into Visual SourceSafe these files can be writable even when they are added To check that the Add to VCS operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the project folder whose files you want to check in the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Get VCS status toolbar button Ka OR e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Get VCS status OR e Right click the selected item to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Get VCS status REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 198 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 3 The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s Status
508. p up menu of the IO window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 413 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility The contents of the IO window are grayed out but the text color of the I O register for which the value has been changed remains While Lock Refresh is active you cannot modify the I O register settings expanded on the All Register and Selected Register tabbed panes of the IO window 17 6 6 Selecting the I O register s to view You can select the I O register s to be shown on the Select Register tabbed pane of the IO window To select the I O register s to view 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Select I O Register The Select IO Register dialog box opens The figure given below is an example of the Select I O Register dialog box for the SH 4 simulator debugger x Select I0 Register Ed Available Registers Io an Cancel Check All Uncheck All Interrupt Control Cache Control Direct Menon Access Controller Bus State Controller Timer LU rit 3 Each of the items in the Available Registers list has a checkbox that is unselected by default Clicking on expands the collapsed item while clicking on collapses the expanded item If you select the checkbox for an item with or the checkboxes for all of its elements are also selected Similarly if you deselect the checkb
509. pecifies the format of sampling valid when YCbCr is selected An example is shown below Sampling Ratio Original Data Sampling Data Size of an Image 4 4 pixels Specifies chunky planar valid when YCbCr is selected Order of data Format 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 24 31 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 Hias 21 21 23 23 31 31 33 33 41 41 43 43 11 11 13 13 11 11 13 13 31 31 33 33 31 31 33 33 11 11 11 11 21 21 21 21 31 31 31 31 41 41 41 41 Chunky invalid when 4 2 0 is selected Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Y Cb Cr Y Y Y Y Cb Cb Cb Cb Cr Cr Cr Cr Y Y Y Y Cb Cr Cb Cr Cb Cr Cb Cr Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette planar planar2 Specifies the first address in memory of the area for display as image data in hexadecimal notation Specifies the first address in memory of the color palette data in hexadecimal notation valid when 8Bit has been selected for RGB or BGR Width Height Size Specifies the width and height of the image Width Pixel Height Pixel Buffer Size Hex Specifies the width of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Specifies the height of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Displays the size of the buffer required for image display as obtained from the width and height in hexadecimal notation Specifies the redraw continuously function h
510. pen a pop up menu 2 Select Memory Resource Auto Allocate The dialog box shown below appears REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 241 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map eckmap Ci Is the memory resource allocated Cancel 3 To continue processing click OK 4 When allocation is completed the dialog box shown below appears ecxumap i The allocation of the memor resource was completed Note The following debuggers support this facility The Simulator Debugger for the SuperH Family The Simulator Debugger for the H8SX H8S H8 Family The Simulator Debugger for the RX Family 13 1 11 Printing out the section settings tree You can also print out the section settings tree in the left pane To print out the section settings tree 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Print 3 The standard print formatting and selection dialog box opens From here you can choose your printer and page setup options REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 242 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 1 12 Viewing unallocated areas You can view areas where no section is allocated By default this function is not selected To view unallocated areas 1 Right click within the right pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Show Unallocated Area 3 There is a tick mark on Show Unallocated Area The right pane shows
511. performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Source Sorta printf Sorting results fori 1 0 iflU i jf printt altd sld n 1 a4 min af max min hax change a 17 18 3 2 Instant watch Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the editor window or disassembly window in source mode Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the pop up menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch a 1 3FFFFBO long 1 0 shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 17 18 3 3 Watch window The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to open Watch windows which contain a list of variables and their values 1 Opening the Watch window To open a Watch window choose View gt Symbol gt Watch or click on the Watch toolbar button FA if it is visible A Watch window opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 448 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Window configuration Toolbar RE OAS x Se o
512. performance Embedded Workshop generated makefile select Build gt Generate Makefile to generate a makefile For details see section 3 8 Generating a makefile 3 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 4 Click the Build tab Makefile Build Command excluding parameters H EDA hmake ese gt Browse M Use makefile build system for this workspace Generate makefile before build commences Makefile filename S0 DORKS P IR maket PROJECT MAME _ ICL gt Browse Initial directory S0 DORKS P IR I make gt Browse Makefile options gt System Clean options gt 5 Enter the make tool name to execute the makefile in the Command excluding parameters edit box The default is hmake HEWDIR hmake exe 6 Select the Use makefile build system for this workspace checkbox This means that the makefile should be executed rather than the internal build 7 While the Generate makefile before build commences checkbox is selected the High performance Embedded Workshop will generate a makefile before executing the build This means the makefile will always be up to date with the High performance Embedded Workshop project system 8 Enter the file name in the Makefile filename edit box The default file name is WORKSPDIR make PROJECTNAME _ CONFIGNAME mak Note This entry can be left empty if no makefile needs to be specified on the command line 9 In the Initial directory
513. pies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 285 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 Test Support Facility The High performance Embedded Workshop provides regression testing facilities for your application by the test support facility Regression test is re execution of a previous test after modification of the program to verify the result The test tool allows High performance Embedded Workshop macro and batch files to be executed and the system can then be compared to see if it matches the original captured data It is possible to create many tests and scripts and automate the testing procedure Then once the testing has been completed the results are displayed in an easy to understand format in the test browser window This can significantly reduce the work needed to execute many regression tests The test tool uses the TCL command line batch files as its method of executing the features and functions of High performance Embedded Workshop These functions can be created easily using the macro recorder feature or by manually editing them yourself If you need to automate the execution of the actual tests the test tool also supports command line operation Many commands are available that allow you to open and close suites run and compare tes
514. piler Package for M32C Series V 5 40 Release 0 to V 5 41 Release 01A e CCompiler Package for R32C Series V 1 01 Release 00 e C C Compiler Package for SuperH Family V 5 1 to V 9 03 Release 02 e C C Compiler Package for H8SX H8S H8 Family V 3 0A to V 7 00 Release 00 e C C Compiler Package for RX Family V 1 00 Release 00 e CCompiler Package for M32R Family V 5 00 Release 00 to V 5 01 Release 01 e C Compiler Package for 740 Family V 1 00 Release 1 to V 1 01 Release 02 e Assembler Package for 740 Family V 4 10 Release 02 Only relocatable and absolute files are deleted Linkage list MAP and assembly program list LIS files and subcommand files of toolchains are not deleted The extension for absolute files varies with the specified format 2 8 6 Configuring the Build tab of the Output window The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file an icon and the error message will be displayed in the Build tab along with the source file name and line number If you click on a toolbar button or pop up menu option associated with display of error messages the line of the error message will be highlighted with text in white and its background in dark blue and the editor will show the source code of that line if the line has any source code Double clicking the line of an error message will also show the source code in the editor When you at
515. priority among the displayed section groups Overlay Address Section Mame oOo1000 001023 PsectOl Psectil OO2000 002008B Peer Paeeruie Cancel Psectus Psectls After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the Overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 17 18 3 Looking at variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program If you are debugging ELF DWARF2 load modules static member variables can be displayed together with other member variables when structures are expanded in the Watch or Locals window However it will take time to display the variables if the window contains a large amount of debugging information To select not to display static member variables when structures are expanded in the Watch or Locals window 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Display static member on the variable expansion in the Watch Locals checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 446 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High p
516. ption Displays a list of available Debuggers This command is used to get a list of valid inputs for the previous command The list of Debuggers displayed will be the same as is displayed on the Debuggers Tab Syntax sac Parameter Type Description None Displays a list of available Debuggers Exceptions Some commands cannot be redirected to a different Debugger and will always be executed in the local Debugger no matter how the SET_CORE command is used The following commands have this limitation ASSEMBLE CLOSE_TEST_SUITE REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 482 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging COMPARE_TEST_DATA MEMORY _EDIT OPEN_TEST_SUITE REFRESH_SESSION RUN_TEST SET_CORE SHOW_ALL_CORE SUBMIT Note If the parameter of a command to be executed on a Debugger specified with the SET_CORE command includes a filename this filename must be enclosed e g by as shown below file_load Elf Dwarf2 CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME abs 0x0 p byte 18 4 Glossary of terms Term Core Debugger Debugger ID Internal Debugger ID Internal mode Local Debugger Multi core platform Parallel mode Platform SDO file Definition An individual CPU core on a multi core platform A combination of Workspace file project name and session name that can be opened ina High perfo
517. quipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products
518. r ga ES Stack Pointer EEA aena T Cancel Select the stack pointer to track from the drop down list box The Memory Window has its display addresses automatically altered by tracking the selected stack pointer position Selecting Not Following in the Followed Stack Pointer dialog box causes the debugger to stop tracking the stack pointer position Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 3 14 Changing the program display position immediately after downloading To specify the source file position select Set Start Up Symbol option from pop up menu of the memory window The Set start up symbol dialog box opens Set start up symbol ki E o Aal nea Input start up symbol to drop down list box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 390 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 3 15 Refreshing the Memory window The Memory window contents can be forcibly refreshed Selecting Refresh from the pop up menu of the Memory window 17 3 16 Disabling refresh of the Memory window Automatic refresh of the Memory window which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled Select Lock Refresh from the pop up menu of the Memory window While Lock Refresh is active the contents of the Memory window are grayed out Auto Refresh in the Memory window cannot be used with Lock Refresh 17 3 17 Regularly refreshing the Memory
519. r Other The following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are the same as those in the New Project wizard dialog box Next gt Moves to the next display lt Back Returns to the previous display Finish Opens the Summary dialog box selections followed by this button are default Cancel Returns to the New Project Workspace dialog box To move to Step 2 click the Next gt button in Step 1 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 323 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project 2 9 Option Setting Specify global options Onision CPU Endian Round to Zero bi Denorrnalized number allower as a result Position independent code PIC Treat double as float Bit field s members are allocated from the low Pack struct union and class Use try throw and catch of C Enable disable runtime information 2 Specify the options common to all project files in Step 2 The specifiable items depend on the CPU selected in Step L To move to Step 3 click the Next gt button in Step 2 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 324 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Propect 3 9 Setting the Contents of Files to be Generated What kind of initialization routine would you like to create Himbeer of lil Stearns ell M Use Heap Memory Heap Size H 400 i Generate maint Function
520. r display Customize toolbar Toolbar Button Function Highlights the next occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor Highlights the previous occurrence of error and shows the source code in the editor Highlights the next occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor Highlights the previous occurrence of warning and shows the source code in the editor Displays the editor that generated the next build error or warning Displays the editor that generated the previous build error or warning Shows the help information about the line Goes to the associated source line Clears the contents of the window Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Shows or hides the toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 66 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics The Build tab also shows an icon corresponding to the error message output by build execution Icon Name Icon Error Message Level Build Error gs Error Build Warning ify Warning Information a Information You can also customize the Build tab of the Output window so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts in other lines To customize the current colors 1 Select Setup gt Format Views to open the Format Views dialog b
521. r filtering function can be used to view necessary information only 13 2 1 Opening the Map Symbol Information window To open the Map Symbol Information window 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Select Map Window Type dialog box e Select View gt Map OR e Click the Map toolbar button Ma 2 Select Map Symbol Information in the Map drop down list 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 244 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Window configuration Map Symbol Infor mation 13 Map i dhe E Si Link map list Toolbar The map list of the linkage editor e The left pane shows the map list of the linkage editor OOOOOsO0 OOOOODSS OooooDS 4 OOOOODS 4 Oooo ooo oooozo00 OOOOe Teo OOOUOEB4S4 OOOU0BB4c OOUOGESS 70000000 _INTHan E int term _TL mis _IRQHan _RESET _INT MASE _INT Ve _TEL Reset Power Manual jE main F 4 Symbol Name EA Address E Address MEFE Attribute ae a Symbol Size OOO008O0 OOO0008O0 OOO0008 56 OOO00BOO OOO00TOO OOO00DS58 OOO00DS 4 OOO00TS 4 podat 4 OOO00000 OOO00000 OOoO00000 OOO00000 OoOoO00000 Ooo000000 OOO00000 OOoO00000 OOO00000 OOOO1000 OOOOIN4sS OOOOOD4A OOO0104 amp OOOO106F OOOOOUZ6S OOOOZ000 OOOOZ0EY OOOOO0ES None None None None None None None None None Entry Global Local Local Local Local Slobal Globa
522. r if they wish to rebuild the code before the download takes place To rebuild the code before the download again select Yes To not rebuild the code before the download again select No Confirmation Request kl Ed 2 The following download modules are out of date C workspaces H 4demosS H 4demo Debug SH 4demo abs Do you wish to build the SH4derno project T Don t ask this question again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 347 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Build out of date download modules checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK 17 1 5 4 Showing a source tree on download debug only project While a debug only project e Debugger only xxxxxx is in use a tree of source files for a download module are automatically shown in the Projects tab of the workspace window once the module has been downloaded The files for a download module are retrieved when the module is downloaded If the files are not full paths and are relative or short file names they will automatically be searched for relative to the download module directory Files that cannot be found after the init
523. r more tests have been selected the Run button is enabled Clicking this Run button starts the test run Information will be shown in Test tab of the output window as the tests are executed 6 Once completed the test browser will be displayed and will show the test results for all tests executed The Action after test case execution drop down list allows you two options The Compare system against saved test image file is the normal operation and allows the current High performance Embedded Workshop system to be compared with the test image file HIF file that was attached to the relevant test case These results will then be added to the test browser and will give pass fail and failure details information to you The Refresh test image file option simply runs all of the test cases and updates the test image file HIF file with the system image after each test The Automatically save test results check box allows you to automatically save the results of each test execution to a text file in the same directory as the test suite The filename used is made up from the current test suite and the date of time of the test execution The Stop at first failure will stop the automated test execution when the first test failure is met This avoids running many tests when perhaps the first test causes all others to fail anyway REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 316 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test S
524. r the current project The currently displayed file has been edited and the changes not saved If an address included in the address range of a source file is then shifted to be in the range of another source file in View Disassembly mode selecting View Source mode or View mixed mode displays the Confirmation Request dialog box shown below To open the new source file for the address click Yes To view the source code in the previous mode click No If you do not wish to select View Source mode or View mixed mode click Cancel Confirmation Request ki Your curent disassembly address does not correspond to the original file Do pou with to open the file which comesponds to the curent disassembly address T Don t ask this question again Ho Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Switch from disassembly to new source checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 364 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 2 1 1 Viewing the code To view a source file s code click the View Source button Window configuration a DemoSH4 c OR View mitted mode View Source View Disassembly
525. r the following can be specified ASCII SJIS JIS UNICODE EUC Float Complex Fixed Displays memory data as ASCII characters default Not supported Not supported UTF 8 UTF 16 Not supported Float Double Float Complex Double Complex Float Imaginary Double Imaginary 16bit Fixed 32bit Fixed 24bit Accum 40bit Accum 17 3 22 Setting the layout Select the layout from the followings in the pop up menu Layout of the memory window The followings can be selected Label Register Code Not supported Not supported 17 Debugging Facility Displays memory data as single precision floating point values Displays memory data as double precision floating point values Displays complex numbers as single precision floating point values Displays complex numbers as double precision floating point values Displays imaginary numbers as single precision floating point values Displays imaginary numbers as double precision floating point values Displays memory data as 16bit fixed Displays memory data as 32bit fixed Displays memory data as 24bit accumulate Displays memory data as 40bit accumulate Switches display or non display of the Label column Switches display or non display of the Register column Switches display or non display of the Code column When the label register or code is shown the option is checked When the Label Register and Code columns are hidden REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Ju
526. r this function depends on the debugger 17 3 29 Changing text colors The color and font of the data or codes shown in the Memory window can be customized in the Format Views dialog box in the same manner as the color and font in other windows Now it is also possible to customize the color of the changed values or accessed memory which are shown in the data or code field of the Memory window in the Format Views dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 396 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To change the look of the Memory window 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the Memory item in the tree and expand it 3 Select the category of objects to be customized Category Objects to be Customized Foreground Background color default color default Normal Text shown in the windows Black White Accessed During coverage measurement Executed codes Black Sky blue Not Accessed During coverage measurement Codes not executed Black Gray Unknown During coverage measurement The outside in coverage area Black White No Memory The outside in memory area Gray Gray Modified Changed values Red White Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 4 Modify the Foreground and Background color selection on the Color tabbed page as desired 5 Click OK 17 4 Displaying memory contents as an Image The memory contents
527. r to the user s manual help files or the release notes for the emulator or the simulator debugger 15 5 2 1 Editor window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Display Mode Target Operation Function Source mode Instant Watch pop up menu Make setting in the dialog box opened by Adds a symbol option clicking on the menu option e E8 emulator software Target Operation Function Event Breakpoints column Double click on the column Sets or clears a hardware breakpoint 15 5 2 2 Disassembly window While a macro is being recorded the following operation will be recorded into a macro file Display Mode Target Operation Function Source mode Instant Watch pop up menu Make setting in the dialog box opened by Adds a symbol option clicking on the menu option e E8 emulator software Target Operation Function Event Breakpoints column Double click on the column Sets or clears a hardware breakpoint REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 275 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 15 5 2 3 Label window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function Add pop up menu option toolbar button Make setting in the dialog box opened by Defines a symbol clicking on the menu option or toolbar button Delete pop up menu option toolbar button Click on the m
528. rH Family Emulator Debuggers for H8SX H8S H8 Family Exclude the following debugger H8 300H Tiny Compact Emulator Debugger E100 Emulator Software E8 Emulator Software E8a Emulator Software Simulator Debuggers for M16C Family Simulator Debuggers for 740 Family Emulator Debuggers for M16C Family Exclude the following debuggers E100 Emulator Software E8 Emulator Software E8a Emulator Software Emulator Debuggers for 740 Family Exclude the following debugger E8a Emulator Software H8 300H Tiny Compact Emulator Debugger Simulator Debugger for SuperH Family Simulator Debugger for H8SX H8S H8 Family Simulator Debugger for RX Family Simulator Debugger for SuperH Family Simulator Debugger for H8SX H8S H8 Family Simulator Debugger for RX Family Emulator Debuggers for SuperH Family Emulator Debuggers for H8SX H8S H8 Family Page 300 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Test items cannot be selected when the High performance Embedded Workshop is not connected to a target Support of this function depends on the debugger in use For details refer to the user s manual help information and release notes for the emulator or simulator debugger 16 6 2 1 Symbol Watch Watch window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Symbol Test item name Watch
529. rary PC breakpoints Reset go Cancel _ Reset 90 __ Cancel The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a temporary breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 17 13 6 Continuing execution to a main function at a reset The High performance Embedded Workshop has a function to continue execution of the program at a reset until it reaches the top of a main function Then the High performance Embedded Workshop sets a temporary software breakpoint at the main function When execution of the program is stopped this breakpoint is deleted To continue execution of the program to the top of a main function at a reset 1 Select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Run to main function on reset checkbox By default this box is not selected 4 Reset the target microcomputer Select one of the following operations R
530. ration dialog box opens 3 Browse to the HVC file that you would like to import 4 Select the file and then click the Import button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 166 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 Custom Version Control System 8 Custom Version Control System If you have selected Custom VCS as the version control system in section 7 1 Select a Version Control System the following definitions are necessary for connection of the High performance Embedded Workshop and Custom VCS e Version control menu options and locations of the associated command executables EXE command parameters how to control the execution result of version control commands etc e Locations of files for version control directory mapping and global variables e Execution control of version control commands user settings and other general options After defining this information you can execute a command of the custom version control system by selecting a High performance Embedded Workshop menu option or toolbar button and view the result in the High performance Embedded Workshop For installation and setting of the version control system refer to the user s manual for respective version control systems For details on operations of the High performance Embedded Workshop with the custom version control system see section 8 11 Usage example of the Custom Version Control System 8 1 Defining Version Cont
531. rd print formatting and selection dialog box opens From here you can choose your printer and page setup options REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 249 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line 14 Command Line The High performance Embedded Workshop Command Line Interpreter allows the user to control the debugger by sending text based commands instead of the window menus and commands It is especially useful if a series of predefined commands need to be sent to the debugger by calling them from a batch file and optionally recording the output in a log file Notes e Specifying a file in the command line To specify a file in the command line use a placeholder excluding TCL If you wish to specify a directory not included in the placeholder specify an absolute path After specifying the absolute path this file will not be correctly found when it is in another host computer or environment where the path content is different In such cases specify the file again FILE _ LOAD ELF DWARF2 CONFIGDIR demo abs e Separating command parameters You can use TCL commands while TCL is enabled The use of the TCL command batch in which parameters are separated by tabs is also possible For set i 0 1 lt 2 incr i puts memory_display 300 10 When TCL is disabled TCL commands are not usable Only white space can be used to separate parameters so using tabs instead will cause the
532. rded into a macro file Target Operation Set pop up menu option toolbar button Value In place edit 15 5 2 18 CWatch window Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking on the menu option or toolbar button Function Sets new data to selected watch point Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking a value While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Set pop up menu option toolbar button or toolbar button Value In place edit 15 5 2 19 S W Breakpoints window Function Make setting in the dialog box opened by clicking on the menu option Sets new data to selected C watch point Make setting in the dialog box opened by double clicking on a value While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Operation Click on the button Target Add button Delete button Delete All button Enable button All Enable button Disable button All Disable button Selected item in the S W Break Point list Double click on the item REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Function Adds the break point Removes the selected break point Removes all break points Enables the selected break point Enables all break points Disables the selected break point Disables all break points Enables or disables the selected software breakpoint rCENESAS Page 280 of 523 High performance
533. re 17 1 1 Compiling for debug In order to be able to debug your program at C C source level your C C program must be compiled and linked with the Debug option enabled When this option is enabled the compiler puts all the information necessary for debugging your C C code into the absolute file or management information file which are usually called Debug Object Files When you create your project the initial setup will normally be configured for debug Notes e Make sure you have the debug option enabled on your compiler and linker when you generate an object file for debugging e If your debug object file does not contain any debugging information for example the S Record format then you can still load it into the debugger but you will only be able to debug at the assembly language level 17 1 2 Selecting a debugger Selecting the debugger is very dependent on the installation of the High performance Embedded Workshop If the High performance Embedded Workshop has a toolchain installed then the application project generator will be able to set up both the toolchain and the debugger targets simultaneously This allows the options for targets and toolchain to be matched closely so that no inconsistencies occur If there is no toolchain installed you will only be able to select debug only project types By default High performance Embedded Workshop will display a debug only project generation type for each CPU family in the New Pr
534. re not allowed when in internal mode and will be disabled This includes the following Set Current Project Remove Project Unload Project Change Session Change Configuration The standard build operations can be used but they will only affect the active configuration in the active project which cannot be changed If you want to build projects and configurations which are not active then you can use the Build Multiple dialog REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 481 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging 18 3 Using the command line window when synchronized Overview Two new commands are provided when using synchronized debugging These allow the Debugger that commands will be executed on to be changed so a command file executed in one Debugger can execute commands on a different Debugger SET CORE command Abbreviation SMC Description Sets the current Debugger from the perspective of the command line ECX All debugger commands from now on will be sent to the requested Debugger Note This does not effect operations invoked from the GUI Syntax smc lt Debugger ID gt Parameter Type Description lt Debugger ID gt String Debugger ID If empty the perspective will be changed back to the local Debugger Example smc SH X core 1 From now on debugger commands will be directed to the SH X core 1 Debugger SHOW_ALL_ CORE command Abbreviation SAC Descri
535. re within the file to be searched 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Next Bookmark toolbar button qo OR e Press F2 OR e Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark OR e Right click and select Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark from the pop up menu To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Previous Bookmark toolbar button OR e Press SHIFT F2 OR e Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark OR e Right click and select Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark from the pop up menu To remove all bookmarks 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Clear All Bookmarks toolbar button Ce OR e Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks OR e Right click and select Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks from the pop up menu 4 6 Printing a file To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Print toolbar button 2 OR e Press CTRL P OR e Select File gt Print REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 116 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 4 7 Configuring text layout 4 7 1 Page set up When you
536. regard to the debug only project generator it is possible for you to browse to the module that you wish to download This is outlined in the section 17 1 2 Selecting a debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 341 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Debug Settings SimSessionSH 4 Target Options seen Tes Project Name Target SH 4 Simulator Core Single Core Target Debug format EID warta Download modules Offset Address Format SICONFIGDIAY S PAO OOOU0000 EID wart It is also possible to manually choose download modules after the project creation This is achieved via the Debug Settings dialog box This dialog box allows you to control the debug settings throughout your workspace The tree on the left of the dialog contains all of the current projects Selecting a session in this tree will then show you the settings for that project and the session selection in the session drop down list In this list box it is possible to select multiple sessions or all sessions If you select multiple configurations you can choose to modify the settings for one or more configurations at once The Debug Settings dialog box displays the following debug options e Current debug target for the current project and configuration selection e Download modules for the current project and configuration selection Select the debug format in the Debug f
537. resh Interval The Auto Refresh Interval dialog box opens Auto Refresh Interval EE Interval S00 9000mzec T0mzec unit FOC 1500 mec Cancel 3 Specify the refresh interval in 10 ms units The default value and valid range vary depending on the debugger The refresh interval can be specified for each Memory window After Auto Refresh is activated the actual refresh interval is shown on the leftmost column header in the Memory window during execution of the user program The actual refresh interval may be longer than the specified value depending on the state of execution 17 3 19 Changing the data length Select the data length from the followings in the pop up menu Data Length of the memory window Either the following can be specified lbyte Displays in 1 byte units default 2bytes Displays in 2 bytes units Abytes Displays in 4 bytes units Sbytes Displays in 8 bytes units 17 3 20 Changing the radix Select the data radix from the followings in the pop up menu Radix of the memory window Either the following can be specified Hex Displays in hexadecimal default Dec Displays in decimal Signed Dec Displays in signed decimal Oct Displays in octal Bin Displays in binary REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 392 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 3 21 Changing the code Select the code from the followings in the pop up menu Code of the memory window Eithe
538. ress CTRL Z Redo Repeats the last undone editing operation Select Edit gt Redo Press CTRL Y Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Click the Cut toolbar button A Windows clipboard Press CTRL X Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut from the pop up menu Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows Click the Copy toolbar button 3 clipboard Press CTRL C Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy from the pop up menu Paste Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the Click the Paste toolbar button E active window at the position of the insertion cursor Press CTRL V Select Edit gt Paste Select Paste from the pop up menu Clear Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Select Edit gt Clear Windows clipboard Press Delete Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active Select Edit gt Select All window Press CTRL A REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 106 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor If you edit the file the title bar of the editor window shows an asterisk e g filename c This asterisk remains until you save the file If you undo all the changes made in the file the asterisk disappears Selecting text in the editor It is possible to select text in the same manner as all editors However to access column selection hold down the ALT key while you are selecting the text with the mouse This changes the
539. ress column of the Memory window the address of the variable will be the first address shown in the Memory window e The R mark indicates that the value of the variable can be updated while the user program is running When a value is marked with a bold R this value will be updated in real time e Double clicking within the Name column opens the Edit Name dialog box in which you can change the name of the variable Changing of the name can be recorded in a macro Macro Recording e Double clicking within the Value column opens the Edit Value dialog box in which you can change the value of the variable Changing of the value can be recorded in a macro Macro Recording e Inthe Value column the values of variables can be changed by in place editing Macro Recording e Clicking on the Name or Address column header sorts the variables by name or address e Youcan also watch variables in the selected scope The following choices are available Current Scope valid variables within the current scope Global global variables and scope specific to each file static variables within the file scope e Double clicking on the Scope column opens the Set Scope dialog box e Inthe Scope column the scope can be changed by in place editing REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS Page 449 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu contain
540. resses Right click on the Disassembly field in disassembly mode and select Find in Range The Find in Range dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 369 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Find in Range Ei E in ooo Start Address El Cancel End Address Enter your search string the start and end address that should be searched Click OK The view then selects the first instance of that string in the range Note Subsequent find operations will find strings only in the paged disassembly area not the complete range 17 2 1 8 Saving disassembly text The contents of the disassembly view can be saved by using the Save Disassembly Text menu from the Disassembly field in disassembly mode pop up menu When Save Disassembly Text is selected the Save Disassembly Text dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to save Save Disassembly Text EE Start Address ovonz000 il End Address poooz Cancel Filename Browse Both a start and end address should be supplied You also need to specify the full filename to save the information to If needed you can browse to the file to use Click OK 17 2 1 9 Printing the disassembly view The disassembly view can be printed by using File gt Print or the Print toolbar button 8 when it is in focus or by using the menu Print on the Disassembly field in disa
541. rformance Embedded Workshop application from which the Synchronized Debug dialog box was launched See section 18 2 Using High performance Embedded Workshop when synchronized for details on how to use High performance Embedded Workshop while synchronized 18 1 7 Update synchronized debugging If synchronized debug mode was already running when the Synchronized Debug dialog was opened there will be an Update button instead of a Sync button After the Update button is clicked the system will update according to the new settings that have been specified since opening the Synchronized Debug This might include opening additional High performance Embedded Workshop applications when using Parallel mode See section 18 2 Using High performance Embedded Workshop when synchronized for details on how to use High performance Embedded Workshop while synchronized 18 1 8 Stop synchronized debugging If already running in synchronized debug mode when the Synchronized Debug dialog was opened the Unsync button will be enabled In order to stop using synchronized debugging click the Unsync button Any synchronized High performance Embedded Workshop applications will disconnect from their platform and function independently again The Debugger s tab will be removed form the Workspace Window Debugger operations will no longer be synchronized No High performance Embedded Workshop applications will be closed down 18 2 Using High performance Embedded Works
542. rict Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 93 18 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8 175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 62 13 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 JIn Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 http www renesas com 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation and Renesas Solutions Corp All rights reserved Colophon 1 0 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 User s Manual CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation REJ10J2169 0100
543. rk next to file name the files in question To check out writable copy of files from Visual SourceSafe L Select the files that you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof Select one of the following operations Click the Check out from VCS toolbar button a OR Select Tools gt Version Control gt Check out from VCS OR Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Check out from VCS REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 200 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Check out from WGS Workspace Name hyws CAWorksp Project Name hp CAworkep Project Name c CAWworkep I typedefineh CAworkep Midbsct c ol w Pm ee z Cancel Comment 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 3 The Check out from VCS dialog box opens Select the checkbox on the left to the name of the file that you wish to obtain and click the OK button 4 When the operation is finished the file has a red mark next to its name This means you as the current user of High performance Embedded Workshop has checked it out ERTA Workspace Name I Ty Project Name v Et ra an source Tile Intpresrc w E lowlylsrc w 2 vecttblerc w a vhandlersrc w S a source file 3 were i 6 Project Name c w 6 resetpre c w abrk c w
544. rkshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 4 3 Refreshing the Image window Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately refreshes the window contents 17 4 4 Specifying the refresh interval You can specify the interval to refresh the Image window while the user program is running Support for this function depends on the debugger To specify the refresh interval 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Update Interval The Update Interval dialog box opens Update Interval ki x Interval 10 10000msec 1Umeec unit ULI TOOL nse Cancel 3 Specify the refresh interval in 10 ms units The refresh interval is specifiable in the range from 10 to 10000 ms and the default value is 1000 ms The specified refresh interval is applied to all Image windows The actual refresh interval may be longer than the specified value depending on the state of execution 17 4 5 Viewing Images as Consecutive Frames The Image window can also show images as consecutive frames This allows you to view multiple images easily because it is not necessary to set addresses for all images After images have been loaded into consecutive addresses in memory as equal sized frames you can view the images by switching the frames in order REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 402 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To enable the function to show images as cons
545. rkshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features Options Output Files Dependent Files Command CAT oole MyT ool ese Options bFULLFILE Placeholder sia a Insert button File path name for placeholder hzert Note An error will be returned when the total number of characters of the command line options exceeds 256 3 4 2 Output Files tab This tab is where you can specify the output files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the High performance Embedded Workshop checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file 1 e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless Options Output Files Dependent Files Output tiles To add an output file 1 Click the Add button The Add Output File dialog box will be invoked 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 91 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Output File dialo
546. rkspace name Project name Configuration name Example 2 1 Select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the drop down list box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder 2 If you select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field Relative to Configuration directory Sub Directory Example 3 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Select the required placeholder from the drop down list box 3 Click Insert Placeholder Configuration directory Inzert Example 4 1 Alternatively if you know the placeholder already type it into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by C and followed by Y This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR FILEDIR REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 503 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 3 Available placeholders 5 Placeholders The table below lists the available placeholders and their meanings along with an example of their use Placeholder Meaning Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE Filename including full path c workspace projeci file src FILEDIR File directory c workspace project FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension file src FILELEAF Filena
547. rmance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Edit Test Coverage Available Flanges fo T i Pr x ki Ed Ranges to be tested Test Options I Address M Execution Path Execution Times Pass Cancel 1 The Available Ranges list shows the coverage ranges that are currently available 2 If you select coverage ranges in the Available Ranges list and click the gt gt button these coverage ranges then appear in the Ranges to be tested list 3 The Address checkbox among test options is always ON because addresses must be saved whenever coverage ranges are saved into test image files users cannot control this selection To set other test options Execution Path Execution Times and Pass select the check boxes for these options The Execution Path checkbox is selected by default Other check boxes are not selected by default 4 Click OK 16 6 2 7 Code Trace Trace window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name Test item name Test image data to be saved into test image files Test result details REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Code Trace Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the Trace window acquired with this setting No trace range is specified by default Comparing PTR Trace type Trace data is not matching PTR
548. rmance Embedded Workshop application to debug a specific target When running in synchronized debug mode it is used as a generic term to refer to a synchronized High performance Embedded Workshop application when in parallel mode or session when in internal mode The string ID that uniquely identifies a Debugger within the High performance Embedded Workshop GUI The string ID that uniquely identifies a Debugger internally inside High performance Embedded Workshop Only needs to be understood when editing SDO files Using synchronized debugging with all Debuggers open in one High performance Embedded Workshop application The Debugger that the user is currently interacting with A hardware or simulator device that has two or more CPU cores The main purpose of the synchronized debugging feature is to help the user debug multi core platforms Using synchronized debugging with each Debugger in a separate High performance Embedded Workshop application Hardware or simulator device that is connected to High performance Embedded Workshop Could be a single core platform or an individual core on a multi core platform The synchronized debug configuration file Contains all the information needed by High performance Embedded Workshop to start a synchronized debug session Saved from the Synchronized Debug dialog REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 483 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 19 Technical Suppo
549. rmation to display The status bar can be switched on and off via View gt Status Bar When any part of the status bar area is visible this main menu option will completely switch off the status bar area When the status bar is completely hidden this main menu option will switch on the application based section of the status bar The status bar can also be switched off via the status bar pop up menu The pop up menu allows individual status bar items to be toggled on and off including both application and target related areas as well as individual items on each The pop up menu can be displayed by selecting the right mouse button over the status bar area pen Default desktop Showing hiding the entire target related area Te Debugger Showing hiding the entire application related area tr Application Note The entire target related area of the status bar is hidden depending on the target being used All target related status bar items are switched off the entire target related area of the status bar will be hidden by default This can be re shown by switching on one or more target related individual status bar items 1 3 Help system The Help menu is the rightmost menu on the High performance Embedded Workshop menu bar It contains the Help Topics menu option which when selected takes you to the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click the context sensitive help button
550. rol menu options The custom version control system allows you to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions is performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window To execute a command by a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select the items to which you want to apply the version control command from the Projects tab of the workspace window This may include a workspace projects folders and files Right click to invoke a pop up menu You can select a menu option you have defined from the Version Control submenu A command associated with this menu option will be executed on the files contained in the workspace project or folder or file itself selected in the workspace window 2 For example if you select the workspace icon all of the files in all of the projects will be passed to the version control command this will include any High performance Embedded Workshop system files 3 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the highest degree of flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select Tools gt Version Control gt Confi
551. rt 19 Technical Support 19 1 Viewing the version information The version information of the High performance Embedded Workshop can be viewed To view the version information 1 Select Help gt About High performance Embedded Workshop The About High performance Embedded Workshop dialog box opens Information including the copyright and version number is shown in this dialog box 2 Clicking the More gt gt button shows Installed package information which contains various information on the Renesas tool packages associated with the High performance Embedded Workshop installed on your personal computer e g version number About High performance Embedded Workshop Ei High performance Embedded Workshop Copyright C 2003 2004 2010 Hig h performa nce Renesas Electronics Corporation Renesas Solutions Corporation Pesce and Ho Fae foo Limited Workshop Installed package information MIBC Seres ASC Family C Compiler v 5 45 Release 004 1 27 2070 05 57 56 LC compiler package for AX family V 1 00 Release OO 3 12 2010 22 00 05 LC compiler package for SuperH RISC engine family 9 03 Release U2 3 23 2010 19 16 52 Version 408 a Aa oF 3 Click on the OK button to close the dialog box 19 2 Check for updates To check for High performance Embedded Workshop product updates or service packs 1 Select Help gt Technical Support gt Check Website For Updates 2 Your default web browser is i
552. rther dialog box for detailed setting opens Edit Test IO registers EE Compared ID registers Name Address J C FTEH FFOOOUOU CI FTEL FFOUOUO4 C TTE FFOUOUOS CI TEA FFOUOUOL C MMUCR FF0000 0 C CER FFOUOUTC CI TRA FFOOUOU20 DV FXPF YT FFA hd Curent Setting Cancel lgnore address 1 Selecting the checkbox for an I O register in the Compared I O registers list allows this I O register to be saved into the test image file These check boxes are not selected by default The selected I O register is shown in Current Setting 2 If you do not wish to compare the address of the selected register select the Ignore address checkbox This checkbox is not selected by default 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 295 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility 16 6 1 4 CPU Status Status window The following table shows information on the test image data to be saved into test image files and test results not matched Test group name CPU Test item name Status Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and all data in the Status window No sheet is specified saved into test image files by default Test result details Sheet Name of the unmatched sheet Line Unmatched line number Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared w
553. ry Search Next 1 a Finds a next value in memory Address Specifies the display start address Scroll Area Bi Specifies scroll range Register 1 XXXXX Starts address to value of the register Followed Stack Pointer 1 Keeps tracking of the stack pointer position Set Start Up Symbol at Changes the program display position immediately after downloading Refresh eI Refreshes the Memory window Lock Refresh Disables refresh of the Memory window Auto Refresh 2 Refresh Interval 2 Regularly refreshes the Memory window si Specifies the refresh interval Data 1byte i Data is displayed in 1 byte unit Length 2bytes i Data is displayed in 2 bytes units 4bytes nl Data is displayed in 4 bytes units 8bytes nann Data is displayed in 8 bytes units Radix Hex lb Data is displayed in hexadecimal Dec 10 Data is displayed in decimal Signed Dec 1 Data is displayed in signed decimal Oct a Data is displayed in octal Bin ia Data is displayed in binary Code ASCII dbc Displays memory data as ASCII characters default SJIS Not supported JIS UNICODE UTF 8 UTF 16 EUC Float Float Displays memory data as single precision floating point values Double A Displays memory data as double precision floating point values Complex Float Complex fe Displays complex numbers as single precision floating point values Double far Displays complex numbers as double precision
554. ry access Disables reading data from memory outside the displayed range in disassembly mode To limit disassembly memory access L 2 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens Select the Options tab Select the Limit disassembly memory access Default for this checkbox depends on the target Click OK 7 Not performing automatic target connection If this checkbox is selected the target is not connected until you select Debug gt Connect Support for this function depends on the debugger To not perform automatic target connection 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the Do not perform automatic target connection This checkbox is only enabled if the feature is supported by the selected target Selecting a new target will reset this option to the default setting for the target Default for this checkbox depends on the target 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 339 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 8 Resetting CPU after download module If this checkbox is selected the target will be automatically reset after downloading the user program Support for this function depends on the debugger To reset CPU after download module 1 Select Debug gt Debug Settings The Debug Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the Options tab 3 Select the
555. ry data displayed on this row e n in the column header of the Data column means the offset value from the first address of the row e The column header of the Code column shows the code name e Double clicking the Address or Label column opens a dialog box which allows you to change first address to be displayed e Double clicking on the Data or Code column opens a dialog box which allows you to change the memory data at the selected address Changing of the value can be recorded in a macro Macro Recording e Values in the Address Data and Code columns can be changed by in place editing Macro Recording Options Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Macro Function Button Recording Set a Sets data at specified address Fill Fills specified memory block with data REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 381 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Macro Function Button Recording Move Moves specified memory block to Compare 1 Ful D Compares the contents of two memory blocks Test 1 A Tests an area of memory Save Memory contents Eg Saves memory contents in a text file Search 1 LT Finds a value in memo
556. s Intprg Interrupt Program vecttbl Initialize of ector Tab vec i Definition of Vector ery i Define Interuput E ver vhandler ResetInterupt Hand resetprg Reset Program Tutorial Main Program sbrk Header file of sbrk file stackect Setting of Stack area 9 The files to be generated by the High performance Embedded Workshop based on the settings made so far are displayed as a list in Step 9 File Name File name To change a file name after selecting the file name by clicking on it enter the new file name Extension File extension Description Description of the file Clicking the Finish button in Step 9 displays the Summary dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 331 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Summary Ei ES Project Summary PROJECT GENERATOR PROJECT MAME Tutorial PROJECT DIRECTORY CAWWiorkspace Tutorial Tutorial CPU SERIES SH 4 CPU TYPE SH r50 TOOLCHAIN MAME Renesas SuperH RISC engine St TOOLCHAIN VERSION 9 2 0 0 GENERATION FILES CMrorkspace s Tutoria T utonalydbsct c Setting of BA Section CAworkspace Tutorial T utorialtypedetine h Aliases of Integer Type CWrorkspace Tutora T utonalysbrk c Program of brk LC Wrorkspace Tutoria T utoraliodetine h Definition of lO Register CWrorkspace Tutorial T utoralintprg sre Interrupt Prograrn DE W Generate Readme tst as a s
557. s Otherwise select No or Cancel If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open this dialog box again select Setup gt Options to open the Options dialog box Select the Remove download module s from project checkbox on the Confirmation tab By default this checkbox is selected To change the order of a module to be downloaded to the target L 2 Open the Debug Settings dialog box Select a module in the Download modules list and click the Up or Down button Any changes made in the Debug Settings dialog box are only changed when you click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 344 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 5 2 Downloading modules Download the object program to be debugged To download modules Select one of the following operations e Select the module which you wish to download from the Debug gt Download Modules submenu OR e Double click the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window OR e Right click on the module in the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window to display a pop up menu Select Download or Download Debug Data Only The High performance Embedded Workshop shows the most recently downloaded modules on the submenu of File gt Recently Download Modules This is useful when you wish to download
558. s been specified REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 259 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line Command Line C forkspace Command hdc no log file ES toba Tada olagGiviae Contents of the atch file t T E Line number 2 reset k E 3 step urrent line to be executed 4 step oS atep Breakpoint column Line number 4 H column gt command reset step ao Step complete at A000000 execution gt EY console Debugger To single step in a batch file 1 Open the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window 2 Perform one of the following operations in the upper pane e Click on the Step toolbar button H e Right click within the pane to open the pop up menu and select Step e With a focus in the pane press the Ctrl F10 keys The yellow arrow 5 gt moves to the next command line If some errors have occurred however the arrow does not move to the next line Note If the batch file includes the commands listed below debugging of the batch file on the Debugger tabbed pane of the Command Line window cannot proceed Instead use the Console tabbed pane of the Command Line window to execute the batch file e CLOSE WORKSPACE When a command is run the batch file will be closed e CHANGE_PROJECT or CHANGE_SESSION When a command is run the contents of the batch file specified for the current session will be shown in the pane e CHANGE_CONFIGURATION
559. s in a text file Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 7 2 Changing the register display radix You can change the display radix by register To do this click the mouse right button on the register to be changed and select the display radix from the pop up menu which is opened The followings can be selected Hex Display in hexadecimal Dec Display in decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 418 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 7 3 Switching Register Bank Immediately after opening the Register window the register data for the bank corresponding to the value of flag 1s displayed To switch the bank you can also use the pop up menu which is displayed by clicking the mouse right button on the register display area in the Register window or change the value of flag If you change the value of flag the register bank also changes in response to the value To reference the register data of Bank1 select Bank1 from the pop up menu with the Register window active The register specific to Bank is displayed in the gray background Screenshot of the M16C family debugger 1 BANK Register Window Name Value RU OOO R1 aoai Re OOO R3 aood AU aood Al aoo FE aoai USP OOO ISP aoai Pe OFOOOO 4 xex uj z ofs sfz o e 0 0o00 To reference the register data of BankO select B
560. s in the High performance Embedded Workshop application can be driven by the keyboard Below is a list of all keyboard commands in the application Function key ALT ALT ALT ALT ALT ALT CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL Key 0 9 A K O F4 BACKSPACE 0 9 NI lt xX _ lt C1O DyI VIO J ZslSHIi_EO Al TLIO TNsyOsO wa gt S Tl IN F4 F6 F7 F9 SPACEBAR BACKSPACE BREAK INSERT TAB Function Play a macro assigned to keyboard shortcut Toggle status bar Open the workspace window Open the output window Exit the application Undo alternative in the editor to CTRL Z Reserved for use for template insertion Select all in the editor May also work in other windows Open the Breakpoints dialog box Copy the selected items to the clipboard Open the disassembly window Open the Find dialog box Go to source line Open the Replace dialog box Open the IO window Open the stack trace window Open the command line window Open the memory window Create a new source file in the editor Open the open file dialog box Print the document Open the registers window Save the current file Open the status window Paste the clipboard contents Cut the selection Redo the action Undo the last action Toggle bookmark Se
561. s on the debugger 17 13 4 Running to cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may only want to run a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute In this case it would be useful to be able to run to a particular point You can do this by using the Go To Cursor feature How to use the Go To Cursor feature 1 Make sure that an editor or disassembly view is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the cursor on the line containing the address at which you wish to stop 3 Choose Go To Cursor from the pop up menu The debugger will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes e If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens you can stop code execution by pressing ESC choosing Debug gt Halt Program or clicking the Halt toolbar button E e The Go To Cursor feature requires a temporary breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 426 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 13 5 Running from a specified address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program ki Frogram counter faooo0000 Tempo
562. s the corresponding source code in the editor The total number of errors and warnings will also be displayed in the Build tab of the output window at the end of a build phase 10 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove output syntax line formats respectively 11 Click the OK button when all modifications have been made Note You can only change the environment of a system phase via the Tools Administration dialog box To remove a custom phase 1 Select the phase to be removed and click the Remove button 2 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings To import a custom phase 1 Click the Import button The Import Custom Phase dialog box is displayed which allows you to browse to an existing project from which you want to import a custom phase 2 Choose the location of the project from which you want to import a custom phase Once selected the Import Phase dialog box is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and click the OK button The phase will then be added to the Build Phases dialog box at the bottom of the build order REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 87 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 3 2 Build File Order tab If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or cl
563. s to share projects are enabled Hetwrork Network database access User igini Access nights Password Basswood Select server 10 3 Setting the administrator user s password To set the administrator users password 1 Continue from the previous sections step 4 2 Click the Password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled 3 The Change password dialog box opens Change password Ea ES Admin Fassword Cancel Confirm Password 4 The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin 5 Type the new password into both of the fields and click OK 6 This should set the user and password on the Network tab of Options dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 214 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 10 Sharing Projects by Network Facilities 10 4 Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the High performance Embedded Workshop system Administrator Full access to every aspect of High performance Embedded Workshop The user can add and remove users from the projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the
564. scanning data Confirmation Request ki 3 ilf you have not manually updated dependency data it may be out of date Do You want dependency data to be updated prior to build T Don t ask this question again If you do not wish to open this confirmation dialog box select the Don t ask this question again checkbox To open the confirmation dialog box again 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Confirmation tab 3 Select the Scan Dependencies Prior To Build checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK To manually update file dependencies in a project Select one of the following operations e Select Build gt Update All Dependencies OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build gt Update All Dependencies from the pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 71 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 10 Configuring the Workspace window If you right click anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog box Show Dependencies Under Each File If you check the Show dependencies under each file checkbox the dependent files are shown under the including sour
565. se Move from the pop up menu of the memory window The Move dialog box opens start Address jonooooon End Address poooo07F l Move Address OOo Length libyte w D verify Cancel Enter the copy destination start address in the Move Address field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugger If you did not drag the copy source address range you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Drag and Drop Type of dropped data Operation Selected range on the Memory Window s Data column Copy the contents of a selected range of data to an area starting from the dropped position 17 3 6 Comparing the memory contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Select a source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose Compare from the pop up menu of the memory window The Compare Memory dialog box opens Compare Memory Start Address foono00 ind ehee o000F F Compare Address DataLeneth i byte Cancel REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 386 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Enter the start address of the destination memory area in the Compare Address field and the data length in the Data Length field If you did not drag the comparison source address range you
566. seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaegaaeeenees 156 6 8 9 Specifying a default directory for new W OL KS PaCS iaiccivicedcancosuiveddepudcanncaniand niiki eiaa 157 609 Using amexrternal OC LOT essicsrscreiinineain e a aa a aaa 157 OO Customizine heton n yonr VOWS enie ENEE EE R 159 6 11 Using the virtual desktop ao otcpsad coerecerseseniecanamnnenenaaasecsitiesnnntie canoennaseisaaastnns doaahsaneectinanahemnoousiiagnvusandonasaatesaneesiauiiuaurrontoants 161 TNE SOC OnT O e E E E O E ET E E 163 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System zaecc ca chisacuecosundestandectensiceconcoucnsincanesuengandecburand Gea ad nnna k nanna Nr arin hna nekain aaan 165 1 2 lmporine andexporine aset UPeesseee ei OEE EE T AEE EEOSE 166 o Custom Version Contool Syste esie esser r E EEE ST 167 8 1 Defining Version Control menu options sssseeeeseeeeessssssssssssseteteerresssssssssssssssseetereresssssssssssseeererereereeessssssssssees 167 8 1 1 System defined menu options sssseseeeeeeeessssssssssssseetreerrssssssssssssseetrererereresssssssssseeereeereesessssssseeeeeseeeereree 168 8 1 2 User defined ment OPTIONS lt 5 c0cs1cccssagssesassansnagneneessaumncarsacsugeraeanneasapanacacbia dagsnnaaoatarsad mabortannnceriemnadeandbonacantes 169 Sa Delinme Verion COO MANS apace sce pe gone eaters neds E eu oranneeaamapeennieiade 170 8 3 PP UE TE a OIA AS an E EE E O 172 8 4 DeD MR COTM IG opac cere Shee ecnsccaena sta sentirs T E RTE 172 8 5 Poc E O E e E R EEE E EN EEA NE EN EEEE
567. series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a batch file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a batch file is hdc Choose Set Batch File from the pop up menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a batch file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified batch file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without modifying the setting REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 254 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 14 Command Line Batch File gt Browse OK After a batch file has been specified the upper pane of the Debugger tabbed pane in the Command Line window shows the contents of the batch file When saving the session the batch file name will also be saved Notes e The batch file is automatically closed if any of the GUI features or command listed below is run The information shown in the upper pane of the Debugger tabbed pane is cleared o Closing a workspace CLOSE_WORKSPACE o Creating anew workspace o Inserting a project into the workspace o Adding a session e If you modify the contents of the batch file after it has been specified the information shown in the upper pane of the Debugger tabbed pane in the Command Line window will be updated The status of the batch file will be reset with all breakpoints deleted If you modify the conte
568. seseeesssseeeeecceeeeeeeeeaaaeaessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaasesssseseeeeeeeeeeeess 123 ATL Templie Sena E iv scaaiansenn iia ses senate E EEE E 123 4 11 1 D oa E E E NE 124 ANI2 Deletie atemplite eseina E E EO E E SE EESE E 125 4 11 3 Inserti A tenp aE cnni E E E 126 WE Doea A E E E E 126 4 13 Setting the read only attribute for a file wi cssecisscsccaccaccssasciossesadeniennahscsdodadoegeouedaaaieansansaccedgesaeccusccsuecatanscanaanneddessodoes 127 4 14 Preventing modification of files while debugging eee eccccccccccccceceeeeeeesseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaesssesseseeseceeseeeseeeeeeeqaas 127 4 15 Managing the editor COMMUMMS vie s3 snccdeedavedphatnawandacsennessnasdagusieasneonneandsbnceesndeoowaeseaspeaneaednensieieieasterasdusassaraseiavnnsabesiedats 128 416 Sbhbowing hiding the colhimn headet seriinin iien EEE Er ENTE EA EAEE ERES EEEE EEEE E 129 4 17 Opening a file within the editor 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccccccceccceceeesessseseeecccceeceeeeseaaaseusssseseeeeceeeeeeesesaaeesaessasssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 129 MNS TOO A AUC a E E E O 129 I Eyi ANC MOC SS Or n A E E T E ETE E 130 Lo AUC MMPS AION e a E A E T E A S 132 5 1 TOM TOC ON asr raien E E E E E E E E E E 133 5 2 High performance Embedded Workshop registration files cccccccccccccccccceeseeeesssseeeeeccceeeeeeeesaaaaeassseseeeeeeeeseeeess 133 5 3 Registern aA COMO Mle 1 esra ERE 134 E e EC OO a a O ON 135 5 5 Viewing and editing component properties sssseeeeeeeesssssss
569. shop command line commands of the operations listed below are included between the lines showing information to identify macros When a macro includes operations such as running a program the Debug tab of the Output window shows information including the cause of a stop This may cause difference in comparison of test results To clear the contents of the tabs in the Output window the High performance Embedded Workshop command line command clear_output_window is available It is possible to add the line at the next line of Macro Demo Start to clear the information in the Debug tab of the Output window clear_output_window debug a C Documents and Settings 4Macros Default hdc B 1 s Macro Demo Start 3 refresh session 4 Clear output window debug 5 register set RO 0x0 6 register set Rl Oxo T register set Re 0x0 E register set E3 Oxo 9 register set E4 Oxo 10 register set RS Oxd rI register set Ro 0x le register set RY Oxo 13 register set Roa Oxo 14 register set RY Oxo 15 register set R1O Ox0 16 register get Rll Oxd 17 register set Rle 0x0 15 register set R13 Oxo 19 register set R14 0x0 aU build all wait al file load ELf Dwarfe s CONFIGDIF 444 PROJECTNAME oc memory Fill OxTOOOOOOO OxTOOOO0e OxXOOOO long nover 2A reset 24 qo till go x 0E4 ao atch add Watchl a 6 a0 Macro Demo End REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 32 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Emb
570. source files But it 1s not possible to change user access rights from this access level Read write file access Only the source files can be modified All project settings can only be viewed not modified Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above To add a new user to the system L 2 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens Select the Network tab Click the Access rights button The User access rights dialog is displayed Click the Add button The Add new user dialog box opens This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK Once OK is clicked the user is added with read only rights To change the access level select the user you wish to modify and then click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes To remove an existing user to the system 1 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above 2 Select Setup gt Options The Options
571. ssembly mode pop up menu When Print is selected the Disassembly Print Range dialog box is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to print REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 370 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Disassembly Print Range Ed Ed start Address i_ z 4 al End Address JUUUUZU1A al Cancel Both a start and end address should be supplied Clicking OK on this dialog box then passes the print selection to the standard print formatting and selection dialog box From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 17 2 2 Opening the Disassembly window If you wish to view code at assembly language level then select one of the following operations e Choose View gt Disassembly OR e Press CTRL D OR e Click on the View Disassembly toolbar button 1 The Disassembly window opens at the current program counter PC location Toolbar View Source View mired mode View Disassembly didiz OOO002004 The disassembly window in version 4 02 onwards has been enhanced to include a source view This integrated view has a toolbar which allows the switching of mode When each mode is available it is possible to click the button and change to the new view REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 371 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Three different modes are poss
572. ssion file link read only 17 1 6 4 Removing a session To remove a session 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens Select the session you would like to remove Click the Remove button Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is not possible to remove the current session 17 1 6 5 Making a session read only To make a session read only Read only 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions The Debug Sessions dialog box opens 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for 3 Click the Properties button The properties dialog is displayed 4 Click the Read only checkbox This makes the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally 5 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 360 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 1 6 6 Saving session information To save a session Select File gt Save Session If you have the Prompt before saving session checkbox checked a dialog box is displayed which asks you whether you wish to save the information Clicking No loses the changes you made in the session This checkbox is located in the Setup gt Options dialog box on the Workspace tab To save a session with a different name 1 Select Debug gt Debug Sessions T
573. ssssessettererssssssssssssseeeterrresssssssssssseeterererreressssssssesees 136 o e me ASD e R E E T T E E RTA 138 5 7 Using On Demand components eesessesssssseeeeeeeeeeesssssssssssssettrereresssssssssseeeetereressssssssssssssseseeeeerosssessssssseeseeeeeree 139 5 8 Custom project LY PCS sco recasissnnddenncnigncdendebunda stovebawbsdneddeiesnmeh sma daulabdedaubiaweddionsitding E windajedausiactcudwimbuebwaddouvawe daneeawadounaics 140 6 CUSTOMNZINe TNE LOVON essea a E A 142 6 1 Customize the TOOL DANS csse iarrann EE A ENAS aE EAE aE i 142 6 2 Customizing the Tools menu cc ccccssesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaaaaaaeassseeeeeeeeess 144 6 3 Using custom placeholders sesse iueinineieiseieiuaa ean e aa a a a a aea eaei na 146 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities 000000ooeoooeeeneneesssesssssssssssseeetreeressssssssssssserteereresssssssssssssssseseeeeee 148 6 5 oy Na aL chorea a e S ces 11 eee Denne ee eT emee nr ce Nee oer mer R EEE er tenn E er eer 148 6 6 Keyboard shortcut Custom Zal Oliss cccccsccecsccasescarneasaaanaueersnennccsaacsuiarneameanadnapieensnedeconnaneatarsamieagabelessdnseeeniainiaoneaanens 150 6 7 Scope Ol A COMO OI the SEUD esnin ena E R N EEEE E EEE 152 6 7 1 Scope of a control in the Customize dialog bOX nennnsessesssssssssssssseseereessssssssssssssetereressssssssssseseeeeeeereeee 152 6 7 2 Scope of a control in the Options dialog bOX
574. ssssssssssssssseeteereesesssss 241 13 1 11 Printing out the section settings tree cccccccccssssssseseeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeaaassssseeseseeeeeeceeeeeeeesesaaaasseeeseeeeeeeeess 242 I 12 Viewing unallocated Areas sesonon EEE EE saad E K EEEN EE 243 LLS Na Wa SC GIONS Ol e aeae e E O E Et 243 I3 114 Viewmg the Source Code forthe address sicsis scnastoerc danawsuduseaeduwcsaosiesaeiteane n e ESAE Ei 243 LOM Prnnng OUT TE Se CUO Ml ISI eiecgioseri annaa E 244 e PP NENE 080106 eeee Renee pen ce CPenn eee tee rece cen nC eT E tes tor et errr een ee Retr nye Oren ters 244 13 2 1 Opening the Map Symbol Information Window cccssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeesssseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeagaaeeenseeeeees 244 1322 PRI ourthe map Tisi esate cece tenses scams pesicemdesaces E E EE ted dominsateoiacsonmnacdeneseatdcs 246 13 2 3 Finding Sy OS irae actannacseoeaeneneciesemenanesataweomad cnasans E EN EEEREN EEE EEEE SEEE ET EAEE 247 13 2 4 Filtering the symbol information eeesesessssssssseeeeresessssssssssssseeereersssssssssssssssssererereesssssssssssseeeseerrereesssssss 247 13 2 5 Viewing the source code for the address ccccccccsssssssssseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeaeaaessssseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaasessseeseseeeeeeeeess 249 13 2 6 Printing out the symbol 1tOrmMat OM saiiscscoiccacsdeesencaccaceniceecaisasseaadeededdacdacdec eee udadencdadadendeedonsecbecdacsdedensbeceaaads 249 Ws A OMIA AUN TAIN aE E E E E E E E EN 250 14 1 Opening the Command Line W
575. st box 2 Enter the address of the label that you wish to find into the Address field or select an address that you have searched before from the drop down list box 3 To find the label having the name entered in the Name field select the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the High performance Embedded Workshop searches for any labels that partly match the name entered in the Name field the Address field cannot be used 4 When the label name must be case sensitive select the Match case check box 5 Click the OK button to start the search REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 441 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less 17 18 1 9 Searching for the next label Choose Find Next from the pop up menu to find the next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 17 18 1 10 Viewing the source code corresponding to a label Select a label and choose View Source from the pop up menu to open the source file containing the address corresponding to the label 17 18 2 Elf Dwarf2 support The High performance Embedded Workshop supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Key Features e Source level debugging
576. switched If a flag is composed of multiple bits a dialog is opened where you can enter a value to be changed REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 421 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Screenshot of the SH 4 debugger Register Frac 2 ruac opiac ufiac 1am rmo When the flag is displayed in the register Double click the FLG line A dialog opens Enter the value to be changed Screenshot of the SH 4 debugger FLG line FPSCR 17 7 8 Splitting up the window display To vertically divide the Register window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar To cancel the split up display select Split from the pop up menu again 17 7 9 Saving register contents To save register contents in a text file choose Save To File from the register pop up menu The Save As dialog box opens Specify the file name 17 7 10 Refreshing the Register window The Register window contents can be forcibly refreshed Selecting Refresh from the pop up menu of the Register window 17 7 11 Disabling refresh of the Register window Automatic refresh of the Register window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled Select Lock Refresh from the pop up menu of the Register window The contents of the Register window are grayed out REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 422 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS
577. system is in use For further details on version control see Chapter 7 Version Control Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 12 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window fe Clears the contents of the window Save El Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Press the SHIFT ESC key and the Output window closes The color of text or background and font shown in the Output window can be customized in the same manner as in other windows You can also customize the Build tab of the Output window so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts 1n other lines To customize the current colors 1 Select Setup gt Format Views to open the Format Views dialog box 2 Select the Output item from the tree in the left hand section of the dialog box and expand it 3 Select the category for which you wish to change the color from the table below Category Foreground
578. t Create Test Image File 11 Clicking OK adds the test to the Modify Test Suite dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 290 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Add Test Script ki Script type i Cancel Select macros to add to test File Path C Downoad Default NewMacro Default 16 5 Creating a test image file The test image data is what is used for any comparison in the test system Only items that are saved in the test file can be compared For example you may only be interested in comparing data that is located in a small area memory not the memory for the entire device The more items that you compare for each test will slow down the comparison and this can make a big difference if you are executing many tests To create test image data to be saved into a test image file 1 Select the Test gt Create New Test Image File The Create New Test Image dialog box is then displayed Create New Test Image El Ei Available components OK on Stack Trace SimsessianSH 4 Bee OE Trace SimSessianSH 4 O CPU Da O SimSessionSH 4 Cancel Memory SimSessionSH 4 Check All bese 1E Register SimSessionSH 4 been a Simulated l 0 Sim essionS H 4 T ae oo Status SimSessianSH 4 settings om Output Hee BF Build Output Window Import basen gA Debug Output Window SimSessionsH 4 mS Symbol G go
579. t Tools gt Administration The Tools Administration dialog box opens 2 Click the Modify button which is next to the Current HEW tools location field 3 Browse to the root directory of the new tool location and click the OK button 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location This can be achieved by using the Search Disk or Register Tool functionality 5 3 Registering a component The High performance Embedded Workshop will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself In some cases it is useful to search a drive for High performance Embedded Workshop compatible components This is especially useful if the High performance Embedded Workshop installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly To search for components and register them 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog box The Search Disk for Components dialog box opens 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include Subfolders checkbox if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search
580. t Browser window opens 1 14 11 Step 10 Viewing the test result matched You can view the test result in the Test Browser window Make sure that the test result now matches the saved test image information x i gt Test Name Description Result E Test Demo Demonstration SUCCESS aooo Component Result Details a CPU Memory SinsessionsH 4 SUCCESS BH Symbol Watch SimsessionsH 4 SUCCESS REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 40 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general basic functions of the High performance Embedded Workshop whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The build process The typical build process is outlined in the figure below This may not be the exact build process that your installation of High performance Embedded Workshop will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of High performance Embedded Workshop you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each phase of the build takes a set of project files and builds them if every file builds successfully then the next phase is executed INFFPLUT C PHASE 3 OUTPUT gt COMPILER DC S Files T g ASSEMBLER PROJECT Assembler OS Files a_i bra ry Files Files Load module In the example shown in the fi
581. t Scope FFFS0624 i FFF50620 i FFFSO061 C R A EER ivolatile long Current scope H H oooooo0d iwolatile Current c H QOOUO000U wolatile Current Watch1 17 18 3 4 Locals window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window 1 Opening the Locals window To open the Locals window choose View gt Symbol gt Locals or click the Locals toolbar button fal Window configuration Locals Toolbar f 0 6 2 Column Name Value Type E header ve T3FFFFBO long 10 F min H OOUO4S0001 Re ilong a max H OOO40001 Re ftlong z e The local variables and their values can be displayed As you debug your program the Locals window will be updated If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value in the Locals window will be undefined until a value is assigned to the local variable e The contents of this window are blank unless the current PC can be associated to a function containing local variables in the source files via the debugging information available in the absolute file abs e Double clicking the Value column opens a dialog box which allows you to change the value of a local variable Macro Recording e The value of a local variable can be changed by using in place editing Macro Recording REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 463 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08
582. t Test Memory Ranges Memory ranges End address Cancel Hadiye Hemose e To add a memory range 1 Click on the Add button on the Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box to open the Add Memory Range dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 297 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Add Memory Range ki Ei address OK JE Cancel End address ooo00000 ACCESS SIZE kaa 2 Specify Start address End address and Access size to set a memory range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To modify a memory range 1 Click on the Modify button on the Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box The memory range selected in the Memory ranges list will be modified Only one variable is selectable in the list The Modify Memory Range dialog box opens Modify Memory Range Ei ES address e Cancel End address o00000FF E ACCESS SIZE 1 2 Specify Start address End address and Access size to set a memory range to be saved into a test image file 3 Click OK e To remove a memory range 1 Click on the Remove button on the Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box The memory range selected in the Memory ranges list will be deleted Only one trace range is selectable in the list Then click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 298 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 0
583. t data The first step towards using the test tool 1s to create a test suite This is available on the main Test menu Then you must edit the test suite to create some actual tests Then you can execute the tests using the Run tests menu option Note however that High performance Embedded Workshop is not capable of acquiring test image information of all functions in the High performance Embedded Workshop system For the items from which test image information can be acquired see section 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files 16 1 Creating a test suite A test suite is a set of tests A test suite has a very similar concept to a workspace The test suite can contain many tests which in turn can contain many macros to be executed Test Suite REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 286 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Test suites are independent to the current High performance Embedded Workshop workspace This allows your test suite to work with multiple workspaces and projects to test different situations in one test suite The open_workspace and change_project commands all work with the test suite feature so allow you to control which workspace is currently in use To create a test suite 1 Select Test gt Create New Test Suite The Create New Test Suite dialog box opens Create New Test Suite Ei E4 Test suite name Cance
584. t function Refresh all windows Cut the selection in the editor alternative in the editor to CTRL X Hide the output window Move the tab back in the editor Selects from the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor Selects from the cursor to the end of the current line in the editor Select the next line up Select the next line down REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 510 of 523 CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Function key SHIFT ALT None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Note Key BACKSPACE F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 DELETE INSERT ENTER TAB ESC HOME END PAGE UP PAGE DOWN UP ARROW DOWN ARROW LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW ALT Mouse select 8 Keyboard Shortcuts Function Redo the action alternative in the editor to CTRL Y Display context sensitive help Jump to the next bookmark Search for the next of the specified text Find text in multiple files Start or continue the program Build the project Display the editor that generated the next build error or warning Set or remove a breakpoint on the current line Step over the next statement Step into the next statement Refresh the contents of the window Clear Toggle insert and overwrite mode Carriage return in the editor Insert a tab in the ed
585. t when adding it to the Download modules list see section 17 1 5 2 Downloading modules REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 343 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To change the setting of a download module L Select one of the following operations to open the Download Module dialog box Open the Debug Settings dialog box and select a module for which you wish to modify the setting in the Download modules list and click the Modify button OR Right click on the download module or within the Download modules folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Properties from the pop up menu Change the setting and click the OK button To remove download modules L Zi Open the Debug Settings dialog box Select a module which you wish to remove in the Download modules list and click the Remove button To remove selected download modules using the Projects tab of the Workspace window L Select the download modules that you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple download modules can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key Select one of the following operations Select Remove from the pop up menu opened by right clicking OR Press Delete key A confirmation dialog box opens for you to select whether or not to remove the selected download modules from the project To delete the selected download modules select Ye
586. tab 3 Select the Set multiple breakpoints checkbox This checkbox is selected by default 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 431 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Note The line or instruction at which you set a PC breakpoint is not actually executed the program stops just before it is about to execute it If you choose to Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the highlighted line will be the next instruction to be executed To change the PC breakpoint setting by using the Breakpoints dialog box The breakpoint dialog can be displayed by selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoints It allows you to view the current breakpoints set in the workspace and view the code associated with each one From this dialog it 1s also possible to remove one or all breakpoints To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle PC Breakpoints either by double clicking in the breakpoint BP column of the line at which the PC breakpoint is set or by placing the caret on the line and using the F9 key The display will cycle through the available standard breakpoint types a red circle will be shown in the gutter 17 15 Viewing the current status To check the configuration and status of the debugger in the Status window choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status button a The Status window has three tabs Window configuration statuz
587. tart of the line number specified 4 5 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button Q3 OR e Press CTRL F2 OR e Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark OR e Right click and select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the pop up menu 3 A bookmark icon _ will be placed on the bookmarked line to indicate that it is an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button EE OR e Press CTRL F2 OR e Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark OR e Right click and select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the pop up menu 3 The bookmark icon will be removed from the line REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 115 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhe
588. tatmaabaedSenitanieaneAndtanbumessactatiantedebtaatsadndeambllecdMecbs oalderhisaadens 389 17 3 12 Starting address to value of the register sossecs tasceisecincs cece ssiabadudaideedaddiedncind Seeladanasedacabendestendwibetdaussedieabecedands 390 Iolo Tracking the Stack pointer POSIMOM xeccecsseeesesactinectnocanetapstendinessenadactinedsussenddetneddusexusitesactivndteccamedeautniadeuesueseies 390 17 3 14 Changing the program display position immediately after downloading ceccesssseesseeeeseseeeeeeeees 390 17 3 15 Refreshing the Memory WINdOW ec ccccccccccttnssessseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeessssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseseaaaaaassssesessseeeeeeeess 391 17 3 16 Disabling refresh of the Memory WINdOW ccccssssssesssseeecececeeeeeeeeaaaasssseseseeeceeeeeseeeeessasaaasseseeeeeeeeeeeeess 391 17 3 17 Regularly refreshing the Memory windoW ssssseneneessssssssssssseeeerrerssssssssssssserererersssssssssssseeerereressressssss 391 17 318 Specifying the refresh interval ircre ni r ean Aaaa TAN iii 391 FEAS La edar E E E E 392 Mee Tie ae eTa a E cone sceaacnaseuetesanperactsseheaseunsnavedsadca tees 392 Te CAM TC C OE stciciomcesc cc cenrhe eles TE ca CASE denM ee aetna Red E ema as TE 393 17 3 22 Set ng the NAY OE sors oe ruessnaannenanemavecsasanaedenaitanionsie etaanades uaiuapaeadnnaateie teaendoneonedeaaaeanasunaeaanneasedtenteseseeszeudawantebaeoanes 393 17 3 23 Changing the number of digits displayed ccccsssssssssseeeecccc
589. ted in the table below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 225 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities Public member function Protected member tunction Private member function Public member variable Protected member variable Private member variable Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items declaration This default behavior can be modified by selecting Jump To Definition On Double Click from the pop up menu this option is unchecked by default When this option is checked double clicking a navigation item jumps you to the associated navigation items definition To jump to the definition Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump To Definition On Double Click is checked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Go to Definition To jump to the declaration Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump To Definition On Double Click is unchecked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Go to Declaration To list the member variables and
590. ted on the selected Debugger s only All synchronizations are ignored when an operation is executed from the Debuggers tab When debugging a multi core platform some operations will be disabled These are operations that are always synchronized by the hardware which means that the operation cannot be executed on the platform s cores separately Menu items will also be disabled if the operation is not possible on the selected Debugger For example if you right click on a Debugger which is running only the Halt Program menu item will be enabled The Properties menu item is used to find out information on a Debugger When selected a dialog will be displayed containing the following items Workspace file workspace name project name and session name The Activate menu item is only enabled when debugging in Internal mode When selected this will make the selected Debugger the currently active one See section 18 2 3 Internal mode functionality for more information REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 476 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Debugger operations The following table describes the operations that can be synchronized The synchronized operations are determined by the selections on the Synchronized Debug dialog box The table columns contain the following data Operation Name of the operation Option s The check box option or options that must be chec
591. tempt an operation to display an error or warning the status bar shows this error or warning message REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 65 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics You can also customize the Build tab so that the texts in the lines of error messages will be highlighted in a color different from that of the texts in other lines The figure below shows the error messages in red and warnings in green as an example a oaa U 7 aa Phase SH C C Compiler starting Workspace DemoSH4 Demos dbsct c Workspace DemoSH4 DemosH4t resetpryg c Workspace DemoSsH4 DemoSH4 sbrk c Workspace DemoSH4 DemosH4 lowsre c i Workspace DemoSsH4 DemoSH4 DemosH4 c Workspace DemoSH4 DemosHt Demosha cie22 Celsl E No type Workspace DemoSH4 DemosH4 DemosH4 cf 40 ClOle W Arqument n Workspace DemosH4tDemosH4 DemosHd c 49 C1016 iW Arqument Phase SH C C Compiler finished Build Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Od OT A AT Display next Error Warning Info Rd Display previous Error Warning Info AT Help Py Go to Error Warning Info Clear Window Save mj Copy Eg Toolba
592. tents of a range of memory addresses to a value using the memory fill feature Select an address range to fill in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose Fill from the pop up menu of the memory window The Fill dialog box opens Fill Start Address jonooooon kal End Address pooo F kal Data Data Type tf Value C String Length fi byte Wade ASCI Werity Cancel Enter the data value or character to be filled in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugger If you did not drag the address range to be filled you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value When specifying the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group When the display data length is two bytes two bytes worth of a character can be specified Please use the Set dialog box to specify the character string Select menu Set REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 385 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 3 5 Copying an area of memory You can copy an area of memory using the memory copy feature Select a copy source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choo
593. test image information and the actual memory data will not match Bs a1 an long af i0 2a 2 O0002000 oid mainl void ao i 26 long min max ar long j ei Int i ag 30 00002006 printti Data Input ARB Y Hn a1 32 o000zO1a fori i 0 TEN 33 OOO00e20e 2 randi 34 00002032 Ici 01i 35 00002036 ae 36 t 37 00002038 a i j 36 00002044 printt alsd sld n i a li i 39 m 4 H ps DemoSH4 c 1 Open a source file including a main function in the editor window and modify the program to reduce the number of times to store data into the array 2 Click the Save File button fel on the Editor toolbar 3 Right click on the Test_Demo test icon to display a pop up menu 4 Select Run Test Case to start the test The progress and result of the test are shown in the Test tab of the Output window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 38 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 4 ol of a at 21 21 2 starting tests test suite Test suite Demo co Running test Test Demo 1 of 1 Running batch file macro Demo 1 of 1 Batch file macro finished successfully All tests completed Test 5 When the test is completed the Test Browser window opens 1 14 9 Step 8 Viewing the test result unmatched You can view the test result in the Test Browser window ALLE Test Name Description Result Ea Test Demoa Demonstratio
594. th and height of the display Displayed in decimal Width Displays the width Height Displays the height 17 5 Displaying memory contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as wave forms in the Waveform window Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 5 1 Opening the Waveform window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button E3 to open the Waveform Properties dialog box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 406 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Waveform Properties ea Data Address ooooo0og Ell Data Size bit Cancel Channel i Mono Stereo Buffer SizelHex 00000000 ha Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory Displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8bit or 16bit Channel Specifies Mono or Stereo Buffer Size Hex Specifies the buffer size of data Displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform window Even after the Waveform window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X coordinate shows the number of sampling data and the Y coordinate shows the sampling value e
595. that are copied into this directory are automatically added to the Current macro file drop down list The macros functions in the Current macro file selection are shown in the Macro functions list box Changing the Current macro file selection will automatically update this list If you check the Show all available macro functions check box then all macros currently defined are displayed in the list When selected this option ignores the value of the Current macro file drop down list box It can be useful to use multiple macro files to logically hold related areas For example you might like to create a different macro file for use with different debugger targets To execute macro files that have relative paths specify the initial directory in Initial directory Change the directory in the same way as using the change directory command and execute macro files in the initial directory To create a new blank macro file 1 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens 2 Click the New button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 264 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 15 Macro Recording Support Facility 3 4 Enter the new macro file name Click OK The new file name is added to the Current macro file drop down list To import an existing macro file L 2 Select Tools gt Macros The Macro dialog box opens Click the Import button Browse to the existing macro file Click Se
596. the debugger connected with the HEW New Propect 7 9 Setting the Target System for Debugging SH Furnschonal Simulator SH 4 Funchonal Simulatoe Lithe endian EISH 4 Simulator i tttst stS CISH 4 Sinedator Litle endian SH d with BSC Simulata SH 4 with BSC SimulatoLittle endian 1SH 4 5H750R Functional Simulator SH 4SH 7 750A Functional Sinvulator Lit CISH 4 SH 7S0R Simulator CISH 4 SH7750R SimulstorlLitle endian Tatgel type SH 4 Tange CPU A CPUs Configuration names can be changed when creating a project Directories corresponding to each of the configurations are created under the project directory These directories have the names of the configurations Note The project directory having the project name is created under the workspace directory used for creation of a new workspace Workspace window Hard disk Bey Workspace Name i H A Project_Name Slee Project_Name How to set up build options To set up build options kept with a configuration select the configuration from the drop down list box in the dialog box for set up build option opened from the Build menu Options such as the compiler assembler and optimizing linkage editor can be set up The figure below shows the dialog box used for setup of build options for the Renesas SuperH Standard toolchain REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 22 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RE
597. the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop and launch from the external debugger option in High performance Embedded Workshop REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 435 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility External debugger selected Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 or greater Sh Debugger settings HDI location ee roe Session file PO Browse Download module P Browse To configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This must be version Hitachi Debugging Interface 4 0 or greater otherwise its behavior is not guaranteed This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data is the session file This tells the debugger which session to load when it is launched 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 17 17 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop The following details the information required to setup the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop and launch from the external debugger option in High per
598. the Insert Template toolbar button 1 OR e Select Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template OR e Right click in the editor window and select Templates gt Insert Templates from the pop up menu 2 Use the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template to be inserted and then click the OK button The dialog box is closed and the chosen template is added to the current Editor window Alternatively you can press ALT along with the number of the template to be inserted e g ALT 4 to insert template 4 You can define these shortcuts on the Defile Templates dialog box A drop down list is available at the bottom of the Defile Templates dialog box 4 12 Brace matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within a large if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a Brace Matching feature which highlights text between braces of type and To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Match Braces toolbar button 4 OR e Press CTRL SHIFT M OR e Select Edit gt Match Braces OR e Select Match Braces from the pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 126 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High perform
599. the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe version control system For installation and option settings of Microsoft Visual SourceSafe refer to the online help or user s manual for Microsoft Visual SourceSafe In this section it is assumed that the login username and password have been set The outline of procedures for version control by the High performance Embedded Workshop connected with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe is described below For other functions available see section 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands 1 Attaching Microsoft Visual SourceSafe to a workspace Associate a project in a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace with a project inside a Microsoft Visual SourceSafe database e Select Microsoft Visual SourceSafe as the version control system to be connected with the High performance Embedded Workshop e Login Microsoft Visual SourceSafe e Specify the name and location of the project to be created in Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 2 Adding files Select the files in a High performance Embedded Workshop workspace that you would like to add to Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 3 Checking out a file Select the files that you would like to modify in the High performance Embedded Workshop workspace and check them out 4 Checking in a file Select the files modified in the High performance Embedded Workshop workspace and check them in 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace The following sections d
600. the disassembly code in the Editor or Disassembly window in the mixed or disassembly mode o Viewing or modifying the memory values in the Memory IO or MR window REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 340 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility e Operations in which memory accesses are not prevented Memory accesses are not prevented in the following operations o Executing commands in the Command Line window or command files o Viewing or modifying the memory values in the Watch window with real time update enabled o Viewing the memory values in the Monitor Image or Waveform window with real time update enabled o Viewing or modifying the memory values in the CWatch or ASMWatch window with real time RAM monitor function o Viewing the memory values in the RAM Monitor or MR window with real time RAM monitor function o Viewing or modifying the memory values in the CWatch or ASMWatch window o Viewing the memory values in the GUI I O Image or Waveform window Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 1 5 Downloading modules 17 1 5 1 Setting the downloading a program Once you have made sure that there is memory in your system in which to download your code you can then proceed to download a program to debug The initial selection of download module is automatic with regard to an application generator as it is the output from the linker However with
601. the value of the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor not mouse cursor Opens the source file or disassembly at the address of the PC Displays file properties Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 373 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 2 2 2 Opening a source file for editing The Disassembly source mode allows only to view and debug source files and no editing is permitted from within this view To edit a source file that is currently open in the Disassembly source mode view the pop up menu option Open Source File for Editing must be selected This will open an editor window containing the file for editing Alternatively you may open the file for editing manually via the Workspace Window or by the main menu File gt Open 17 2 2 3 Opening a source file in the Disassembly window Opening a source file is possible by selecting Open File in Source Mode from the pop up menu in Disassembly window This menu option is available on the pop up menu in all view modes within the Disassembly window Upon selecting this menu option a file browse dialog will be displayed prompting for the source file to be opened Any text based file may be selected and not just source files 17 2 2 4 Using disassembly source mode as primary debug view It is possible to use disassembly source mode as primary debug view To use
602. then opens Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field To remove a keyword group from the tree select the keyword group and click the Remove button underneath the tree Add Category Ei Category Title To create new keywords 1 Select Setup gt Format Views The Format Views dialog box opens 2 Select the desired keyword group to be modified 3 Click the Keywords tab Color Font Keywords Comments break Case catch p continue SMSs 4 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog box opens Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click the OK button to close the dialog box To remove a keyword from the Keywords list select the keyword and click the Remove button Add Keyword Ei REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 122 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor Note On the Keyword field of the Add Keyword dialog box specify a keyword which consists of only alphanumeric an underscore and the character 4 10 3 Enabling disabling syntax coloring To enable disable syntax coloring 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Editor tab 3 Set the Enable syntax coloring checkbox as necessary and then click the OK button W Enable syntax coloring 4 11 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function
603. tick mark on Section Edit Mode has disappeared 13 1 3 Adding a section group In the edit mode you can add a section group To add a section group 1 Right click within the left pane to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Section Group 3 The Add Section Group dialog box appears Add Section Group Section Start Address fo Cancel Section Group Hame s echon Section ij 4 Enter the start address of a section in Section Start Address 5 Enter a section group name in Section Group Name If you specify section names separated by a comma each of them will be added as a section In the example above Section and Section2 are added as sections REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 237 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map In the tree of the left pane the new section group is added under the address 13 1 4 Adding a section In the edit mode you can add a section under a section group subsection group or overlay group To add a section 1 Right click on a section group subsection group or overlay group to open a pop up menu 2 Select Add Section 3 The Add Section dialog box appears Add Section Section Hame Section Cancel Ui 4 Enter a section name in Section Name In the tree of the left pane the new section is added under the section group subsection group or overlay group 13 1 5 Adding an overlay group In the edit m
604. ties for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog box It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order And then you can click OK button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 83 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 3 Advanced Build Features 3 3 1 Build Order tab buttons is selected The check box to the left of each phase indicates whether or not the phase is currently enabled A phase can be toggled on off by checking unchecking its corresponding checkbox respectively Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order WISH G G Library Generator Add WSH C C Compiler Modify WISH Assembler wlOptLinker Remove a fa My Phase Move Up Mare Wovwn Import Spstem phase To change the order of phases system custom in a build or build all operation 1 Select the phase to be moved and then click the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the phase up and down respectively 2 Click the OK button to set the new ordering To view the properties of a system phase 1 Select the system phase that you would like to view 2 Click the Modify button 3 The Command tab shows general information about the phase This may include copyright information version information and so on 4 Select the Environment tab to view the environment settings of the phase 5 Click the OK button to c
605. ting Simulator I O disable Simulator LO addr Ox Bus mode Initial session 8 Set the options for the debugger targets selected in Step 8 Core Specifies the target core Configuration name By default the High performance Embedded Workshop generates two configurations Release and Debug If a debugger target is selected a configuration for the selected target is also generated an abbreviation including the target name This configuration name can be changed in Configuration name Detail options Sets the debugger target options To modify an option select Item and click Modify If the selected item cannot be modified Modify remains gray even when Item is selected Simulator I O System call for standard I O or file I O from the user program is enabled Enable or disabled Disable Simulator I O addr Address for above system call Bus mode Currently cannot be used by the simulator debugger Initial session If Initial session is checked this session becomes an initial session To move to Step 9 click the Next gt button in Step 8 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 330 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Propect 9 9 Changing the File Names to be Created The following source files will be generated Est Description dbsct C Setting of B A Section tupedefine h Aliases of Integer Type sbrk Program of brk lodetine h Definition of k O Aegi
606. tion Multiplication Logical AND amp amp Logical OR Logical NOT Bitwise AND amp Bitwise OR Bitwise NOT Left arithmetic shift lt lt Right arithmetic shift gt gt Less than lt Modulo Bitwise exclusive OR Less than or equal to lt Note Support for this function depends on the debugger Register names It can be useful to be able to use the value contained in a CPU register when you are entering a value You can do this by specifying the register name prefixed by the or character e g PC or PC The supported prefix depends on the debugger Character Constants Characters enclosed in single quote marks may be use as character constants For example A etc These character constants are converted to ASCII code and used as 1 byte immediate values Character String Literals Character strings enclosed in double quote marks may be use as character string literals Examples are abc etc Note Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS Page 131 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration 5 Tools Administration You can control the components that are used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog box which is invoked by selecting Tools gt Administration The Tools Administration dialog
607. tion Version Control Executes a version control system Configure View Configures the workspace view Show Differences Compares files Properties Displays file properties For details on Current project Loaded project and Unloaded project see section 2 12 Setting the current project 2 3 Project files In order for the High performance Embedded Workshop to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built see the figure below REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 45 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Debug OH Optimize OH Liat File TES Deb ug OAR Liat File TES Debug OH bhp File TES 2 3 1 Adding files to a project Add Project Files Remove Project Files Set Compiler Optio ris bet Assembler Options Assembler Source Files E bet Linker Options Before building an application select files to configure the application To add files to a project 1 Files can be added to the active project only Select one of the following operations to open the Add files to project project name dialog box e Select Project gt Add Files OR e Right click on the project within the Projects tab of the workspace window and select Add Files from the pop up menu OR e Press the Insert key when the Projects tab of the Workspace window is selected 2 Select the file s yo
608. tion Project for generating a demonstration program written in the C language C source startup Application Project for generating a startup program written in the C language Empty Application Project for only setting the toolchain environment no generation file Import Makefile A project to create an executable program by importing an existing makefile Library Project for generating a library file no generation file Debugger only xxxxxx A debug only project no generation file In the example below the SH 4 simulator debugger is assumed For details on the functions available with the debugger in use refer to the user s manual or help of the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 322 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Propect 1 9 Select Target CPU_Toolchain version Toolchain version 3 2 0 0 Which CPU do you want to use for this project CPU Seres IF there is no CPU type to be selected select the CPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other 1 Select the CPU and Toolchain version in Step 1 The CPU types CPU Type are classified according to the CPU series CPU Series Select the CPU corresponding to the program to be developed because the generation file differs according to the CPU Series and CPU Type settings If there is no corresponding CPU select a CPU with similar hardware specifications o
609. tion Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Compare cn This opens a new compare window so that some new files can be compared and the differences displayed Export results to file This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format Ignore white space bw The ignore white space option which is on the advanced options dialog can be toggled via this menu option Find ith Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the High performance Embedded Workshop editor Find previous Bh Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 220 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Comparing Files Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Find next bh Finds the next string that meets the find requirements Previous difference F Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference Next difference 4 Automatically jumps the view to the next difference Refresh comparison Refreshes the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 221 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigatio
610. tip pop up window is displayed showing its identity The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via Setup gt Format Views This dialog box allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by High performance Embedded Workshop If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the High performance Embedded Workshop internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via Setup gt Options For further details on how to use the editor see Chapter 4 Editor Note Allows you to set software breakpoints only when the debugger is connected 1 2 6 Output window The Output window by default has seven tabs Build Debug Find in Files 1 Find in Files 2 Macro Test and Version Control on display J oora at 21 2t 7 G 2 Build Finished 0 Errors O Warnings la x REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS 4 H 4 Build Find in Files 1 Find in Files 2 version Control Page 9 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Build tab The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file an icon and the error message will be displayed in the Build tab along with the source file name and line numb
611. to open the Register window Double click the register of which you wish to change the value to invoke the Set Value dialog box Enter 0 in Value jThis records the register_set command This records the build command 5 Double click to download the program for demonstration within the Download modules folder in the Projects tab of the workspace window jThis records the file_load command REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 30 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview 6 Click the Memory button Fel on the CPU toolbar to invoke the Display Address dialog box Enter the address of the data field in Display Address Then select Fill from the pop up menu Enter 0 as the data in the Fill dialog box IThis records the memory_fill command 7 Click the Reset CPU button EIT on the Debug Run toolbar to reset the CPU IThis records the reset command 8 Open a source file including a main function in the editor window 9 Right click on the last line of the main function and select Go To Cursor from the pop up menu lEThis records the go_ till command 10 Add the array element a 6 storing random data to the Watch window IThis records the watch_add command 11 Click the Stop Macro button O on the Macros toolbar The mouse pointer returns to be an arrow 12 The Add New Macro Function dialog box opens Enter a macro name e g Demo The message Finished recording Demo is
612. to test image files and test results not matched Test group name Symbol Test item name CWatch Test image data to be Values set as detailed information and the range of data in the CWatch window acquired saved into test image files with this setting Checkboxes for all variables are blank by default Test result details Failed at xxx data Name of the unmatched variable value is different Src Content of the test image file Dest Data in the current High performance Embedded Workshop system or in another test image file to be compared with Example Failed at a 0 Global data value is different Src 1783 Dest 0 To make detailed setting If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 306 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Edit Test C Variables a Cancel Compared Delete e To add a variable 1 Click on the Add button on the Edit Test C Variables dialog box to open the Add Variables dialog box in which variables can be added in units of scopes Add Yarnables Scope i C signed long 10 a C struct Sample st Cancel 2 The Scope drop down list contains Global Local and file names Variables shown in the Name list depend on the selection made in the Scope drop down list The Name list shows global var
613. to the project The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the output window or the File s History dialog box For setting of location where the status is to be displayed see section 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options To view the revision history of files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the files whose history you would like to view in the Projects tab of the workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select one of the following operations e Select Tools gt Version Control gt Show History OR e Right click to invoke a pop up menu and select Version Control gt Show History 3 The Version Control tab of the output window or the File s History dialog box shows the revision history of files REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 204 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 9 Visual SourceSafe Version Control System 9 3 Visual SourceSafe command options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Configure 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog box opens 2 Select the General tab Visual Source Safe W Display dialog box for history Display dialog box for file status 3 To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check th
614. toolbar The Toolbar display and Customize toolbar options are also included in the pop up menu opened by right clicking on the toolbar Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Macro Recording Function Refresh Refreshes the IO window Lock Refresh Pe Disables refresh of the IO window Load IO File i Manually loads an I O file Selected IO Register R Selects the I O register s to be shown on the Select Register tabbed pane Print Prints the current data of the window Save To File i Saves the current data of the window to a text file Find it Finds an I O register Find Next ih Finds the next I O register to match Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons 17 6 2 Expanding an I O register display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers double click on the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the cursor right key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Double clicking or pressing the cursor left key again on the module name will close the I O register display Note If you are using an emulator based debugger reading data from an I O register can sometimes affect the operation of your program For example reading a data register can cancel a pending interrupt Data is only read from I O modu
615. toolbar button halt command Step In Step Debug gt Step In menu Performs step in on all synchronized Step In toolbar button platforms step command Step Over Step Debug gt Step Over menu Performs step over on all synchronized Step Over toolbar button platforms step_over command Step Out Step Debug gt Step Out menu Performs step out on all synchronized Step Out toolbar button platforms step_out command Connect Connection Debug gt Connect menu Connects to the platform in all Connect toolbar button synchronized Debuggers connect command or platform specific command REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 477 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Operation Option s Method Effect Download Download Debug gt Download Modules menu item Downloads the module to all synchronized file load modules Workspace tab Download modules folder platforms The module filename must be file_ load command the same in each Debugger On connection when Download automatically on target connection option is set After build when Download modules after build option is set When a module is modified externally to High performance Embedded Workshop Initialize Initialize Debug gt Initialize menu All synchronized platforms will be initialize command initialized Regarding stepping t
616. ts E Templates ad Mavigaton 1 14 7 Step 6 Creating a test image file To compare the Memory content at the address of an array or the contents of the Watch window the range of data acquisition must be selected The test image of a test item is saved to the test image file Test_Suite_Demo_Test_Demo hif specified at step 5 1 Right click on the Test_Demo test icon to display a pop up menu 2 Select Edit Test Image File to invoke the Edit Test Image File dialog box The title of the dialog box includes the test name Test_Demo and test image file name Test_Suite_Demo_Test_Demo hif 3 Select the checkboxes Memory xxxxxx under CPU in Available components and Watch xxxxxx under Symbol Edit Test Image File Test_Demo Test_Suite_Demo_Test_Demo F EA Available components JE Stack Trace SimSessionSH 4 oo FS Trace SimSessionSH 4 Cancel 3 k 0 SimSessionSH 4 i Memory SimsessionsH 4 Check All ee Reaister SimSessionSH 4 EA Simulated 1 0 SimSessionSH 4 CIs Status SimSessionSH 4 Settings ma Output C0 Build Output Window Import gw Debug Output Wwindow 5imSessionS H 4 mS cu S Setel Sims essians H 4 fatch SimS essian SH 4 The Memory content at the address of an array is saved into the test image file Double click Memory xxxxxx under CPU in Available components The Edit Test Memory Ranges dialog box opens 5 Click the Add button to display the Add
617. ts of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons The Build tab also shows an icon corresponding to the error message output by build execution Icon Name Icon Error Message Level Build Error Error Build Warning it Warning Information gT Information REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 10 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Overview Debug tab Shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window Right clicking displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up Menu Option Toolbar Button Function Clear Window ee Clears the contents of the window Save mj Saves the contents of the window into a text file Copy Copies the selected contents onto the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Shows or hides the toolbar Customize toolbar Customizes toolbar buttons Find in Files 1 and Find in Files 2 tab Shows the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select Edit gt Find In Files or click the Fin
618. tween each configuration to gain access to the other windows The toolbars and windows are dependent on the virtual desktop configuration Source files are independent of the virtual desktop system and will remain in view To rename your configuration to a more meaningful name 1 Select Window gt Virtual desktop gt Desktop Manager The Desktop manager dialog box opens 2 Select the window configuration you wish to change the name for 3 Click Rename 4 Enter the new meaningful name in the edit field and click OK 5 Click OK to keep the changes and revert to the High performance Embedded Workshop main window To switch desktop configurations There are a number of ways to switch desktop configuration The first and easiest method is using the virtual desktop buttons located on the status bar These are shown below E Build desktop Read write 25187 4 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 161 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 6 Customizing the Environment In this example the selected desktop is number 1 This has been given the name Build by the user Its description is seen in the edit box to the right on the buttons Clicking a different desktop selects that button and changes the description control Once clicked High performance Embedded Workshop then loads the windows in the new configurations style Another method of changing the desktop configuration is as follows 1 Select Win
619. u wish to add to the project 3 A Relative Path checkbox is available at the bottom of this dialog box Selecting this checkbox allows the files to be relative project files These project files are relative to the workspace file and can also be placed outside the workspace structure Even if you re allocate the entire source tree the High performance Embedded Workshop is able to check the relative position of the files to find them By default this checkbox is selected 4 A Hide Project Files checkbox is available at the bottom of this dialog box Selecting this checkbox only shows the files not added to the current project By default this checkbox is not selected 5 Click the Add button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 rCENESAS 2 Build Basics Page 46 of 523 High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics There are other ways to add files to a project e Right clicking on an open file in the Editor window displays a pop up menu If the file is already in the project then the Add File To Project menu option is disabled Select the Add File To Project menu option to add the file to the current project e Inthe High performance Embedded Workshop it is also possible to drag and drop files from Windows Explorer onto the Projects tab of the workspace window For details see section 2 3 2 Drag and drop of files and folders Notes e If you add a file that has an unrecognized file type to the project
620. ubsection group or ITEM P aa tne a of the item section and drag it while Normal select pointer showing the item name and holding the Ctrl key P g a sign when placed over a destination where Select an overlay group ia and the item can be copied to Copied to the last of the items drag it while holding the Ctrl key Select a subsection group or Pay ITEM Am the item where section s and drag it while holding the Shift key Normal select pointer showing the item name and an upward pointing arrow when placed over a destination where the item can be moved to Select a subsection group 7 or ITEM Added to the next of the item where dropped i section _ anddragit_ Normal select pointer showing the item name a 2 when placed over a destination where the item Added to the last of the items and can be moved to Select an overlay group drag it e The right pane shows the section settings after a build Nothing is displayed in this pane if there is no linkage list file map output by the linkage editor You can adjust the column width by dragging the mouse on a column header Moreover right clicking the column header displays a pop up menu A tick mark right next to an entry indicates that this column is displayed Clicking an entry will switch showing hiding the column Clicking the column header sorts the listed items When the window is first opened the items are sorte
621. ugger functionality e g CPU DLL Target platform Object reader etc Extension Component An Extension Component is a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the High performance Embedded Workshop system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The High performance Embedded Workshop builder debugger and flash support REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 132 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 5 Tools Administration 5 1 Tool locations The High performance Embedded Workshop maintains the locations of High performance Embedded Workshop compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the High performance Embedded Workshop stores information about the component including its location This is referred to as Registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself 5 2 High performance Embedded Workshop registration files When a High performance Embedded Workshop compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF This file describes the component to the High performance Embedded Workshop see the figure below The process of registration refers to loading a component
622. ugger core for a specific debug operation e g Go While debugging is synchronized these virtual links are examined whenever a debug operation is executed If a synchronization exists for the operation from the Debugger where the operation is executed to another Debugger then the operation will be executed on both Debuggers The synchronizations are followed through multiple Debuggers to find out which Debuggers the operation needs to be executed on Synchronizations can be one way or two way Example 1 Two Debuggers are synchronized with IDs COREO and CORE1 Only one synchronization exists and it is one way for the Go debug operation from COREO to CORE1 When a Go is executed in the COREO Debugger the Go will occur on both Debuggers When a Go is executed in the CORE1 the Go will only occur on CORE1 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 472 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Example 2 Four Debuggers are synchronized with IDs COREQO CORET CORE and CORE3 Two way synchronizations exist for the Go debug operation between each Debugger and every other Debugger When a Go is executed in any Debugger the Go will occur on all Debuggers By changing the configuration SDO file in a text editor see lt html link gt many synchronizations can be setup in as complex a pattern as required however the GUI only allows the m
623. ugging information exists even when the Step In execution reaches such addresses To select not to step into addresses where no debugging information exists 1 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog box opens 2 Select the Debug tab 3 Select the Only step in when debug information is available checkbox By default this checkbox is not selected Note Support for this function depends on the debugger 17 13 8 Multiple steps Sometimes you may find it useful to step through several instructions at a time You can do this by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing Debug gt Step The Step Program dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 429 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Step Program Sheps il Delay 25 seconds Cancel T Step over calls M Source level step EE Steps Number of steps to be executed By default this value is 1 Delay Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped No Refresh Prevents the update of the windows or 0 to 3 seconds can be selected in 0 5 second units By default this value is 2 5 seconds Step over calls Selecting this box steps over function calls By default this checkbox is not selected Source level step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level By default th
624. uild Basics Note This option is available only when the Use external editor checkbox is selected in the Editor tab of the Options dialog box opened via Setup gt Options Right clicking on the Download modules folder opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available when the debugger is connected Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Download all module Cs Downloads all modules in the Download modules list on the Target tab of the Debug Settings dialog box i e download modules shown under the Download Modules folder in the Projects tab of the workspace window Download A New Module D Opens the Download Module dialog box which allows you to add download modules Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings which allows you to modify the debug settings Configure View Configures the workspace view Right clicking on a download module opens a pop up menu containing the available options Available when the debugger is connected Pop up Menu Option Macro Recording Function Download D Downloads modules Download Debug Data Only Downloads modules debug data only Unload D Unloads modules Download A New Module D Opens the Download Module dialog box which allows you to add download modules Remove Removes the selected modules Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box which allows you to modify the debug settings Configure View Configures the workspace view Relocate Module
625. ummary file in the project directory Cancel Click OK to generate the project or Cancel to abort 10 The project generator displays information on the project to be generated in the Summary dialog box After confirming the display contents click the OK button Clicking Cancel returns to the New Project wizard dialog box Checking Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory will save the project information displayed in the Summary dialog box as a text file named Readme txt in the project directory 17 1 2 1 To create a new project having information from makefile High performance Embedded Workshop can analyze GNU make format and Hmake format High performance Embedded Workshop generated and create a workspace which has file information from makefile Open the New Project Workspace dialog box and select the Import Makefile as project type After supplying some fields e g Workspace Name and pressing OK button New Project Import Makefile dialog box opens REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 332 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility Hew Project 1 6 Import Makefile Ed Makefile path CSHEWWorkspace SH4_Demotmal Import options Start Source files Elly Project h Se C source file rene dbsch c Add lowgrc c resetprg c a sbrk c Remove gt SH4 Dermo c Baa Assembly source fil bese Intprg src a Bee ere ae p
626. umn of a menu option indicates that this function can be recorded into a macro file For details see section 15 5 1 Recordable functions common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products 2 Support for this function depends on the debugger 1 5 Build Menu Options Menu Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Macro Function Key Button Recording 1 Build Toolchain Sets build options 2 Build File CTRL F7 2 5 Builds the selected file Build F7 Es C Builds out of date project files Build All s D Builds project files regardless of whether the project files are out of date Build Multiple D Builds multiple projects Clean Current Project co Cleans the current configuration in this project Clean All Projects Cleans all configurations in all projects in this workspace Update All Dependencies Updates a projects dependencies Stop Tool Execution CTRL Break Stops tool execution Include Exclude Build Excludes a file from build or cancels the exclusion Build Phase Adds removes and modifies a phase Build Configurations C Selects the current configuration Linkage Order Customizes the High performance Embedded Workshop linkage order Generate Makefile Generates a makefile REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 490 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 1 Main Menus Notes 1 Operations with some menu options can be recorded as High performance Embedded Works
627. upport Facility The Test time out is for use when you may be executing user code In some cases if there is a bug the code many execute and never finish during the tests execution If any one test takes longer than the number of seconds in this box the test is terminated and is flagged as a failure You can also run test from the workspace window pop up menu 16 9 Using the test browser The test browser displays the results of the last test execution The test browser can be easily opened by selecting Test gt Test Results Browser x ig J Test Name Description Result ez Tes_Dema Demonstration FAIL 0 ef Component Result Details i CPU Memorn SimSessionSH 4 FAIL Failed in memor range Oe FO000000 Ox 7000002 ea Symbol Watch SimsessionSH 4 FAIL Symbol data i not matching a CPU 10 SimSessionSH 4 SUCCESS el The top pane of the test browser lists all of the tests that were executed during the last test run A green icon to the left of the test name indicates the test was successful A red icon indicates the test failed Selecting a test in the top pane shows the test details in the pane below The bottom pane of the test browser lists all of the components that were checked A green icon to the left of the component name indicates the test was successful A red icon indicates the test failed If a test fails the details are shown in this window Double clicking on the component displays more information on why th
628. upporting Facilities Commands Command Name Abbreviation Description CLOSE TEST SUITE CTS Closes the current test suite COMPARE TEST DATA CTD Compares test data and create results OPEN _ TEST SUITE OTS Opens a test suite RUN_TEST RT Runs a test Execution Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description FREE_GO FG Runs program ignoring any breakpoints GO GO Runs program GO_RESET GR Runs program from reset GO_TILL GT Runs program until specified addresses HALT HA Halts program RESET RE Resets the microprocessor STEP ST Steps through program by instructions or source lines STEP_ MODE SM Sets the step mode STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function STEP_OVER SO Steps through program without stepping into functions STEP_RATE SR Sets rate of stepping Note Support for this command depends on the debugger Memory Operation Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Abbreviation Description CACHE Sets caching on or off FILE LOAD FL Loads an object program file FILE LOAD ALL LA Loads all object program files FILE SAVE FS Saves memory to a file FILE UNLOAD FU Unloads an object file from memory FILE UNLOAD_ALL UA Unloads all object program files from memory FILE VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory MEMORY_COMPARE MC Compares memory contents MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies me
629. ustomize dialog box is where the external debugger related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Setup gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab The first choice to make is which debug tool you would like to use Once this has been selected the external debugger must be configured Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 x or greater Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop Renesas PD debugger Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop Other external debugger Configuring an external debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop Non selected Not use the external debugger Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button 4 to invoke the debugger with the specified session file After a build if the download module has been updated the High performance Embedded Workshop will switch back to the debugger to enable immediate debugging Whilst using an external debugger double clicking in any editor window will switch back to the High performance Embedded Workshop with the source file open at the line that was double clicked 17 17 1 Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop The following details the information required to setup
630. ut logging Compares memory contents Displays memory contents Modifies memory contents REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 496 of 523 CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 Command Name MEMORY_FILL MEMORY_FIND 2 MEMORY_MOVE MEMORY_TEST 2 OPEN_TEST_ SUITE OPEN WORKSPACE QUIT RADIX REFRESH SESSION REMOVE_FILE RESET RUN_TEST SAVE_SESSION SAVE_WORKSPACE SET _DISASSEMBLY_SOFT_BREAK SET _SOURCE_SOFT_BREAK SLEEP STATE_DISASSEMBLY_SOFT_BREAK STATE_SOURCE_SOFT_BREAK STEP STEP_MODE STEP_OUT STEP_OVER STEP_RATE SUBMIT TCL TOOL_INFROMATION UPDATE _ALL_ DEPENDENCIES 1 Notes 1 Available only when there is a toolchain installed 2 Support for this command depends on the debugger 3 Commands Abbreviation Description MF MI MV MT OTS OW QU RA RSE REM RE RT SE SW SDB SSB TDB TSB ST SM SP SO SR SU TO UD Fills a block of memory Finds a string in an area of memory Moves a block of memory Tests a block of memory Opens a test suite Opens the specified workspace file Exits High performance Embedded Workshop Sets the radix for the value Reloads the session file Removes a file from the current project Resets the microprocessor Runs a test Saves the current session Saves the current workspace Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the disassembly level Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the source leve
631. uttons to a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to add from the Available toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Add button 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 516 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View To move the currently selected buttons 1 Select the toolbar you wish to move in the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Click Move Up or Move Down until it is in the desired position 3 Click OK To remove the currently selected buttons from a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to remove from the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Remove button The toolbar is added to the Available toolbar buttons list 3 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 517 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 To Build in Toolchain for HEW V 1 x 12 To Build in Toolchain for High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 x When a project created in High performance Embedded Workshop V 1 x is used without upgrading to new toolchain that has been registered in High performance Embedded Workshop V 2 x onwards the toolchain for the old version must be registered Select the HREF file for the old toolchain with the Register button by selecting Tools gt Administration Build can be executed on High performance Embedded Workshop V 2 x onwards by using the old toolchain However note that a workspace which has
632. v6 as the filter the list box would be set to only contain __conv641 and 66 __conv64u This is a useful feature for when you have a large number of labels in your project REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Page 514 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 11 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View 11 Integrated Toolbars ina Components View The High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 0 onwards has the capability to include a toolbar in a views client area This toolbar allows the views functionality to be accessed quickly from this integrated toolbar Various views in the High performance Embedded Workshop system have this functionality One example is the Difference view This is shown below Difference Toolbar un ith kh hh 4 LWWorkspace DemoSH4 DemoSH4 resetprg c LAW orkspace DemoSH14DemoSH 1 resetprg c extern woid INTHandlerPRG void wold PowerON Reset void iw wold Manual Reset void void PowerON Reset PCl void woid Manual Reset PCl void Void mainivoid Wold main woid ifdef cplusplus ifdef cplusplus i Hendif endif a WoO oo E The toolbar allows access to key Difference view features L It is also possible to customize the toolbar further This can be achieved via the pop up menu of the toolbar or the component itself If you right click on the toolbar itself the following menu is displayed w Toolbar Customize The top
633. view the positions where these navigation items are defined Note however that these navigation items must be under the categories checked on the Navigation tab of the workspace window To jump to a definition 1 Right click on a navigation item which you wish to view where it is defined within the Source field of the Editor window 2 Select Go To Definition Of Navigation item from the pop up menu REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 227 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 12 Navigation Facilities we resetprg c S ounce extern void INTHandlerPRG vo1id oid FowerON Reset void oid Manual Reset void oid maity ifdet Go To Definition OF main al Navigation 3 Iftwo or more navigation items are found the Select Navigation Item dialog box appears File names and line numbers are listed in the dialog box Double click an item or select an item and press the OK button Select Navigation Item Ei Ei Select the location of sort Filename c workspace demosh4 demoshd demastt c c mworkspace demnosh4 demosh4 demast c Cancel 12 4 Drag and drop navigation items It is possible drag and drop navigation items of defines C functions or C classes shown in the Navigation tab of the workspace window The Category C Defines C Functions and C Classes Globals Folder and File items will not be draggable Drag and drop of navigation
634. vigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed The figure above shows C macro definitions C Defines and C functions C Functions conforming to the ANSI standard See Chapter 12 Navigation Facilities for more information about navigation e Test tab Allows you to setup or view test suites as part of the test support facility See Chapter 16 Test Support Facility for more information about the test support facility To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Right click anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed vv Allow Docking If the Allow Docking option is checked docking is allowed Otherwise docking is not allowed Select the Allow Docking option to check or un check it When the Allow Docking option is checked you can dock a window toolbar or menu bar to the edge of the High performance Embedded Workshop main window or to the edge of another docked window You can also float them above the other High performance Embedded Workshop windows or outside the High performance Embedded Workshop main window Figure 1 below shows a docked Workspace window and figure 11 below shows a floating Workspace window eee Cid Workspace Gy E ra Tutorial A Assembly source file utorial Y Assembly source file H Intpre src vecttblerc vhandler erc FS C source file a 2 Intpre src E vecttbler
635. w 1620 ah 17 Debugging Facility ESSE E A Watch Item 1 FFFSO5CO volatile long i0 Current Scope RP H 00000000 FFFSO05CcO volatile long oR 1 Higoooooo00 FFFS05C4 volatile long A 2 H 00000000 FFFS05C8 volatile long A 3 Higoooooo00 FFFSO05CcC volatile long oR 4 Higoooooo00 FFFSO05D0 volatile long E 5 H 00000000 FFFS05D4 volatile long E 6 H 00000000 FFFSO05D8 volatile long oo BDF H 00000000 FFFSO5DC volatile long oR 8 H 00000000 FFFS0S5E0 volatile long E 9 Higoooooo00 FFFS05E4 volatile long me R Wateh Item 2 0 H OOOOOO00 FFFSOSES fwolatile long Current Scope 4 ji py watcha A watch2 A watcha A watcha j F This window shows data only when the debugging information available in the load module abs includes the information on the C C source program No data is shown in the window 1f information on the source program is excluded from the debugging information due to optimization by the compiler No variables declared as macros also can be displayed Each variable can be dragged from the Editor or Disassembly window and dropped into the Watch window You can also use the Add Watch menu option in the Editor or Disassembly window in the source mode to add a variable The order of the variables can be changed by dragging and dropping items onto desired positions e If you drag an item in the Watch window and drop it into the Add
636. w 2 Right click and select Rename Folder from the pop up menu 3 Enter the new name in Folder of the Rename Folder dialog box 4 Click OK REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 52 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Build Basics 2 5 File extensions and file groups The High performance Embedded Workshop can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools that are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and will be used as input to the compiler phase Additionally the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the High performance Embedded Workshop treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog box which is invoked by selecting Project gt File Extensions This dialog box displays all the extensions and file groups that are defined within the current workspace File Extensions Group Absolute tile Gesembly include tile Assembly list tile Gesembly source file Assembly source tile Sssembly source file Binary tile header
637. w or disassembly window in source mode showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable Source Sorta printt Sorting results For 1 0 ixl0 i jf printf alsd sld n 1i a min af max ilong 0 70000000 mirn max change al Wak alt Evaluate an expression Launches the Evaluate dialog box allowing the user to enter a numeric expression e g 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices To evaluate an expressions 1 Select Edit gt Evaluate The Evaluate dialog box opens 2 Enter the expression that you wish to evaluate and click the Evaluate button REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 130 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor Provides a calculator function evaluating simple and complex expressions with parentheses and symbols All operators have the same precedence but parentheses may be used to change the order of evaluation The operators have the same meaning as in C C Expressions can also be used in any command where a number is required The result is displayed in all supported radix types Valid operators Division Equal to Unequal to Greater than gt Greater than or equal to gt Addition Subtrac
638. wIR1 BANK Carcel WISA IRZ BANK VIGER VIRI BANK WVBR WA 4_ BANE Wi ivf MASE La iw T Mf MASE 2 Calon Wela SE I pa MASE IO REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 420 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 7 6 Modifying register contents To change register contents follow the procedure below Enter a value in the Value field of the register you want to change MDOREBRL To change a register s contents open the Set Value dialog by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the register you want to change OR e Select the register you want to change and choose the Edit option from the pop up menu PO Set Value Set As whole Fesister z Cael You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose the radix from the Radix drop down list box You can choose whether to modify the entire contents of the register a masked area floating bits or flag bits by selecting an option from the Set As drop down list box the contents of this list depends on the CPU and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press Enter The dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 17 7 7 Setting the flag value When the flag itself is displayed Click the button of the flag to be changed Every time you click the button the flag status 1 0 is
639. whole word only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 6 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case checkbox 7 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions checkbox See Reference 4 Regular Expressions for further information REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 111 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 8 The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file 9 Click the Find Next button to begin the search You can also search for text in multiple files 4 4 2 Finding text in multiple files To search for text in multiple files 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Find In Files dialog box e Click the Find In Files toolbar button 44 OR e Press the F4 key OR e Select Edit gt Find in Files Find In Files Ei In fles types abs asm bin bls c cal cc cp c Lancel Match case Match whole word only Regular expressions F Output to Find in Files 2 Location f Directory E vWokspacetDemosH4
640. will always halt if a fatal error is encountered e When projects are dependent on one another building stops if an error occurs in the child project and its parent project will not be built Note the following descriptions when you check the Stop build if the number of errors exceeds check box and specify a number to the controls The build will stop immediately once the maximum number of errors or warnings is exceeded It will not continue to the end of the current phase When the number of errors in one execution of a tool exceeds the specified number the number of error messages displayed on the Output window is the specified number plus one A message saying that the number of error has exceeded the specified number is NOT displayed on the Output window The same things as Stop build if the number of errors exceeds shown above hold also in Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds There is no correlation between Stop build if the number of errors exceeds and Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds They are independent 3 6 Logging build output The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to write the results of each build to file To specify a log file 1 Select Setup gt Customize The Customize dialog box opens 2 Select the Log tab 3 Select the Generate build log checkbox 4 Enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button or click th
641. window If you select Auto Refresh from the pop up menu of the Memory window the Memory window will regularly be refreshed while the user program is running The actual refresh interval is shown on the leftmost column header in the Memory window Support for this function depends on the debugger Memory Watch 1 E aaa E mmn 16 1240 amp Z ab d amp db de die de a Es Ee ET 4 ASCI E JUUUSAUUT O000HISE OOO0S4ER OON048SA OOONSSAS naasen nni popsin 00000255E 000O02OCS O00020AF 00001208 8 san sanna 0000420 0000IODO 0000O0Z0E Q0AAQOOO OOO00S400 2 ee eee eee Ts OOOUS430 DISEBSFO OOOON000 AAOOOOOI OOONN00N 2 ee eee eee OO005440 00001404 OONNNNNN O00OSOOO OOOOODOD aT 00005460 D32E561F 7B36C775 FIE4CCF9 175BE4A2 V iB u 0 0 4 d To specify the refresh interval select Refresh Interval from the pop up menu This item is only selectable when it is supported by the debugger Lock Refresh in the Memory window cannot be used with Auto Refresh 17 3 18 Specifying the refresh interval You can specify the interval to refresh the Memory window while the user program is running Support for this function depends on the debugger REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 391 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility To specify the refresh interval 1 Right click within the window to open a pop up menu 2 Select Ref
642. windows so that they overlap Arranges all open windows horizontally Arranges all open windows vertically Lines up all minimized windows Closes all open windows Renames your configuration to a more meaningful name Switches desktop configurations 1 11 Help Menu Options Menu Menu Option Helo Help Topic Technical Create Bug Report Support Check Website For Updates License Management About High performance Embedded Workshop Debugger Help REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Jul 01 2010 Shortcut Toolbar Function Key Button Shows the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window Creates a High performance Embedded Workshop bug report Checks for High performance Embedded Workshop product updates or service packs Opens the License Management dialog box To view the License Management help double click Tools Renesas DebugComp Ecx EcxLicMgr EcxLicMgr chm under the High performance Embedded Workshop installation directory Opens the About High performance Embedded Workshop dialog box allowing the user to view the version of High performance Embedded Workshop Shows the help window of the emulator or simulator when the debugger is connected Page 494 of 523 rCENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 2 Windows 2 Windows Window Name Differences Map Section Information 1 Map Symbol Information 1 Command Line Console 2 Workspace Output Disassembly Registers Memory
643. workspace window pop up menu 16 6 Functions that can be saved as test image data into test image files Create New Test Image EAE Avallabl oo Stack Trace SimSessionSH 4 fee CIE Trace SimSessionSH 4 Coe cru Oe 0 SimSessionSH 4 oo Bel Memoary SimSessianSH 4 Check All OB Reaister SimSessionSH 4 JA Simulated 1 0 SimSessionSH 4 A Status SimS essionSH 4 settings OF Output 0 Build Output window e components OK Cancel Import EERE REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 292 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility High performance Embedded Workshop is not capable of saving all High performance Embedded Workshop functions as test image data For details on the functions that can be saved into test image files see the topics below These topics also include information about failed test items FAIL shown after test or at comparison of test image files e Functions that can be saved into test image files common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products e Functions that can be saved into test image files dependent on the debugger In some cases it is necessary to make detailed setting specific to each of the test items before saving test image data If you double click on a test item in the Create New Test Image dialog box a further dialog box for detailed setting opens When a test item has any detail
644. ws 1 On the first frame select an update interval from the Redraw Interval drop down list box and click on the Redraw Continuously toolbar button Image Nonreftesh E pr 4 He 1 05 a Redraw Continuously 2 When the specified time has elapsed the second frame is automatically displayed 3 When the specified time has elapsed the third frame is automatically displayed The automatic switching of frames has ended REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 405 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 4 6 Displaying the pixel information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Color mode Monochrome Fixel Black Position Buffer Size width Height Image Size width Height This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information of the cursor location Displayed in decimal Position Displays the cursor location in X and Y coordinate Displayed in decimal X Displays the X coordinate of the cursor location Y Displays the Y coordinate of the cursor location Buffer Size Displays the buffer size Displayed in decimal Width Displays the buffer width Height Displays the buffer height Image Size Displays the wid
645. wstesaans 475 18 1 8 Stop synchronized debugging nseessssssssseeereessssssssssssssseetrrrressssssssssseetterresossssssssssesettrereesessssssssssseeeeeereeeo 475 18 2 Using High performance Embedded Workshop while synchronized ccscseeeeececeeecececeaaaaeeseessseeeeeeeeseeees 475 18 2 1 Common e ON ee E E Ei 476 18 2 2 Parallel mode functionality siicesiniisinicnsieurnearni cannunata E a aE EN A a Ea ataandaa is iai 479 18 2 3 Internal mode functionality coscscmcanapscccsrsaadacantancnsersaunasaragosuaesnnsanannereacede mneneasanacasineaunsaanna necassanousuberancernadantes 480 18 3 Using the command line window when synchronized ccccccccccecccceecaeeeneaesssesssseececeeeeeeeeeeeaaaassssseeeeeeeseeeeeess 482 ISA ROSS Ole WC acces ca cian scene a even cacachanedecace nan cace cata E Ai 483 E CC TMI AL SD OU E AE E T EE E E E E 484 19 1 Viewing the version IMTOLM AU OM ccna noessicrnsradvaunbovssenaisedscwanendscwudsied heuolessdsicnadalsemnnsasdeniedieceaneteh cendcewamondsieueniuddeunteaeiies 484 2 OMG CR TOP CALC 8 orrena ocrecenenaee ent EEOAE EEEE EIEEE EEOAE ERARE A 484 TO Arane 10 onio E sone nonecoteee 485 JES ie CC ae cats seas E ET EE T E E AT E ESE TASE E A TE E 486 GANAN e E E E E encreseeeatsonssaeacts 487 1 1 FUNE OO E EE E E E ne EAE E 487 t2 SCN ONG ea E E 487 1 3 ANY IRS WS TU OS ae e E E E E nse 489 kA Por IV A OS asa E E E E E E EE A E EE 490 1 5 BOKMI ON O T E E T E E E EEE TA 490 1 6 Debug Menu
646. xample Figure below Starting tests lt Test Suite Name gt TestSuite test suite lt Compare Conditions gt Action after test Compare system against comparing results execution drop saved test image file down list box Refresh test image file refreshing results lt Save Conditions gt Automatically save m Default saving results test results TC notsavingresuts lt Error Condition gt Stop at first failure m stop on failure E Default continue on failure lt Time out gt Test timeout Optional Default 10 timeout 10 REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 319 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 16 Test Support Facility Classification Item Run Tests dialog box Example Figure below Running test lt Test Name gt Test_01 Test_02 X of Y 1 of 2 X is the current test 2 of 2 number and Y is the total number of tests Running batch lt Macro Name gt Macro_01 file macro Macro _02 X of Y 1 of 2 X is the current test 2 of 2 number and Y is the total number of tests ol of al at 212t 7 2 Starting tests test suite TestSuite comparing Running test Test Ul 1 of Running batch file macro Macro Ul 1 of 2 Batch file macro finished successfully Running batch file macro Macro O2 4 af a Batch file macro finished successfully Running test Test Ue 4 of d Running batch file macro Macro Ul 1 of 2 Batch file macro fi
647. xt in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 113 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 4 Editor 3 Select one of the following operations to open the Replace dialog box e Press the CTRL H key OR e Select Edit gt Replace OR e Select Replace from the pop up menu in the Editor window Replace Find what Replace with Replace F Match whole word only Match case Regular expression Replace In Selection te whole file i All open files Replace All Cancel WAU 8 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 9 Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box 10 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match whole word only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 11 If you would like your search to be case sensitive 1 e to distinguish between upper and lower c
648. xternal debugger option in High performance Embedded Workshop External debugger selected Other external debugger Debugger settings External debugger location P Browse Command line options gt Download module P Browse To configure an external debugger to integrate with High performance Embedded Workshop 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data is the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 437 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 17 18 Debugging functions dependent on the debugger The debugging functions listed in this section are not common to all High performance Embedded Workshop products included in tool packages User s manual and help information just include descriptions of these debugging functions as the previous version did For details on the functions available with the debugger in use refer to the user s manual or help of the emulator or simulator 17 1
649. y Link Library Standard Library CPU _4 gt Category List i W Generate list file Contents Show symbol Show reference 4 Show section Disable al Iw Show cross reference Options LinkLibrary hoprelink rom D A nomessage list CONFIGDIAE PROJECT AAME l map show symnbol reference xreferenice nooptimize Note If a subcommand file is specified as shown below the section setting information of the linkage editor will not be shown in the Map Section Information window C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU _4 gt Category Subcommand file M Use external subcommand file Subeom mand file path s CONFI GOIR ISAlet sub Options LinkLibrary subocom mand LONFIGDIA SeT sub REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 232 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 13 Map 13 1 Managing section settings You can add modify or delete information on sections on the GUI through the Map Section Information window It is also easy to check the section settings after modification 13 1 1 Opening the Map Section Information window To open the Map Section Information window 1 Select one of the following operations to open the Select Map Window Type dialog box e Select View gt Map OR e Click the Map toolbar button Ma 2 Select Map Section Information in the Map drop down list 3 Click OK Window con
650. y be automatically enabled If an option check box is checked and grayed out this means that the platform has specified that the operation must always be synchronized REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 473 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 18 Synchronized Debugging Notes e Platform settings cannot be overridden by editing the SDO configuration file e Platform settings override your style selection These operations will always be synchronized between all Debuggers even when None or Master debugger is selected 18 1 4 Setting the memory update option I Update the views in all debuggers when platform memory is changed When this option is checked all High performance Embedded Workshop views which display memory data e g the memory view the watch view etc in all Debuggers will update 1 e read memory from the platform whenever the memory is changed in any synchronized Debugger If the option is not set then only the memory views in the local Debugger will update when memory is changed If memory is shared between Debuggers a manual refresh will need to be performed in the memory related windows of the other Debuggers in order for them to display the correct memory Memory is usually only shared between Debuggers when debugging a multi core platform If memory is not shared between Debuggers e g when debugging several single core platforms then actions in one Debugger cannot change th
651. y for new workspaces fc Vy orkspace Browse Using an external editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed Selecting a file in the Open File dialog box opened by selecting File gt Open Selecting File gt Recent Files Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the workspace window Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the output window Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files 1 tab of the output window Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files 2 tab of the output window Right clicking on a file within the Projects tab of the workspace window and selecting the Open lt file gt in external editor option from the pop up menu Clicking the Edit Code button in the Breakpoints dialog box opened by selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoints Drag and drop into the High performance Embedded Workshop window When a file is dragged from the Windows Explorer and dropped into the High performance Embedded Workshop window note that however a drag and drop of a file onto the current project and user folder into the Projects tab of the workspace window only adds this file to the project and does not open the file REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 157 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RE
652. y have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space File format Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency the dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register def
653. y on target connection are not recordable 3 Support for this function depends on the debugger 4 Selections made from the Current configuration drop down list can be recorded 5 Selections made from the Current session drop down list can be recorded e Windows While a macro is being recorded operations made in the windows listed below will be recorded into a macro file For information on the types of recordable operations see the descriptions of the respective windows Window Name Opened by Projects tab of the Workspace window View gt Workspace Editor Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the workspace window Disassembly View gt Disassembly Register View gt CPU gt Registers Memory View gt CPU gt Memory lO View gt CPU gt IO 15 5 1 1 Projects tab of Workspace window While a macro is being recorded the following operations will be recorded into a macro file Target Operation Function ey Clean All Projects pop up Click on the menu option Deletes intermediate and output Workspace menu option 1 files from configurations in all projects in this workspace Build pop up menu option Builds out of date project files Project 1 Build All pop up menu Builds project files regardless of option 1 whether the project files are out Clean Current Project Deletes intermediate and output pop up menu option 1 files from the current configuration in this project Set as Current Project
654. ys the number of the functions having the same name All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box 1 Selecting a function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button 2 Deselecting a function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt button The deselected function s will be moved from the Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box REJ10J2169 0100 Rev 1 00 Page 444 of 523 Jul 01 2010 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 08 17 Debugging Facility 3 Setting a function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without setting the functions 17 18 2 4 Debugging an overlay program Programs making use of the Overlay function can be debugged This section explains the settings for using the Overlay function

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  ZKAccess User Manual - Blintech Solutions ZoneContáctanos    取扱説明書  Chamberlain 3280 1/2HP Garage Door Opener User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file